8
Kia, THE COMPANY
Thank you for becoming the owner of a new Kia vehicle.
As a global car manufacturer focused on building high-quality vehi-
cles with exceptional value, Kia Motors is dedicated to providing you
with a customer service experience that exceeds your expectations.
All information contained in this Owner’s Manual was accurate at the
time of publication. However, Kia reserves the right to make changes
at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement can
be carried out.
This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descrip-
tions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a
result, you may encounter material in this manual that is not applica-
ble to your specific Kia vehicle.
Drive safely and enjoy your Kia!
i
Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle.
When you require service, remember that your Kia dealer
knows your vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trained tech-
nicians, recommended special tools and genuine Kia replace-
ment parts. It is dedicated to your complete customer satisfac-
tion.
Because subsequent owners require this important information
as well, this publication should remain with the vehicle if it is
sold.
This manual will familiarize you with operational, mainte-
nance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is sup-
plemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information manual
that provides important information on all warranties regarding
your vehicle.
We urge you to read these publications carefully and follow the
recommendations to help assure enjoyable and safe operation
of your new vehicle.
Kia offers a great variety of options, components and features
for its various models. Therefore, some of the equipment
described in this manual, along with the various illustrations,
may not be applicable to your particular vehicle.
The information and specifications provided in this manual
were accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the right to
discontinue or change specifications or design at any time
without notice and without incurring any obligation. If you
have questions, always check with your Kia dealer.
We assure you of our continuing interest in your motoring
pleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle.
© 2017 Kia MOTORS AMERICA, Inc.
All rights reserved. May not be reproduced or translated in
whole or in part without the written consent of Kia Motors
America, Inc.
Printed in Korea
Foreword
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I
Introduction
Your vehicle at a glance
Safety features of your vehicle
Features of your vehicle
Audio system
Driving your vehicle
What to do in an emergency
Maintenance
9
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Index
table of contents
Introduction
How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
• Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol. . . . . . . . . 1-3
• Do not use methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
• Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Vehicle handling instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Vehicle Break-In Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders. . 1-7
1
Introduction
21
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your
vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can
assist you in many ways. We strong-
ly recommend that you read the
entire manual. In order to minimize
the chance of death or injury, you
must read the WARNING and CAU-
TION sections in the manual.
Illustrations complement the words
in this manual to best explain how to
enjoy your vehicle. By reading your
manual, you will learn about fea-
tures, important safety information,
and driving tips under various road
conditions.
The general layout of the manual is
provided in the Table of Contents.
Use the index when looking for a
specific area or subject; it has an
alphabetical listing of all located in
the back of this manual.
Sections:This manual has eight sec-
tions plus an index. Each section
begins with a brief list of contents so
you can tell at a glance if that section
has the information you want.
You will find various types of safety
instructions in this manual. These
instructions were prepared to
enhance your personal safety.
Carefully read and follow ALL proce-
dures and recommendations provid-
ed in these instructions.
✽✽
NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates interesting or
helpful information is being provided.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation
in which harm, serious bodily
injury or death could result if the
warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation
in which damage to your vehicle
could result if the caution is
ignored.
13
Introduction
Your new Kia vehicle is designed to use
only unleaded fuel having a pump
octane number ((R+M)/2) of 87
(Research Octane Number 91) or high-
er.(Do not use methanol blended fuels)
Your new vehicle is designed to obtain
maximum performance with UNLEAD-
ED FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust
emissions and spark plug fouling.
Never add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than what
has been specified. (Consult an
authorized Kia dealer for details.)
Tighten the cap until it clicks one
time, otherwise the fuel cap open
warning indicator light (or LCD
display) will illuminate.
Gasoline containing alcohol and
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alco-
hol), and gasoline or gasohol con-
taining methanol (also known as
wood alcohol) are being marketed
along with or instead of leaded or
unleaded gasoline.
Pursuant to EPA regulations, ethanol
may be used in your vehicle. Do not
use gasohol containing more than 15
percent ethanol, and do not use
gasoline or gasohol containing any
methanol. Ethanol provides less
energy than gasoline and it attracts
water, and it is thus likely to reduce
your fuel efficiency and could lower
your MPG results. Methanol may
cause drivability problems and dam-
age to the fuel system, engine control
system and emission control system.
✽✽
NOTICE
Never use any fuel containing
methanol. Discontinue use of any
methanol containing product which
may inhibit proper drivability.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
WARNING - Refueling
• Do not "top off" after the noz-
zle automatically shuts off.
Attempts to force more fuel
into the tank can cause fuel
overflow onto you and the
ground causing a risk of fire.
• Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to pre-
vent fuel spillage, especially
in the event of an accident.
Introduction
41
Discontinue using gasohol of
anykind if drivability problems occur.
Vehicle damage or drivability prob-
lems may not be covered by the
manufacturer's warranty if they result
from the use of:
1. Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
2. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
3. Gasohol containing more than 15
percent ethanol.
"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel com-
prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15
percent gasoline, and is manufac-
tured exclusively for use in Flexible
Fuel Vehicles. “E85” is not compati-
ble with your vehicle. Use of “E85”
may result in poor engine perform-
ance and damage to your vehicle's
engine and fuel system. Kia recom-
mends that customers do not use
fuel with an ethanol content exceed-
ing 15 percent.
✽✽
NOTICE
Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
does not cover damage to the fuel
system or any performance prob-
lems caused by the use of “E85” fuel.
Other fuels
Using fuels that contain Silicone (Si),
MMT (Manganese, Mn), Ferrocene
(Fe), and Other metalic additives,
may cause vehicle and engine dam-
age or cause misfiring, poor acceler-
ation, engine stalling, catalyst melt-
ing, clogging, abnormal corrosion,
life cycle reduction, etc.
Also, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) may illuminate.
✽✽
NOTICE
Damage to the fuel system or per-
formance problem caused by the use
of these fuels may not be covered by
your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
15
Introduction
Gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains harmful
manganese-based fuel additives
such as MMT (Methylcyclopentadi-
enyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Kia does not recommend the use of
gasoline containing MMT.
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle
performance and affect your emis-
sion control system.
The malfunction indicator lamp on
the cluster may come on.
Do not use methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood
alcohol) should not be used in your
vehicle. This type of fuel can reduce
vehicle performance and damage
components of the fuel system,
engine control system and emission
control system.
Fuel Additives
Kia recommends that you use good
quality gasolines treated with deter-
gent additives such as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline, which helps
prevent deposit formation in the
engine.These gasolines will help the
engine run cleaner and enhance per-
formance of the Emission Control
System. For more information on
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline,
please go to the website (www.top-
tiergas.com).
For Customers who do not use TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,
and have problems starting or the
engine does not run smoothly, addi-
tives that you can buy separately
may be added to the gasoline. If
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not
available, one bottle of additive
added to the fuel tank at 7,500 miles
or every engine oil change is recom-
mended.Additives are available from
your authorized Kia dealer along with
information on how to use them. Do
not mix other additives.
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle
in another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding
registration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is
available.
Introduction
61
As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle cor-
rectly may result in loss of control,
an accident or vehicle rollover.
Specific design characteristics (high-
er ground clearance, track, etc.) give
this vehicle a higher center of gravity
than other types of vehicles. It is not
designed for cornering at the same
speeds as a conventional 2-wheel
drive sedans or sports coupe. Avoid
sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Failure to operate this vehicle cor-
rectly may result in loss of control, an
accident or vehicle rollover. Be sure
to read the “Reducing the risk of a
rollover” driving guidelines, in
chapter 6 of this manual.
No special break-in period is need-
ed.By following a few simple precau-
tions for the first 600 miles (1,000
km) you may add to the perform-
ance, economy and life of your vehi-
cle.
• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine
speed (rpm, or revolutions per
minute) between 2,000 rpm and
4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for
long periods of time, either fast or
slow.Varying engine speed is need-
ed to properly break-in the engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emer-
gencies, to allow the brakes to seat
properly.
• Don't tow a trailer during the first
1,200 miles (2,000 km) of operation.
VEHICLE BREAK-IN
PROCESS
VEHICLE HANDLING
INSTRUCTIONS
17
Introduction
VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS
This vehicle is equipped with an
event data recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an
air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle's
systems performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety sys-
tems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
* How various systems in your
vehicle were operating;
* Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/ fastened;
* How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
* How fast the vehicle was travel-
ing.
These data can help provide a bet-
ter understanding of the circum-
stances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving con-
ditions and no personal data (e.g.,
name, gender, age, and crash loca-
tion) are recorded. However, other
parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with
the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Your rights with respect to the
information discussed above may
vary from state to state. In some
states, such information is consid-
ered private, is exclusively owned
by the owner of the motor vehicle,
and is not retrievable or usable by
another person or entity.
Your vehicle at a glance
Exterior overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Interior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2
Your vehicle at a glance
22
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Hood.....................................................4-29
2. Head lamp (Features of your vehicle)..4-89
Head lamp (Maintenance).....................8-90
3. Front fog lamp
(Features of your vehicle).....................4-92
Front fog lamp (Maintenance)...............8-96
4.Wheel and tire (Maintenance) ..............8-59
Wheel and tire (Specification) ................9-5
5. Outside rearview mirror........................4-45
6. Panorama sunroof................................4-34
7. Front windshield wiper blades
(Features of your vehicle).....................4-93
Front windshield wiper blades
(Maintenance).......................................8-52
8.Windows ...............................................4-24
OPS016005N
■ Front view
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
23
Your vehicle at a glance
1. Door locks.............................................4-17
2. Fuel filler lid ..........................................4-31
3. Rear combination lamp
(Maintenance).......................................8-90
4. High mounted stop lamp
(Maintenance).....................................8-102
5. Rear window wiper blade .....................4-95
6. Liftgate..................................................4-22
7. Antenna ..................................................5-2
8. Rearview camera .................................4-87
OPS016006N
■ Rear view
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
Your vehicle at a glance
42
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Inside door handle ................................4-18
2. Power window switch............................4-24
3. Central Door lock/unlock switch............4-19
4. Power window lock button.....................4-28
5. Outside rearview mirror control.............4-46
6. Outside rearview mirror folding.............4-46
7. Fuel filler lid open lever.........................4-31
8. Instrument panel illumination control
switch ...................................................4-49
9. BSD On/Off button................................6-92
10. LDWS On/OFF button.........................6-85
11. Steering wheel heater On/Off Button..4-41
12. ESC Off button....................................6-41
13. Speaker lights .......................................5-4
14. Steering wheel....................................4-39
15.Tilt and telescopic steering control
lever.....................................................4-40
16. Inner fuse panel..................................8-79
17. Hood release lever..............................4-29
18.Transaxle shift lever..........6-14, 6-19, 6-25
19. Seat.......................................................3-4
OPS016004N
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
25
Your vehicle at a glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
1. Audio remote control buttons..................5-3
2. Driver’s front air bag .............................3-56
3. Horn......................................................4-41
4. Cruise control button ............................6-63
5. Instrument cluster.................................4-48
6. Lighting control lever.............................4-89
7.Wiper and washer control lever.............4-93
8. Ignition switch or Engine start/stop
button...............................................6-6, 6-9
9. Audio ...........................................5-10, 5-46
10. Hazard warning flasher.........................7-2
11. Climate control system..........4-103, 4-114
12. Front seat warmer/
Seat air ventilation.................4-137, 4-139
13. Power outlet......................................4-141
14. Center console storage box..............4-133
15. Glove box..........................................4-134
16. Passenger’s front air bag....................3-56
17. Parking brake......................................6-37
18. Drive mode button..............................6-84
OPS013003N
❈The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
Your vehicle at a glance
62
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
OPS076113/OPS076133
1. Engine oil filler cap................................8-41
2.Windshield washer fluid reservoir ........8-47
3. Engine oil dipstick ................................8-39
4. Engine coolant reservoir ......................8-42
5. Radiator cap..........................................8-43
6. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir....................8-45
7. Positive battery terminal........................8-56
8. Negative battery terminal......................8-56
9. Fuse box................................................8-74
10. Air cleaner ..........................................8-48
❈ The actual engine cover in the vehicle may
differ from the illustration.
■■
Gasoline 1.6 T-GDI
■■
Gasoline 1.6 GDI
27
Your vehicle at a glance
OPS076002N
1. Engine oil filler cap................................8-41
2.Windshield washer fluid reservoir ........8-47
3. Engine oil dipstick ................................8-39
4. Engine coolant reservoir ......................8-42
5. Radiator cap..........................................8-43
6. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir....................8-45
7. Positive battery terminal........................8-56
8. Negative battery terminal......................8-56
9. Fuel box ................................................8-74
10. Air cleaner ..........................................8-48
■■
Nu 2.0L GDI
❈ The actual engine cover in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
Safety features of your vehicle
Important safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
• Always wear your seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
• Restrain all children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
• Air bag hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
• Driver distraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
• Control your speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
• Keep your vehicle in safe condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
• Front seat adjustment - manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
• Front seat adjustment - power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
• Seatback pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
• Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
• Seat belt restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
• Pre-tensioner seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
• Seat belt precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
• Care of seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Child restraint system (CRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
• Children always in the rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
• Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS) . . . . . . . . 3-32
• Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS). . . . . . . . 3-35
Air bag - advanced supplemental
restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
• How does the air bag system operate . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
• Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
• SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
• Occupant Detection System (ODS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
• Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
• Side air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
• Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
• SRS Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
• Adding equipment to or modifying your
air bag-equipped vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
• Air bag warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
3
Safety features of your vehicle
23
You will find many safety precautions
and recommendations throughout
this section, and throughout this man-
ual.The safety precautions in this sec-
tion are among the most important.
Always wear your seat belt
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of accidents. Air bags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with air
bags, ALWAYS make sure you and
your passengers wear your seat
belts, and wear them properly.
Restrain all children
All children under age 13 should ride
in your vehicle properly restrained in
a rear seat, not the front seat.Infants
and small children should be
restrained in an appropriate child
restraint. Larger children should use
a booster seat with the lap/shoulder
belt until they can use the seat belt
properly without a booster seat.
Air bag hazards
While air bags can save lives, they
can also cause serious or fatal
injuries to occupants who sit too
close to them, or who are not prop-
erly restrained. Infants, young chil-
dren, and shorter adults are at the
greatest risk of being injured by an
inflating air bag. Follow all instruc-
tions and warnings in this manual.
Driver distraction
Driver distraction presents a serious
and potentially deadly danger, espe-
cially for inexperienced drivers.
Safety should be the first concern
when behind the wheel and drivers
need to be aware of the wide array of
potential distractions, such as drowsi-
ness, reaching for objects, eating,
personal grooming, other passen-
gers, and using cellular phones.
Drivers can become distracted when
they take their eyes and attention off
the road or their hands off the wheel
to focus on activities other than driv-
ing.To reduce your risk of distraction
or getting into an accident:
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
33
Safety features of your vehicle
• ALWAYS set up your mobile
devices (i.e., MP3 players, phones,
navigation units, etc.) when your
vehicle is parked or safely stopped.
• ONLY use your mobile device
when allowed by laws and when
conditions permit safe use.NEVER
text or email while driving. Most
states have laws prohibiting drivers
from texting. Some states and
cities also prohibit drivers from
using handheld phones.
• NEVER let the use of a mobile
device distract you from driving.
You have a responsibility to your
passengers and others on the road
to always drive safely, with your
hands on the wheel as well as your
eyes and attention on the road.
Control your speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current condi-
tions, regardless of the maximum
speed posted.
Keep your vehicle in safe con-
dition
Having a tire blowout or a mechani-
cal failure can be extremely haz-
ardous. To reduce the possibility of
such problems, check your tire pres-
sures and condition frequently, and
perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.
Safety features of your vehicle
43
Front seat
(1) Forward and backward
(2) Seatback angle
(3) Seat cushion height
(Driver’s seat)
(4) Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)
(5) Headrest
Rear seats
(6) Seatback folding
(7) Headrest
SEATS
OPS036001N
Manual seat
Power seat
35
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Uprighting
seat
Do not press the release lever
on a manual seatback without
holding and controlling the
seatback. The seatback will
spring upright possibly impact-
ing you or other passengers.
WARNING - Loose
objects
Do not place anything in the dri-
ver's foot well or under the front
seats. Loose objects in the dri-
ver's foot area could interfere with
the operation of the foot pedals.
WARNING - Driver respon-
sibility for passengers
The driver must advise the pas-
senger to keep the seatback in
an upright position whenever
the vehicle is in motion. If a seat
is reclined during an accident,
the restraint system's ability to
restrain will be greatly reduced.
1KMN3662
WARNING - Seat cushion
Occupants should never sit on
aftermarket seat cushions or sit-
ting cushions. The passenger's
hips may slide under the lap por-
tion of the seat belt during an
accident or a sudden stop.
WARNING - Driver’s seat
• Never attempt to adjust the
seat while the vehicle is mov-
ing. This could result in loss
of control of your vehicle.
• Do not allow anything to inter-
fere with the normal position
of the seatback. Storing items
against the seatback could
result in serious or fatal injury
in a sudden stop or collision.
• Sit as far back as possible from
the steering wheel while still
maintaining comfortable con-
trol of the your vehicle. A dis-
tance of at least 10" from your
chest to the steering wheel is
recommended. Failure to do so
can result in airbag inflation
injuries to the driver.
WARNING - Rear seat-
backs
Always lock the rear seatback
before driving. Failure to do so
could result in passengers or
objects being thrown forward
injuring vehicle occupants.
Safety features of your vehicle
63
Feature of Seat Leather
• Leather is made from the outer
skin of an animal, which goes
through a special process to be
available for use. Since it is a nat-
ural substance, each part differs in
thickness or density.
Wrinkles may appear as a natural
result of stretching and shrinking
depending on the temperature and
humidity.
• The seat is made of stretchable
fabric to improve comfort.
• The parts contacting the body are
curved and the side supporting
area is high which provides driving
comfort and stability.
• Wrinkles may appear naturally
from usage. It is not a fault of the
product.
WARNING - Unexpected
Seat Movement
After adjusting a manual seat,
always check that it is locked by
shifting your weight to the front
and back. Sudden or unexpect-
ed movement of the driver's
seat could cause you to lose
control of the vehicle.
WARNING - Luggage and
Cargo
Do not stack pile or stack lug-
gage or cargo higher than the
seatback in the cargo area.In an
accident the cargo could strike
and injury a passenger. If
objects are large, heavy or must
be piled, they must be secured
in the cargo area.
(Continued)
• Do not place your hand near
the seat bottom or seat track
while adjusting the seat. Your
hand could get caught in the
seat mechanism.
WARNING - Small
Objects
Use extreme caution when pick-
ing up small objects trapped
under the seats or between the
seat and the center console.
Your hands might be cut or
injured by the sharp edges of
the seats mechanism.
WARNING
- Cargo Area
Do not allow passengers to ride
in the cargo area under any cir-
cumstance. The cargo area is
solely for the purpose of trans-
porting luggage or cargo.
WARNING - Seat
adjustment
• Do not adjust the seat while
wearing seat belts. Moving the
seat forward will cause strong
pressure on the abdomen.
(Continued)
37
Safety features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
Wrinkles or abrasions which appear
naturally from usage are not cov-
ered by warranty.
Front seat adjustment - manual
Forward and backward
To move the seat forward or back-
ward:
1.Pull the seat slide adjustment
lever up and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and
make sure the seat is locked securely
by trying to move forward and back-
ward without using the lever. If the
seat moves, it is not locked properly.
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the
seatback recline lever.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat
and adjust the seatback of the
seat to the position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seatback is locked in place.
(The lever MUST return to its orig-
inal position for the seatback to
lock.)
OPS033002
OPS033003
CAUTION
• Belts with metallic acces-
sories, zippers or keys inside
your back pants pocket may
damage the seat fabric.
• Make sure not to wet the seat.
It may change the nature of
natural leather.
• Jeans or clothes which con-
tain bleach may contaminate
the surface of the seat cover-
ing fabric and cause damage
or discoloration.
Safety features of your vehicle
83
Seat height (for driver’s seat)
To change the height of the seat,
push the lever upwards or down-
wards.
• To lower the seat cushion, push the
lever down several times.
• To raise the seat cushion, pull the
lever up several times.
Front seat adjustment - power
(if equipped)
The front seat can be adjusted by
using the control switches located on
the outside of the seat cushion.
Before driving, adjust the seat to the
proper position so you can easily con-
trol the steering wheel, pedals and
switches on the instrument panel.
When in operation, the power seat-
consumes a large amount of electri-
cal power. To prevent unnecessary
charging system drain, don’t adjust
the power seat longer than neces-
sary while the engine is not running.
OPS033004
WARNING - Unattended
children
Do not leave children unattend-
ed in the vehicle.Children might
operate features of the vehicle
that could injure them.
CAUTION - Power seat
adjustments
The power seating controls
function by electronic motor.
Excessive operation may cause
damage to the electrical equip-
ment.
CAUTION - Power Seating
Do not operate two or more
power seat control switches at
the same time. Doing so may
damage the power seat motor or
electrical components.
39
Safety features of your vehicle
Forward and backward
Push the control switch forward or
backward to move the seat to the
desired position. Release the switch
once the seat reaches the desired
position.
Seatback angle
Push the control switch forward or
backward to move the seatback to
the desired angle. Release the
switch once the seat reaches the
desired position.
Seat height (for driver’s seat)
Pull the front portion of the control
switch up to raise or press down to
lower the front part of the seat cush-
ion. Pull the rear portion of the con-
trol switch up to raise or press down
to lower the seat cushion. Release
the switch once the seat reaches the
desired position.
OPS033005 OPS033006 OPS036061L
Safety features of your vehicle
103
Lumbar support (for driver’s seat)
The depth of the lumbar support can
be adjusted by pressing the button
fore and after. If equipped, the loca-
tion of the lumbar support can be
adjusted up and down by pressing
the button up and down.
Headrest (for front seat)
The driver's and front passenger's
seats are equipped with a headrest
for the occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides com-
fort for the driver and front passenger,
but also helps protect the head and
neck in the event of a rear collision.
For maximum effectiveness in case of
an accident, the headrest should be
adjusted so the middle of the headrest
is at the same height of the center of
gravity of an occupant's head.
Generally, the center of gravity of most
people's head is similar with the height
of the top of their eyes.Also, adjust the
headrest as close to your head as pos-
sible. For this reason, the use of a
cushion that holds the body away from
the seatback is not recommended.
OPS033008
OPS034058N
WARNING - Headrest
removal/adjustment
• Do not operate the vehicle
with the headrests removed.
Headrests can provide critical
neck and head support in a
crash.
• Do not adjust the headrest
height while the vehicle is in
motion. Driver may lose con-
trol of the vehicle.
CAUTION
Excessive pulling or pushing
may damage the headrest.
311
Safety features of your vehicle
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the
headrest, push and hold the release
button (2) on the headrest support
and lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).
✽✽
NOTICE
If you recline the seatback towards
the front with the headrest and seat
cushion raised, the headrest may
come in contact with the sunvisor or
other parts of the vehicle.
Removal and installation
To remove the headrest:
1. Recline the seatback (2) with the
recline lever or switch (1).
2. Raise headrest as far as it can go.
3. Press the headrest release button
(3) while pulling the headrest up (4).
OPS033010
OYFH034205
OPS033047L
OPS033049L
■ Type A
■ Type B
Safety features of your vehicle
123
To reinstall the headrest :
1. Put the headrest poles (2) into the
holes while pressing the release
button (1).
2. Recline the seatback (4) with the
recline lever or switch (3).
3. Adjust the headrest to the appro-
priate height.
WARNING - Headrest
Removal
NEVER allow anyone to ride in a
seat with the headrest removed.
Headrests can provide critical
neck and head support in a
crash.
OPS033048L
OPS033050L
■ Type A
■ Type B
WARNING - Headrest
Reinstallation
To reduce the risk of injury to
the head or neck, always make
sure the headrest is locked into
position and adjusted properly
after reinstalling.
313
Safety features of your vehicle
Seatback pocket (if equipped)
The seatback pocket is provided on
the back of the front passenger’s
seatbacks.
Rear seat adjustment
Folding the rear seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded to
facilitate carrying long items or to
increase the luggage capacity of the
vehicle.
OPS033016
WARNING - Seatback
pockets
Do not put heavy or sharp
objects in the seatback pocket.
An occupant could contact such
objects in a crash. Heavy objects
in the front passenger seatback
could also interfere with the
airbag sensing system.
WARNING - Objects
Objects carried on the folded
down seatback should not extend
higher than the top of the front
seatbacks.This could allow cargo
to slide forward and cause injury
or damage during sudden stops.
WARNING - Folded
Seatback
The purpose of the fold-down
rear seatbacks is to allow you to
carry longer objects than could
not otherwise be accommodated.
• Never allow a passenger to sit
on top of the folded down
seatback while the car is mov-
ing. This is not a proper seat-
ing position since no seat
belts are available for use.
• To reduce the risk of injury
caused by sliding cargo within
the passenger compartment
of the vehicle, objects carried
on the folded down seatback
should not extend higher than
the top of the front seats.
Safety features of your vehicle
143
To fold down the rear seatback
1. Insert the rear seat belt buckle in
the pocket (if equipped) between
the rear seatback and cushion,
and insert the rear seat belt web-
bing in the guide to prevent the
seat belt from being damaged.
2.Set the front seatback to the
upright position and if necessary,
slide the front seat forward.
3. Lower the rear headrests to the
lowest position.
4.Pull on the seatback folding lever,
then fold the seat toward the front
of the vehicle.When you return the
seatback to its upright position,
always be sure it has locked into
position by pushing on the top of
the seatback.
5.To use the rear seat, lift and pull
the seatback backward by pulling
on the folding lever.
Pull the seatback firmly until it
clicks into place.
Make sure the seatback is locked
in place.
6.Return the rear seat belt to the
proper position.
OPS033017
OPS033015
OPS033018
315
Safety features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
After folding the rear seat, unless
the driver’s position is properly set
according to the driver’s physical
figure, do not fold the rear seat.
WARNING - Cargo
Do not place heavy objects in
the rear seats, since they can-
not be properly secured and
may hit vehicle occupants in a
frontal collision.
WARNING - Cargo loading
Make sure the engine is off, the
automatic transaxle / dual clutch
transmission is in P (Park) and
the parking brake is securely
applied whenever loading or
unloading cargo. Failure to take
these steps may allow the vehi-
cle to move if the shift lever is
inadvertently moved to another
position.
WARNING - Uprighting
seat
When you return the seatback
to its upright position, hold the
seatback and return it slowly. If
the seatback is returned with-
out holding it, the back of the
seat could spring forward,
resulting in injury caused by
being struck by the seatback.
WARNING - Rear
Seatback
To ensure maximum protection
in the event of an accident or
sudden stop,when returning the
rear seat to the upright position:
• Be careful not to damage the
seat belt webbing or buckle.
• Do not allow the seat belt
webbing or buckle to become
pinched or caught in the rear
seat.
• Ensure the seatback is com-
pletely locked into its upright
position by pushing on the
top of the seatback.
Failure to adhere to any of
these instructions could
result in serious injury or
death in the event of a crash.
CAUTION
- Damaging rear seat belt
buckles
When you fold the rear seat-
back, insert the buckle between
the rear seatback and cushion.
Doing so can prevent the buckle
from being damaged by the rear
seatback.
Safety features of your vehicle
163
Headrest
The rear seat(s) is equipped with
headrests in all the seating positions
for the occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides com-
fort for passengers, but also helps
protect the head and neck in the
event of a collision.
For maximum effectiveness in case of
an accident, the headrest should be
adjusted so the middle of the head-
rest is at the same height as the cen-
ter of gravity of an occupant's head.
Generally, the center of gravity of
most people's head is similar with
the height of the top of their eyes.
Also adjust the headrest as close to
your head as possible. For this rea-
son, the use of a cushion that holds
the body away from the seatback is
not recommended.
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest :
1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).
To lower the headrest :
1. Push and hold the release button
(2) on the headrest support
2. Lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).
OPA039053
*
WARNING - Headrest
removal/adjustment
Do not operate the vehicle with
the headrests removed.
Headrests can provide critical
neck and head support in a
crash.
OPS033033
317
Safety features of your vehicle
Removal and installation
To remove the headrest :
1. Raise it as far as it can go then
press the release button (1) while
pulling the headrest up (2).
To reinstall the headrest :
1. Put the headrest poles (3) into the
holes while pressing the release
button (1).
2. Adjust it to the appropriate height.
Make sure the headrest locks in
position after adjusting it to properly
protect the occupants.
Armrest (if equipped)
To use the armrest, pull it forward
from the seatback.
OPS033034 OPS033032
WARNING - Headrest
installation
After installing the headrest,
make sure that it is installed in
the right direction.
A headrest installed reversely
could increase whiplash injury
during rear impact.
Safety features of your vehicle
183
SEAT BELTS
Seat belt restraint system
Seat belts are designed to bear upon
the bony structure of the body, and
should be worn low across the front
of the pelvis, chest and shoulders, as
applicable;wearing the lap section of
the belt across the abdominal area
must be avoided.
Seat belts should be adjusted as
firmly as possible, consistent with
comfort, to provide the protection for
which they have been designed.
A slack belt will greatly reduce the
protection afforded to the wearer.
Care should be taken to avoid con-
tamination of the webbing with pol-
ishes, oils and chemicals, and partic-
ularly battery acid. Cleaning may
safely be carried out using mild soap
and water. The belt should be
replaced if webbing becomes frayed,
contaminated or damaged.
• For maximum restraint system pro-
tection, the seat belts must always
be used whenever the vehicle is
moving. A properly positioned
shoulder belt should be positioned
midway over your shoulder across
your collarbone.
• Never allow children to ride in the
front passenger seat. See child
restraint system section for further
discussion.
WARNING - Shoulder Belt
• Never wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind
your back. An improperly
positioned shoulder belt can-
not protect the occupant in a
crash.
• Always wear both the shoul-
der portion and lap portion of
the lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING - Damaged
seat belt
Replace the entire seat belt
assembly if any part of the web-
bing or hardware is damaged as
you can no longer be sure that a
damaged seat belt will provide
protection in a crash.
WARNING - Twisted seat
belt
Make sure your seat belt is not
twisted when worn. A twisted
seat belt may not properly pro-
tect you in an accident and
could even cut into your body.
319
Safety features of your vehicle
• No modifications or additions
should be made by the user which
will either prevent the seat belt
adjusting devices from operating to
remove slack, or prevent the seat
belt assembly from being adjusted
to remove slack.
• When you fasten the seat belt, be
careful not to latch the seat belt in
buckles of other seat. It's very dan-
gerous and you may not be pro-
tected by the seat belt properly.
• Do not unfasten the seat belt and
do not fasten and unfasten the seat
belt repeatedly while driving. This
could result in loss of control, and
an accident causing death, serious
injury, or property damage.
• When fastening the seat belt,
make sure that the seat belt does
not pass over objects that are hard
or can break easily.
Seat belt warning (for driver’s seat)
The driver's seat belt warning light
and chime will activate pursuant to
the following table when the ignition
switch is in "ON" position.
1GQA2083
WARNING - Seat belt
buckle
Do not allow foreign material
(gum, crumbs, coins, etc.) to
obstruct the seat belt buckle.
This may prevent the seat belt
from fastening securely.
Safety features of your vehicle
203
*
1
Warning pattern repeats 11 times with
an interval of 24 seconds.If the driver's
seat belt is buckled, the light will stop
within 6 seconds and chime will stop
immediately.
*
2
The light will stop within 6 seconds and
chime will stop immediately.
Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system
with emergency locking retractor
To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of
the retractor and insert the metal tab
(1) into the buckle (2). There will be
an audible "click" when the tab locks
into the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to
the proper length only after the lap
belt portion is adjusted manually so
that it fits snugly around your hips. If
you lean forward in a slow, easy
motion, the belt will extend and let
you move around. If there is a sud-
den stop or impact, however, the belt
will lock into position. It will also lock
if you try to lean forward too quickly.
If you are unable to pull out the seat
belt from the retractor, firmly pull the
belt out and release it. Then you will
be able to pull the belt out smoothly.
B180A01NF-1
Conditions Warning Pattern
Seat Belt
Vehicle
Speed
Light-Blink
Chime-
Sound
Unbuckled 6 seconds
Buckled 6 seconds None
Buckled →
Unbuckled
Below 3 mph
(5 km/h)
6 seconds None
3 mph~
6 mph
6 seconds
Above 6 mph
(10 km/h)
6 sec. on / 24 sec. off
(11 times)
Unbuckled
Above 6 mph
(10 km/h)
↓
Below 3 mph
(5 km/h)
6 seconds *
1
↓
Stop *
2
321
Safety features of your vehicle
Height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the shoul-
der belt anchor to one of the 3 posi-
tions for maximum comfort and safety.
The height of the adjusting seat belt
should not be too close to your neck.
The shoulder portion should be
adjusted so that it lies across your
chest and midway over your shoulder
near the door and not your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height
adjuster into an appropriate position.
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up
(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while
pressing the height adjuster button (2).
Release the button to lock the
anchor into position. Try sliding the
height adjuster to make sure that it
has locked into position.
You should place the lap belt portion as
low as possible and snugly across your
hips, not on your waist.If the lap belt is
located too high on your waist, it may
increase the chance of injury in the
event of a collision. Both arms should
not be under or over the belt. Rather,
one should be over and the other
under, as shown in the illustration.
Never wear the seat belt under the
arm that is near the door.
B200A02NF
OXM039026
Front seat
WARNING - Shoulder belt
positioning
Never position the shoulder belt
across your neck or face.
WARNING - Seat belt
replacement
Replace your seat belts after
being in an accident. Failure to
replace seat belts after an acci-
dent could leave you with dam-
aged seat belts that will not pro-
vide protection in the event of
another collision.
Safety features of your vehicle
223
Seat belts - Front passenger and
rear seat 3-point system with
combination locking retractor
To fasten your seat belt:
Combination retractor type seat belts
are installed in the rear seat posi-
tions to help accommodate the
installation of child restraint systems.
Although a combination retractor is
also installed in the front passenger
seat position, it is strongly recom-
mended that children always be
seated in the rear seat. NEVER
place any infant restraint system in
the front seat of the vehicle.
This type of seat belt combines the
features of both an emergency lock-
ing retractor seat belt and an auto-
matic locking retractor seat belt. To
fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the
retractor and insert the metal tab into
the buckle. There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the
buckle. When not securing a child
restraint, the seat belt operates in the
same way as the driver's seat belt
(Emergency Locking Retractor Type).
It automatically adjusts to the proper
length only after the lap belt portion
of the seat belt is adjusted manually
so that it fits snugly around your hips.
When the seat belt is fully extended
from the retractor to allow the instal-
lation of a child restraint system, the
seat belt operation changes to allow
the belt to retract, but not to extend
(Automatic Locking Retractor Type).
Refer to “Using a child restraint sys-
tem” in this section.
✽✽
NOTICE
Although the combination retractor
provides the same level of protection
for seated passengers in either emer-
gency or automatic locking modes,
have the seated passengers use the
emergency locking feature for
improved convenience. The auto-
matic locking function is intended to
facilitate child restraint installation.
To convert from the automatic lock-
ing feature to the emergency locking
operation mode, allow the unbuck-
led seat belt to fully retract.
Do NOT fold down the left portion of
the rear seat back when the rear
center seat belt is buckled. ALWAYS
UNBUCKLE the rear center seat belt
before folding down the left portion of
the rear seat back. If the rear center
seat belt is buckled when the left por-
tion of the rear seat back is folded
down, distortion and damage to the
top portion of the seat back and seat
belt garnish may result, causing the
seat back to lock into the folded
down position.
323
Safety features of your vehicle
To release the seat belt:
The seat belt is released by pressing
the release button (1) on the locking
buckle. When it is released, the belt
should automatically draw back into
the retractor.
If this does not happen, check the
belt to be sure it is not twisted, then
try again.
Stowing the rear seat belt
The rear seat belt buckles can be
stowed in the pocket between the
rear seatback and cushion when not
in use.
Routing the seat belt webbing
through the rear seat belt guides will
help keep the belts from being
trapped behind or under the seats.
After inserting the seat belt, tighten
the belt webbing by pulling it up.
CAUTION
- Seat belt guide
Remove the seat belt from the
guides before using. If you pull
on the seat belt when it is stored
in the guides, it may damage the
guides and/or belt webbing.
B210A01NF-1
OPS033017
OPS033015
Safety features of your vehicle
243
3 Point rear center belt
To fasten the rear center belt
1.Insert the mini tongue (A) into the
open end of the anchor connector
(C) until an audible “click" is heard,
indicating the latch is locked. Make
sure the belt is not twisted.
2.Pull the tongue plate (B) and insert
the tongue plate (B) into the open
end of the buckle (D) until an audi-
ble “click” is heard, indicating the
latch is locked. Make sure the belt
is not twisted.
When using the rear center seat
belt, the buckle with the “CENTER”
mark must be used.
ORP032073C
ORP032074
WARNING - Rear center
seat belt
Do not separate mini tongue and
mini buckle even if there is not
an occupant.
If it is separated, It may hit the
rear seat occupants in a collision
or sudden stops.
325
Safety features of your vehicle
There will be an audible “click” when
the tab locks in the buckle. The seat
belt automatically adjusts to the
proper length only after the lap belt is
adjusted manually so that it fits snug-
ly around your hips, if you lean for-
ward in a slow, easy motion, the belt
will extend and let you move around.
If there is a sudden stop or impact,
the belt will lock into position. It will
also lock if you try to lean forward too
quickly.
When using the rear seat center belt,
you must lock all tongue plates and
buckles.
To unfasten the rear center belt
Press the release button on the
buckle (D) and remove the tongue
plate (B) from the buckle (D).
When you fold the rear seatback
To retract the rear center seatbelt,
insert the tongue plate or similar
small rigid device into the web
release hole (C). Pull up on the seat
belt web (A) and allow the webbing
to retract automatically.
ORP032075
ORP032076K
Safety features of your vehicle
263
Pre-tensioner seat belt
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's
and front passenger's pre-tensioner
seat belts (retractor pretensioner and
EFD (Emergency Fastening Device)).
The pre-tensioner seat belts may be
activated, when a frontal collision is
severe enough, together with the air
bags.
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or
if the occupant tries to lean forward
too quickly, the seat belt retractor
may lock into position. In certain
frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner
will activate and pull the seat belt into
tighter contact against the occu-
pant's body.
(1) Retractor Pretensioner
The purpose of the retractor pre-
tensioner is to make sure that the
shoulder belts fit in tightly against
the occupant's upper body in cer-
tain frontal collisions.
(2) EFD (Emergency Fastening Device)
The purpose of the EFD is to
make sure that the pelvis belts fit
in tightly against the occupant's
lower body in certain frontal colli-
sions.
If the system senses excessive ten-
sion on the driver or passenger's seat
belt when the pre-tensioner system acti-
vates, the load limiter inside the retrac-
tor pre-tensioner will release some of
the pressure on the affected seat belt.
✽✽
NOTICE
When the pre-tensioner seat belts
are activated, a loud noise may be
heard and fine dust, which may
appear to be smoke, may be visible
in the passenger compartment.
These are normal operating condi-
tions and are not hazardous.
The seat belt pre-tensioner system
consists mainly of the following com-
ponents.Their locations are shown in
the illustration:
1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
3. SRS control module
4.Emergency fastening device (EFD)
OXMA033101
OPS033036N/Q
327
Safety features of your vehicle
• Both the driver's and front passen-
ger's seat belt pre-tensioner sys-
tem may be activated not only in
certain frontal collision but also in
certain side collision or rollover, if
the vehicle is equipped with a side
or curtain air bag.
• Because the sensor that activates
the SRS air bag is connected with
the pre-tensioner seat belt, the
SRS air bag warning light on
the instrument panel will illuminate
for approximately 6 seconds after
the ignition switch has been turned
to the ON position, and then it
should turn off.
If the pre-tensioner seat belt system
are not working properly, this warning
light will illuminate even if there is no
malfunction of the SRS air bag. If the
SRS air bag warning light does not
illuminate when the ignition switch is
turned ON, or if it remains illuminated
after illuminating for approximately 6
seconds, or if it illuminates while the
vehicle is being driven, have an
authorized Kia dealer inspect the pre-
tensioner seat belt and SRS air bag
system as soon as possible.
• Pre-tensioners are designed to
operate only one time.After activa-
tion, pre-tensioner seat belts must
be replaced. All seat belts, of any
type, should always be replaced
after they have been worn during a
collision.
• Do not strike the pre-tensioner seat
belt assemblies.
✽✽
NOTICE
Do not attempt to service or repair
the pre-tensioner seat belt system in
any manner. Do not attempt to
inspect or replace the pre-tensioner
seat belts yourself. This must be
done by an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING
-
Hot pretensioner
Do not touch the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies for several
minutes after they have been
activated.When the pre-tension-
er seat belt mechanism fires dur-
ing a collision the pre-tensioner
becomes hot and can burn you.
WARNING - Skin irritation
Wash all exposed skin areas
thoroughly after an accident in
which the pre-tensioner seat
belts were activated. The fine
dust from the pre-tensioner
activation may cause skin irrita-
tion and should not be breathed
for prolonged periods.
Safety features of your vehicle
283
Seat belt precautions
Infant or small child
All 50 states have child restraint
laws. You should be aware of the
specific requirements in your state.
Child and/or infant seats must be
properly placed and installed in the
rear seat. For more information
about the use of these restraints,
refer to “Child restraint system”in this
section.
✽✽
NOTICE
Small children are best protected
from injury in an accident when
properly restrained in the rear seat
by a child restraint system that
meets the requirements of the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards. Before buying any child
restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213. The restraint must be
appropriate for your child's height
and weight. Check the label on the
child restraint for this information.
Refer to “Child restraint system” in
this section.
Larger children
Children who are too large for child
restraint systems should always
occupy the rear seat and use the
available lap/shoulder belts. The lap
portion should be fastened and
snugged on the hips and as low as
possible. Check if the belt fits period-
ically. A child's squirming could put
the belt out of position. Children are
given the most safety in the event of
an accident when they are restrained
by a proper restraint system in the
rear seat. If a larger child (over age
12) must be seated in the front seat,
the child should be securely
restrained by the available lap/shoul-
der belt and the seat should be
placed in the rearmost position.
Children age 12 and under should be
restrained securely in the rear seat.
NEVER place a child age 12 and
under in the front seat.NEVER place
a rear facing child seat in the front
seat of a vehicle.
329
Safety features of your vehicle
If the shoulder belt portion slightly
touches the child’s neck or face, try
placing the child closer to the center of
the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still
touches their face or neck they need to
be returned to a child restraint system.
Restraint of pregnant women
Pregnant women should wear
lap/shoulder belt assemblies when-
ever possible according to specific
recommendations by their doctors.
The lap portion of the belt should be
worn AS SECURELY AND LOW AS
POSSIBLE.
Injured person
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
When this is necessary, you should
consult a physician for recommenda-
tions.
One person per belt
Two people (including children)
should never attempt to use a single
seat belt. This could increase the
severity of injuries in case of an acci-
dent.
WARNING - Small children
Do not allow small children to
ride in the vehicle without an
appropriate child restraint sys-
tem. If the shoulder belt comes
in contact with your child's neck
or face your child is too small to
ride in the vehicle. In a crash the
seat belt will inflict injury to your
child's neck, throat and face.
WARNING - Pregnant
women
Pregnant women must never
place the lap portion of the seat
belt above or on the abdomen
where the fetus is located. The
force of the seat belt during a
collision will crush the fetus.
Safety features of your vehicle
303
Do not lie down
To reduce the chance of injuries in
the event of an accident and to
achieve maximum effectiveness of
the restraint system, all passengers
should be sitting up and the front and
rear seats should be in an upright
position when the vehicle is moving.
A seat belt cannot provide proper
protection if the person is lying down
in the rear seat or if the front and rear
seats are in a reclined position.
Care of seat belts
Seat belt systems should never be
disassembled or modified. In addi-
tion, care should be taken to assure
that seat belts and belt hardware are
not damaged by seat hinges, doors
or other abuse.
Periodic inspection
All seat belts should be inspected
periodically for wear or damage of
any kind. Any damaged parts should
be replaced as soon as possible.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and
dry.If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solu-
tion and warm water. Bleach, dye,
strong detergents or abrasives
should not be used because they
may damage and weaken the fabric.
When to replace seat belts
The entire in-use seat belt assembly
or assemblies should be replaced if
the vehicle has been involved in an
accident.This should be done even if
no damage is visible. Additional
questions concerning seat belt oper-
ation should be directed to an
authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING - Pinched seat
belt
Make sure that the webbing
and/or buckle does not get
caught or pinched in the rear
seat when returning the rear
seatback to its upright position.
A caught or pinched
webbing/buckle may become
damaged and could fail during a
collision or sudden stop.
WARNING
Seatbelts can become hot in a
vehicle that has been closed up
in sunny weather. They could
burn infants and children.
331
Safety features of your vehicle
Children Always in the Rear
Children under age 13 must always
ride in the rear seats and must always
be properly restrained to minimize the
risk of injury in an accident, sudden
stop or sudden maneuver. According
to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seats than in the front seat. Even
with air bags, children can be serious-
ly injured or killed. Children too large
for a child restraint must use the seat
belts provided.
All 50 states have child restraint laws
which require children to travel in
approved child restraint devices.The
laws governing the age or
height/weight restrictions at which
seat belts can be used instead of
child restraints differs among states,
so you should be aware of the spe-
cific requirements in your state, and
where you are travelling.
Child restraint systems must be
properly placed and installed in the
rear seat. You must use a commer-
cially available child restraint system
that meets the requirements of the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS).
Child restraint systems are generally
designed to be secured in a vehicle
seat by lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt, or by a LATCH sys-
tem in the rear seats of the vehicle.
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM (CRS)
WARNING - Restraint
Location
Never install a child or infant
seat on the front passenger's
seat. A child riding in the front
passenger seat can be forceful-
ly struck by an inflating airbag
and seriously injured.
WARNING - Hot Child
Restraint
A child restraint system can
become very hot if it is left in a
closed vehicle on a sunny day.
Be sure to check the seat cover,
buckles and latches before
placing a child in the restraint
system.
Safety features of your vehicle
323
Child restraint system (CRS)
Infants and younger children must be
restrained in an appropriate rear-fac-
ing or forward-facing CRS that has
first been properly secured to the
rear seat of the vehicle. Read and
comply with the instructions for
installation and use provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint.
Selecting a Child Restraint
System (CRS)
When selecting a CRS for your child,
always:
• Make sure the CRS has a label
certifying that it meets applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS 213).
• Select a child restraint based on
your child’s height and weight.The
required label or the instructions
for use typically provide this infor-
mation.
• Select a child restraint that fits the
vehicle seating position where it
will be used.
• Read and comply with the warn-
ings and instructions for installation
and use provided with the child
restraint system.
WARNING
-
Child Restraint Installation
An improperly secured child
restraint can increase the risk
of serious injury or death in an
accident. Always take the fol-
lowing precautions when using
a child restraint system:
• Always follow the child
restraint system manufactur-
er’s instructions for installa-
tion and use.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Always properly restrain your
child in the child restraint.
• If the vehicle head restraint
prevents proper installation of
a child seat (as described in
the child restraint system
manual), the head restraint of
the respective seating posi-
tion shall be readjusted or
entirely removed.
• Do not use an infant carrier or
a child safety seat that
"hooks" over a seatback, it
may not provide adequate
protection in an accident.
• After an accident, have a Kia
dealer check the child restraint
system, seat belts, tether
anchors and lower anchors.
333
Safety features of your vehicle
Child restraint system types
There are three main types of child
restraint systems: rear-facing seats,
forward-facing seats, and booster
seats. They are classified according
to the child’s age, height and weight.
WARNING - Holding
Children
Never hold a child in your arms
or lap when riding in a vehicle.
The violent forces created dur-
ing a crash will tear the child
from your arms and throw the
child against the car’s interior.
Always use a child restraint
system which is appropriate for
your child's height and weight.
WARNING - Unattended
Children
Never leave children unattended
in a vehicle.The car can heat up
very quickly, resulting in injuries
to the child in the vehicle.
WARNING - Seat Belt Use
Do not use one seat belt for two
occupants at the same time.
This will eliminate any safety
benefit provided by the seat belt
to the occupants.
Safety features of your vehicle
343
Rear-facing child seats
A rear-facing child seat provides
restraint with the seating surface
against the back of the child. The
harness system holds the child in
place, and in an accident, acts to
keep the child positioned in the seat
and reduces the stress to the neck
and spinal cord.
All children under age one must
always ride in a rear-facing infant
child restraint.
Convertible and 3-in-1 child seats
typically have higher height and
weight limits for the rear-facing posi-
tion, allowing you to keep your child
rear-facing for a longer period of time.
Continue to use a rear-facing child
seat for as long as your child will fit
within the height and weight limits
allowed by the child seat manufactur-
er. It’s the best way to keep them
safe. Once your child has outgrown
the rear-facing child restraint, your
child is ready for a forward-facing
child restraint with a harness.
Forward-facing child restraints
A forward-facing child seat provides
restraint for the child’s body with a
harness. Keep children in a forward-
facing child seat with a harness until
they reach the top height or weight
limit allowed by your child restraint’s
manufacturer.
Once your child outgrows the for-
ward-facing child restraint, your child
is ready for a booster seat.
CRS09
OUN026150
335
Safety features of your vehicle
Booster seats
A booster seat is a restraint designed
to improve the fit of the vehicle’s seat
belt system. A booster seat positions
the seat belt so that it fits properly
over the lap of your child.
Keep your child in a booster seat
until they are big enough to sit in the
seat without a booster and still have
the seat belt fit properly. For a seat
belt to fit properly, the lap belt must
lie snugly across the upper thighs,
not the stomach. The shoulder belt
should lie snug across the shoulder
and chest and not across the neck or
face. Children under age 13 must
always ride in the rear seats and
must always be properly restrained
to minimize the risk of injury.
Installing a Child Restraint
System (CRS)
After selecting a proper child seat for
your child, check to make sure it fits
properly in your vehicle. Follow the
instructions provided by the manu-
facturer when installing the child
seat. Note these general steps when
installing the seat to your vehicle:
• Properly secure the child
restraint to the vehicle. All child
restraints must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a
lap/shoulder belt or with the
LATCH system.
• Make sure the child restraint is
firmly secured. After installing a
child restraint to the vehicle, push
and pull the seat forward and from
side-to-side to verify that it is
securely attached to the seat. A
child restraint secured with a seat
belt should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, some side-to-
side movement can be expected.
• Secure the child in the child
restraint. Make sure the child is
properly strapped in the child
restraint according to the manufac-
turer instructions.
Safety features of your vehicle
363
Lower Anchors and Tether for
Children (LATCH) System
The LATCH system holds a child
restraint during driving and in an
accident. This system is designed to
make installation of the child restraint
easier and reduce the possibility of
improperly installing your child
restraint. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attach-
ments on the child restraint. The
LATCH system eliminates the need
to use seat belts to secure the child
restraint to the rear seats.
Lower anchors are metal bars built
into the vehicle. There are two lower
anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a
child restraint with lower attach-
ments.
To use the LATCH system in your
vehicle, you must have a child
restraint with LATCH attachments.
The child seat manufacturer will pro-
vide you with instructions on how to
use the child seat with its attach-
ments for the LATCH lower anchors.
LATCH anchors have been provided
in the left and right outboard rear
seating positions.Their locations are
shown in the illustration. There are
no LATCH anchors provided for the
center rear seating position.
OPS034059N
WARNING - LATCH Lower
Anchors
Never attempt to attach a LATCH
equipped seat in the center
seating position. LATCH lower
anchors are only to be used in
the left and right rear outboard
seating positions.You may dam-
age the anchors or the anchors
may fail and break in a collision.
337
Safety features of your vehicle
The lower anchor position indicator
symbols are located on the left and
right rear seat backs to identify the
position of the lower anchors in your
vehicle (see arrows in illustration).
The LATCH anchors are located
between the seatback and the seat
cushion of the rear seat left and right
outboard seating positions.
To use the lower anchor, push the
upper portion of the lower anchor
cover.
❈ (1) : Lower Anchor position indicator
(2) : Lower Anchor
Securing a child restraint with
the LATCH anchors system
To install a LATCH-compatible child
restraint in either of the rear outboard
seating positions:
1. Move the seat belt buckle away
from the lower anchors.
2. Move any other objects away from
the anchors that could prevent a
secure connection between the
child restraint and the lower
anchors.
3. Place the child restraint on the
vehicle seat, then attach the seat
to the lower anchors according to
the instructions provided by the
child restraint manufacturer.
4. Follow the child restraint instruc-
tions for properly adjusting and
tightening the lower attachments
on the child restraint to the lower
anchors.
OPS036042L
WARNING
Take the following precautions
when using the LATCH system:
• Read and follow all installation
instructions provided with
your child restraint system.
• To prevent the child from
reaching and taking hold of
unretracted seat belts, buckle
all unused rear seat belts and
retract the seat belt webbing
behind the child. Children can
be strangled if a shoulder belt
becomes wrapped around their
neck and the seat belt tightens.
• NEVER attach more than one
child restraint to a single
anchor. This could cause the
anchor or attachment to come
loose or break.
• Always have the LATCH sys-
tem inspected by your author-
ized Kia dealer after an acci-
dent. An accident can damage
the LATCH system and may
not properly secure the child
restraint.
Safety features of your vehicle
383
✽✽
NOTICE
The recommended maximum
weight for the LATCH system is 65
lbs. (30 kg). When selecting a proper
child restraint, consider that the
maximum total weight of the child
plus the child restraint should be
less than 65 lbs (30 kg).
As a guide, the MAX child restraint
weight should be determined by the
following calculation:
Child Restraint Weight =
65 - (child's total weight in lbs.)
Securing a child restraint seat
with "Tether Anchor" system
First secure the child restraint with
the LATCH lower anchors or the seat
belt. If the child restraint manufactur-
er recommends that the top tether
strap be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether strap to the top tether
strap anchor.
Child restraint system top tether
anchorages are located on the back
of the rear seatbacks.
OPS033019
WARNING
Take the following precautions
when installing the tether strap:
• Read and follow all installation
instructions provided with
your child restraint system.
• NEVER attach more than one
child restraint to a single teth-
er anchor. This could cause
the anchor or attachment to
come loose or break.
• Do not attach the tether strap
to anything other than the cor-
rect tether anchor. It may not
work properly if attached to
something else.
• Do not use the tether anchors
for adult seat belts or har-
nesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the
vehicle.
• Always fasten the seatbelts
behind the child restraint seat
when they are not used to
secure the child seat. Failure
to do so may result in child
strangulation.
339
Safety features of your vehicle
To install the tether anchor:
1. Route the child restraint tether
strap over the child restraint seat-
back. Route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between
the head restraint posts, or route
the tether strap over the top of the
vehicle seatback. Make sure the
strap is not twisted.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to
the tether anchor, then tighten the
tether strap according to the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions to
firmly secure the child restraint to
the seat.
3. Check that the child restraint is
securely attached to the seat by
pushing and pulling the seat for-
ward and from side-to-side.
Securing a child restraint with a
lap belt or lap/shoulder belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child restraints must be secured to
a vehicle rear seat with the lap part
of a lap/shoulder belt.
Automatic locking mode
Since all passenger seat belts move
freely under normal conditions and
only lock under extreme or emer-
gency conditions (emergency locking
mode), you must manually pull the
seat belt all the way out to shift the
retractor to the “Automatic Locking”
mode to secure a child restraint.
The “Automatic Locking” mode will
help prevent the normal movement
of the child in the vehicle from caus-
ing the seat belt to loosen and com-
promise the child restraint system.To
secure a child restraint system, use
the following procedure.
OPS036071L OLMB033044
Safety features of your vehicle
403
To install a child restraint system on
the rear seats, do the following:
1.Place the child restraint system on
a rear seat and route the lap/ shoul-
der belt around or through the child
restraint, following the restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
Be sure the seat belt webbing is
not twisted.
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch
into the buckle. Listen for the dis-
tinct "click" sound.
Position the release button so that
it is easy to access in case of an
emergency.
3. Pull the shoulder portion of the
seat belt all the way out.When the
shoulder portion of the seat belt is
fully extended, it will shift the
retractor to the "Automatic
Locking" (child restraint) mode.
OEN036101 OEN036102
341
Safety features of your vehicle
4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion
of the seat belt to retract and listen
for an audible "clicking" or "ratchet-
ing" sound. This indicates that the
retractor is in the "Automatic
Locking" mode.If no distinct sound
is heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.
5. Remove as much slack from the
belt as possible by pushing down
on the child restraint system while
feeding the shoulder belt back into
the retractor.
6. Push and pull on the child restraint
system to confirm that the seat
belt is holding it firmly in place. If it
is not, release the seat belt and
repeat steps 2 through 6.
7. Double check that the retractor is
in the "Automatic Locking" mode
by attempting to pull more of the
seat belt out of the retractor. If you
cannot, the retractor is in the
"Automatic Locking" mode.
If your CRS manufacturer instructs or
recommends you to use a tether
anchor with the lap/shoulder belt,
refer to the previous pages for more
information.
✽✽
NOTICE
When the seat belt is allowed to
retract to its fully stowed position,
the retractor will automatically
switch from the "Automatic
Locking" mode to the emergency
lock mode for normal adult usage.
To remove the child restraint, press
the release button on the buckle and
then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of
the restraint and allow the seat belt
to retract fully.
OEN036103
WARNING
If the retractor is not in the
"Automatic Locking" mode, the
child restraint can move when
your vehicle turns or stops sud-
denly. A child can be seriously
injured or killed if the child
restraint is not properly anchored
in the car, including manually
pulling the seat belt all the way
out to shift the rectractor to the
"Automatic Locking" mode.
Safety features of your vehicle
423
(1) Driver’s front air bag
(2) Passenger’s front air bag
(3) Side air bag
(4) Curtain air bag
Even in vehicles with air bags, you
and your passengers must always
wear the safety belts provided in
order to minimize the risk and sever-
ity of injury in the event of a collision
or rollover.
AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OAM032026
343
Safety features of your vehicle
How does the air bag system
operate
• Air bags are activated (able to
inflate if necessary) only when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
or START position.
• The appropriate air bags inflate
instantly in the event of a serious
frontal collision or side collision in
order to help protect the occupants
from serious physical injury.
• In normal conditions, the airbag is
designed to deploy based on certain
angle and intensity of the collision.
These two factors are crucial ele-
ments for deciding whether to trans-
mit airbag deployment signal or start
the electrical operation or not.
• The airbag will deploy based on
angle and intensity of the collision.
It will not deploy in every crash or
collision situations
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant.
It is virtually impossible for you to
see the air bags inflate during an
accident.
It is much more likely that you will
simply see the deflated air bags
hanging out of their storage com-
partments after the collision.
• In addition to inflating in serious
side collisions, side and/or curtain
air bags will inflate if the sensing
system detects a rollover.
• When a rollover is detected, cur-
tain air bags will remain inflated
longer to help provide protection
from ejection, especially when
used in conjunction with the seat
belts.
• In order to help provide protection,
the air bags must inflate rapidly.
The speed of the air bag inflation is
a consequence of extremely short
time in which to inflate the air bag
between the occupant and the
vehicle structures before the occu-
pant impacts those structures.This
speed of inflation reduces the risk
of serious or life-threatening
injuries and is thus a necessary
part of the air bag design.
However, air bag inflation can also
cause injuries which can include
facial abrasions, bruises and bro-
ken bones because the inflation
speed also causes the air bags to
expand with a great deal of force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the
steering wheel or passenger air
bag can cause fatal injuries,
especially if the occupant is
positioned excessively close to
the steering wheel or passenger
air bag.
Safety features of your vehicle
443
Noise and smoke
When inflated, the air bags make a
loud noise and leave smoke and
powder in the air inside the vehicle.
This is normal and is a result of the
ignition of the air bag inflator. After
the air bag inflates, you may feel sub-
stantial discomfort in breathing due
to the contact of your chest with both
the seat belt and the air bag, as well
as from breathing the smoke and
powder. Open your doors and/or
windows as soon as possible after
impact in order to reduce discom-
fort and prevent prolonged expo-
sure to the smoke and powder.
Though smoke and powder are non-
toxic, it may cause irritation to the
skin (eyes, nose and throat, etc). If
this is the case, wash and rinse with
cold water immediately and consult a
doctor if the symptom persists.
WARNING - Hot compo-
nents
Do not touch the air bag storage
area's internal components
immediately after airbag infla-
tion.The air bag related parts in
the steering wheel, instrument
panel and the roof rails above
the front and rear doors are
very hot. Hot components can
result in burn injuries.
WARNING - Airbag infla-
tion
Sit as far back as possible from
the steering wheel while still
maintaining comfortable con-
trol of your vehicle. A distance
of at least 10" from your chest
to the steering wheel is recom-
mended. Failure to do so can
result in airbag inflation injuries
to the driver.
WARNING
Do not install or place any
accessories near air bag
deployment areas, such as the
instrument panel, windows, pil-
lars,and roof rails.Such objects
may become dangerous projec-
tiles if the airbag inflates.
345
Safety features of your vehicle
Do not install a child restraint on
the front passenger’s seat.
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger’s
seat. If the air bag deploys, it would
impact the rear-facing child restraint,
causing serious or fatal injury.
In addition, do not place front-facing
child restraints in the front passen-
ger’s seat. If the front passenger air
bag inflates, it could cause serious or
fatal injuries to the child.
Air bag warning light
The purpose of air bag warning light
in your instrument panel is to alert
you of a potential problem with your
air bag system, which could include
your side and/or curtain air bags
used for rollover protection.
1JBH3051
W7-147
WARNING - Air bag
deployment
When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats of a vehicle
equipped with side and/or cur-
tain air bags, install the child
restraint system as far away
from the door side as possible.
Inflation of the side and/or cur-
tain air bags could impact the
child.
Safety features of your vehicle
463
When the ignition switch is turned
ON, the warning light should illumi-
nate for approximately 6 seconds,
then go off. Have the system
checked by an authorized Kia dealer-
ship if:
• The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating
for approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the ignition
switch is in ON position.
SRS components and functions
The SRS consists of the following
components:
1. Driver's front air bag module
2. Passenger's front air bag module
3. Side air bag modules
4. Curtain air bag modules
5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies
6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM)/
Rollover sensor
8. Front impact sensors
9. Side impact sensors
10. PASSENGER “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator (Front passenger’s seat
only)
11. Occupant detection system
(Front passenger’s seat only)
12. Driver’s and front passenger’s
seat belt buckle sensors
13.Emergency fastening device
(EFD)
14. Side pressure impact sensor
The SRSCM continually monitors all
SRS components while the ignition
switch is ON to determine if a crash
impact is severe enough to require
air bag deployment or pre-tensioner
seat belt deployment.
OPS034060N/Q
,,
,,
347
Safety features of your vehicle
If the air bag warning light illuminat-
ed for more than, 6 seconds after the
ignition is turned on, or of it illumi-
nates during vehicle operation, an
SRS component may not be func-
tioning properly and you should have
your vehicle checked by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
If any of the following conditions
occurs, this indicates a malfunction
in the air bag system. Have an
authorized Kia dealer inspect the air
bag system as soon as possible.
• The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating
for approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the ignition
switch is in ON position.
The front air bag modules are locat-
ed both in the center of the steering
wheel and in the front passenger's
panel above the glove box.When the
SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe
impact to the front of the vehicle, it
will automatically deploy the front air
bags.
W7-147
B240B01L
Driver’s front air bag (1)
Safety features of your vehicle
483
Upon deployment, tear seams mold-
ed directly into the pad covers will
separate under pressure from the
expansion of the air bags. Further
opening of the covers then allows full
inflation of the air bags.
A fully inflated air bag, in combina-
tion with a properly worn seat belt,
slows the driver's or the passenger's
forward motion, reducing the risk of
head and chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating, enabling
the driver to maintain forward visibility
and the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
B240B02L
Driver’s front air bag (2)
B240B03L
Driver’s front air bag (3)
B240B05L
Passenger’s front air bag
WARNING - Air bag
obstructions
Do not install or place any
accessories on the steering
wheel, instrument panel, or on
the front passenger's panel
above the glove box in a vehi-
cle. Such objects may become
dangerous projectiles if the air
bag deploys.
349
Safety features of your vehicle
• If an air bag deploys, there may be
a loud noise followed by a fine dust
released in the vehicle.These con-
ditions are normal and are not haz-
ardous - the air bags are packed in
this fine powder.The dust generat-
ed during air bag deployment may
cause skin or eye irritation as well
as aggravate asthma for some per-
sons. Always wash all exposed
skin areas thoroughly with cold
water and a mild soap after an
accident in which the air bags were
deployed.
• The SRS can function only when
the ignition switch is in the ON
position.If the SRS air bag warning
light does not illuminate, or contin-
uously remains on after illuminat-
ing for about 6 seconds when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, or after the engine is
started, comes on while driving,
the SRS is not working properly. If
this occurs, have your vehicle
immediately inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
Before you replace a fuse or discon-
nect a battery terminal, turn the igni-
tion switch to the LOCK position and
remove the ignition switch. Never
remove or replace the air bag related
fuse(s) when the ignition switch is in
the ON position. Failure to heed this
warning will cause the SRS air bag
warning light to illuminate.
Occupant Detection System
(ODS)
Your vehicle is equipped with an
occupant detection system in the
front passenger's seat.
The occupant detection system is
designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated front passenger and
determine if the passenger's front air
bag should be enabled (may inflate)
or not. Only the front passenger front
air bag is controlled by the Occupant
Detection System.
Do not put anything in front of the
passenger air bag indicator.
WARNING - Flying objects
Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
front door and the front seat.
Such objects may become dan-
gerous projectiles if the side
airbag inflates.
OPS033020
Safety features of your vehicle
503
Main components of the occu-
pant detection system
• A detection device located within
the front passenger seat cushion.
• An electronic system which deter-
mines whether the passenger air
bag systems should be activated
or deactivated.
• A indicator light located on the
instrument panel which illuminates
the words PASSENGER AIR BAG
“OFF” indicating the front passen-
ger air bag system is deactivated.
• The instrument panel air bag warn-
ing light is interconnected with the
occupant detection system.
If the front passenger seat is occupied
by a person that the system deter-
mines to be of appropriate size, and
he/she sits properly (sitting upright
with the seatback in an upright posi-
tion, centered on the seat cushion with
their seat belt on, legs comfortably
extended and their feet on the floor),
the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator will turn off and the front pas-
senger's air bag will be able to inflate,
if necessary, in frontal crashes.
You will find the PASSENGER AIR
BAG “OFF” indicator on the center
facia panel. This system detects the
conditions 1~4 in the following table
and activates or deactivates the front
passenger air bag based on these
conditions.
Always be sure that you and all vehicle
occupants are seated and restrained
properly (sitting upright with the seat in
an upright position, centered on the
seat cushion, with the person’s legs
comfortably extended, feet on the floor,
and wearing the safety belt properly)
for the most effective protection by the
air bag and the safety belt.
• The ODS (Occupant Detection
System) may not function properly if
the passenger takes actions which
can defeat the detection system.
These include:
(1) Failing to sit in an upright position.
(2) Leaning against the door or cen-
ter console.
(3) Sitting towards the sides or the
front of the seat.
(4) Putting legs on the dashboard or
resting them on other locations
which reduce the passenger
weight on the front seat.
(5) Improperly wearing the safety
belt.
(6) Reclining the seat back.
(7) Wearing a thick cloth like ski wear
or hip protection wear.
(8) Put on the seat an additional thick
cushion.
351
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - ODS System
Riding in an improper position
adversely affects the Occupant
Detection System and may
result in the deactivation of the
front passenger airbag. It is
important for the driver to
instruct the passenger as to the
proper seating instructions as
contained in this manual.
- Do not place a heavy loads in
the front passenger seatback
pocket or on the front passen-
ger seat.
(Continued)
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant detection
system
*
1
:The ODS system uses a field to evaluate a person's size to determine whether the
air bag should deploy.It is possible for a child to be detected and activate the ODS,
thus allowing the air bag to deploy.To maximize safety, do not allow children to ride
in the front passenger seat.
*
2
: Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.
✽✽
NOTICE
Do not modify or replace the front passenger seat. Don't place anything on or
attach anything such as a blanket, front seat cover or after market seat heater
to the front passenger seat. This can adversely affect the occupant detection
system.
Condition detected by the
occupant detection
system
1. Adult or child*
1
2. Child restraint system*
2
3. Unoccupied
4.There is a malfunction
in the system
Off
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
Activated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Activated
"PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF" indicator
light
SRS warning light
Front passenger
air bag
Indicator/Warning light Devices
OVQ036013N
Safety features of your vehicle
523
(Continued)
- Do not place feet on the front
passenger seatback.
- Never sit with hips shifted
towards the front of the seat.
(Continued)
(Continued)
- Never excessively recline the
front passenger seatback.
- Never place feet on the dash-
board.
(Continued)
(Continued)
- Never lean on the door or cen-
ter console.
- Never sit on one side of the
front passenger seat.
(Continued)
OVQ036014N
1KMN3662
1KMN3663
1KMN3665
1KMN3664
353
Safety features of your vehicle
(Continued)
- Do not use car seat acces-
sories such as thick blankets
and cushions which cover up
the car seat surface.
(Continued)
OQLA035100
(Continued)
- Do not put an electronic
device (ex. Laptop computer,
after market DMB, navigation,
satellite audio, video game
machine, MP3, AC inverter,
etc.) in the front passenger
seatback pocket or on the
front passenger seat.
(Continued)
OJFA035102
(Continued)
- Wet Passenger Seat:
Do not spill liquid in the pas-
senger seat. Spilled liquid on
the passenger seat may cause
the air bag warning light to illu-
minate or malfunction. If any
liquid is spilled, make sure the
seat has been completely dried
before driving the vehicle.
OJFA035103
Safety features of your vehicle
543
When an adult is seated in the front
passenger seat, if the PASSENGER
AIR BAG “OFF” indicator is on, turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
tion and ask the passenger to sit
properly (sitting upright with the seat
back in an upright position, centered
on the seat cushion with their seat
belt on, legs comfortably extended
and their feet on the floor). Restart
the engine and have the person
remain in that position.This will allow
the system to detect the person and
to enable the passenger air bag.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator is still on, ask the passen-
ger to move to the rear seat.
B990A01O
WARNING - “AIR BAG
OFF” light
Do not allow an adult passenger
to ride in the front seat when the
PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator is illuminated, because
the air bag will not deploy in the
event of a crash. The driver must
instruct the passenger to reposi-
tion himself in the seat. Failure
to properly position yourself
may lead to air bag deactivation
resulting in air bag non-deploy-
ment in a collision. If the PAS-
SENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indica-
tor remains illuminated after the
passenger repositions them-
selves properly and the car is
restarted, it is recommended
that passenger move to the rear
seat because the passenger's
front air bag will not deploy.
Proper position
355
Safety features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
The PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator illuminates for about 4 sec-
onds after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position or after
the engine is started. If the front
passenger seat is occupied, the occu-
pant detection sensor will then clas-
sify the front passenger after several
more seconds.
✽✽
NOTICE
Air bags can only be used once -
have an authorized Kia dealer
replace the air bag immediately
after deployment.
Any child age 12 and under should ride
in the rear seat. Children too large for
child restraints should use the available
lap/shoulder belts. No matter what type
of crash, children of all ages are safer
when restrained in the rear seat.
✽✽
NOTICE
Do not modify or replace the front
passenger seat. Don't place anything
on or attach anything such as a blan-
ket, front seat covers or after market
seat heater to the front passenger
seat. This can adversely affect the
occupant detection system.
If the occupant detection system is
not working properly, the SRS air bag
warning light on the instrument panel
will illuminate because the passen-
ger's front air bag is connected with
the occupant detection system. If
there is a malfunction of the occupant
detection system, the PASSENGER
AIR BAG “OFF” indicator will not illu-
minate and the passenger's front air
bag will inflate in frontal impact crash-
es even if there is no occupant in the
front passenger's seat
Safety features of your vehicle
563
Driver's and passenger's front
air bag
Your vehicle is equipped with an
Advanced Supplemental Restraint
(Air Bag) System and lap/shoulder
belts at both the driver and passen-
ger seating position.
The indication of the system's pres-
ence are the letters "AIR BAG"
embossed on the air bag pad cover
on the steering wheel and the pas-
senger's side front panel pad above
the glove box.
The SRS consists of air bags
installed under the pad covers in the
center of the steering wheel and the
passenger's side front panel above
the glove box.
The purpose of the SRS is to provide
the vehicle's driver and/or the front
passenger with additional protection
than that offered by the seat belt sys-
tem alone in case of a frontal impact
of sufficient severity. The SRS uses
sensors to gather information about
the driver's and front passenger's
seat belt usage and impact severity.
The seat belt buckle sensors deter-
mine if the driver and front passen-
ger's seat belts are fastened.
OPS033021
OPS033022
Driver’s front air bag
Passenger’s front air bag
CAUTION - Seat Track
Sensor
Do not place any objects under-
neath the front seats as they
could damage the seat track
position sensor or interfere with
the occupant detection system.
WARNING - Modification
Modification to the seat struc-
ture can cause the air bag to
deploy at a different level than
should be provided.
357
Safety features of your vehicle
These sensors provide the ability to
control the SRS deployment based on
whether or not the seat belts are fas-
tened, and how severe the impact is.
The advanced SRS offers the ability
to control the air bag inflation with
two levels. A first stage level is pro-
vided for moderate-severity impacts.
A second stage level is provided for
more severe impacts.
The passenger’s front air bag is
designed to help reduce the injury of
children sitting close to the instru-
ment panel in low speed collisions.
However, children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
According to the impact severity and
seat belt usage, the SRSCM (SRS
Control Module) controls the air bag
inflation. Failure to properly wear seat
belts can increase the risk or severity of
injury in an accident.
Additionally, your vehicle is equipped
with an occupant detection system in
the front passenger's seat. The occu-
pant detection system detects the pres-
ence of a passenger in the front pas-
senger's seat and will turn off the front
passenger's air bag under certain con-
ditions.For more detail, see "Occupant
detection system" in this section.
Modification to the seat structure can
cause the air bag to deploy at a dif-
ferent level than should be provided.
Manufacturers are required by gov-
ernment regulations to provide a
contact point concerning modifica-
tions to the vehicle for persons with
disabilities, which modifications may
affect the vehicle’s advanced air bag
system.That contact is Kia’s toll-free
Customer Assistance center at 1-
800-333-4Kia. However, Kia does
not endorse nor will it support any
changes to any part or structure of
the vehicle that could affect the
advanced air bag system, including
the occupant detection system.
WARNING - Replacement /
Modifications
The front passenger seat, dash-
board or door should not be
replaced except by an authorized
Kia dealer using original Kia parts
designed for this vehicle and
model. Any other such replace-
ment or modification could
adversely affect the operation of
the occupant detection system
and your advanced air bags.
Safety features of your vehicle
583
Advanced air bags are combined with
pre-tensioner seat belts to help pro-
vide enhanced occupant protection in
frontal crashes.Front air bags are not
intended to deploy in collisions in
which sufficient protection can be pro-
vided by the pre-tensioner seat belt.
Front air bags are not intended to
deploy in side-impact, rear-impact or
rollover crashes. In addition, front air
bags will not deploy in frontal crash-
es below the deployment threshold.
OEP036096N
OVQ036018N
1VQA2091
Rear impact
Side impact
Rollover
WARNING - SRS Wiring
Do not tamper with or discon-
nect SRS wiring or other com-
ponents of the SRS system.
Doing so could result in injury,
due to accidental deployment of
the air bags or by rendering the
SRS inoperative.
WARNING - No attaching
objects
No objects (such as crash pad
cover, cellular phone holder,
cup holder, perfume or stickers)
should be placed over or near
the air bag modules on the
steering wheel, instrument
panel, windshield glass, and the
front passenger's panel above
the glove box. Such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle
is in a crash severe enough to
cause the air bags to deploy.
359
Safety features of your vehicle
Side air bag
Your vehicle is equipped with a side air
bag in each front seat.The purpose of
the air bag is to provide the vehicle's
driver and/or the front passenger with
additional protection than that offered
by the seat belt alone.
• The side air bags are designed to
deploy during certain side-impact col-
lisions, depending on the crash sever-
ity, angle, speed and point of impact.
• The side and/or curtain air bags do
not only deploy on the side of the
impact but also on the opposite side.
• The side and/or curtain air bags on
both sides of the vehicle will deploy if
a rollover or possible rollover is
detected.
• The side air bags are not designed
to deploy in all side impact or rollover
situations.
OPS033037
OPS033023
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may dif-
fer from the illustration.
WARNING - Unexpected
deployment
Avoid impact to the side impact
airbag sensor when the ignition
switch is ON to prevent unex-
pected deployment of the side
impact air bag.
Safety features of your vehicle
603
• The side air bag is supplemental to
the driver's and the passenger's
seat belt systems and is not a sub-
stitute for them. Therefore your
seat belts must be worn at all times
while the vehicle is in operation.
• For best protection from the side
air bag system and to avoid being
injured by the deploying side air
bag, both front seat occupants
should sit in an upright position
with the seat belt properly fas-
tened. The driver's hands should
be placed on the steering wheel at
the 9:00 and 3:00 positions. The
passenger's arms and hands
should be placed on their laps.
• If seat or seat cover is damaged,
have the vehicle checked and
repaired by an authorized Kia deal-
er. Inform the dealer that your vehi-
cle is equipped with side air bags
and an occupant detection system.
WARNING - Deployment
Do not install any accessories
including seat covers, on the
side or near the side impact air
bag as this may affect the
deployment of the side air bags.
WARNING - Flying
objects
Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
front door and the front seat.
Such objects may become dan-
gerous projectiles if the side
airbag inflates.
WARNING - No attaching
objects
• Do not place any objects over
the air bag or between the air
bag and yourself. Also, do not
attach any objects around the
area the air bag inflates such
as the door, side door glass,
front and rear pillar.
• Do not put any objects
between the side airbag label
and seat cushion. It could
cause harm if the vehicle is in
a crash severe enough to
cause the air bags to deploy.
• Never place or insert any
object into any small opening
near side airbag labels
attached to the vehicle seats.
When the air bag deploys, the
object may affect the deploy-
ment and result in unexpected
accident or bodily harm.
• Do not install any accessories
on the side or near the side air
bags.
361
Safety features of your vehicle
Curtain air bag
Curtain air bags are located along
both sides of the roof rails above the
front and rear doors.
They are designed to help protect
occupants in certain side impacts
and to help prevent them from eject-
ing out of the vehicle as a result of a
rollover, especially when the seat-
belts are also in use. The curtain air
bags are designed to deploy during
certain side impact collisions, depend-
ing on the crash severity, angle, speed
and point of impact. The side and/or
curtain air bags do not only deploy on
the side of the impact but also on the
opposite side.Also, the curtain air bags
on both sides of the vehicle will deploy
in certain rollover situations.The curtain
air bags are not designed to deploy in
all side impact or rollover situations. Do
not allow the passengers to lean their
heads or bodies against the doors, put
their arms on the doors, stretch their
arms out of the window or place objects
between the doors and passengers
when they are seated on seats
equipped with side impact and/or cur-
tain air bags.
✽✽
NOTICE
Never try to open or repair any com-
ponents of the side and curtain air
bag system. This should only be
done by an authorized Kia dealer.
OPS033024
OPS033038
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may dif-
fer from the illustration.
WARNING - No attaching
objects
• Do not place any objects over
the air bag. Also, do not attach
any objects around the area
the air bag inflates such as the
door, side door glass, front
and rear pillar, roof side rail.
• Do not hang hard or breakable
objects on the clothes hanger.
Safety features of your vehicle
623
Why didn’t my air bag go off in a
collision? (Inflation and non-infla-
tion conditions of the air bag)
There are many types of accidents
in which the air bag would not be
expected to provide additional
protection.
These include rear impacts, sec-
ond or third collisions in multiple
impact accidents, as well as low
speed impacts.
Air bag collision sensors
(1) SRS control module/
Rollover sensor
(2) Front impact sensor
(3) Side impact sensor
(4) Side pressure sensor
OPS036025L/OPS033026/OPS036027L/OPS033028/OPS033029
1
2
3 4
❈ The actual air bag collision sensors in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
363
Safety features of your vehicle
• Problems may arise if the sensor
installation angles are changed
due to the deformation of the front
bumper, front end module, body or
front doors and/or B pillar where
side collision sensors are installed.
Have the vehicle checked and
repaired by an authorized Kia deal-
er.
• Installing bumper guards (or side
step or running board) or replacing
a bumper (or front door module)
with non-genuine parts may
adversely affect your vehicle’s col-
lision and air bag deployment per-
formance.
Air bag inflation conditions
Front air bags
Front air bags are designed to inflate
in a frontal collision depending on
the speed or angles of the impact of
the front collision.
1VQA2084
WARNING - Air bag
sensors
• Do not hit or allow any objects
to impact the locations where
air bags or sensors are
installed.
This may cause unexpected
air bag deployment, which
could result in serious per-
sonal injury or death.
• If the installation location or
angle of the sensors is altered
in any way, the air bags may
deploy when they should not
or they may not deploy when
they should.
Therefore, do not try to per-
form maintenance on or
around the air bag sensors.
Have the vehicle checked and
repaired by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Safety features of your vehicle
643
Side and/or curtain air bags
Side air bags (side and/or curtain air
bags) are designed to inflate when
an impact is detected by side colli-
sion sensors depending on the
strength, speed or angles of impact
resulting from a side impact collision.
Also, the side and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when a rollover is
detected by a rollover sensor.
Although the front air bags (driver’s
and front passenger’s air bags) are
designed to inflate in frontal colli-
sions, they also may inflate in other
types of collisions if the front impact
sensors detect a sufficient frontal
force in another type of impact. Side
and curtain air bags are designed to
inflate in certain side impact colli-
sions. They may inflate in other type
of collisions where a side force is
detected by the sensors.Side air bag
and/or curtain air bags may also
inflate where rollover sensors indi-
cate the possibility of a rollover
occurring (even if none actually
occurs) or in other situations, incluid-
ing when the vehicle is tilted while
being towed.
Even where side and/or curtain air
bags would not provide impact pro-
tection in a rollover, however, they
will deploy to prevent ejection of
occupants, especially those who are
restrained with seat belts.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved
roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive
carefully on unimproved roads or on
surfaces not designed for vehicle
traffic to prevent unintended air bag
deployment.
OVQ036018N
OPS033039
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may dif-
fer from the illustration.
365
Safety features of your vehicle
Air bag non-inflation conditions
• In certain low-speed collisions the
air bags may not deploy. The air
bags are designed not to deploy in
such cases because they may not
provide benefits beyond the pro-
tection of the seat belts in such col-
lisions.
• Air bags are not designed to inflate
in rear collisions, because occu-
pants are moved backward by the
force of the impact. In this case,
inflated air bags would not be able
to provide any additional benefit.
• Front air bags may not inflate in
side impact collisions, because
occupants move to the direction of
the collision, and thus in side
impacts, frontal air bag deployment
would not provide additional occu-
pant protection.
OUN036087 OVQ036018N
1VQA2086
Safety features of your vehicle
663
• In an angled collision, the force of
impact may direct the occupants in
a direction where the air bags
would not be able to provide any
additional benefit, and thus the
sensors may not deploy any air
bags.
• Just before impact, drivers often
brake heavily. Such heavy braking
lowers the front portion of the vehi-
cle causing it to “ride” under a vehi-
cle with a higher ground clearance.
Air bags may not inflate in this
"under-ride" situation because
deceleration forces that are detect-
ed by sensors may be significantly
reduced by such “under-ride” colli-
sions.
• Front air bags may not inflate in all
rollover accidents where the
SRSCM indicates that the front air
bag deployment would not provide
additional occupant protection.
1VQA2090 1VQA20911VQA2089
367
Safety features of your vehicle
• Air bags may not inflate if the vehi-
cle collides with objects such as util-
ity poles or trees, where the point of
impact is concentrated to one area
and the full force of the impact is not
delivered to the sensors.
SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-
free and so there are no parts you can
safely service by yourself. If the SRS
air bag warning light does not illumi-
nate, or continuously remains on, have
your vehicle immediately inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
Any work on the SRS system, such
as removing, installing, repairing, or
any work on the steering wheel, the
front passenger’s panel, front seats
and roof rails must be performed by
an authorized Kia dealer. Improper
handling of the SRS system may
result in serious personal injury.
For cleaning the air bag pad covers,
use only a soft, dry cloth or one which
has been moistened with plain water.
Solvents or cleaners could adversely
affect the air bag covers and proper
deployment of the system.
If components of the air bag system
must be discarded, or if the vehicle
must be scrapped, certain safety
precautions must be observed. An
authorized Kia dealer knows these
precautions and can give you the
necessary information. Failure to fol-
low these precautions and proce-
dures could increase the risk of per-
sonal injury.
1VQA2092
Safety features of your vehicle
683
Adding equipment to or modi-
fying your air bag-equipped
vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by changing
your vehicle's frame, bumper system,
front end or side sheet metal or ride
height, this may affect the operation of
your vehicle's air bag system.
Air bag warning label
Air bag warning labels, some required
by the U.S. National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), are
attached to the sunvisor to alert the
driver and passengers of potential
risks of the air bag system.
WARNING - Tampering
with SRS
Do not tamper with or discon-
nect SRS wiring, or other com-
ponents of the SRS system.
Doing so could result in the
accidental inflation of the air
bags or by rendering the SRS
inoperative.
WARNING - Towing Vehicle
Always have the ignition off
when your vehicle is being
towed. The side air bags may
inflate if the vehicle is tilted
such as when being towed
because of the rollover sensors
in the vehicle.
OAM039041
Features of your vehicle
Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
• Key operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
• Transmitter precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
• Immobilizer system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
• Smart key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
• Loss of the smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
• Smart key precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
• Smart key immobilizer system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
• Operating door locks from outside the vehicle . . . . 4-17
• Operating door locks from inside the vehicle. . . . . . 4-18
• Impact sensing door unlock system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
• Auto door lock/unlock feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
• Speed sensing door lock system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
• Child-protector rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
• Opening the liftgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
• Closing the liftgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
• Emergency liftgate safety release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
• Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
• Opening the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
• Closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
• Opening the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
• Closing the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Panoramic sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
• Sunroof open warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
• Sliding the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
• Tilting the sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
• Sunshade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
• Closing the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
• Resetting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
• Electric power steering (EPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
• Tilt and telescopic steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
• Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
• Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
• Flex steer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
• Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
• Outside rearview mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
4
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
• Instrument cluster control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
• LCD display control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
• Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
• Transaxle Shift Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
• LCD modes (for Type B cluster) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
• Service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
• User settings mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
• Turn by turn mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
• Warning Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Trip computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
• Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
• Trip A/B (for Type A cluster) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
• Fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
• Accumulated info display (for Type B cluster). . . . . 4-71
• Drive info display (for Type B cluster) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
• Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
• Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Rear camera display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
• Headlamp escort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
• Battery saver function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
• Daytime running light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
• Lighting control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
• High beam operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
• Turn signals and lane change signals . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
• Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
Wipers and washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
• Windshield wiper/washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
• Rear window wiper/washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
• Windshield wipers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
• Windshield washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
• Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
• Interior lamp AUTO cut. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
• Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
• Room lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
• Luggage room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
• Portable lamp usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
• Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
• Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
• Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
Manual climate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
• Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
• System operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
• Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
• Air conditioning refrigerant label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
4
• Checking the amount of air conditioner
refrigerant and compressor lubricant. . . . . . . . . . 4-113
Automatic climate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
• Automatic heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . 4-115
• Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
• System operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
• Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
• Air Conditioning refrigerant label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
• Checking the amount of air conditioner
refrigerant and compressor lubricant. . . . . . . . . . 4-127
Windshield defrosting and defogging. . . . . . . . . 4-128
• Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
• Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
• Defogging logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
Clean air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
Storage compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
• Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
• Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
• Cool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
• Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
• Luggage box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
• Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
• Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
• Seat warmer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
• Seat air ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
• Rear seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
• Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
• Clothes hanger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142
• Floor mat anchor(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
• Luggage net holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144
• Cargo area cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144
Exterior features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
• Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
• Mounting bracket for roof carrier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
4
Features of your vehicle
44
Record your key number
The key code num-
ber is stamped on
the key code tag
attached to the key
set. Should you
lose your keys, this number will
enable an authorized Kia dealer to
duplicate the keys easily. Remove
the key code tag and store it in a safe
place. Also, record the key code
number and keep it in a safe and
handy place, but not in the vehicle.
Key operations
• Used to start the engine.
• Used to lock and unlock the doors.
• To unfold the key, press the release
button (1) then the key will unfold
automatically. To fold the key, fold
the key manually while pressing
the release button (1).
KEY
CAUTION
Do not fold the key without
pressing the release button.
This may damage the key.
WARNING - Aftermarket
key
Use only Kia original parts for
the ignition key in your vehicle.
If an aftermarket key is used,
the ignition switch may not
return to ON after START. If this
happens, the starter will contin-
ue to operate causing damage
to the starter motor and possi-
ble fire due to excessive current
in the wiring.
OED036001A
OPS046493N
■ Type A (if equipped)
■ Type B (if equipped)
45
Features of your vehicle
Door Lock (1)
1. Close all doors, engine hood and
liftgate.
2. Press the lock button(1).
3. All doors and liftgate will lock. The
hazard warning lights will blink
once.
4. If the lock button is pressed once
more within 4 seconds, the hazard
warning lights will blink and the
horn will sound once.
5. Make sure that doors are locked by
checking the door lock button inside
or pulling the outside door handle.
Door Unlock (2)
1. Press the unlock button(2).
2.The driver's door will unlock. The
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
3. Press the unlock button(2) twice
within 4 seconds and all doors and
liftgate will unlock. The hazard
warning lights will blink two times.
✽✽
NOTICE
You can activate or deactivate the
Two Turn Unlock function. Refer to
“User settings” in this chapter.
OXMA043317
WARNING - Ignition key
Never leave the keys in your
vehicle with unsupervised chil-
dren. Leaving children unat-
tended in a vehicle with a man-
ual ignition key or a smart key
is dangerous. Children copy
adults and they could place the
key in the ignition switch or
press the start button. The key
would enable children to oper-
ate power windows or other
controls, or even make the vehi-
cle move, which could result in
serious bodily injury or death.
result in serious bodily injury or
death.
Features of your vehicle
64
Liftgate unlock (3)
The liftgate is unlocked if the button
is pressed for more than 1 second.
Also, once the liftgate is opened and
then closed, the liftgate will be locked
automatically.
Panic (4)
The horn sounds and hazard warn-
ing lights flash for about 30 seconds
if this button is pressed for more than
1 second.To stop the horn and lights,
press any button except the trunk
button on the transmitter.
Transmitter precautions
• The transmitter will not work if any
of following occur:
- The ignition key is in the ignition
switch.
- You exceed the operating dis-
tance limit (about 30 feet [10 m]).
- The battery in the transmitter is
weak.
- Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
- The weather is extremely cold.
- The transmitter is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio sub-
station or an airport which can
interfere with normal operation of
the transmitter.
• When the transmitter does not
work correctly, open and close the
door with the ignition key. If you
have a problem with the transmit-
ter, contact an authorized Kia deal-
er.
• If the transmitter is in close proxim-
ity to your mobile phone, the signal
could be blocked by your mobile
phones normal operational signals.
This is especially important when
the phone is active such as making
and receiving calls, text messag-
ing, and/or sending/receiving
emails. Avoid placing the transmit-
ter and your mobile phone in the
same pants or jacket pocket and
always try to maintain an adequate
distance between the two devices.
47
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
If the keyless entry system is inoper-
ative due to exposure to water or liq-
uids, it will not be covered by your
manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.
Battery replacement
The transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium
battery which will normally last for
several years. When replacement is
necessary, use the following proce-
dure.
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and
gently pry open the transmitter
center cover.
2. Replace the battery with a new
battery (CR2032).When replacing
the battery, make sure the battery
is positioned battery.
3. Install the battery in the reverse
order of removal.
For replacement transmitters, see an
authorized Kia dealer for transmitter
reprogramming.
• The transmitter is designed to give
you years of trouble-free use, how-
ever it can malfunction if exposed to
moisture or static electricity. If you
are unsure how to use your trans-
mitter or replace the battery, contact
an authorized Kia dealer.
• Using the wrong battery can cause
the transmitter to malfunction. Be
sure to use the correct battery.
• To avoid damaging the transmitter,
don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it
to heat or sunlight.
• An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and may cause
human health. Dispose the
battery according to your
local law(s) or regulation.
CAUTION
Keep the transmitter away from
water or any liquid as it can
become damaged and not func-
tion properly.
OYDDCO2005
Features of your vehicle
84
Immobilizer system
(if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with an
electronic engine immobilizer system
to reduce the risk of unauthorized
vehicle use.
Your immobilizer system is com-
prised of a small transponder in the
ignition key and electronic devices
inside the vehicle.
With the immobilizer system, when-
ever you insert your ignition key into
the ignition switch and turn it to ON,
it checks and determines and verifies
if the ignition key is valid.
If the key is determined to be valid,
the engine will start.
If the key is determined to be invalid,
the engine will not start.
To activate the immobilizer sys-
tem:
Turn the ignition key to the OFF posi-
tion. The immobilizer system acti-
vates automatically. Without a valid
ignition key for your vehicle, the
engine will not start.
To deactivate the immobilizer
system:
Insert the ignition key into the key
cylinder and turn it to the ON position.
In order to prevent theft of your vehi-
cle, do not leave spare keys any-
where in your vehicle. Your
Immobilizer password is a customer
unique password and should be kept
confidential. Do not leave this num-
ber anywhere in your vehicle.
CAUTION - Transmitter
damage
Do not drop, wet or expose the
keyless entry system transmit-
ter to heat or sunlight or it will
be damaged.
49
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
When starting the engine, do not use
the key with other immobilizer keys
around. Otherwise the engine may
not start or may stop soon after it
starts. Keep each key separate in
order to avoid a starting malfunction.
Do not put metal accessories near
the ignition switch.
Metal accessories may interrupt the
transponder signal and may prevent
the engine from being started.
✽✽
NOTICE
If you need additional keys or lose
your keys, contact an authorized
Kia dealer.
This device complies with Part 15
of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
2.This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
✽✽
NOTICE
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. If the keyless entry
system is inoperative due to changes
or modifications not approved by
the party responsible for compli-
ance, it will not be covered by your
manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.
CAUTION - Immobilizer
damage
Do not expose your immobilizer
system to moisture, static elec-
tricity and rough handling. This
may damage your immobilizer.
CAUTION - Immobilizer
alterations
Do not change, alter or adjust
the immobilizer system because
it could cause the immobilizer
system to malfunction.
Features of your vehicle
104
Record your key number
The key code num-
ber is stamped on
the key code tag
attached to the key
set. Should you
lose your keys, this number will
enable an authorized Kia dealer to
duplicate the keys easily. Remove
the key code tag and store it in a safe
place. Also, record the key code
number and keep it in a safe and
handy place, but not in the vehicle.
Smart key function
To remove the mechanical key, press
and hold the release button(1) and
remove the mechanical key (2).
To reinstall the mechanical key, put
the key into the hole and push it until
a click sound is heard.
With a smart key, you can lock or
unlock a door (and Liftgate) and start
the engine.
Refer to the following for more details.
Door Lock
Using the door handle button
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Close all doors, engine hood and
liftgate.
3. Press the button of the outside
door handle.
4.The hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound once.
5. Make sure that doors are locked
by pulling the outside door handle.
SMART KEY (IF EQUIPPED)
OXMA043316 OPS043010
WARNING - Smart key
Never leave the smart key in
your vehicle with unsupervised
children. Leaving children unat-
tended in a vehicle with a smart
key is dangerous. Children
copy adults and they could
press the start button. The key
would enable children to oper-
ate power windows or other
controls, or even make the vehi-
cle move, which could result in
serious bodily injury or death.
result in serious bodily injury or
death.
411
Features of your vehicle
The button will only operate when
the smart key is within 28~40 in.
(0.7~1m) from the outside door han-
dle.
Even though you press the outside
door handle button, the doors will not
lock and the chime will sound for 3
seconds if any of following occur:
• The smart key is in the vehicle.
• The engine start/stop button is in
ACC or ON position.
• Any door except the liftgate is
open.
Using the button on the smart key
1 Close all doors, engine hood and
liftgate.
2. Press the lock button(1).
3.The hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound once.
4. Make sure that doors are locked
by pulling the outside door handle.
Unlocking
Using the door handle button
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Press the button of the driver's
outside door handle.
3.The driver’s door will unlock. The
hazard warning lights will blink and
the chime will sound two times.
4. Press the button twice within 4
seconds and all doors and the lift-
gate will unlock and the hazard
warning lights will blink and the
chime will sound two times.
OPS046494N
Features of your vehicle
124
• The button will only operate when
the smart key is within 28~40 in.
(0.7~1m) from the outside door
handle.
• When the smart key is recognized
in the area of 28~40 in. (0.7~1m)
from the front outside door handle,
other people can also open the
doors.
• After unlocking the driver’s door or
all doors, the door(s) will lock auto-
matically unless the door is
opened.
Using the button on the smart key
1. Press the unlock button(2) of the
smart key.
2.The driver’s door will unlock. The
hazard warning lights will blink and
the chime will sound two times.
3. Press the unlock button(2) twice
within 4 seconds and all doors and
the liftgate will unlock.The hazard
warning lights will blink and the
chime will sound two times.
✽✽
NOTICE
After pressing the button, the doors
will lock automatically unless any
door is opened within 30 seconds.
✽✽
NOTICE
You can activate or deactivate the
Two Turn Unlock function. Refer to
“User settings” in this chapter.
Liftgate unlocking
Using the liftgate handle button
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Press the liftgate handle button.
3.When all doors are locked, the
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
Once the liftgate is opened and
then closed, the liftgate will lock
automatically.
If you are within 28~40 in. (0.7~1 m)
from the outside liftgate handle, with
your smart key in possession, the lift-
gate will unlock and open when you
press the liftgate handle switch.
413
Features of your vehicle
Using the button on the smart key
1. Press the liftgate unlock button(3)
for more than 1 second.
2.When all doors are locked, the
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
Panic
1. Press the panic button(4) for more
than 1 second.
2.The horn sounds and hazard
warning light flash for about 30
seconds.
Start-up
You can start the engine without
inserting the key.
❈ For detailed information refer to
the “Engine start/stop button” in
chapter 6.
Loss of the smart key
A maximum of 2 smart keys can be
registered to a single vehicle.
If you happen to lose your smart key,
you will not be able to start the
engine.You should immediately take
the vehicle and remaining key to your
authorized Kia dealer(tow the vehi-
cle, if necessary) to protect it from
potential theft.
Smart key precautions
• The smart key will not work if any
of the following occur:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio sta-
tion or an airport which can inter-
fere with normal operation of the
smart key.
- The smart key is near a mobile
two way radio system or a cellular
phone.
- Another vehicle’s smart key is
being operated close to your
vehicle.
• When the smart key does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the mechanical key and contact
an authorized Kia dealer.
Features of your vehicle
144
• If the smart key is in close proximi-
ty to your cell phone or smart
phone, the signal from the smart
key could be blocked by normal
operation of your cell phone or
smart phone. This is especially
important when the phone is active
such as making a call, receiving
calls, text messaging, and/or send-
ing/receiving emails. Avoid placing
the smart key and your cell phone
or smart phone in the same pants
or jacket pocket and maintain ade-
quate distance between the two
devices.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the keyless entry system is inoper-
ative due to exposure to water or liq-
uids, it will not be covered by your
manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.
Smart key immobilizer system
Your vehicle is equipped with an
electronic engine immobilizer system
to reduce the risk of unauthorized
vehicle use.
Your immobilizer system is com-
prised of a small transponder in the
smart key and electronic devices
inside the vehicle.
With the immobilizer system, when-
ever you turn the engine start/stop
button to the ON position by pressing
the button while carrying the smart
key, it checks and determines and
verifies if the smart key is valid or
not.
If the key is determined to be valid,
the engine will start.
If the key is determined to be invalid,
the engine will not start.
To deactivate the immobilizer
system:
Turn the engine start/stop button to
the ON position by pressing the but-
ton while carrying the smart key.
To activate the immobilizer system:
Turn the engine start/stop button to
the OFF position. The immobilizer
system activates automatically.
Without a valid smart key for your
vehicle, the engine will not start.
In order to prevent theft of your vehi-
cle, do not leave spare keys any-
where in your vehicle. Your
Immobilizer password is a customer
unique password and should be kept
confidential. Do not leave this num-
ber anywhere in your vehicle.
CAUTION
Keep the smart key away from
water or any liquid as it can
become damaged and not func-
tion properly.
415
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
When starting the engine, do not use
the key with other immobilizer keys
around. Otherwise the engine may
not start or may stop soon after it
starts. Keep each key separate in
order to avoid a starting malfunction.
Do not put metal accessories near
the smart key.
The engine may not start because
the metal accessories may interrupt
the transponder signal from transmit-
ting normally.
✽✽
NOTICE
If you need additional keys or lose
your keys, contact an authorized
Kia dealer.
This device complies with Part 15
of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
2.This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
✽✽
NOTICE
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. If the keyless entry
system is inoperative due to changes
or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible
for compliance, it will not be cov-
ered by your manufacturer’s vehicle
warranty.
CAUTION - Immobilizer
damage
Do not expose your immobilizer
system to moisture, static elec-
tricity and rough handling. This
may damage your immobilizer.
CAUTION - Immobilizer
alterations
Do not change, alter or adjust
the immobilizer system because
it could cause the immobilizer
system to malfunction.
Features of your vehicle
164
Battery replacement
A smart key battery should last for
several years, but if the smart key is
not working properly, try replacing
the battery with a new one.If you are
unsure how to use your smart key or
replace the battery, contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
1.Remove the mechanical key.
2.Pry open the rear cover.
3.Replace the battery with a new
battery (CR2032). When replacing
the battery, make sure the battery
position.
4.Install the battery in the reverse
order of removal.
• The smart key is designed to give
you years of trouble-free use, how-
ever it can malfunction if exposed
to moisture or static electricity. If
you are unsure how to use or
replace the battery, contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Using the wrong battery can cause
the smart key to malfunction. Be
sure to use the correct battery.
• To avoid damaging the smart key,
don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it
to heat or sunlight.
• An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to
the environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local
law(s) or regulation.
OPS043002
CAUTION - Smart key
damage
Do not drop, get wet or expose
the smart key to heat or sun-
light, or it will be damaged.
417
Features of your vehicle
DOOR LOCKS
.
Operating door locks from
outside the vehicle
• Turn the key clockwise to lock and
counterclockwise to unlock.
• If you lock the driver's door with a
key
- All vehicle doors will lock auto-
matically. (for normal key)
- Only the driver's door will lock.
(for folding key, smart key)
• From the driver's door
- Turn the key to the left once to
unlock the door and once more
within 4 seconds to unlock all
doors. (for normal key).
- Turn the key to the left once to
unlock the driver's door. (for fold-
ing key, smart key.
• Doors can also be locked and
unlocked with the transmitter.
• Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
• When closing the door, push the
door by hand.Make sure the doors
are closed securely.
✽✽
NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked
multiple times in rapid succession
with either the vehicle key or door
lock switch, the system may stop
operating temporarily in order to
protect the circuit and prevent
damage to system components.
OPS043011
Lock
Lock
Unlock
■ Type A ■ Type B
Unlock
WARNING
If people must spend a longer
time in the vehicle while it is
very hot or cold outside, there
is rick of injuries or danger to
life. Do not lock the vehicle from
the outside when there are peo-
ple in it.
WARNING
• Securely close your door
before you begin driving.
Failure to fully close your door
may cause it to open during
vehicle operation.
• Keep your body out of the way
of the closing door to prevent
injuries.
CAUTION
Do not open and close the door
repeatedly if unnecessary or
with excessive force. Such
action can damage the vehicle
door.
Features of your vehicle
184
• To lock a door without the key,
push the inside door lock button (1)
or central door lock switch (2) to
the “Lock” position and close the
door (3).
• If you lock the door with the central
door lock switch (2), all vehicle
doors will lock automatically.
✽✽
NOTICE
Always remove the ignition key,
engage the parking brake, close all
windows and lock all doors when
leaving your vehicle unattended.
Operating door locks from
inside the vehicle
With the door lock button
• To unlock a door, push the door
lock button (1) to the “Unlock (B)”
position. The red mark (2) on the
button will be visible.
• To lock a door, push the door lock
button (1) to the “Lock (A)”position.
If the door is locked properly, the
red mark (2) on the door lock but-
ton will not be visible.
• To open a door, pull the door han-
dle (3) outward.
• If the inner door handle of the dri-
ver’s (or front passenger’s) door is
pulled when the door lock button is
in the lock position, the button will
unlock and the door will open. (if
equipped)
• Front doors cannot be locked if the
ignition key is in the ignition switch
and any front door is opened.
OPS043012
OPS046013L
419
Features of your vehicle
If a power door lock ever fails to func-
tion while you are in the vehicle, try
one or more of the following tech-
niques to exit :
• Operate the door unlock feature
repeatedly (both electronic and
manual) while simultaneously
pulling on the door handle.
• Operate the other door locks and
handles, front and rear.
• Lower a front window and use the
key to unlock the door from out-
side.
• Move to the cargo area and open
the liftgate.
With central door lock switch
Operate by pressing the central door
lock switch.
• When pressing the front portion (1)
of the switch, all vehicle doors will
lock.
• When pressing the rear portion (2)
of the switch, all vehicle doors will
unlock.
• If the key is in the ignition switch
and any front door is opened, the
doors will not lock even though the
front portion (1) of the central door
lock switch is pressed.
OPS046014L
Driver’s door
OPS046015N
Passenger’s door
WARNING
Do not pull the inner door handle
of driver’s(or passenger’s) door
while the vehicle is moving.
WARNING - Doors
• The doors should always be
fully closed and locked while
the vehicle is in motion to pre-
vent accidental opening of the
door.
• Be careful when opening doors
and watch for vehicles, motor-
cycles, bicycles or pedestrians
approaching the vehicle in the
path of the door. Opening a
door when something is
approaching can cause dam-
age or injury.
Features of your vehicle
204
Impact sensing door unlock
system
In the event of air bag deployment
resulting from a vehicle impact, all
doors will automatically unlock.
Auto door lock/unlock feature
(if equipped)
• All doors will automatically lock
when the transaxle shift lever is
shifted out of P(Park).
• All doors will automatically unlock
when the transaxle shift lever is
shifted into P (Park).
Speed sensing door lock sys-
tem
All doors will be automatically locked
after the vehicle speed exceeds 9.3
mph (15 km/h). And all doors will be
automatically unlocked when you
turn the engine off or when you
remove the ignition key.
✽✽
NOTICE
You can select some auto door
lock/unlock features in “User
Settings” as follows;
• Speed sensing auto door lock
• Auto door unlock when the igni-
tion key is removed from the igni-
tion switch or engine is turned off.
• Auto door lock/unlock by shifting
the shift lever out of P(Park) or
into P(Park).
For more information, refer to
“User Settings” in this chapter.
WARNING -Unattended
children/animals
Never leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle. An
enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
severe injury to unattended
children or animals who cannot
escape the vehicle.
WARNING - Unlocked
vehicles
Leaving your vehicle unlocked
can invite theft or possible harm
to you or others from someone
hiding in your vehicle while you
are gone. Always remove the
ignition key, engage the parking
brake, close all windows and
lock all doors when leaving
your vehicle unattended.
421
Features of your vehicle
Child-protector rear door lock
The child safety lock is provided to
help prevent children from acciden-
tally opening the rear doors from
inside the vehicle. The rear door
safety locks should be used whenev-
er children are in the vehicle.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert a key (or screwdriver) into
the hole (1) and turn it to the
“lock( )”position. When the child
safety lock is in the lock position, the
rear door will not open even when
the inner door handle is pulled.
3. Close the rear door.
To open the rear door, pull the out-
side door handle.
Even though the doors may be
unlocked, the rear door will not open
by pulling the inner door handle (1)
until the rear door child safety lock is
unlocked.
OPS043016
WARNING - Rear door
locks
Use the rear door safety locks
whenever children are in the
vehicle. If a child accidently
opens the rear doors while the
vehicle is motion,he can fall out.
Features of your vehicle
224
Opening the liftgate
• The liftgate is locked or unlocked
when all doors are locked or
unlocked with the key, transmitter
(or smart key) or central door lock
switch.
• If unlocked, the liftgate can be
opened by pressing the handle
switch and then pulling the handle
up.
• Only the liftgate is unlocked if the
liftgate unlock button on the smart
key is pressed (if equipped). Once
the liftgate is opened and then
closed, the liftgate is locked auto-
matically.
✽✽
NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
The liftgate swings upward. Make
sure no objects or people are near
the rear of the vehicle when opening
the liftgate.
Closing the liftgate
To close the liftgate, lower and push
down the liftgate firmly. Make sure
that the liftgate is securely latched.
Make sure your hands, feet and
other parts of your body are safely
out of the way before closing the lift-
gate.
LIFTGATE
CAUTION - Liftgate lift
Make certain that you close the
liftgate before driving your vehi-
cle. Possible damage may occur
to the liftgate lift cylinders and
attached hardware if the liftgate
is not closed prior to driving.
OPS046017L OPS043018L
423
Features of your vehicle
Emergency liftgate safety
release
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emergency liftgate safety release
lever located on the bottom of the lift-
gate. When someone is inadvertent-
ly locked in the compartment. The
liftgate can be opened by doing as
follows:
1. Remove the cover.
2. Push the release lever to the right.
3. Push up the liftgate.
WARNING
• No one should be allowed to
occupy the cargo area of the
vehicle at any time.The cargo
area is a very dangerous loca-
tion in the event of a crash.
• Use the release lever for
emergencies only. Use with
extreme caution, especially
while the vehicle is in motion.
OPS046019L
WARNING - Rear cargo
area
Occupants should never ride in
the rear cargo area where no
restraints are available.
Occupants should always be
properly restrained.
WARNING - Exhaust
fumes
Driving with the liftgate open is
not advisable. Dangerous
exhaust fumes can enter the
passenger compartment. If you
must drive with the liftgate
opened, keep the air vents and
all windows open so that addi-
tional outside air can enter.
Features of your vehicle
244
(1) Driver’s door power window
switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power
window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window
switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window
up/down
(7) Power window lock switch
In cold and wet climates, power win-
dows may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
WINDOWS
OPS046491L
425
Features of your vehicle
Power windows
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for power windows to operate.
Each door has a power window
switch that controls the door's win-
dow. The driver has a power window
lock button which can block the oper-
ation of the rear passenger windows.
The power windows can be operated
for approximately 30 seconds after
the ignition key is removed or turned
to the ACC or LOCK position.
However, if the front doors are
opened, the power windows cannot
be operated even within the 30 sec-
ond period.
If the window cannot be close
because it is blocked by objects,
remove the objects and close the
window.
✽✽
NOTICE
While driving with the rear windows
down or with the sunroof (if
equipped) in an open (or partially
open) position, your vehicle may
demonstrate a wind buffeting or
pulsation noise. This noise is a nor-
mal occurrence and can be reduced
or eliminated by taking the follow-
ing actions. If the noise occurs with
one or both of the rear windows
down, partially lower both front
windows approximately one inch. If
you experience the noise with the
sunroof open, slightly reduce the
size of the sunroof opening.
Window opening and closing
The driver’s door has a master power
window switch that controls all the
windows in the vehicle.
To open or close a window, press
down or pull up the front portion of
the corresponding switch to the first
detent position (5).
OPS046021L
WARNING
Do not install any accessories
in the vehicle that extend into
the open window area. Such
objects will impact the proper
function of the Automatic rever-
sal “jam protection” feature
described on page 4-26 of this
manual.
Features of your vehicle
264
Auto down window (if equipped)
Pressing the power window switch
momentarily to the second detent
position (6) completely lowers the
driver’s window even when the
switch is released. To stop the win-
dow at the desired position while the
window is in operation, momentarily
pull up the switch to the opposite
direction of the window movement.
Auto up/down window
(if equipped)
Pressing or pulling up the power win-
dow switch momentarily to the sec-
ond detent position (6) completely
lowers or raises the window even
when the switch is released. To stop
the window at the desired position
while the window is in operation, pull
up or press down and release the
switch.
If the power window does not oper-
ate normally, the automatic power
window system must be reset as fol-
lows:
1.Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Close the driver’s window and
continue pulling up the driver’s
power window switch for at least 1
second after the window is com-
pletely closed.
OPS046203L
OPS046022L
427
Features of your vehicle
Automatic reversal
If the upward movement of the win-
dow is blocked by an object or part of
the body, the window will detect the
resistance and will stop upward
movement. The window will then
lower approximately 11.8 in. (30 cm)
to allow the object to be cleared.
The distance may vary based on the
size or position of the window. If the
window detects the resistance while
the power window switch is pulled up
continuously, the window will stop
upward movement then lower
approximately 1 in. (2.5 cm).
And if the power window switch is
pulled up continuously again within 5
seconds after the window is lowered
by the automatic window reversal
feature, the automatic window rever-
sal will not operate.
✽✽
NOTICE
The automatic reverse feature for
the driver’s window is only active
when the “auto up” feature is used
by fully pulling up the switch. The
automatic reverse feature will not
operate if the window is raised using
the halfway position on the power
window switch.
OUN026013
WARNING
Always check for obstructions
before raising any window to
avoid injuries or vehicle damage.
If an object less than 4 mm (0.16
in.) in diameter is caught
between the window glass and
the upper window channel, the
automatic reverse window may
not detect the resistance and will
not stop and reverse direction.
WARNING
The automatic reverse feature
doesn’t activate while resetting
power window system. Make
sure body parts or other objects
are safely out of the way before
closing the windows to avoid
injuries or vehicle damage.
Features of your vehicle
284
Power window lock button
• The driver can disable the power
window switches on the passenger
doors by pressing the power win-
dow lock button located on the dri-
ver’s door to the LOCK position
(pressed).
• When the power window lock
switch is pressed :
- The driver's master control can
operate all the power windows.
- The front passenger's control can
operate the front passenger's
power window.
- The rear passenger's control can-
not operate the rear passenger's
power window.
Always double check to make sure
all arms, hands, head and other
obstructions are safely out of the way
before closing a window.
OPS046023L
CAUTION - Opening /clos-
ing Window
To prevent possible damage to
the power window system, do
not open or close two windows
or more at the same time. This
will also ensure the longevity of
the fuse.
WARNING - Power win-
dows
Do not allow children to play
with the power windows. Keep
the power window lock switch
(on the driver's door) in the
LOCK (pressed) position.
429
Features of your vehicle
Opening the hood
1. Pull the release lever to unlatch
the hood. The hood should pop
open slightly.
Open the hood after turning off the
engine on a flat surface, shifting the
shift lever to the P (Park) position for
automatic transaxle and to the 1st
(First) gear or R (Reverse) for manu-
al transaxle, and setting the parking
brake.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise
the hood slightly, pull the second-
ary latch (1) inside of the hood
center and lift the hood (2).
3. Raise the hood. It will completely
rise by itself after it has been
raised about halfway.
Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the
following:
• All filler caps in engine compart-
ment must be correctly installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other com-
bustible material must be
removed from the engine com-
partment.
2. Return the support rod to its clip to
prevent it from rattling.
3.Lower the hood until it is about 30
cm above the closed position and
let it drop. Make sure that it locks
into place.
4. Check that the hood has engaged
properly. If the hood can be raised
slightly, it is not properly engaged.
Open it again and close it with a lit-
tle more force.
HOOD
OPS043024
OPS046025L
Features of your vehicle
304
When you check the engine com-
partment, Take caution to avoid con-
tacting your head with the safety
hook which is located inside of the
hood.
WARNING - Fire risk
Do not leave gloves, rags or any
other combustible material in the
engine compartment. Doing so
may cause a heat-induced fire.
WARNING
- Unsecured
engine hood
Always double check to be sure
that the hood is firmly latched
before driving away. If it is not
latched, the hood could fly open
while the vehicle is being driv-
en, causing a total loss of visi-
bility, which might result in an
accident.
ODMNMC2034
WARNING
Before closing the hood, ensure
that all obstructions are
removed from the hood open-
ing. Closing the hood with an
obstruction present in the hood
opening may result in severe
personal injury.
431
Features of your vehicle
Opening the fuel filler lid
The fuel filler lid must be opened
from inside the vehicle by pulling up
the fuel filler lid opener.
If the fuel filler lid does not open
because ice has formed around it,
tap lightly or push on the lid to break
the ice and release the lid.Do not pry
on the lid. If necessary, spray around
the lid with an approved de-icer fluid
(do not use radiator anti-freeze) or
move the vehicle to a warm place
and allow the ice to melt.
1. Stop the engine.
2.To open the fuel filler lid, push the
fuel filler lid opener button.
3. Pull open the fuel filler lid (1).
4.To remove the cap, turn the fuel
filler cap (2) counterclockwise.
5. Refuel as needed.
Closing the fuel filler lid
1.To install the cap, turn it clockwise
until it “clicks” once. This indicates
that the cap is securely tightened.
2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it
in lightly making sure that it is
securely closed.
✽✽
NOTICE
There may be an intermittent noise
near the refueling hole while the
engine is idling if the fuel cap is not
closed securely. This occurs normal-
ly with the OBD system.
✽✽
NOTICE
When refueling fully at an up hill,
the fuel gauge may not point to the F
position.
It is not a malfunction. If you move
your vehicle to a level ground, the fuel
gauge will move to the full position.
FUEL FILLER LID
OPS043027
OPS043026
Features of your vehicle
324
Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an accident.
✽✽
NOTICE
Tighten the cap until it clicks once,
otherwise the fuel cap open warning
indicator light will illuminate
WARNING - Fire/explo-
sion risk
Read and follow all warnings
posted at the gas station facili-
ty. Failure to follow all warnings
will result in severe personal
injury, severe burns or death
due to fire or explosion.
WARNING - Static elec-
tricity
• Before touching the fuel noz-
zle, you should eliminate
potentially dangerous static
electricity discharge by touch-
ing another metal part of the
vehicle, a safe distance away
from the fuel filler neck, noz-
zle, or other gas source.
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refuel-
ing since you can generate
static electricity by touching,
rubbing or sliding against any
item or fabric (polyester, satin,
nylon,etc.) capable of produc-
ing static electricity. Static
electricity discharge can
ignite fuel vapors resulting in
rapid burning. If you must
reenter the vehicle, you
should once again eliminate
potentially dangerous static
electricity discharge by touch-
ing a metal part of the vehicle,
away from the fuel filler neck,
nozzle or other gasoline
source.
WARNING - Refueling
Always remove the fuel cap
carefully and slowly. If the cap
is venting fuel or if you hear a
hissing sound, wait until the
condition stops before com-
pletely removing the cap. If
pressurized fuel sprays out, it
can cover your clothes or skin
and subject you to the risk of
fire and burns.
433
Features of your vehicle
Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the “Fuel requirements”
suggested in chapter 1.
If the fuel filler cap requires replace-
ment, use only a genuine Kia cap or
the equivalent specified for your vehi-
cle. An incorrect fuel filler cap can
result in a serious malfunction of the
fuel system or emission control sys-
tem.
WARNING - Cell phone
fires
Do not use cellular phones
while refueling. Electric current
and/or electronic interference
from cellular phones can poten-
tially ignite fuel vapors causing
a fire.
WARNING - Smoking
DO NOT use matches or a lighter
and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit
cigarette in your vehicle while at
a gas station especially during
refueling. Automotive fuel is
highly flammable and can, when
ignited, result in fire.
WARNING - Refueling &
Vehicle fires
When refueling, always shut the
engine off. Sparks produced by
electrical components related
to the engine can ignite fuel
vapors causing a fire. Once
refueling is complete, check to
make sure the filler cap and
filler door are securely closed,
before starting the engine.
CAUTION - Exterior paint
Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any
type of fuel spilled on painted
surfaces may damage the paint.
WARNING - Portable fuel
container
When using an approved
portable fuel container, be sure
to place the container on the
ground prior to refueling. Static
electricity discharge from the
container can ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire. Once refueling
has begun, contact with the
vehicle should be maintained
until the filling is complete. Use
only approved portable plastic
fuel containers designed to
carry and store gasoline.
Features of your vehicle
344
The sunroof can be operated for
approximately 30 seconds after the
ignition key is removed or turned to
the ACC or LOCK position. However,
if the front doors are opened, the
sunroof cannot be opened even with-
in the 30 seconds period.
✽✽
NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, the sun-
roof may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
• After a vehicle is washed or in a
rainstorm be sure to wipe off any
water that is on the sunroof before
operating it.
✽✽
NOTICE
The sunroof cannot tilt when it is in
the slide position but can be slid
while in a tilt position.
PANORAMIC SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
CAUTION - Sunroof control
• Do not continue to pull or
push the sunroof glass con-
trol lever after the sunroof is
fully opened, closed, or tilted.
Damage to the motor or sys-
tem components could occur.
• Make sure the sunroof is closed
fully when leaving your vehicle.
If the sunroof is open, rain or
snow may leak through the
sunroof and wet the interior as
well as cause theft.
OPSE046028L
WARNING
- Roof cargo
Do not operate the sun roof
while using the roof rack to
transport cargo.This may cause
the cargo to come loose and
distract the driver.
WARNING
Never adjust the sunroof or
sunshade while driving. This
could result in loss of control
and an accident that may cause
death, serious injury, or proper-
ty damage.
WARNING
To avoid accidental injury, do
not let children operate the sun-
roof without adult supervision.
435
Features of your vehicle
Sunroof open warning
(if equipped)
If the driver removes the ignition key
(smart key: turns off the engine)
when the sunroof is not fully closed,
the warning chime will sound for a
few seconds and a message will
appear on the LCD display or warn-
ing indicator will illuminate.
Close the sunroof securely when
leaving your vehicle.
Sliding the sunroof
When the sunshade is closed
Pull the sunroof control lever back-
ward to the 2nd detent position, the
sunshade and sunroof glass will slide
all the way open. To stop the sunroof
movement at any point, push the sun-
roof control lever momentarily.
When the sunshade is opened
Pull the sunroof control lever back-
ward to the 1st or 2nd detent position,
the sunroof glass will slide all the way
open. To stop the sunroof movement
at any point, pull or push the sunroof
control lever momentarily.
❈ The front part of the sunroof glass
can only be opened and closed
OPSE046029L
OPS046426L
■ for Type B cluster
Features of your vehicle
364
Automatic reversal
If an object or part of the body is
detected while the sunroof is closing
automatically, it will reverse the direc-
tion, and then stop.
The auto reverse function does not
work if a tiny obstacle is between the
sliding glass and the sunroof sash.
You should always check that all pas-
sengers and objects are away from
the sunroof before closing it.
Objects less than 0.16 inch (4 mm) in
diameter caught between the sunroof
glass and the front window channel
may not be detected by the automat-
ic reverse window and the window will
not stop and reverse direction.
Tilting the sunroof
When the sunshade is closed
Push the sunroof control lever
upward, the sunshade will slide
halfway open then the sunroof glass
will tilt.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, push the sunroof control lever
momentarily.
When the sunshade is opened
Push the sunroof control lever
upward, the sunroof glass will tilt.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, push the sunroof control lever
momentarily.
OPSE046030LOXM049029
WARNING - Sunroof
Operation
When closing the sunroof, make
sure there are no body parts in
the movement range of the slid-
ing roof. Parts of the body could
become trapped or crushed.
WARNING - Sunroof
• Be careful that no head, hands
and body parts are obstructed
by a closing sunroof.
• Do not extend the face, neck,
arms or body outside the sun-
roof while driving.
437
Features of your vehicle
Sunshade
To open the sunshade
Pull the sunroof control lever back-
ward to the 1st detent position.
To close the sunshade when the
sunroof glass is closed
Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward or pull it down to the 1st detent
position.
To stop the sliding at any point, press
the sunshade control switch momen-
tarily.
✽✽
NOTICE
Only the front glass of the panora-
ma sunroof opens and closes.
Closing the sunroof
To close the sunroof glass with
the sunshade
Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward or downward to the 2nd detent
position. The sunroof glass and sun-
shade will close automatically.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, push the sunroof control lever
momentarily.
To close the sunroof glass only
Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward or downward to the 1st detent
position.The sunroof glass will close
automatically.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, push the sunroof control lever
momentarily.
✽✽
NOTICE
Wrinkles formed on the sunshade as
material characteristic are normal.
OPSE046031L
CAUTION - Sunroof motor
damage
If you try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is below
freezing or when the sunroof is
covered with snow or ice, the
glass or the motor could be
damaged.
CAUTION
Periodically remove any dirt that
may accumulate on the guide
rail to prevent damage to the
sunroof.
Features of your vehicle
384
Resetting the sunroof
Whenever the vehicle battery is dis-
connected or discharged, you must
reset your sunroof system as follows:
1.Start the engine.
2.Close the sunshade and sunroof
completely if opened.
3.Release the sunroof control lever.
4.Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward in the direction of close
v(about 10 seconds) until the sun-
shade slightly moves. Then,
release the lever.
5.Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward in the direction of close, until
the sunroof operates as follows
again:
Sunshade Open → Glass Tilt Open
→ Glass Slide Open → Glass Slide
Close → Sunshade Close
Then, release the lever.
When this is complete, the sunroof
system has been reset.
CAUTION - Automatic
sunroof shade
• Do not pull or push the sun-
shade by hand as such action
may damage the sunshade or
cause it to malfunction.
• Close the sunroof when driv-
ing in dusty environments.
Dust may cause a malfunction
of the vehicle system.
CAUTION
If the sunroof is not reset when
the vehicle battery is discon-
nected or discharged, or related
fuse is blown, the sunroof may
operate improperly.
439
Features of your vehicle
Electric power steering (EPS)
The power steering uses a motor to
assist you in steering the vehicle. If
the engine is off or if the power steer-
ing system becomes inoperative, the
vehicle may still be steered, but it will
require increased steering effort.
The motor driven power steering is
controlled by a power steering con-
trol unit which senses the steering
wheel torque and vehicle speed to
command the motor.
The steering becomes heavier as
the vehicle’s speed increases and
becomes lighter as the vehicle’s
speed decreases for optimum steer-
ing control.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, have the power
steering checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.
• If the Electric Power Steering System
does not operate normally, the warn-
ing light will illuminate on the instru-
ment cluster.The steering wheel may
require increased steering effort.
Take your vehicle to an authorized
Kia dealer and have the vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
• When you operate the steering
wheel in low temperature, noise
may occur.If temperature rises, the
noise will likely disappear.This is a
normal condition.
• When the vehicle is stationary,
when the steering wheel is turned
all the way to the left or right con-
tinuously, the steering wheel
becomes harder to turn.The power
assist is limited to protect the
motor from overheating.
As time passes, the steering wheel
return to its normal condition.
✽✽
NOTICE
The following symptoms may occur
during normal vehicle operation:
• The EPS warning light does not
illuminate.
• The steering gets heavy immedi-
ately after turning the ignition
switch on. This happens as the sys-
tem performs the EPS system
diagnostics. When the diagnostics
are completed, the steering wheel
will return to its normal condition.
• A click noise may be heard from
the EPS relay after the ignition
switch is turned to the ON or
LOCK (OFF) position.
• A motor noise may be heard when
the vehicle is at a stop or at a low
driving speed.
• If the Electric Power Steering
System does not operate normally,
the warning light will illuminate on
the instrument cluster. The steer-
ing wheel may become difficult to
control or operate abnormally.
Take your vehicle to an authorized
Kia dealer and have the vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
(Continued)
STEERING WHEEL
Features of your vehicle
404
(Continued)
• When you operate the steering
wheel in low temperature, abnor-
mal noise may occur. If tempera-
ture rises, the noise will likely dis-
appear. This is a normal condition.
• When the charging system warn-
ing light comes on due to the low
voltage (When the alternator or
battery) does not operate normal-
ly or it malfunctions), the steering
wheel may require increased
steering effort.
Tilt and telescopic steering
Tilt and telescopic steering allows
you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive.You can also raise it
to give your legs more room when
you exit and enter the vehicle.
The steering wheel should be posi-
tioned so that it is comfortable for
you to drive, while permitting you to
see the instrument panel warning
lights and gauges.
To change the steering wheel angle,
pull down the lock-release lever (1),
adjust the steering wheel to the
desired angle (2) and height (3, if
equipped) then pull up the lock-
release lever to lock (4) the steering
wheel in place. Be sure to adjust the
steering wheel to the desired posi-
tion before driving.
OPS043032
WARNING - Steering
wheel adjustment
Never adjust the angle and
height of the steering wheel
while driving. You may lose
steering control.
441
Features of your vehicle
Heated steering wheel
(if equipped)
With the ignition switch in the ON
position, pressing the heated steer-
ing wheel button warms the steering
wheel. The indicator on the button
will illuminate.
To turn the heated steering wheel off,
press the button once again. The
indicator on the button will turn off.
✽✽
NOTICE
The heated steering wheel will turn
off automatically approximately 30
minutes after the heated steering
wheel is turned on.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn
symbols on your steering wheel.
Check the horn regularly to be sure it
operates properly.
✽✽
NOTICE
To sound the horn, press the area
indicated by the horn symbol on
your steering wheel (see illustra-
tion). The horn will operate only
when this area is pressed.
OPS043033
OPS043034
CAUTION
• Do not install any grip to oper-
ate the steering wheel. This
causes damage to the heated
steering wheel system.
• When cleaning the heated
steering wheel, do not use an
organic solvent such as paint
thinner, benzene, alcohol and
gasoline. Doing so may dam-
age the surface of the steering
wheel.
• If the surface of steering
wheel is damaged by sharp
object, damage to the heated
steering wheel components
could occur.
WARNING
If the steering wheel becomes
too warm, turn the system off.
The heated steering wheel may
cause burns even at low tem-
peratures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
Features of your vehicle
424
FLEX STEER (if equipped)
The FLEX STEER controls steering
effort based upon as driver's prefer-
ence or road condition.
You can select the desired steering
mode by pressing the FLEX STEER
button.
When the steering mode button is
pressed, the selected steering mode
will appear on the instrument cluster.
If the steering mode button is
pressed within 4 seconds, the steer-
ing mode will change as shown
above.
If the steering wheel mode button is
not pressed for about 4 seconds, the
LCD display will change to the previ-
ous screen (for Type B cluster).
Normal mode
The normal mode offers medium
steering effort.
Sport mode
The steering wheel becomes heav-
ier. The sport mode is usually used
when driving on the highway.
OPS046036L
CAUTION
• For your safety, if you press
the steering mode button
while operating the steering
wheel, but the steering effort
will not change immediately.
After operating the steering
wheel, the steering effort will
change automatically to the
selected mode.
• Use caution when changing
the steering mode while driv-
ing.
• When the electronic power
steering is not operating prop-
erly, the flex steering wheel
will not work.
443
Features of your vehicle
MIRRORS
Inside rearview mirror
Adjust the rearview mirror so that the
center view through the rear window
is seen. Make this adjustment before
you start driving.
Do not place objects in the rear seat
or cargo area which would interfere
with your vision through the rear win-
dow.
Day/night rearview mirror
(if equipped)
Make this adjustment before you
start driving and while the day/night
lever is in the day position.
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce the glare from the headlights
of the vehicles behind you during
night driving.
Remember that you lose some
rearview clarity in the night position.
WARNING - Mirror adjust-
ment
Do not adjust the rearview mir-
ror while the vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of con-
trol.
WARNING
Do not modify the inside mirror
and don’t install a wide mirror. It
could result in injury, during an
accident or deployment of the
air bag.
OAM049023
Day
Night
Features of your vehicle
444
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
(if equipped)
The electric rearview mirror automat-
ically controls the glare from the
headlights of the vehicles behind you
in nighttime or low light driving condi-
tions.The sensor mounted in the mir-
ror senses the light level around the
vehicle, and automatically controls
the headlight glare from the vehicles
behind you.
When the engine is running, the
glare is automatically controlled by
the sensor mounted in the rearview
mirror.
Whenever the shift lever is shifted
into reverse (R), the mirror will auto-
matically go to the brightest setting in
order to improve the drivers view
behind the vehicle.
To operate the electric rearview mirror:
• The mirror defaults to the ON posi-
tion whenever the ignition switch is
turned on.
• Press the ON/OFF button (1) to
turn the automatic dimming func-
tion off. The mirror indicator light
will turn off.
Press the ON/OFF button (1) to
turn the automatic dimming func-
tion on. The mirror indicator light
will illuminate.
CAUTION - Cleaning
mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner.
Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror. It may
cause the liquid cleaner to enter
the mirror housing.
OAM042349L
Indicator
Sensor
445
Features of your vehicle
Outside rearview mirror
Be sure to adjust the mirror angles
before driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both
left-hand and right-hand outside
rearview mirrors.The mirrors can be
adjusted remotely with the remote
switch.The mirror heads can be fold-
ed back to prevent damage during an
automatic vehicle wash or when
passing through a narrow street.
The right outside rearview mirror is
convex. Objects seen in the mirror
are closer than they appear.
Use your interior rearview mirror or
direct observation to determine the
actual distance of following vehicles
when changing lanes.
If the mirror is jammed with ice, do
not adjust the mirror by force.Use an
approved spray de-icer (not radiator
antifreeze) to release the frozen
mechanism or move the vehicle to a
warm place and allow the ice to melt.
CAUTION - Rearview
mirror
Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the sur-
face of the glass. If ice should
restrict the movement of the
mirror, do not force the mirror
for adjustment. To remove ice,
use a deicer spray, or a sponge
or soft cloth with very warm
water.
WARNING - Mirror adjust-
ment
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors while the vehi-
cle is moving. This could result
in loss of control.
Features of your vehicle
464
Remote control
Electric type
The electric remote control mirror
switch allows you to adjust the posi-
tion of the left and right outside
rearview mirrors. To adjust the posi-
tion of either mirror the ignition
switch should be in the ACC position.
Move the switch (1) to R or L to
select the right side mirror or the left
side mirror, then press a correspon-
ding point on the mirror adjustment
control to position the selected mirror
up, down, left or right.
After the adjustment, put the switch
into the neutral (center) position to
prevent inadvertent adjustment.
Folding the outside rearview mirror
Manual type
To fold the outside rearview mirror,
grasp the housing of the mirror and
then fold it toward the rear of the
vehicle.
OPS046035L
CAUTION - Outside mirror
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum
adjusting angles, but the
motor continues to operate
while the switch is pressed.
Do not press the switch longer
than necessary, the motor
may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the
outside rearview mirror by
hand. Doing so may damage
the parts.
OPS043037
447
Features of your vehicle
Electric type
The outside rearview mirror can be
folded or unfolded by pressing the
switch as below.
Left (1) :The mirror will unfold.
Right (2) :The mirror will fold.
Center (AUTO, 3) :
The mirror will fold or unfold auto-
matically as follows:
• Without smart key system
- The mirror will fold or unfold when
the door is locked or unlocked by
the transmitter.
• With smart key system
- The mirror will fold or unfold when
the door is locked or unlocked by
the smart key.
- The mirror will fold or unfold when
the door is locked or unlocked by
the button on the outside door
handle.
- The mirror will unfold when you
approach the vehicle (all doors
closed and locked) with a smart
key in possession. (if equipped)
OPS046038L
CAUTION - Electric type
outside rearview mirror
The electric type outside
rearview mirror operates even
though the ignition switch is in
the OFF position. However, to
prevent unnecessary battery
discharge, do not adjust the
mirrors longer than necessary
while the engine is not running.
In case it is an electric type out-
side rearview mirror, don’t fold it
by hand. It could cause motor
failure.
Features of your vehicle
484
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
1.Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. LCD display
6.Warning and indicator lights (if equipped)
7.Turn signal indicator lights
OPS046100N/OPS046101N
■■
Type A
❈ The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
For more details, refer to the “Gauges” in
this chapter.
■■
Type B
449
Features of your vehicle
Instrument Cluster Control
Adjusting Instrument Cluster
Illumination
The brightness of the instrument
panel illumination is changed by
pressing the illumination control button
(“+” or “-”) when the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop button is ON, or the
tale lights are turned on.
• If you hold the illumination control
button (“+” or “-”), the brightness
will be changed continuously.
• If the brightness reaches to the
maximum or minimum level, an
alarm will sound.
LCD Display Control
The LCD display modes can be
changed by using the control buttons
on the steering wheel.
OPS043039
OPS043117
OPS046430L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OPS046489L
Features of your vehicle
504
[For type A cluster]
(1) TRIP :TRIP button for changing
trip modes
(2) RESET : RESET button for
resetting items
[For type B cluster]
(1) : MODE button for changing
modes or SELECT button
for setting the selected item
(2) : MOVE button for changing
items or RESET button for
resetting the selected item
❈ For the LCD modes, refer to “LCD
Display” in this chapter.
Gauges
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the
speed of the vehicle and is calibrated
in miles per hour (mph) and/or kilo-
meters per hour (km/h).
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the
approximate number of engine revo-
lutions per minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the cor-
rect shift points and to prevent lug-
ging and/or over-revving the engine.
OPS043102N
OPS043103N
■ Type A
■ Type B
OPS043104N
OPS043106
■ Type A
■ Type B
451
Features of your vehicle
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
This gauge indicates the tempera-
ture of the engine coolant when the
ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop
button is ON.
If the gauge pointer moves beyond
the normal range area toward the “H”
position, it indicates overheating that
may damage the engine.
Do not continue driving with an over-
heated engine. If your vehicle over-
heats, refer to “If the Engine
Overheats” in chapter 7.
CAUTION - Red zone
Do not operate the engine with-
in the tachometer's RED ZONE.
This may cause severe engine
damage.
OPS043108
OPS043109
■ Type A
■ Type B
WARNING - Hot radiator
Never remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. The
engine coolant is under pres-
sure and could severely burn.
Wait until the engine is cool
before adding coolant to the
reservoir.
Features of your vehicle
524
Fuel Gauge
This gauge indicates the approxi-
mate amount of fuel remaining in the
fuel tank.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The fuel tank capacity is given in
chapter 9.
• The fuel gauge is supplemented by
a low fuel warning light, which
will illuminate when the fuel tank
is nearly empty.
• On inclines or curves, the fuel
gauge pointer may fluctuate or the
low fuel warning light may come
on earlier than usual due to the
movement of fuel in the tank.
✽✽
NOTICE - Fuel gauge
Running out of fuel can expose vehi-
cle occupants to danger. You must
stop and obtain additional fuel as
soon as possible after the warning
light comes on or when the gauge
indicator comes close to the "E
(Empty)" level.
✽✽
NOTICE
Fuel display may not be accurate if
you are filling in sloping places.
OPS043110
OPS043111
■ Type A
■ Type B
CAUTION - Low fuel
Avoid driving with an extremely
low fuel level. Running out of
fuel could cause the engine to
misfire damaging the catalytic
converter.
453
Features of your vehicle
Odometer
The odometer Indicates the total dis-
tance that the vehicle has been driv-
en and should be used to determine
when periodic maintenance should
be performed.
- Odometer range :0 ~ 999999 miles
or kilometers.
Outside Temperature Gauge
This gauge indicates the current out-
side air temperatures by 1°F (1°C).
- Temperature range : -40°F ~ 140°F
(-40°C ~ 60°C)
The outside temperature on the dis-
play may not change immediately
like a general thermometer to pre-
vent the driver from being inattentive.
To change the temperature unit (from
°C to °F or from °F to °C)
• Type A Cluster
Change the trip modes to Distance
To Empty mode and then press and
hold the RESET button for 5 seconds
and more.
• Type B Cluster
The temperature unit can be
changed by using the “User Settings”
mode of the LCD display
❈ For more details, refer to “LCD
Display” in this chapter.
OPS043112
OPS046431N
■ Type A
■ Type B
OPS043114N
OPS046432N
■ Type A
■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
544
Transaxle Shift Indicator
Automatic Transaxle Shift Indicator
This indicator displays which auto-
matic transaxle shift lever is selected.
•Park :P
• Reverse : R
• Neutral : N
•Drive :D
• Sports Mode : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
Manual Transaxle Shift Indicator
(if equipped)
This indicator informs which gear is
desired while driving to save fuel.
• Shifting up :
▲
2,
▲
3,
▲
4,
▲
5,
▲
6
• Shifting down :
▼
1,
▼
2,
▼
3,
▼
4,
▼
5
OPS043115
OPS046433L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OPS046116L
OPS046434L
■ Type A
■ Type B
455
Features of your vehicle
For example
: Indicates that shifting up to the
3rd gear is desired (currently
the shift lever is in the 2nd or 1st
gear).
: Indicates that shifting down to
the 3rd gear is desired (current-
ly the shift lever is in the 4th, 5th,
or 6th gear).
When the system is not working prop-
erly, the indicator is not displayed.
Features of your vehicle
564
LCD DISPLAY (IF EQUIPPED)
❈ For controlling the LCD modes, refer to “LCD Display Control” in this chapter.
LCD Modes (for Type B cluster)
Modes Symbol Explanation
Trip Computer
This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter, fuel economy, and so on.
For more details, refer to “Trip Computer” in this chapter.
Turn By Turn
(if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the navigation.
LDWS
(if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS).
For more details, refer to “Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)” in chapter 6.
User Settings On this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps, and so on.
Master warning This mode informs of warning messages related to TPMS, BSD fail and so on.
457
Features of your vehicle
Service Mode
Service Interval
Service in
It calculates and displays when you
need a scheduled maintenance
service (mileage or days).
If the remaining mileage or time
reaches 900 mi. (1,500 km) or 30
days, “Service in” message is dis-
played for several seconds each time
you set the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop Button to the ON position.
Service required
If you do not have your vehicle serv-
iced according to the already inputted
service interval, “Service required”
message is displayed for several sec-
onds each time you set the ignition
switch or Engine Start/Stop Button to
the ON position (The mileage and
time changes to “---”).
To reset the service interval to the
mileage and days you inputted before:
- Press the RESET button for
more than 1 second.
✽✽
NOTICE
If any of the following conditions
occurs, the mileage and days may be
incorrect.
- The battery cable is disconnected.
- The fuse switch is turned off.
- The battery is discharged.
OPS046495N
ORP046314L
Features of your vehicle
584
Master Warning Mode
(if equipped)
• This warning light informs the driv-
er the following situations
- BSD fail (if equipped)
- TPMS (if equipped)
The Master Warning Light illumi-
nates when more than one of the
above warning situations occur.
If the warning situation is solved, the
master warning light will be turned
off.
User Settings Mode
Description
On this mode, you can change set-
ting of the doors, lamps, and so on.
OPS046438L
WARNING
Do not adjust the User Setting
while driving.You may lose your
steering control and cause
severe personal injury or acci-
dents.
459
Features of your vehicle
Items Explanation
Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(if equipped)
If this item is checked, the rear cross traffic alert function will be activated.
For more details, refer to “Blind Spot Detection System” in chapter 6.
FCW
(Forward Collision Warning)
(if equipped)
Choose the sensitivity of the FCW.
For more details, refer to “Forward Collision Warning System” in chapter 6.
BSD (Blind Spot Detection)
Sound (if equipped)
If this item checked, the blind spot detection sound will be activated.
For more details, refer to “Blind Spot Detection System” in chapter 6.
Driving Assist (if equipped)
Features of your vehicle
604
Items Explanation
Automatically Lock
• Enable on Speed: All doors will be automatically locked when the vehicle speed exceeds
9.3mph (15km/h).
• Enable on Shift: All doors will be automatically locked if the automatic transaxle/dual clutch trans-
mission shift lever is shifted from the P (Park) position to the R (Reverse), N
(Neutral), or D (Drive) position.
Automatically Unlock
• Disable:The auto door unlock operation will be canceled.
• Key Out or Vehicle Off: All doors will be automatically unlocked when the ignition key is removed
from the ignition switch or the Engine Star/Stop button is set to the OFF
position.
• On Shift to P: All doors will be automatically unlocked if the automatic transaxle/dual clutch
transmission shift lever is shifted to the P (Park) position.
Two Press Unlock
• Off:The two press unlock function will be deactivated. Therefore, all doors will unlock if the door
is unlocked.
• On:The driver’s door will unlock if the door is unlocked.When the door is unlocked again within
4 seconds, all doors will unlock.
Horn Feed Back If this item is checked, the horn feed back will be activated.
Door / Liftgate
461
Features of your vehicle
Items Explanation
One Touch Turn Signal
• Off:The one touch turn signal function will be deactivated.
• 3, 5, 7 Flashes :The lane change signals will blink 3, 5, or 7 times when the turn signal lever is
moved slightly.
For more details, refer to “Light” in this chapter.
Head Lamp Delay • If this item is checked, the head lamp delay function will be activated.
Light
Items Explanation
Park Assist System Vol.
(if equipped)
• Adjust the Park Assist System volume. (Level 1~3)
For more details, refer to “Parking Assist System” in this chapter.
Welcome Sound
(if equipped)
• If this item is checked, the welcome sound function will be activated.
Sound
Features of your vehicle
624
Convenience
Items Explanation
Gear position pop-up
(if equipped)
If this item checked the gear position function will be activated.
Items Explanation
Service Interval
On this mode, you can activate the service interval function with mileage (km or mi.) and period
(months).
• Off :The service interval function will be deactivated.
• On :You can set the service interval (mileage and months).
For more details, refer to "Service Mode" in this chapter.
Service interval
463
Features of your vehicle
Items Explanation
Fuel Economy Auto Reset
If this item is checked, the average fuel economy will reset automatically when refueling or after
ignition.
Fuel Economy Unit Choose the fuel economy unit. (US gallon, UK gallon)
Temperature Unit Choose the temperature unit. (°C,°F)
Other features
Language
Items Explanation
Language Choose the language you prefer within the LCD.
Features of your vehicle
644
Service Interval
On this mode, you can activate the
service interval function with mileage
(mi. or km) and period (months).
Turn By Turn Mode (if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the
navigation.
Warning Messages
Shift to “P” position (for smart key
system and automatic transaxle)
• This warning message illuminates
if you try to turn off the engine with-
out the shift lever in P (Park) posi-
tion.
• At this time, the Engine Start/Stop
Button turns to the ACC position (If
you press the Engine Start/Stop
Button once more, it will turn to the
ON position).
Low Key Battery
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the battery of the smart key is
discharged when the Engine
Start/Stop Button changes to the
OFF position.
OPS046436L OPS046440N
465
Features of your vehicle
Press brake pedal to start engine
(for smart key system and auto-
matic transaxle)
• This warning message illuminates
if the Engine Start/Stop Button
changes to the ACC position twice
by pressing the button repeatedly
without depressing the brake
pedal.
• It means that you should depress
the brake pedal to start the engine.
Press clutch pedal to start engine
(for smart key system and manual
transaxle)
• This warning message illuminates
if the Engine Start/Stop Button
changes to the ACC position twice
by pressing the button repeatedly
without depressing the clutch
pedal.
• It means that you should depress
the clutch pedal to start the engine.
Key not in vehicle
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the smart key is not in the vehicle
while the door is opened or closed
with the ignition switch in the ACC
position or engine is running.
• It means that you should always
have the smart key with you.
Key not detected
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the smart key is not detected
when you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button.
Press start button again
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if you can not operate the Engine
Start/Stop Button when there is a
problem with the Engine Start/Stop
Button system.
• It means that you could start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/ Stop Button once more.
• If the warning illuminates each
time you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button, have your vehi-
cle inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Features of your vehicle
664
Press start button with smart key
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if you press the Engine Start/Stop
Button while the warning message
“Key not detected” is illuminating.
• At this time, the immobilizer indica-
tor light blinks.
Check fuse “BRAKE SWITCH”
(for smart key system and auto-
matic transaxle)
• This warning message illuminates
if the brake switch fuse is discon-
nected.
• It means that you should replace
the fuse with a new one. If that is
not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/Stop Button for 10 seconds in
the ACC position.
Shift to “P” or “N” to start engine
(for smart key system and auto-
matic transaxle)
• This warning message illuminates
if you try to start the engine with
the shift lever not in the P (Park) or
N (Neutral) position.
✽✽
NOTICE
You can start the engine with the
shift lever in the N (Neutral) posi-
tion. But, for your safety, we recom-
mend that you start the engine with
the shift lever in the P (Park) posi-
tion.
Door Open
• It means that any door is open.
OPS046476L
467
Features of your vehicle
Liftgate Open
• It means that the liftgate is open.
Sunroof Open (if equipped)
• The warning message illuminates
if you turn off the engine when the
sunroof is open.
Turn on "FUSE SWITCH"
(if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates
if the fuse switch on the fuse box is
OFF.
• The “FUSE” and “on” warning mes-
sages are displayed alternately.
(for Type A cluster)
• It means that you should turn the
fuse switch on.
❈For more details, refer to “Fuses”in
chapter 8.
OPS046473LOPS046472L
Features of your vehicle
684
Overview
Description
The trip computer is a microcomput-
er-controlled driver information sys-
tem that displays information related
to driving.
✽✽
NOTICE
Some driving information stored in
the trip computer (for example
Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the
battery is disconnected.
Trip Modes (for Type A cluster)
Trip Modes (for Type B cluster)
TRIP COMPUTER
Tripmeter A
Tripmeter B
Range
Average Fuel Economy*
Average Vehicle Speed*
Elapsed Time*
* if equipped
To change the trip mode, press the
TRIP button.
To change the trip mode, press the
MOVE button .
• Tripmeter
• Fuel Economy
• Timer
Accumulate Info
• Tripmeter
• Fuel Economy
• Timer
Digital speedometer
Drive Info
• Average Fuel Economy
• Instant Fuel Economy
TRIP
469
Features of your vehicle
Trip A/B (for Type A cluster)
Tripmeter (1)
• The tripmeter is the total driving dis-
tance since the last tripmeter reset.
- Distance range: 0.0 ~ 9999.9 mi.
or km
• To reset the tripmeter, press the
RESET/ button on the steering
wheel for more than 1 second
when the tripmeter is displayed.
Average Vehicle Speed (2)
• The average vehicle speed is cal-
culated by the total driving dis-
tance and driving time since the
last average vehicle speed reset.
- Speed range: 160 MPH or 200
km/h
• To reset the average vehicle speed,
press the RESET/ button on the
steering wheel for more than 1 sec-
ond when the average vehicle
speed is displayed.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The average vehicle speed is not
displayed if the driving distance is
less than 0.03 miles (50 meters) or
the driving time is less than 10 sec-
onds since the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop button is turned
to ON.
• Even if the vehicle is not in
motion, the average vehicle speed
keeps going while the engine is
running.
Elapsed Time (3)
• The elapsed time is the total driv-
ing time since the last elapsed time
reset.
- Time range (hh:mm):00:00 ~ 99:59
• To reset the elapsed time, press
the RESET/ button on the steer-
ing wheel for more than 1 second
when the elapsed time is dis-
played.
✽✽
NOTICE
Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
the elapsed time keeps going while
the engine is running.
OPS043125
Features of your vehicle
704
Fuel Economy
Range (1)
• The range to empty is the estimat-
ed distance the vehicle can be
driven with the remaining fuel.
- Distance range :1 ~ 999 km or 1~
999 mi.
• If the estimated distance is below
1mi. (1km), the trip computer will
display “---” as distance to empty.
• If the vehicle is not on level ground
or the battery power has been
interrupted, the distance to empty
function may not operate correctly.
• The distance to empty may differ
from the actual driving distance as
it is an estimate of the available
driving distance.
• The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 6 liters
(1.6 gallons) of fuel are added to
the vehicle.
• The fuel economy and distance to
empty may vary significantly based
on driving conditions, driving
habits, and condition of the vehicle.
Average Fuel Economy (2)
• The average fuel economy is calcu-
lated by the total driving distance
and fuel consumption since the last
average fuel economy reset.
- Fuel economy range: 0.0 ~ 99.9
MPG or L/100km
• The average fuel economy can be
reset both manually and automati-
cally.
Manual reset
To clear the average fuel economy
manually, press the RESET/ but-
ton on the steering wheel for more
than 1 second when the average fuel
economy is displayed.
■ Type A
OPS043123
OPS046481N
■ Type B
471
Features of your vehicle
Automatic reset
- Off :The average fuel economy will
not reset automatically whenever
refueling.
- After Ignition (Auto Reset) : The
average fuel economy will reset
automatically when after 4 hours
ignition Off.
- After Refueling (Auto Reset) : The
average fuel economy will reset
automatically when refueling more
than 1.6 gallons (6 liters).
✽✽
NOTICE
The average fuel economy is not dis-
played for more accurate calculation
if the vehicle does not drive more
than 10 seconds or 0.03 miles (50
meters) since the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop button is turned
to ON.
Instant Fuel Economy (3)
• This mode displays the instant fuel
economy during the last few sec-
onds when the vehicle speed is
more than 6.2 MPH (10 km/h).
- Fuel economy range: 0 ~ 99.9
MPG or L/100km
Accumulated Info display
(for Type B cluster)
This display shows the accumulated
trip distance (1), the average fuel
economy (2), and the total driving
time (3).
The information is calculated starting
from the last reset.
To manually reset the information,
press and hold the button when
viewing the Accumulated driving info.
The trip distance, the average fuel
economy, and total driving time will
reset simultaneously.
OPS046496N
Features of your vehicle
724
The accumulated driving information
will continue to be counted while the
engine is still running (for example,
when the vehicle is in traffic or
stopped at a stop light.
✽✽
NOTICE
The vehicle must be driven for a min
imum of 0.19 miles (300 meters)
since the last ignition key cycle
before the average fuel economy will
be recalcu lated.
Drive Info display
(for Type B cluster)
This display shows the trip distance
(1), the average fuel economy (2),
and the total driving time (3).
The information is calculated for
each ignition cycle.The driving infor-
mation data gets initialized, when it
has passed 4 hours after turning
OFF the engine. In other words, the
last driving information is available 4
hours after you have turned on the
engine.
To manually reset the information,
press and hold the button when
viewing the Driving info. The trip dis-
tance, the average fuel economy,
and total driving time will reset simul-
taneously.
The driving information will continue
to be counted while the engine is still
running (for example, when the vehi-
cle is in traffic or stopped at a stop
light.)
✽✽
NOTICE
The vehicle must be driven for a
minimum of 0.19 miles (300 meters)
since the last ignition key cycle
before the average fuel economy will
be recalculated.
OPS046497N
473
Features of your vehicle
Digital speedometer
This mode displays the current
speed of the vehicle.
OPS046445N
Features of your vehicle
744
Warning lights
✽✽
NOTICE - Warning lights
Make sure that all warning lights
are OFF after starting the engine. If
any light is still ON, this indicates a
situation that needs attention.
Air bag Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 6
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the SRS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Seat Belt Warning Light
This warning light informs the driver
that the seat belt is not fastened.
❈For more details, refer to the “Seat
Belts” in chapter 3.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
475
Features of your vehicle
Parking Brake & Brake
Fluid Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds
- It remains on if the parking brake
is applied.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
- If the warning light illuminates
with the parking brake released, it
indicates the brake fluid level in
reservoir is low.
If the brake fluid level in the reservoir
is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and add
fluid as required (For more details,
refer to “Brake Fluid” in chapter 8).
Then check all brake components
for fluid leaks. If any leaks in the
brake system is still found, the
warning light remains on, or the
brakes do not operate properly, do
not drive the vehicle.
In this case, have your vehicle
towed to an authorized Kia dealer
and inspected.
Dual-diagonal braking system
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-
diagonal braking systems. This
means you still have braking on two
wheels even if one of the dual sys-
tems should fail.
With only one of the dual systems
working, more than normal pedal
travel and greater pedal pressure are
required to stop the vehicle.
Also, the vehicle will not stop in as
short a distance with only a portion
of the brake system working.
If the brakes fail while you are driv-
ing, shift to a lower gear for addition-
al engine braking and stop the vehi-
cle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Driving the vehicle with a warning
light ON is dangerous. If the Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Light
illuminates with the parking brake
released, it indicates that the brake
fluid level is low.
In this case, have your vehicle inspect-
ed by an authorized Kia dealer.
Features of your vehicle
764
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ABS (The normal braking sys-
tem will still be operational without
the assistance of the anti-lock
brake system).
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Electronic
Brake force
Distribution
(EBD) System
Warning Light
These two warning lights illuminate at
the same time while driving:
• When the ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
WARNING - Electronic
Brake force Distribution
(EBD) System Warning Light
When both ABS and Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid Warning
Lights are on, the brake system
will not work normally and you
may experience an unexpected
and dangerous situation during
sudden braking thereby increas-
ing the risk of a crash or injury.
In this case, avoid high speed
driving and abrupt braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer as
soon as possible.
477
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE - Electronic Brake
force Distribution (EBD)
System Warning Light
When the ABS Warning Light is on
or both ABS and Parking Brake &
Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on,
the speedometer, odometer, or trip-
meter may not work. Also, the EPS
Warning Light may illuminate and
the steering effort may increase or
decrease.
In this case, have your vehicle inspect-
ed by an authorized Kia dealer as
soon as possible.
Electronic Power
Steering (EPS) Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
the EPS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
the emission control system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
CAUTION -
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp (MIL)
Driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may
cause damage to the emission
control systems which could
effect drivability and/or fuel
economy.
Features of your vehicle
784
Charging System
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
either the alternator or electrical
charging system.
If there is a malfunction with either
the alternator or electrical charging
system:
1.Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2.Turn the engine off and check the
alternator drive belt for looseness
or breakage.
If the belt is adjusted properly,
there may be a problem in the elec-
trical charging system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
CAUTION - Catalytic
Converter Damage
If the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) illuminates, poten-
tial catalytic converter damage
is possible which could result in
loss of engine power.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
479
Features of your vehicle
Engine Oil Pressure
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When the engine oil pressure is low.
If the engine oil pressure is low:
1.Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2.Turn the engine off and check the
engine oil level (For more details,
refer to “Engine Oil” in chapter 8).If
the level is low, add oil as required.
If the warning light remains on after
adding oil or if oil is not available,
have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer as soon as
possible.
• If the warning light stays on while
the engine is running, it indicates
that there may be serious engine
damage or malfunction.In this case,
1. Stop the vehicle as soon as it is
safe to do so.
2. Turn off the engine and check the
oil level. If the oil level is low, fill
the engine oil to the proper level.
3. Start the engine again. If the
warning light stays on after the
engine is started, turn the
engine off immediately. In this
case, have your vehicle inspect-
ed by an authorized Kia dealer.
Low Fuel Level Warning
Light
This warning light illuminates:
When the fuel tank is nearly empty.
If the fuel tank is nearly empty:
Add fuel as soon as possible.
CAUTION - Low Fuel
Level
Driving with the Low Fuel Level
warning light on or with the fuel
level below “0 or E” can cause
the engine to misfire and dam-
age the catalytic converter (if
equipped).
CAUTION - Engine dam-
age
If the engine does not stop
immediately after the engine oil
pressure warning light is illumi-
nated and stays on while the
engine is running, serious
engine damage may result.
Features of your vehicle
804
Low Tire Pressure
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When one or more of your tires are
significantly underinflated.
❈For more details, refer to “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in chapter 7.
This warning light remains on after
blinking for approximately 60 seconds
or repeats blinking and off at the
intervals of approximately 3 seconds:
• When there is a malfunction with
the TPMS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
❈For more details, refer to “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in chapter 7.
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire damage
caused by external factors.
• If you notice any vehicle instability,
immediately take your foot off the
accelerator pedal, apply the brakes
gradually with light force, and slow-
ly move to a safe position off the
road.
WARNING
- Low tire pressure
• Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable
and can contribute to loss of
vehicle control and increased
braking distances.
• Continued driving or low pres-
sure tires will cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
481
Features of your vehicle
Door Ajar Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
When a door is not closed securely.
Liftgate Open Warning
Light
This warning light illuminates:
When the liftgate is not closed
securely.
Sunroof Open Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
When the sunroof is not closed
securely.
Fuel cap open warning
indicator (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• When the fuel filler cap is not tight-
en securely.
Always make sure that the fuel
filler cap is tight.
Forward collision
warning (FCW) system
OFF/warning indicator
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• When you deactivate this system
in the User settings mode in LCD
display.
• If this indicator illuminates with
warning message in LCD display,
there is a malfunction with the
Forward collision warning system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Features of your vehicle
824
Master Warning light
(if equipped)
• This warning light informs the driv-
er the following situations
- BSD fail (if equipped)
- TPMS (if equipped)
The Master Warning Light illumi-
nates when more than one of the
above warning situations occur.
If the warning situation is solved, the
master warning light will be turned off.
Icy Road Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light blinks 10 times and
then illuminates, and also warning
chime sounds 3 times:
• When the temperature on the
Outside Temperature Gauge is
below approximately 39.2
O
F (4
O
C)
with the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop button in the ON posi-
tion.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the icy road warning light appears
while driving, you should drive
more attentively and safely refrain-
ing from over-speeding, rapid accel-
eration, sudden braking or sharp
turning, etc.
Indicator Lights
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ESC system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
While the ESC is operating.
❈For more details, refer to
“Electronic Stability Control (ESC)”
in chapter 6.
483
Features of your vehicle
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) OFF
Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When you deactivate the ESC sys-
tem by pressing the ESC OFF but-
ton.
❈For more details, refer to
“Electronic Stability Control (ESC)”
in chapter 5.
ECOMINDER
®
indicator
Active ECO system
This indicator light illuminates:
When the Active ECO button is
pressed the ECOMINDER
®
indicator
(green) will illuminate to show that
the Active ECO is operating.
For more detailed information, refer
to "Active ECO" in chapter 6.
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (Without Smart Key)
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the vehicle detects the
immobilizer in your key properly
while the ignition switch is ON.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks:
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
ECO
Features of your vehicle
844
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (With Smart Key)
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates for up
to 30 seconds:
• When the vehicle detects the
smart key in the vehicle properly
while the Engine Start/Stop Button
is ACC or ON.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks for a few
seconds:
• When the smart key is not in the
vehicle.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine.
This indicator light illuminates for 2
seconds and goes off:
• When the vehicle can not detect
the smart key which is in the vehi-
cle while the Engine Start/Stop
Button is ON.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
• When the battery of the smart key
is weak.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine.However, you can start the
engine if you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button with the smart
key. (For more details, refer to
“Starting the Engine”in chapter 6).
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Turn Signal Indicator
Light
This indicator light blinks:
• When you turn the turn signal light
on.
If any of the following occurs, there
may be a malfunction with the turn
signal system.In this case, have your
vehicle inspected by an authorized
Kia dealer.
- The indicator light does not blink
but illuminates.
- The indicator light blinks more
rapidly.
- The indicator light does not illumi-
nate at all.
485
Features of your vehicle
High Beam Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the headlights are on and in
the high beam position
• When the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
Light ON Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the tail lights or headlights
are on.
Front Fog Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the front fog lights are on.
KEY OUT Indicator Light
(if equipped)
When the ENGINE START/STOP
button is in the ACC or ON position,
if any door is open, the system
checks for the smart key.
This indicator light blinks:
When the smart key is not in the
vehicle and any door is open with the
ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop
button in the ACC or ON position.
- At this time, if you close all doors,
the chime will also sound for
approximately 5 seconds.
- The indicator will go off while the
vehicle is moving.
Cruise Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control system is
enabled.
❈For more details, refer to “Cruise
Control System” in chapter 6.
CRUISE
KEY
OUT
Features of your vehicle
864
Cruise SET Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control speed is set.
❈For more details, refer to “Cruise
Control System” in chapter 6.
FLEX STEER indicator
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When you press the FLEX STEER
mode button.
❈For more details, refer to “FLEX
STEER” in chapter 4.
Lane Departure Warning
System (LDWS) Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• [White] When the lane departure
warning system does not detect
the lane line.
• [Green] When you activate the lane
departure warning system by
pressing the LDWS button.
• [Yellow] When there is a malfunc-
tion with the lane departure warn-
ing system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia deal-
er.
❈ For more details, refer to “Lane
Departure Warning System
(LDWS)” in chapter 6.
63257
1250$/
SET
487
Features of your vehicle
The rear camera display will activate
when the back-up light is ON with the
ignition switch ON and the shift lever
in the R (Reverse) position.
This system is a supplemental sys-
tem that helps the driver by display-
ing objects behind the vehicle when
backing up.
Always keep the camera lens clean.If
lens is covered with foreign matter,
the camera may not operate normally.
The rear camera display is not a
safety device. It only serves to assist
the driver in identifying objects
directly behind the middle of the
vehicle.The camera does NOT cover
the complete area behind the vehi-
cle. While the camera's display is
generally accurate, objects can be
much closer than they appear in the
display screen and can be distorted
in both size and proportion.
REAR CAMERA DISPLAY (IF EQUIPPED)
OPS043050
OPS046051L
WARNING - Backing up
using camera
Never rely solely on the rear
camera display when backing.
You must always use methods
of viewing the area behind you
including looking over both
shoulders as well as continu-
ously checking all three rear
view mirrors. Due to the difficul-
ty of ensuring that the area
behind you remains clear,
always back slowly and stop
immediately if you even suspect
that a person, and especially a
child, might be behind you.
Features of your vehicle
884
Headlamp escort (if equipped)
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ACC or OFF position with the head-
lights ON, the headlights remain on
for about 5 minutes. However, if the
driver’s door is opened and closed,
the headlights are turned off after 15
seconds.
The headlights can be turned off by
pressing the lock button on the trans-
mitter (or smart key) twice or turning
the light switch to the OFF or Auto
position.However, if you turn the light
switch to the Auto position when it is
dark outside, the headlights will not
be turned off immediately.
Battery saver function
• The purpose of this feature is to
prevent the battery from being dis-
charged.The system automatically
turns off the parking lights when
the driver removes the ignition key
and opens the driver-side door (in
that order).
• With this feature, the parking lights
will turn off automatically if the driv-
er parks on the side of the road at
night.
If necessary, to keep the lights on
when the ignition key is removed,
perform the following:
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and
ON again using the light switch
on the steering column.
Daytime running light
(if equipped)
The Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
can make it easier for others to see
the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many dif-
ferent driving conditions, and it is
especially helpful after dawn and
before sunset.
The DRL system turns OFF when:
1.The headlight switch is ON.
2.The engine is OFF.
3.The front fog light is ON.
4. Engaging the Parking Brake
LIGHTING
489
Features of your vehicle
Lighting control
The light switch has a Headlight and
a Parking light position.
To operate the lights, turn the knob at
the end of the control lever to one of
the following positions:
(1) OFF position
(2) Parking light position
(3) Headlight position
(4) Auto light position (if equipped)
Parking light position ( )
When the light switch is in the park-
ing light position (1st position), the
tail, license and instrument panel
lights will turn ON.
Headlight position ( )
When the light switch is in the head-
light position (2nd position), the
head, tail, license and instrument
panel lights will turn ON.
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to turn on the headlights.
OAM049041 OAM049042OXM049110
Features of your vehicle
904
Auto light position (if equipped)
When the light switch is in the AUTO
light position, the taillights and head-
lights will be turned ON or OFF auto-
matically depending on the amount
of light outside the vehicle.
• Never place anything over sensor
(1) located on the instrument
panel. This will ensure better auto-
light system control.
• Don’t clean the sensor using a win-
dow cleaner. The cleaner may
leave a light film which could inter-
fere with sensor operation.
• If your vehicle has window tint or
other types of metallic coating on
the front windshield, the Auto light
system may not work properly.
High beam operation
To turn on the high beam headlights,
push the lever away from you. The
lever will return to its original posi-
tion.
The high beam indicator will light
when the headlight high beams are
switched on.
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the lights
on for a prolonged time while the
engine is not running.
OPS046443L OAM049044
491
Features of your vehicle
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
towards you. It will return to the nor-
mal (low beam) position when
released. The headlight switch does
not need to be on to use this flashing
feature.
Turn signals and lane change
signals
The ignition switch must be on for the
turn signals to function. To turn on
the turn signals, move the lever up or
down (A).The green arrow indicators
on the instrument panel indicate
which turn signal is operating. They
will self-cancel after a turn is com-
pleted. If the indicator continues to
flash after a turn, manually return the
lever to the OFF position.
To signal a lane change, move the
turn signal lever slightly and hold it in
position (B). The lever will return to
the OFF position when released.
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one
of the turn signal bulbs may be
burned out and will require replace-
ment.
If an indicator flash is abnormally
quick or slow, a bulb may be burned
out or have a poor electrical connec-
tion in the circuit.
OAM049045
OAM049043
WARNING - High beams
Do not use high beam when
there are other vehicles. Using
high beam could obstruct the
other driver's vision.
Features of your vehicle
924
One-touch lane change function
To activate an one-touch lane
change function, move the turn sig-
nal lever slightly and then release it.
The lane change signals will blink 3,
5 or 7 times.
You can choose one-touch lane
change blinking function in “One
touch turn lamp” of “User setting”.
Refer to “User setting” in chapter 4.
✽✽
NOTICE
If an indicator flash is abnormally
quick or slow, the bulb may be
burned out or have a poor electrical
connection in the circuit.
Front fog light (if equipped)
Fog lights are used to provide
improved visibility when visibility is
poor due to fog, rain or snow, etc.
The fog lights will turn on when the
fog light switch (1) is turned to the on
position after the headlight is turned
on.
To turn off the fog lights, turn the fog
light switch (1) to the OFF position.
When in operation, the fog lights
consume large amounts of vehicle
electrical power. Only use the fog
lights when visibility is poor.
OAM049046N
493
Features of your vehicle
A :Wiper speed control
· MIST – Single wipe
· OFF – Off
· INT – Intermittent wipe
· LO – Low wiper speed
· HI – High wiper speed
B : Intermittent wipe time adjust-
ment
C :Wash with brief wipes (front)
D : Rear wiper/washer control
· ON – Continuous wipe
· INT – Intermittent wipe
(if equipped)
· OFF – Off
E :Wash with brief wipes (rear)
Windshield wipers
Operates as follows when the igni-
tion switch is turned ON.
MIST : For a single wiping cycle,
push the lever upward and
release it with the lever in the
OFF position. The wipers will
operate continuously if the
lever is pushed upward and
held.
OFF : Wiper is not in operation
INT :Wiper operates intermittently at
the same wiping intervals. Use
this mode in light rain or mist.
To vary the speed setting, turn
the speed control knob (1).
WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield wiper/washer Rear window wiper/washer
(if equipped)
OAM049100N/OAM049048N
OAM049101N
Features of your vehicle
944
LO : Normal wiper speed
HI : Fast wiper speed
✽✽
NOTICE
If there is heavy accumulation of
snow or ice on the windshield, defrost
the windshield for about 10 minutes,
or until the snow and/or ice is
removed before using the windshield
wipers to ensure proper operation.
Windshield washers
In the OFF position, pull the lever
gently toward you to spray washer
fluid on the windshield and to run the
wipers 1-3 cycles.
Use this function when the wind-
shield is dirty.
The spray and wiper operation will
continue until you release the lever.
If the washer does not work, check
the washer fluid level.If the fluid level
is not sufficient, you will need to add
appropriate non-abrasive windshield
washer fluid to the washer reservoir.
The reservoir filler neck is located in
the front of the engine compartment
on the passenger side.
OAM049102N
CAUTION - Washer pump
To prevent possible damage to
the washer pump, do not oper-
ate the washer when the fluid
reservoir is empty.
WARNING - Obscured vis-
ibility
Do not use the washer in freez-
ing temperatures without first
warming the windshield with
the defrosters; the washer solu-
tion could freeze on the wind-
shield and obscure your vision.
495
Features of your vehicle
Rear window wiper and washer
switch (if equipped)
The rear window wiper switch is
located at the end of the wiper and
washer switch lever. Turn the switch
to the desired position to operate the
rear wiper and washer.
ON - Normal wiper operation
INT - Intermittent wiper operation
(if equipped)
OFF - Wiper is not in operation
Push the lever away from you to
spray rear washer fluid and to run the
rear wipers 1~3 cycles. The spray
and wiper operation will continue
until you release the lever.
OAM049103N
CAUTION - Wipers& wind-
shields
• To prevent possible damage
to the wipers or windshield,
do not operate the wipers
when the windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the
wiper blades,do not use gaso-
line, kerosene, paint thinner,
or other solvents on or near
them.
• To prevent damage to the
wiper arms and other compo-
nents, do not attempt to move
the wipers manually.
OXM049125
Features of your vehicle
964
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the engine is
not running.
It may cause battery discharge.
Interior lamp AUTO cut
• When all entrances are closed, if
you lock the vehicle by using the
transmitter or the smart key, all
interior lamp will be off after a few
seconds.
• If you do not operate anything in
the vehicle after turning off the
engine, the lights will turn off after
20 minutes.
Map lamp
Press the lens (1) or button (1) to
turn the map lamp on or off
INTERIOR LIGHT
WARNING - Interior light
Do not use the interior lights
when driving in the dark. The
glare from the interior lights
may obstruct your view and
cause an accident.
OPS043052
OPSE046053L
■ Type B
■ Type A
497
Features of your vehicle
• ROOM (2) :
- The map lamp and room lamp
stays on at all times.
- To turn off the ROOM mode,
press the ROOM button (2) once
again (not pressed.)
• DOOR (3) :
- The map lamp and room lamp
comes on when a door is opened.
The lamps go out after approxi-
mately 30 seconds.
- The map lamp and room lamp
comes on for approximately 30
seconds when doors are unlocked
with a transmitter or smart key as
long as the doors are not opened.
- The map lamp and room lamp will
stay on for approximately 20 min-
utes if a door is opened with the
ignition switch in the ACC or
LOCK/OFF position.
- The map lamp and room lamp will
stay on continuously if the door is
opened with the ignition switch in
the ON position.
- The map lamp and room lamp will
go out immediately if the ignition
switch is changed to the ON posi-
tion or all doors are locked.
- To turn off the DOOR mode,
press the DOOR button (3) once
again (not pressed).
✽✽
NOTICE
• When the lamp is turned on by
pressing the lens (1), the lamp does
not turn off even if the DOOR
mode or ROOM mode is not
selected (not pressed).
• If the ROOM button and DOOR
button are pressed at the same
time, the map lamp and room
lamp will stay on at all times
(ROOM mode will be selected).
Room lamp
Press the button to turn the light on
or off.
If the front map lamp turns on by the
front map lamp switch, the room
lamp will turn on.
OPS043054
OPS043072
■ Type B
■ Type A
Features of your vehicle
984
Luggage room lamp
The luggage room lamp comes on
when the liftgate is opened.
The lamp comes on as long as the
liftgate is open. To prevent unneces-
sary charging system drain, close
the liftgate securely after using the
luggage room.
Portable lamp usage
(if equipped)
1. In-vehicle lamp, if necessary, after
separation can be used as a
portable.
2. Press push button (1).
3. Pull out the lamp holder.
4. Press the power switch (2).
❈ If the portable lamp does not turn
on, it means the portable lamp
needs to be charged. Insert the
lamp holder and then charge it
again. The charge mode will be
activated if the ignition switch (or
engine start/stop button) is on
position or engine is running.
OPS043055
OPS043056
■ Type B
■ Type A
OPS043197
499
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
1.Remove the batteries when not in
use for a long time.
2.Use the specified battery.
3.Do not place the lamp with water
or moist places and liquid com-
pounds. These can cause internal
leakage of a battery.
4.When replacing the batteries,
check the direction and insert.
It will not be charged if installed
reversely.
5.Do not mix the rechargeable bat-
teries.
It may not be charged normally.
If the portable lamp does not turn on
anymore after charged, replace the
rechargeable batteries.
Battery replacement
When replacement is necessary, use
the following procedure.
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and
gently try open the battery cover.
2. Replace the batteries with new
rechargeable batteries (AAA size).
When replacing the batteries,
make sure the position of batteries.
3. Close the cover carefully.
CAUTION - Portable lamp
damage
You can use the regular batter-
ies (Disposable batteries) but
do not use the Non-recharge-
able battery in charge mode. It
may damage the vehicle.
OTAM041101
Features of your vehicle
1004
Glove box lamp (if equipped)
The glove box lamp comes on when
the glove box is opened.
To prevent unnecessary charging
system drain, close the glove box
securely after using the glove box.
Vanity mirror lamp
(if equipped)
Pull the sunvisor downward and you
can turn the vanity mirror lamp ON or
OFF by pushing the button.
• :To turn the lamp ON.
• O :To turn the lamp OFF.
To prevent unnecessary charging
system drain, turn off the lamp by
pushing the O button after using the
lamp.
OPS043057
OAM042336
4101
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
If you want to defrost and defog the
front windshield, refer to
“Windshield defrosting and defog-
ging” in this section.
Rear window defroster
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from
the rear window, while the engine is
running.
To activate the rear window
defroster, press the rear window
defroster button located in the center
facia switch panel.
The indicator on the rear window
defroster button illuminates when the
defroster is ON.
If there is heavy accumulation of
snow on the rear window, brush it off
before operating the rear defroster.
The rear window defroster automati-
cally turns off after approximately 20
minutes or when the ignition switch is
turned off. To turn off the defroster,
press the rear window defroster but-
ton again.
DEFROSTER
CAUTION - Conductors
To prevent damage to the con-
ductors bonded to the inside
surface of the rear window,
never use sharp instruments or
window cleaners containing
abrasives to clean the window.
OPS043150
OPS043153
OPS043152
■ Type A
■ Type C
■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
1024
Outside rearview mirror defroster
(if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the
outside rearview mirror defrosters,
they will operate at the same time you
turn on the rear window defroster.
Front wiper deicer (if equipped)
The front wiper deicer will operate at
the same time you turn on the front
windshield defroster.
• To turn off the wiper deicer, press
the front windshield defroster but-
ton again.
• The front wiper deicer automatical-
ly turns off after approximately 20
minutes or when the ignition switch
is turned off.
4103
Features of your vehicle
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
OPS043154
1. Fan speed control knob
2. Air intake control button
3. Mode selection knob
4. Rear window defroster button
5.Temperature control knob
6. Air conditioning button
(if equipped)
Features of your vehicle
1044
Heating and air conditioning
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired posi-
tion.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
OPS043058
4105
Features of your vehicle
Mode selection
The mode selection knob controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
Air can be directed to the floor, dash-
board outlets, or windshield. Five
symbols are used to represent.
Vent mode (B, D)
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Vent-Floor mode (B, D, C, E)
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.
Floor mode (C, E, A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.
Floor/Defrost mode
(A, C, E, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
Defrost mode (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window
defrosters.
OPS043155
Features of your vehicle
1064
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or
closed separately using the thumb-
wheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivery from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature control knob allows
you to control the temperature of the
air flow from the ventilation system.
To change the air temperature in the
passenger compartment, turn the
knob to the right position for warm air
or left position for cooler air.
To operate the MAX A/C, turn the
temperature knob to extreme left. Air
flow is directed toward the upper
body and face.
In this mode, the air conditioning and
the recirculated air position will be
selected automatically.
OPS043059
OPS043156
OPS043159
4107
Features of your vehicle
Air intake control
The air intake control is used to
select the outside (fresh) air position
or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control posi-
tion, press the control button.
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger com-
partment will be drawn
through the heating sys-
tem and heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
✽✽
NOTICE
• According to the outside tempera-
ture if the recirculation air posi-
tion is on for a long time, the air
intake position will automatically
change to the outside (fresh) air
position to ventilate the inside air.
• To cancel the automatic outside
(fresh) air position, do the follow-
ing.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the
ON position.
2. Set the mode to the posi-
tion.
3. Press the air intake control but-
ton more than 3 seconds.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
Prolonged operation of the heater in
the recirculated air position (without
air conditioning selected) may cause
fogging of the windshield and side
windows and the air within the pas-
senger compartment may become
stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated air
position selected will result in exces-
sively dry air in the passenger com-
partment.
OPS043160
Features of your vehicle
1084
Sunroof inside air recirculation
(if equipped)
If the sunroof opens while the heater
or Air Conditioning system operates,
the outside (fresh) air will be selected
automatically for ventilating the car.
Then, if you select the recirculated air
position, the outside (fresh) air will be
selected automatically after 3 minutes.
If you close the sunroof, the intake
mode will be changed to the previous
selected mode.
Fan speed control
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for fan operation.
The fan speed knob allows you to
control the fan speed of the air flow
from the ventilation system. To
change the fan speed, turn the knob
to the right for higher speed, or left
for lower speed.
OPS043157
WARNING - Recirculated
air
Continuous use of the climate
control system in the recirculat-
ed air position can cause
drowsiness or sleepiness, and
loss of vehicle control. Set the
air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
WARNING - Reduced visi-
bilty
Continued use of the climate
control system in the recirculat-
ed air position may allow
humidity to increase inside the
vehicle which may fog the glass
and obscure visibility.
WARNING - Sleeping with
AC on
Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on as this may cause
serious harm or death due to a
drop in the oxygen level and/or
body temperature.
4109
Features of your vehicle
To turn off the blowers
To turn off the blowers, turn the fan
speed control knob to the “0” posi-
tion.
Air conditioning (if equipped)
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate). Press the button
again to turn the air conditioning sys-
tem off.
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the
or position.
OPS043161OPS043158
Features of your vehicle
1104
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the vehicle through
the ventilation system, temporarily
set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. Be sure to
return the control to the fresh air
position when the irritation has
passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle.This will help keep the driv-
er alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system
is drawn in through the grilles just
ahead of the windshield. Care
should be taken that these are not
blocked by leaves, snow, ice or
other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-
shield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air position and fan speed
to the desired position, turn on the
air conditioning system, and adjust
the temperature control to desired
temperature.
Air conditioning (if equipped)
All Kia Air Conditioning Systems are
filled with R-134a refrigerant.
1. Start the engine.Press the air con-
ditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the
outside air or recirculated air posi-
tion.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
• When maximum cooling is desired,
set the temperature control to the
extreme left position, set the mode
control to the MAX A/C position,
then set the fan speed control to
the highest speed.
CAUTION - Excessive A/C
• When using the air condition-
ing system, monitor the tem-
perature gauge closely while
driving up hills or in heavy
traffic when outside tempera-
tures are high. Air condition-
ing system operation may
cause engine overheating.
Continue to use the blower fan
but turn the air conditioning
system off if the temperature
gauge indicates engine over-
heating.
• When opening the windows in
humid weather air condition-
ing may create water droplets
inside the vehicle. Since
excessive water droplets may
cause damage to electrical
equipment, air conditioning
should only be used with the
windows closed.
4111
Features of your vehicle
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of
the windows on rainy or humid
days, decrease the humidity inside
the vehicle by operating the air
conditioning system.
• During air conditioning system
operation, you may occasionally
notice a slight change in engine
speed as the air conditioning com-
pressor cycles. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month only for a few minutes
to ensure maximum system per-
formance.
• When using the air conditioning
system, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side
of the vehicle.This is a normal sys-
tem operation characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning sys-
tem in the recirculated air position
provides maximum cooling, how-
ever, continual operation in this
mode may cause the air inside the
vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and
humid air intake. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
Climate control air filter
(if equipped)
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust
or other pollutants that come into the
vehicle from the outside through the
heating and air conditioning system.
If dust or other pollutants accumulate
in the filter over a period of time, the
air flow from the air vents may
decrease, resulting in moisture accu-
mulation on the inside of the wind-
shield even when the outside (fresh)
air position is selected. If this hap-
pens, have the climate control air fil-
ter replaced by an authorized Kia
dealer.
1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
Features of your vehicle
1124
✽✽
NOTICE
• Replace the filter every 15,000
miles or once a year.
If the vehicle is being driven in
severe conditions such as dusty or
rough roads, more frequent air
conditioner filter inspections and
changes are required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, the system should be
checked at an authorized Kia
dealer.
Air Conditioning refrigerant
label
❈ The actual Air Conditioning refrigerant
label in the vehicle may differ from the
illustration.
Each symbols and specification on
air conditioning refrigerant label
means as below ;
1. Classification of refrigerant
2. Amount of refrigerant
3. Classification of Compressor lubri-
cant
Refer to chapter 8 for more detail
location of air conditioning refrigerant
label.
OXM063009
■ Example
CAUTION - Proper Oil &
Refrigerant
It is important that the correct
type and amount of oil and
refrigerant is used, otherwise
damage to the vehicle and injury
may occur. To prevent damage,
the air conditioning system in
your vehicle should only be
serviced by trained and certified
technicians.
4113
Features of your vehicle
Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air con-
ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a negative impact on the air con-
ditioning system.Therefore, if abnor-
mal operation is found, have the sys-
tem inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
It is important that the correct type
and amount of oil and refrigerant is
used. Otherwise, damage to the
compressor and abnormal system
operation may occur.
WARNING
The oil and refrigerant in your
vehicle’s air conditioning sys-
tem is under very high pressure.
If proper service procedures are
not followed an explosion may
result. To reduce the risk of seri-
ous injury or death, the air con-
ditioning system in your vehicle
should only be serviced by
trained and certified technicians.
Features of your vehicle
1144
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OPS043162/OPS043163
1.Temperature control button / knob
2. Front windshield defroster button
3. Rear windshield defroster button
4. Climate control display
5. Air intake control button
6. Air conditioning button
7. Fan speed control button
8. AUTO (automatic control) button
9. OFF button
10. Mode selection button
11.Climate control information screen
selection button
■ Type A
■ Type B
4115
Features of your vehicle
Automatic heating and air con-
ditioning
1.Push the AUTO button.It is indicat-
ed by AUTO on the display. The
modes, fan speeds, air intake and
air-conditioning will be controlled
automatically by temperature set-
ting.
2.Push the temperature control but-
ton to set the desired temperature.
(Type A)
Turn the temperature control knob
to set the desired temperature.
(Type B)
✽✽
NOTICE
• To turn the automatic operation
off, select any button or switch of
the following:
- Mode selection button
- Air conditioning button
- Front windshield defroster but-
ton (Press the button one more
time to deselect the front wind-
shield defroster function. The
‘AUTO’ sign will illuminate on
the information display once
again.)
- Air intake control button
- Fan speed control switch
The selected function will be con-
trolled manually while other func-
tions operate automatically.
• Regardless of the temperature set-
ting, when using automatic opera-
tion, the air conditioning system
can automatically turn on to
decrease the humidity inside the
vehicle, even if the temperature is
set to warm.
OPS043164
OPS043165
■ Type B
■ Type A
OPS043170
OPS043171
■ Type B
■ Type A
Features of your vehicle
1164
Never place anything over the sensor
located on the instrument panel to
ensure better control of the heating
and cooling system.
Manual heating and air condi-
tioning
The heating and cooling system can
be controlled manually by pushing
buttons other than the AUTO button.
In this case, the system works
sequentially according to the order of
buttons selected.
When pressing any button (or turning
any knob) except AUTO button while
automatic operation, the functions
not selected will be controlled auto-
matically.
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired posi-
tion.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to
convert to full automatic control of
the system.
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
Refer to the illustration in the
“Manual climate control system”.
OPS043071
OPS043166
OPS043167
■ Type B
■ Type A
4117
Features of your vehicle
The air flow outlet port is converted
as follows:
Vent mode (B, D)
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face.Additionally, each out-
let can be controlled to direct the air
discharged from the outlet.
Vent-Floor mode (B, D, C, E)
Air flow is discharged towards the
face and floor.
Floor mode (C, E, A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defroster.
Floor/Defrost mode
(A, C, E, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
Features of your vehicle
1184
Defrost mode (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
Instrument panel vents
The outlet port can be opened or
closed separately using the thumb-
wheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivered from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
Temperature control
• Type A
The temperature will increase to the
maximum (HI) by pushing the button
().
OPS043168
OPS043169
■ Type B
■ Type A
OPS043059
OPS043170
OPS043171
■ Type B
■ Type A
4119
Features of your vehicle
The temperature will decrease to the
minimum (Lo) by pushing the button
().
When pushing the button, the tem-
perature will increase or decrease by
0.5°C/1°F. When set to the lowest
temperature setting, the air condi-
tioning will operate continuously.
• Type B
The temperature will increase to the
maximum (HI) by turning the knob to
the right extremely.
The temperature will decrease to the
minimum (Lo) by turning the knob to
the left extremely.
When turning the knob, the tempera-
ture will increase or decrease by
0.5°C/1°F. When set to the lowest
temperature setting, the air condi-
tioning will operate continuously.
Temperature scale conversion
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the temperature mode
display will reset to Centigrade.
This is normal condition. You can
switch the temperature scale as fol-
lows;
While pressing the AUTO button,
press the OFF button for 3 seconds
or more. The temperature scale will
change from Centigrade to
Fahrenheit, or from Fahrenheit to
Centigrade.
The temperature unit (from °C to °F
or from °F to °C) can be changed by
using the “User Settings”mode of the
LCD display.
Air intake control
This is used to select outside (fresh)
air position or recirculated air posi-
tion.
To change the air intake control posi-
tion, push the control button.
OPS043172
OPS043173
■ Type B
■ Type A
Features of your vehicle
1204
Recirculated air position
The indicator light on the
button illuminates when
the recirculated air posi-
tion is selected.
With the recirculated air
position selected, air from
passenger compartment
will be drawn through the
heating system and heat-
ed or cooled according to
the function selected.
✽✽
NOTICE
• According to the outside tempera-
ture if the recirculation air posi-
tion is on for a long time, the air
intake position will automatically
change to the outside (fresh) air
position to ventilate the inside air.
• To cancel the automatic outside
(fresh) air position, do the following.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the
ON position.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Press the air intake control but-
ton more than 3 seconds.
Outside (fresh) air position
The indicator light on the
button does not illumi-
nate when the outside
(fresh) air position is
selected.
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
Prolonged operation of the heater in
the recirculated air position (without
air conditioning selected) may cause
fogging of the windshield and side
windows and the air within the pas-
senger compartment may become
stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated air
position selected will result in exces-
sively dry air in the passenger com-
partment.
4121
Features of your vehicle
Sunroof inside air recirculation
(if equipped)
If the sunroof opens while the heater
or Air Conditioning system operates,
the outside (fresh) air will be select-
ed automatically for ventilating the
car.Then, if you select the recirculat-
ed air position, the outside (fresh) air
will be selected automatically after 3
minutes.
If you close the sunroof, the intake
mode will be changed to the previous
selected mode.
WARNING - Recirculated
air
Continuous use of the climate
control system in the recirculat-
ed air position can cause
drowsiness or sleepiness, and
loss of vehicle control. Set the
air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
WARNING - Reduced visi-
bility
Continued climate control sys-
tem operation in the recirculat-
ed air position may allow
humidity to increase inside
vehicle which may fog the glass
and obscure visibility.
WARNING - Sleeping
with AC on
Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on as this may cause
serious harm or death due to a
drop in the oxygen level and/or
body temperature.
Features of your vehicle
1224
Fan speed control
The fan speed can be set to the
desired speed by pressing the fan
speed control button.
To change the fan speed, press the
button ( ) for higher speed, or push
the button ( ) for lower speed. To
turn the fan speed control off, press
the OFF button and select outside
(fresh) air position.
Air conditioning
Push the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate).
Push the button again to turn the air
conditioning system off.
OPS043176
OPS043177
■ Type B
■ Type A
OPS043174
OPS043175
■ Type B
■ Type A
4123
Features of your vehicle
Blower OFF
Push the OFF button to turn off the
blower.However you can still operate
the mode and air intake buttons as
long as the ignition switch is in the
position ON.
Climate information screen
selection (if equipped)
Press the climate information screen
selection button to view climate infor-
mation in full screen mode.
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the
or position.
OPS043178
OPS043179
■ Type B
■ Type A
OPS043180
■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
1244
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the vehicle through
the ventilation system, temporarily
set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. Be sure to
return the control to the fresh air
position when the irritation has
passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle.This will help keep the driv-
er alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system
is drawn in through the grilles just
ahead of the windshield. Care
should be taken that these are not
blocked by leaves, snow, ice or
other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-
shield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air position and fan speed
to the desired position, turn on the
air conditioning system, and adjust
the temperature control to desired
temperature.
Air conditioning (if equipped)
All Kia Air Conditioning Systems are
filled with R-134a refrigerant.
1. Start the engine.Press the air con-
ditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the
outside air or recirculated air posi-
tion.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
• When maximum cooling is desired,
set the temperature control to the
extreme left position, set the mode
control to the MAX A/C position,
then set the fan speed control to
the highest speed.
CAUTION - Excessive A/C
• When using the air condition-
ing system, monitor the tem-
perature gauge closely while
driving up hills or in heavy
traffic when outside tempera-
tures are high. Air condition-
ing system operation may
cause engine overheating.
Continue to use the blower fan
but turn the air conditioning
system off if the temperature
gauge indicates engine over-
heating.
• When opening the windows in
humid weather air condition-
ing may create water droplets
inside the vehicle. Since
excessive water droplets may
cause damage to electrical
equipment, air conditioning
should only be used with the
windows closed.
4125
Features of your vehicle
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of
the windows on rainy or humid
days, decrease the humidity inside
the vehicle by operating the air
conditioning system.
• During air conditioning system
operation, you may occasionally
notice a slight change in engine
speed as the air conditioning com-
pressor cycles. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month only for a few minutes
to ensure maximum system per-
formance.
• When using the air conditioning
system, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side
of the vehicle.This is a normal sys-
tem operation characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning sys-
tem in the recirculated air position
provides maximum cooling, how-
ever, continual operation in this
mode may cause the air inside the
vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and
humid air intake. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
Climate control air filter
(if equipped)
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust
or other pollutants that come into the
vehicle from the outside through the
heating and air conditioning system.
If dust or other pollutants accumulate
in the filter over a period of time, the
air flow from the air vents may
decrease, resulting in moisture accu-
mulation on the inside of the wind-
shield even when the outside (fresh)
air position is selected. If this hap-
pens, have the climate control air fil-
ter replaced by an authorized Kia
dealer.
1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
Features of your vehicle
1264
✽✽
NOTICE
• Replace the filter every 15,000
miles or once a year.
If the vehicle is being driven in
severe conditions such as dusty or
rough roads, more frequent air
conditioner filter inspections and
changes are required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, the system should be
checked at an authorized Kia
dealer.
Air Conditioning refrigerant
label
❈ The actual Air Conditioning refrigerant
label in the vehicle may differ from the
illustration.
Each symbols and specification on
air conditioning refrigerant label
means as below ;
1. Classification of refrigerant
2. Amount of refrigerant
3. Classification of Compressor lubri-
cant
Refer to chapter 8 for more detail
location of air conditioning refrigerant
label.
OXM063009
■ Example
CAUTION - Proper Oil &
Refrigerant
It is important that the correct
type and amount of oil and refrig-
erant is used, otherwise damage
to the vehicle may occur. To pre-
vent damage,the air conditioning
system in your vehicle should
only be serviced by trained and
certified technicians.
4127
Features of your vehicle
Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air con-
ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a negative impact on the air con-
ditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
It is important that the correct type
and amount of oil and refrigerant is
used. Otherwise, damage to the
compressor and abnormal system
operation may occur.
WARNING
The oil and refrigerant in your
vehicle's air conditioning sys-
tem is under very high pres-
sure. If proper service proce-
dures are not followed an explo-
sion may result. To reduce the
risk of serious injury or death,
the air conditioning system in
your vehicle should only be
serviced by trained and certi-
fied technicians.
Features of your vehicle
1284
• For maximum defrosting, set the
temperature control to the extreme
right/hot position and the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired
while defrosting or defogging, set the
mode to the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and
ice from the windshield, rear win-
dow, outside rear view mirrors, and
all side windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the
hood and air inlet in the cowl grille
to improve heater and defroster
efficiency and to reduce the proba-
bility of fogging up inside of the
windshield.
Manual climate control system
To defog inside windshield
1. Select any fan speed except “0”
position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Select the or mode.
4.The outside (fresh) air and air con-
ditioning will be selected automat-
ically.
If the air conditioning and outside
(fresh) air position are not selected
automatically, press the correspon-
ding button manually.
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
OPS043181
WARNING - Windshield
heating
Do not use the or posi-
tion during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temper-
ature of the outside air and that
of the windshield could cause
the outer surface of the wind-
shield to fog up, causing loss of
visibility. In this case, set the
mode selection knob or button
to the position and fan
speed control knob or button to
the lower speed.
4129
Features of your vehicle
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position.
2.Set the temperature to the
extreme hot position.
3. Select the position.
4.The outside (fresh) air and air con-
ditioning will be selected automat-
ically.
Automatic climate control
system
To defog inside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the desired
position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the defrost button ( ).
4.The air-conditioning will be turned
on according to the detected
ambient temperature, outside
(fresh) air position and higher fan
speed will be selected automati-
cally.
If the air-conditioning, outside (fresh)
air position and higher fan speed are
not selected automatically, adjust the
corresponding button or knob manu-
ally.
If the position is selected, with a
low fan speed, a higher fan speed
may be automatically selected.
OPS043182
OPS043183
OPS043185
■ Type B
■ Type A
Features of your vehicle
1304
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set fan speed to the highest posi-
tion.
2. Set temperature to the Maximum
(HI).
3. Press the defrost button ( ).
4.The air-conditioning will be turned
on according to the detected
ambient temperature and outside
(fresh) air position will be selected
automatically.
If the position is selected, with a
low fan speed, a higher fan speed
may be automatically selected.
Defogging logic
To reduce the possibility of fogging
up the inside of the windshield, the
air intake or air conditioning are con-
trolled automatically according to
certain conditions such as or
position. To cancel or return to the
defogging logic, do the following.
OPS043184
OPS043186
■ Type B
■ Type A
4131
Features of your vehicle
Manual climate control system
1.Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2.Turn the mode selection knob to
the defrost position ( ).
3.Within 10 seconds after select the
defrost positon, press the air
intake control button ( ) at least
5 times within 3 seconds.
The indicator on the air intake button
blinks 3 times with 0.5 seconds of
interval. It indicates that the defog-
ging logic is canceled or returned to
the programmed status.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it will be reset to the
defog logic status.
Automatic climate control system
1.Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Press the defrost button ( ).
OPS043187
OPS043189
OPS043188
■ Type B
■ Type A
Features of your vehicle
1324
3.While pressing the air conditioning
button (A/C), press the air intake
control button ( ) at least 5
times within 3 seconds.
The indicator on the air intake button
blinks 3 times with 0.5 seconds of
interval. It indicates that the defog-
ging logic is canceled or returned to
the programmed status.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it will be reset to the
defog logic status.
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the clean air function turns
on automatically.
Also, the clean air function turns off
automatically, when the ignition
switch turns to the OFF position.
OPS043206
CLEAN AIR (IF EQUIPPED)
4133
Features of your vehicle
These compartments can be used to
store small items.
• To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartment.
• Always keep the storage compart-
ment covers closed while driving.
Do not attempt to place so many
items in the storage compartment
that the storage compartment
cover cannot close securely.
Center console storage
These compartments can be used to
store small items required by the
driver or front passenger.
To open the center console storage,
pull up the lever. (Type B)
Glove box
To open the glove box, push the but-
ton and the glove box will automati-
cally open. Close the glove box after
use.
Always keep the glove box closed
while the vehicle is in operation.
STORAGE COMPARTMENT
OPS043062
WARNING - Flammable
materials
Do not store, propane cylinders
or other flammable/explosive
materials in the vehicle. These
items may catch fire and/or
explode if the vehicle is exposed
to hot temperatures for extended
periods.
OPS043060
OPS043061
■ Type B
■ Type A
WARNING - Glove box
To reduce the risk of injury in an
accident or sudden stop,always
keep the glove box door closed
while driving.
Features of your vehicle
1344
Cool box (if equipped)
You can keep beverage cans or other
items cool in the glove box.
1. Turn on the air conditioning.
2. Slide the open/close lever of the
vent installed in the glove box to
the open position.
3. When the cool box is not used,
slide the lever to the closed posi-
tion.
If some items in the cool box block
the vent, the cooling effectiveness of
the coolbox is reduced.
✽✽
NOTICE
Do not put perishable food in the
cool box because it may not main-
tain the necessary consistent tem-
perature to keep the food fresh.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the temperature control knob is in
the warm or hot position, warm or
hot air will flow into the glove box.
Sunglass holder
To open the sunglass holder, press
the cover and the holder will slowly
open.Place your sunglasses with the
lenses facing out.
To close the sunglass holder, push it
up.
Do not place other items in the sun-
glass holder.
OPS043064 OPSE046065L
4135
Features of your vehicle
Luggage box (if equipped)
You can place a first aid kit, a reflec-
tor triangle, tools, etc. in the box for
easy access.
OPS043198
WARNING - Sunglass
holder
• Do not keep objects except
sunglasses inside the sun-
glass holder. Such objects
can be thrown from the holder
in the event of a sudden stop
or an accident, possibly injur-
ing the passengers in the
vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglass
holder while the vehicle is
moving. The rear view mirror
of the vehicle can be blocked
by an opened sunglass holder.
Features of your vehicle
1364
Cup holder
Cups or small beverage cans may be
placed in the cup holders.
Rear (if equipped)
To use the cup holder, folding the
center seat or pull down the armrest.
INTERIOR FEATURES
WARNING - Hot liquids
Do not place uncovered cups
with hot liquid in the cup holder
while the vehicle is in motion. If
the hot liquid spills, you burn
yourself. Such a burn to the
driver could lead to loss of con-
trol of the vehicle.
OPS043067
OPS043066
■ Type A
■ Type B
OPS043068
CAUTION
• Keep your drinks sealed while
driving to prevent spilling
your drink. If liquid spills, it
may get into the vehicle's
electrical/electronic system
and damage electrical/elec-
tronic parts.
• When cleaning spilled liquids,
do not dry the cup holder at
high temperature. This may
damage the cup holder.
4137
Features of your vehicle
Sunvisor
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use the sunvisor, pull it down-
ward.
To use the sunvisor for the side win-
dow, pull it downward, unsnap it from
the bracket (1) and swing it to the
side (2).
Adjust the sunvisor extension for-
ward or backward (3). (if equipped)
To use the vanity mirror, pull down
the visor and slide the mirror cover
(4).
To use the vanity mirror lamp, switch
it on. (if equipped)
The ticket holder (5, if equipped) is
provided for holding a tollgate ticket.
Seat warmer (if equipped)
The seat warmer is provided to warm
the front seats during cold weather.
With the ignition switch in the ON
position, push either of the switches
to warm the driver's seat or the front
passenger's seat.
CAUTION - Vanity
mirror lamp (if equipped)
If you use the vanity mirror
lamp, turn off the lamp before
returning the sunvisor to its
original position. It could result
in battery discharge and possi-
ble sunvisor damage.
OPS033012
■ Type A
OPS033013
■ Type B
OVG049174
Features of your vehicle
1384
During mild weather or under condi-
tions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the “OFF” position.
• Each time you press the switch,
the temperature setting of the seat
will change as follows :
• The seat warmer defaults to the
OFF position whenever the ignition
switch is turned on.
• When pressing the switch for more
than 1.5 seconds with the seat
warmer operating, the seat warmer
will turn OFF.
✽✽
NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in
the seat turns off or on automatical-
ly depending on the seat tempera-
ture.
✽✽
NOTICE
Be careful not to spill liquid such as
water or beverages on the seat. If you
spill some liquid, wipe the seat with a
dry towel. Before using the seat
warmer, dry the seat completely.
CAUTION - Seat damage
• When cleaning the seats, do
not use an organic solvent
such as paint thinner, ben-
zene, alcohol and gasoline.
Doing so may damage the sur-
face of the heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the
seat warmer, do not place any-
thing on the seats that insu-
lates against heat, such as
blankets, cushions or seat
covers while the seat warmer
is in operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped
with seat warmers. Damage to
the seat warming components
could occur.
OFF
HIGH ( )
LOW ( )
→→
→
• Type A
OFF
HIGH ( )
MIDDLE ( )*
LOW ( )
→→→
→
• Type B
4139
Features of your vehicle
Seat air ventilation (if equipped)
The temperature setting of the seat
changes according to the switch
position.
• If you want to cool your seat cush-
ion, press the switch (blue color).
• Each time you press the button,
the airflow will change as follows:
• When pressing the switch for more
than 1.5 seconds with the seat air
ventilation operating, the seat air
ventilation will turn OFF.
• The seat air ventilation defaults to
the OFF position whenever the
ignition switch is turned on.
WARNING - Seat heater
burns
The seat warmer may cause
burns, even at low tempera-
tures, if used over a long period
of time. Never allow passengers
who may not be able to take
care of themselves to be
exposed to the risk of seat
heater burns.These include:
1. Infants, children, elderly or
disabled persons, or hospital
outpatients
2. Persons with sensitive skin
or those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills,
cold tablets, etc.)
OPS033014
OFF
HIGH ( )
MIDDLE ( )
LOW ( )
→→→
→
Features of your vehicle
1404
Rear seat warmer (if equipped)
The seat warmer is provided to warm
the rear outboard seats during cold
weather. With the ignition switch in
the ON position, push either of the
switches to warm rear seats.
During mild weather or under condi-
tions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the “OFF” position.
• When pressing the switch for more
than 1.5 seconds with the seat
warmer operating, the seat warmer
will turn OFF.
• The seat warmer defaults to the
OFF position whenever the engine
start/stop button (the ignition switch)
is turned on.
✽✽
NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in
the seat turns off or on automatically
depending on the seat temperature.
CAUTION - Seat damage
• When cleaning the seats, do
not use an organic solvent
such as paint thinner, ben-
zene, alcohol and gasoline.
Doing so may damage the air
ventilation seat.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on the seat. Those
things may damage the air
ventilation seat.
• Be careful not to spill liquid
such as water or beverages on
the seat. If you spill some liq-
uid, wipe the seat with a dry
towel. Before using the air
ventilation seat, dry the seat
completely.
OPS033031
→
OFF → HIGH ( ) → LOW ( )
4141
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
Be careful not to spill liquid such as
water or beverages on the seat. If you
spill some liquid, wipe the seat with a
dry towel. Before using the seat
warmer, dry the seat completely.
Power outlet (if equipped)
The power outlet is designed to pro-
vide power for mobile telephones or
other devices designed to operate
with vehicle electrical systems. The
devices should draw less than 10
amps with the engine running.
OPS043069
■ Front (Type A)
OPS043070
■ Rear (if equipped)
CAUTION - Seat damage
• When cleaning the seats, do
not use an organic solvent
such as thinner, benzene,
alcohol and gasoline. Doing
so may damage the surface of
the heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the
seat warmer, do not place any-
thing on the seats that insu-
lates against heat, such as
blankets, cushions or seat
covers while the seat warmer
is in operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped
with seat warmers. Damage to
the seat warming components
could occur.
WARNING - Seat heater
burns
The seat warmer may cause
burns, even at low tempera-
tures, if used over a long period
of time. Never allow passengers
who may not be able to take
care of themselves to be
exposed to the risk of seat
heater burns.These include:
1. Infants, children, elderly or
disabled persons, or hospital
outpatients
2. Persons with sensitive skin
or those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills,
cold tablets, etc.)
Features of your vehicle
1424
• Use the power outlet only when the
engine is running and remove the
accessory plug after use. Using the
accessory plug for prolonged peri-
ods of time with the engine off could
cause the battery to discharge.
• Only use 12V electric accessories
which are less than 10A(Driver’s
side) or 15A(Passenger’s side) in
electric capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or heater
to the lowest operating level when
using the power outlet.
• Close the cover when not in use.
• Some electronic devices can cause
electronic interference when
plugged into a vehicle’s power out-
let. These devices may cause
excessive audio static and malfunc-
tions in other electronic systems or
devices used in your vehicle.
Clothes hanger (if equipped)
To use the hanger, pull down the
upper portion of hanger.
Be careful when opening and closing
the doors. Clothes, etc. may get
caught between the door gap.
ORP042186
WARNING - Electric
shock
Do not put a finger or a foreign
element (pin, etc.) into a power
outlet and do not touch with a
wet hand.You may get an electric
shock.
CAUTION
- Hanging
clothing
Do not hang heavy clothes,since
those may damage the hook.
4143
Features of your vehicle
Floor mat anchor(s)
When using a floor mat on the floor
carpet, make sure it attaches to the
floor mat anchor(s) in your vehicle.
This keeps the floor mat from sliding
forward.
The following must be observed
when installing ANY floormat to the
vehicle.
• Ensure that the floormats are
securely attached to the vehicle's
floormat anchor(s) before driving
the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floormat that can-
not be firmly attached to the vehi-
cle's floormat anchors.
• Do not stack floormats on top of
one another (e.g. all-weather rub-
ber mat on top of a carpeted floor-
mat). Only a single floormat should
be installed in each position.
IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was
manufactured with driver's side floor-
mat anchors that are designed to
securely hold the floormat in place.
To avoid any interference with pedal
operation, Kia recommends that only
the Kia floormat designed for use in
your vehicle be installed.
OTFNCO2001
■ Driver's side ■ Passenger's side
WARNING - After market
floor mat
Do not install aftermarket floor
mats that are not capable of
being securely attached to the
vehicle's floor mat anchors.
Unsecured floor mats can inter-
fere with pedal operation.
WARNING
The coat hook should only be
used to hang clothing. Do not
hang any other items on the
hook as they may become
injury producing objects in the
event of a crash.
OPS046500
Features of your vehicle
1444
Luggage net holder
(if equipped)
To keep items from shifting in the
cargo area, you can use the holders
located in the cargo area to attach
the luggage net.
If necessary, contact your authorized
Kia dealer to obtain a luggage net.
Cargo area cover (if equipped)
Use the cargo area cover to hide
items stored in the cargo area.
OPS043193
WARNING - Luggage net
• Always keep your face and
body out of the luggage net
recoil path and avoid using
the luggage net when the
straps have visible signs of
wear or damage. The luggage
net can snap and cause
injuries.
• All cargo should be evenly
distributed, properly secured
and never piled higher than
the seatback.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the goods
or vehicle, care should be taken
when carrying fragile or bulky
objects in the luggage compart-
ment.
OPS043199L
4145
Features of your vehicle
Removal and installation
To remove the cargo area cover:
1. Fold the cargo area cover up in
half.
2. Firmly hold the folded part of the
cover and lift it up.
3.While lifting the cover up, hold the
area near the front slots.Then, pull
up the cover at approximately 45°
angle.
✽✽
NOTICE
Folded cover may block the rear
view. Put the folded cover in the
appropriate position.
OPS045355
OPS045357 OPS045356
Features of your vehicle
1464
To install the cargo area cover:
To use the cargo area cover, insert
the 4 edges into the slots.
CAUTION - Luggage
Since the cargo area cover may
be damaged or malformed,do not
put luggage on it when it is used.
WARNING - Objects
• Do not place objects on the
cargo area cover. Such
objects may be thrown about
inside the vehicle and possi-
bly injure vehicle occupants
during an accident or when
braking.
• All cargo should be evenly
distributed, properly secured
and never piled higher than
the seatback.
OPS043200L
4147
Features of your vehicle
EXTERIOR FEATURES
Roof rack (if equipped)
If the vehicle has a roof rack, you can
load cargo on top of your vehicle.
We recommend to obtain the cross-
bars and fixing components needed
to install the roof rack on your vehicle
from an authorized Kia dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The crossbars (if equipped) should
be placed in the proper load carry-
ing positions prior to placing items
onto the roof rack.
• If the vehicle is equipped with a
sunroof, be sure not to position
cargo onto the roof rack in such a
way that it
could interfere with sun-
roof operation.
• When the roof rack is not being
used to carry cargo, the crossbars
may need to be repositioned if wind
noise is detected.
OPS043201
CAUTION - Loading Roof
Rack
• When carrying cargo on the
roof rack, take the necessary
precautions to make sure the
cargo does not damage the
roof of the vehicle.
• When carrying large objects
on the roof rack, make sure
they do not exceed the overall
roof length or width.
• When you are carrying cargo
on the roof rack, do not operate
the sunroof (if equipped). This
can damage the sunroof.
WARNING - Driving with
roof load
Always drive slow and turn cor-
ners carefully when carrying
items on the roof rack.The vehi-
cle's center of gravity will be
higher when items are loaded
onto the roof rack.
Features of your vehicle
1484
• The following specification is the
maximum weight that can be
loaded onto the roof rack.
Distribute the load as evenly as
possible across the crossbars (if
equipped) and roof rack and
secure the load firmly.
Loading cargo or luggage in
excess of the specified weight limit
on the roof rack may damage your
vehicle.
• The vehicle center of gravity will be
higher when items are loaded onto
the roof rack. Avoid sudden starts,
braking, sharp turns, abrupt
maneuvers or high speeds that
may result in loss of vehicle control
or rollover resulting in an accident.
• Always drive slowly and turn cor-
ners carefully when carrying items
on the roof rack. Severe wind
updrafts, caused by passing vehi-
cles or natural causes, can cause
sudden upward pressure on items
loaded on the roof rack. This is
especially true when carrying
large, flat items such as wood pan-
els or mattresses.This could cause
the items to fall off the roof rack
and cause damage to your vehicle
or others around you.
• To prevent damage or loss of cargo
while driving, check frequently
before or while driving to make
sure the items on the roof rack are
securely fastened.
Mounting bracket for roof carrier
(if equipped)
To install or remove a roof carrier,
you can use the mounting bracket
and cover on the roof.
When you install a roof carrier, do
the following procedure.
1. Insert a slim tool (coin or flat blade
driver) into the slot and slide the
cover toward the arrow on the
cover.
OPS043207
ROOF 80 kg (176 lbs.)
RACK EVENLY DISTRIBUTED
4149
Features of your vehicle
2. Rotate the cover half way and
insert the cover on the roof hole as
the illustration.
✽✽
NOTICE
To prevent losing the roof carrier
cover, install the cover on the roof
before you install the roof carrier.
3. After using the roof carrier, install
the cover back on the roof in the
reverse order.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the vehicle is equipped with a sun-
roof, be sure not to position cargo
onto the roof in such a way that it
could interfere with sunroof opera-
tion.
• When carrying large objects on the
roof rack, make sure they do not
exceed the overall roof length or
width.
• The vehicle center of gravity will be
higher when items are loaded onto
the roof. Avoid sudden starts, brak-
ing, sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers
or high speeds that may result in
loss of vehicle control or rollover
resulting in an accident.
• To prevent damage or loss of cargo
while driving, check frequently
before or while driving to make
sure the items on the roof are
securely fastened.
WARNING
- Driving with
roof load
Always drive slow and turn cor-
ners carefully when carrying
items on the roof rack.The vehi-
cle center of gravity will be
higher when items are loaded
onto the roof rack.
OED046091
CAUTION - Loading roof
rack
When carrying cargo on the roof
rack,take the necessary precau-
tions to make sure the cargo
does not damage the roof of the
vehicle.
Audio system
Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
• Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
• Audio remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
• AUX and USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
• Speaker lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
• How vehicle audio works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Audio (Without Touch Screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
• Feature of Your Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
• Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
• SiriusXM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
• Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
• Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
• Siri. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
• Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Audio (With Touch Screen). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
• Feature of Your Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
• Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
• SiriusXM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
• Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
• Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
• Siri. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
• Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
• FCC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
5
Audio system
25
If you install aftermarket HID head
lamps, your vehicle’s audio and elec-
tronic devices may malfunction.
Antenna (if equipped)
Your vehicle uses a roof antenna to
receive AM or/and FM broadcast sig-
nals.
This antenna pole is removable. To
remove the roof antenna pole, turn it
counterclockwise. To install the roof
antenna pole, turn it clockwise.
• When reinstalling your roof anten-
na, it is important that it is fully
tightened and adjusted to the
upright position to ensure proper
reception.
• When cargo is loaded on the roof
rack, do not place the cargo near
the antenna pole to ensure proper
reception.
AUDIO SYSTEM
OPS046442L
CAUTION - Antenna
Before entering a place with a
low height clearance or a car
wash, remove the antenna pole
by rotating it counterclockwise.
If not, the antenna may be dam-
aged.
Audio system
53
Audio remote control
The steering wheel audio remote
control button may be installed.
Do not operate the audio remote
control buttons simultaneously.
VOLUME (VOL+/ VOL-) (1)
• Push the VOL + to increase volume.
• Push the VOL -to decrease volume.
SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2)
If the SEEK/PRESET button is
pressed for more than 1 second, it
will work as follows in each mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK
select button.
USB mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
If the SEEK/PRESET button is
pressed for less than 1 second, it will
work as follows in each mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STA-
TION select buttons.
USB mode
It will function as the FILE UP/DOWN
button.
MODE (3)
Press the button to select Radio,
USB or AUX.
Detailed information for audio control
buttons is described in the following
pages in this section.
OPS043190
WARNING - Distracted
Driving
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle con-
trol that may lead to an acci-
dent, severe personal injury and
death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a
vehicle or that are not permissi-
ble by law should never be used
during operation of the vehicle.
Audio system
45
AUX and USB port (if equipped)
If your vehicle has an AUX and/or
USB(universal serial bus) port, you
can use an AUX port to connect
audio devices and an USB port to
plug in an USB.
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise
may occur during playback. If this
happens, use the power source of
the portable audio device.
Speaker lights (if equipped)
The speaker lights that lights around
the front speaker is adjusted by turn-
ing the knob as follows.
OPS043194
OPS043195
OPS043196
Audio system
55
1.OFF :The light turns off.
2.MUSIC :
The red light blinks according to the
sound of the audio.
If the audio is not turned on, the
light does not turn on.
3.MOOD :
The light color changes automati-
cally at regular interval.
4. +/- :
When the lights are on, push the
illumination button to adjust the
light intensity.
If low lighting grade is selected, the
intensity of light may be weak or
may not illuminate according to the
audio volume or selected condition.
The lighting around the front speaker
may not illuminate when the sound of
the audio is low.
Do not use the lights for extended
periods when engine is not running.
It may cause battery discharge.
✽✽
NOTICE
When the doors are opened, the
lighting system will not operate.
Audio system
65
How vehicle audio works
AM and FM radio signals are broad-
cast from transmitter towers located
around your city. They are intercept-
ed by the radio antenna on your vehi-
cle.This signal is then processed by
the radio and sent to your vehicle
speakers.
However, in some cases the signal
coming to your vehicle may not be
strong and clear.
This can be due to factors, such as
the distance from the radio station,
closeness of other strong radio sta-
tions or the presence of buildings,
bridges or other large obstructions in
the area.
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broad-
casts. This is because AM radio
waves are transmitted at low fre-
quencies. These long distance,low
frequency radio waves can follow the
curvature of the earth rather than
travelling straight. In addition, they
curve around obstructions resulting
in better signal coverage.
JBM002
AM reception
JBM001
FM reception
Audio system
57
FM broadcasts are transmitted at
high frequencies and do not bend to
follow the earth's surface. Because
of this, FM broadcasts generally
begin to fade within short distances
from the station.Also, FM signals are
easily affected by buildings, moun-
tains, and obstructions. This can
lead to undesirable or unpleasant lis-
tening conditions which might lead
you to believe a problem exists with
your radio. The following conditions
are normal and do not indicate radio
trouble:
• Fading - As your vehicle moves
away from the radio station, the
signal will weaken and sound will
begin to fade. When this occurs,
we suggest that you select another
stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the
transmitter and your radio can dis-
turb the signal causing static or
fluttering noises to occur.Reducing
the treble level may lessen this
effect until the disturbance clears.
• Station Swapping - As an FM sig-
nal weakens, another more power-
ful signal near the same frequency
may begin to play. This is because
your radio is designed to lock onto
the clearest signal. If this occurs,
select another station with a
stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio
signals being received from sever-
al directions can cause distortion
or fluttering.This can be caused by
a direct and reflected signal from
the same station, or by signals
from two stations with close fre-
quencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition
has passed.
JBM003
FM radio station
JBM005JBM004
Audio system
Using a cellular phone or a two-
way radio
When a cellular phone is used inside
the vehicle, noise may be produced
from the audio system.This does not
mean that something is wrong with
the audio equipment. In such a case,
try to operate mobile devices as far
from the audio equipment as possi-
ble.
When using a communication sys-
tem such as a cellular phone or a
radio set inside the vehicle, a sepa-
rate external antenna must be fitted.
When a cellular phone or a radio set
is used with an internal antenna
alone, it may interfere with the vehi-
cle's electrical system and adversely
affect safe operation of the vehicle.
WARNING - Cell phone
use
Do not use a cellular phone
while driving. Stop at a safe
location to use a cellular phone.
85
WARNING - Antenna
Do not touch the antenna dur-
ing thunder or lightening as
such acts may lead to lightning
induced electric shock.
WARNING - Driver
Distraction
• Do not stare at the screen
while driving. Staring at the
screen for prolonged periods
of time could lead to traffic
accidents.
• Using the phone while driving
may lead to a lack of attention
of traffic conditions and
increase the likelihood of acci-
dents. Use the phone feature
after parking the vehicle.
WARNING - Audio System
• Do not disassemble, assem-
ble, or modify the audio sys-
tem. Such acts could result in
fire or electric shock.
• Exercise caution not to spill
water or introduce foreign
objects into the device. Such
acts could lead to smoke, fire,
or product malfunction.
CAUTION
Refrain from use if the screen is
blank or no sound can be heard
as these signs may indicate
product malfunction. Continued
use in this condition may fur-
ther damage the system.
Audio system
59
iPod
®
iPod
®
is a registered trademark of Apple Inc.
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
A compatible
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology-enabled
cell phone is required to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth
®
SIG, Inc. and any use
of such marks by Kia is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names are those of their
respective owners.
A Bluetooth
®
enabled cell phone is required to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
Pandora
®
Pandora, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress
are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora
Media, Inc. Used with permission. Pandora is only avail-
able in certain countries.
Please visit http://www.pandora.com/legal for more infor-
mation.
Audio system
105
AUDIO (Without Touch Screen)
B2G4G0000EU
(With
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology)
■ Type A
Audio system
511
Feature of Your Audio
Head unit
❈ The actual features in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
(1) RADIO
• Start FM, AM and SiriusXM.
(2) MEDIA
• Select USB(iPod
®
),
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology(BT) Audio,
AUX, My Music or Pandora.
• Display the media menu when two
or more media are connected or
when the [MEDIA] button is
pressed in media mode.
(3) PHONE
• Start
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Phone mode.
(4) POWER/VOL knob
• Turn to adjust the volume.
• Press to turn the device on or off.
(5) SEEK/TRACK
• Search for frequencies in radio
mode.
• Change the current song in media
mode.
(6) [1] ~ [6] (Preset)
• Save/play presets in radio mode.
• Select/launch the numeric menus
displayed on the screen.
Audio system
(7) SETUP/CLOCK
• Access Display, Sound, Date/Time,
Bluetooth, System and Display Off
settings.
• Press and hold to set the date/time.
(8) MENU
• Display additional menus available
on the current screen.
(9) BACK
• Return to the previous screen.
(10) TUNE knob
• Turn to navigate through the sta-
tions/songs list.
• Press to select an item.
(11) PRESET
• Move to the previous/next preset
page in radio mode.
(12) RESET
• Shutdown and restart the system.
125
Audio system
Steering wheel remote control
❈ The actual features in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
(1)MODE
• Press the button to change the
mode in the following order: Radio
➟ Media.
• Press and hold the button to turn
off.
(2) VOLUME
• Press to adjust the volume.
(3) UP/DOWN
• Press the button in radio mode to
search Presets.
• Press and hold the button in radio
mode to search frequencies.
• Press the button in media mode to
change the current song.
• Press and hold the button in media
mode to quick search through
songs.
(4)VOICE
• Pressing the button
- If Siri is not active: Starts Siri.
- If Siri is active: Re-starts Siri.
• Pressing and holding the button:
Siri is deactivated.
(5)CALL
• Pressing the button
- If not in
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree mode or
receiving a phone call.
First press: Display Dial Number
screen.
Second press: Automatically dis-
play the most recently Dialed call
number.
Third press: Dial the phone num-
ber entered.
- Press in the Incoming Call notifi-
cation screen to accept the
phone call.
- Press in
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree mode to
switch to the waiting call.
• Pressing and holding the button
- If not in
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree mode or
receiving a phone call, the most
recently Dialed Call number is
dialed.
- Press in
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree mode to
transfer the call to your cell
phone.
- Press in cell phone mode to
switch to
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree mode.
(6) END
• Press in
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree mode to
end the phone call.
• Press in the incoming call screen
to reject the call.
513
Audio system
145
• Adjust the volume to levels that
allow the driver to hear sounds
from outside of the vehicle. Driving
in a state where external sounds
cannot be heard may lead to acci-
dents.
• Pay attention to the volume setting
when turning the device on. A sud-
den output of extreme volume
upon turning the device on could
lead to hearing impairment.(Adjust
the volume to a suitable levels
before turning off the device.)
• If you want to change the position
of device installation, please
inquire with your place of purchase
or service maintenance center.
Technical expertise is required to
install or disassemble the device.
• Turn on the car ignition before
using this device. Do not operate
the audio system for long periods
of time with the ignition turned off
as such operations may lead to
battery discharge.
• In case of product malfunction,
please contact your place of pur-
chase or After Service center.
• Placing the audio system within an
electromagnetic environment may
result in noise interference.
WARNING - Driver
distraction
Operating the device while driv-
ing could lead to accidents due
to a lack of attention to external
surroundings. First park the
vehicle before operating the
device.
CAUTION
• When cleaning the device,
make sure to turn off the
audio system and use a dry
and smooth cloth.
• Do not place beverages close
to the audio system. Spilling
beverages may lead to system
malfunction.
• Never use tough materials,
chemical cloths, or solvents
(alcohol, benzene, thinners,
etc.) as such materials may
damage the device panel or
cause color/quality deteriora-
tion.
• Prevent caustic solutions
such as perfume and cosmet-
ic oil from contacting the
dashboard because they may
cause damage or discol-
oration.
CAUTION - LCD Monitor
Do not subject the device to
severe shock or impact. Direct
pressure onto the front side of
the monitor may cause damage
to the LCD or touch screen.
Information on status icons
Icons showing audio status are shown in the upper-right
corner of the screen.
Icon Description
Mute Mute engaged
Battery
Remaining battery life of a connected
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device
Handsfree +
Audio streaming
connection
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Handsfree
call and audio streaming available
Handsfree
connection
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Handsfree
call available
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
audio streaming
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology audio
streaming available
Downloading
contacts
Downloading contacts through
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology wireless communications
Downloading
call history
Downloading call history through
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology wireless communications
Line busy Phone call in progress
Mute mic
Mic muted during a call
(caller cannot hear your voice)
Phone signal
strength
Display the phone signal strength for a cell
phone connected by
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
Audio system
515
Audio system
165
Radio
Switching between FM, AM and
SiriusXM
Press the [RADIO] button on the
audio system to switch between FM,
AM and SiriusXM.
Searching frequencies
Search frequencies by pressing the
[SEEK/TRACK] button on the prod-
uct.
Presets
Save up to 36 frequently used sta-
tions.
1. Press and hold the desired slot
from 1 through 36. This saves the
current station in the selected slot.
If the slot is empty, simply press-
ing saves the station to the slot.
2. To save in slots numbered 7 or
higher, press the [PRESET] but-
ton to move to the previous/next
page and save.
To listen to a preset station, press
the desired station in the list.
Menu
Press the [MENU] button, and select
the desired function.
• List: A list of all stations available in
the current location of the vehicle is
displayed. Press the desired sta-
tion. Press the [Refresh] to update
the list of available stations.
• Scan: All stations available in the
current location of the vehicle are
played for five seconds each.
• Information: View detailed station
information. Station Info should be
enabled if information wants to be
shown.
• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-
tings can be changed.
• Station Info: Set whether to receive
station information such as Station
Name, Program Type or Information.
Audio system
517
✽✽
NOTICE - SiriusXM
®
Satellite
Radio information
• Satellite Radio channels:
Enjoy SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with a 3-month trial subscription
to the Sirius Select package. You’ll
get over variable channels, includ-
ing commercialfree music, plus all
your favorite sports, exclusive
talk, entertainment, and a selec-
tion of premium programming.
For more information and a com-
plete list of SiriusXM channels,
visit siriusxm.com in the United
States, siriusxm.ca in Canada, or
call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
• Satellite Radio reception factors:
To receive the satellite signal, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
satellite radio antenna located on
the roof of your vehicle. The vehi-
cle roof provides the best location
for an unobstructed, open view of
the sky, a requirement of a satellite
radio system. Like AM/FM, there
are several factors that can affect
satellite radio reception perform-
ance:
(Continued)
(Continued)
- Antenna obstructions: For opti-
mal reception performance, keep
the antenna clear of snow and
ice build-up and keep luggage
and other material as far away
from the antenna as possible.
• SiriusXM Satellite Radio service:
SiriusXM is a subscription-based
satellite radio service that broad-
casts music, sports, news and
entertainment programming to
radio receivers, which are avail-
able for installation in motor vehi-
cles or factory installed, as well as
for the home, portable and wire-
less devices, and through an Internet
connection on a personal computer.
Vehicles that are equipped with a
factory installed SiriusXM Satellite
Radio system include:
- Hardware and an introductory
trial subscription term, which
begins on the date of sale or lease
of the vehicle.
- For a small upgrade fee, access to
SiriusXM music channels, and
other select channels over the
Internet using any computer con-
nected to the Internet (U.S. cus-
tomers only).
(Continued)
(Continued)
• SiriusXM services require a sub-
scription sold separately, or as a
package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc.
If you decide to continue service
after your trial, the subscription
plan you choose will automatically
renew thereafter and you will be
charged according to your chosen
payment method at then-current
rates. Fees and taxes apply. To
cancel you must call SiriusXM at
1-866-635-2349. See SiriusXM
Customer Agreement for complete
terms at www.siriusxm.com.
SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data
services are available only in the
48 contiguous states, DC and
Puerto Rico (with coverage limita-
tions). SiriusXM satellite service is
also available in Canada; see
www.siriusxm. ca. All fees and
programming subject to change.
Sirius, XM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of Sirius
XM Radio Inc.
Audio system
185
SiriusXM
Switching between FM, AM and
SiriusXM
Press the [RADIO] button on the
audio system to switch between FM,
AM and SiriusXM.
Searching channels
Search channels by pressing the
[SEEK/TRACK] button on the prod-
uct.
Replay
Press the TUNE knob to play a
replay.
Presets
Save up to 36 frequently used sta-
tions.
1. Press and hold the desired slot
from 1 through 36. This saves the
current station in the selected slot.
2. To save in slots numbered 7 or
higher, press the [PRESET] but-
ton to move to the previous/next
page and save.
To listen to a preset station, press
the desired station in the list.
Menu
Press the [MENU] button, and select
the desired function.
• List: A list of all stations available in
the current location of the vehicle is
displayed. Press the desired sta-
tion.
• Categories: Channels can be
searched by category.
• Direct Tune: The desired channel
can be selected by entering num-
bers.
• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-
tings can be changed.
• Tag Song: Tag the current song
information.
When an Apple device (iPhone
®
,
iPod
®
) is connected, tagged song
information is sent automatically to
the connected device.
✽✽
NOTICE
Up to 50 songs can be tagged.
• Scan: All stations available in the
vehicle’s current location are
played for ten seconds each.
• Program Schedule: View the pro-
gram schedule.
Audio system
519
• Featured Favorites: The Featured
Favorites feature allows
SiriusXM™ to broadcast additional
presets.
- Example 1: During holidays,
“Holiday Music” might include all
SiriusXM™ channels that are
playing holiday music for easy
access by users.
Multiple sets of Featured Favorites
data can be broadcast by
SiriusXM™ and can change from
time to time.
• Information: View detailed channel
information.
• Category Lock: Search or scan
channels in the current category
only.
Audio system
205
Media
MP3
Supported audio formats
✽✽
NOTICE
File formats other than the formats
above may not be recognized or
playable. Information such as file-
name may not be displayed.
Range of supported compressed file
types
1. Bitrate range (Kbps)
2. Sampling frequency (Hz)
• The sound quality of MP3/WMA
compressed files may vary depend-
ing on the bitrate. (A higher bitrate
can have better sound quality.)
• The product only recognizes files
with the MP3 or WMA extension.
Files without one of these exten-
sions are not recognized.
3. Number of recognizable folders
and files
• Folders: 2,000 for USB
• Files: 6,000 for USB
• No recognition limit for folder hier-
archies
Audio system
521
4. Character display range (Unicode)
• Filenames: Up to 64 English char-
acters (64 Korean characters)
• Foldernames: Up to 32 English
characters (32 Korean characters)
Languages supported (Unicode sup-
port)
• Korean: 2,604 characters
• English: 94 characters
• Common Chinese characters: 4,888
characters
• Special symbols: 986 characters
✽✽
NOTICE
Japanese/Simplified Chinese char-
acters are not supported.
Audio system
225
✽✽
NOTICE - Using the USB
Devices
• Starting the vehicle while a USB
device is connected can damage
the device. Please disconnect USB
devices before starting the vehicle.
• Starting the vehicle or stopping
the engine while an external USB
device is connected can result in
failure of the external USB device
to operate.
• Be cautious of static electricity
when connecting/disconnecting
external USB devices.
• An encrypted MP3 player is not
recognized when connected as an
external device.
• External USB devices may not be
recognized, depending on the state
of the external USB device.
• Only products with byte/sectors
formatted at 4 KB or lower are
recognized.
• Only USB devices in FAT12/16/32
format are recognized; NTFS and
ExFAT file systems are not recog-
nized.
• Some USB devices are not recog-
nized due to compatibility issues.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not touch the USB connections.
• Connecting and disconnecting
USB devices rapidly over a short
period of time can cause equip-
ment failure.
• Abnormal sounds may be audible
when the USB device is discon-
nected.
• Turn the audio off before connect-
ing or disconnecting external USB
devices.
• Recognition may take longer
depending on the type, capacity or
file format of the external USB
device. This is not a product mal-
function.
• Use of USB devices for purposes
other than playing music files is
prohibited.
• Image display and video playback
are not supported.
• Use of USB accessories, including
charge and heat though the USB
I/F, can lead to reduced product
performance or malfunctions. Do
not use USB devices or accessories
for these purposes.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Use of aftermarket USB hubs and
extension cables can result in the
vehicle’s audio system failing to
recognize your USB device.
Connect the USB device directly to
the multimedia port of your vehi-
cle.
• When using high-capacity USB
devices with logical drive divi-
sions, only files saved on the high-
est level logical drive can be
played.
If applications are loaded on a
USB drive, file playback may fail.
• Some MP3 players, cell phones,
digital cameras, etc. (USB devices
that are not recognized as mobile
storage) may not operate normally
when connected.
• USB charging may not be sup-
ported by some mobile devices.
• Operation is guaranteed only for
standard (Metal Cover Type) USB
Memory drives.
• Operation of HDD, CF, SD and
memory stick devices is not guar-
anteed.
(Continued)
Audio system
523
(Continued)
• DRM (Digital Rights Management)
files cannot be played.
• SD-type USB memory, CF-type
USB memory, and other USB
memory devices that require
adapters for connection are not
supported.
• Proper operation of USB HDDs or
USB drives with connectors that
loosen due to vehicle vibrations is
not guaranteed. (iStick, etc.)
• USB products that are
used as key chains or
cell phone accessories
may damage the USB
jack and affect proper
file playback. Please refrain from
use. Use only products with plug
connectors, as shown in the follow-
ing illustration.
• When MP3 devices or cell phones
are connected simultaneously
through AUX, BT Audio and USB
modes, a popping noise or mal-
function may occur.
Audio system
245
USB
(1) Repeat
Enable/disable repeat by pressing
button [1].
(2) Shuffle
Enable/disable shuffle play by press-
ing button [2].
(3) List
View a list of all songs by pressing
button [3].
Playback
• Press the [MEDIA] button, and
select [USB].
• Connect a USB drive to the USB
port to automatically play files on
the USB drive.
Changing songs
• Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button
to play the previous or next song.
• Press and hold the [SEEK/TRACK]
button to rewind or fast-forward the
currently playing song.
• Search songs by turning TUNE
knob, and press the knob to play.
Selecting songs from a list
Press the [List] to view a list of songs
available for play.
Select and play the desired song.
Repeat play
Press the [Repeat] to enable or dis-
able ‘Repeat all’, ‘Repeat current
song’, ‘Repeat folder’ or ‘Repeat cat-
egory’.
• Repeat all: All songs in the
playlist are repeated.
• Repeat current song: The cur-
rently playing song is repeated.
• Repeat folder: All songs in the
current folder are repeated.
• Repeat category: Repeat all
songs in the current category.
✽✽
NOTICE
The repeat folder function is avail-
able only when songs are playing
from the [File] category under
[List].
Audio system
525
Shuffle play
Press the [Shuffle] to enable/disable
‘Shuffle’, ‘Shuffle folder’ or ‘Shuffle
category’ play.
• Shuffle: Songs are played in
random order.
• Shuffle folder: Songs within
the current folder are played in ran-
dom order.
• Shuffle category: Songs within
the current category are played in
random order.
Menu
Press the [MENU] button, and select
the desired function.
• Save to My Music: Songs on your
USB device can be saved to My
Music.
(1)File: Select a file by using TUNE
knob
.
(2)Mark All: Select all files by press-
ing button [1].
(3)Unmark All: Deselect all files by
pressing button [2].
(4)Save: Save the selected files by
pressing button [3].
- Select the files you want to save,
and press the [Save]. This saves
the selected files to My Music.
- If Siri is activated, phone calls
are received or made while sav-
ing, saving will be canceled.
- Up to 6,000 files can be saved.
- The currently playing file on the
USB device cannot be changed
while saving.
- My Music cannot be used while
saving.
• Information: Detailed information
on the song that is currently play-
ing is displayed.
• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-
tings can be changed.
Audio system
265
✽✽
NOTICE - Using the iPod
®
Devices
• To use the audio system’s iPod
®
control function, use the dedicated
cable provided with your iPod
®
.
• Connecting the iPod
®
to the vehi-
cle during play may result in a
loud noise that lasts about one to
two seconds. Connect the iPod
®
to
the vehicle after stopping or paus-
ing play.
• Connect the iPod
®
with the vehicle
in the ACC ON state to begin
charging.
• When connecting the iPod
®
cable,
be sure to fully push the cable into
the port.
• When EQ effects are enabled
simultaneously on external
devices, such as iPod
®
s and the
audio system, the EQ effects may
overlap, causing sound quality
deterioration or distortion.
Deactivate the EQ function for all
external devices, if possible.
• Noise may occur when your iPod
®
or the AUX port is connected.
Disconnect and store separately
when not in use.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• There may be noise if the audio
system is used with an iPod
®
or
AUX external device connected to
the power jack. In these cases, dis-
connect the iPod
®
or external
device from the power jack.
• Play may be interrupted, or device
malfunctions may occur depend-
ing on the characteristics of your
iPod
®
/iPhone
®
.
• Play may fail if your iPhone
®
is
connected through both Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology and USB. In
this case, select Dock connector or
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
on your iPhone
®
to change the
sound output settings.
• If your software version does not
support the communication proto-
col or your iPod
®
is not recognized
due to device failure, anomalies or
defects, iPod
®
mode cannot be
used.
• iPod
®
nano (5th generation)
devices may not be recognized if
the battery is low. Charge suffi-
ciently before use.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The search and song play order in
the iPod
®
device may be different
from the search order in the audio
system.
• If the iPod
®
has failed due to an
internal defect, please reset the
iPod
®
(consult your iPod
®
manu-
al).
• Depending on the software ver-
sion, the iPod
®
may fail to sync
with the system. If the media is
removed or disconnected before
recognition, the previous mode
may not be restored (iPad
®
cannot
be charged).
• Cables other than the 1-meter
cable provided with iPod
®
/iPhone
®
products may not be recognized.
• When other music apps are used
on your iPod
®
, the system sync
function may fail due to malfunc-
tion of the iPod
®
application.
Audio system
527
iPod
®
(1) Repeat
Enable/disable repeat by pressing
button [1].
(2) Shuffle
Enable/disable shuffle play by press-
ing button [2].
(3) List
View a list of all songs by pressing
button [3].
Playback
• Connect your iPod
®
to the audio
USB port, press the [MEDIA] but-
ton, and select [iPod
®
].
Changing songs
• Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button
to play the previous or next song.
• Press and hold the [SEEK/TRACK]
button to rewind or fastforward the
currently playing song.
• Search songs by turning the TUNE
knob, and press the knob to play.
Selecting songs from a list
Press the [List] to see a list of songs
available for play.
Select and play the desired song.
Repeat play
Press the [Repeat] to enable or dis-
able ‘Repeat category’, ‘Repeat cur-
rent song’.
• Repeat category: Repeat all
songs in the current category.
• Repeat current song: The cur-
rently playing song is repeated.
Shuffle play
Press the [Shuffle] to enable/disable
‘Shuffle category’ play.
• Shuffle category: Songs within
the current category are played in
random order.
Menu
Press the [MENU] button, and select
the desired function.
• Information: Detailed info on the
currently playing song is displayed.
• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-
tings can be changed.
Audio system
285
When other music programs are run-
ning
When songs saved on your iPod
®
are playing through a separate music
app, the following screen is dis-
played.
(1)Play/Pause: Pause or play music
by pressing button [1]
.
(2)Play iPod
®
Files: Play music files
saved on your iPod
®
by pressing
button [2].
Playing iPod
®
files
• Select [Play iPod
®
Files] to play
songs saved on your iPod
®
.
If there are no songs saved on your
iPod
®
, the [Play iPod
®
Files] is dis-
abled.
Audio system
529
✽✽
NOTICE - Using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio mode can only be used if a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology-
enabled phone is connected. Only
devices that support Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology audio can be
used.
• If the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology-enabled phone is dis-
connected during play, the music
stops.
• When the TRACK UP/DOWN
buttons are used during Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology audio stream-
ing, a popping noise or sound
interruptions may occur, depend-
ing on the cell phone device.
• Depending on the cell phone
model, the audio streaming func-
tion may not be supported.
• If a phone call is made or received
when music is playing in
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio mode, the call may mix with
the music.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When returning to Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio mode
after ending a call, play might not
resume automatically for some cell
phone models.
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree is a feature that enables
drivers to practice safe driving.
Connecting the car audio system
with a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone allows the user to conve-
niently make calls, receive calls,
and manage the phone book.
Before using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology, carefully
read the contents of this user’s
manual.
• Excessive use or operations while
driving may lead to negligent driv-
ing practices and be the cause of
accidents.
• Do not operate the device exces-
sively while driving.
• Viewing the screen for prolonged
periods of time is dangerous and
may lead to accidents.
• When driving, view the screen only
for short periods of time.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle con-
trol that may lead to an acci-
dent, severe personal injury,
and death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a
vehicle or which are not permis-
sible by law should never be
used during operation of the
vehicle.
Audio system
305
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
(BT) Audio
(1) Repeat
Enable/disable repeat by pressing
button [1].
(2) Shuffle
Enable/disable shuffle play by press-
ing button [2].
(3) Play/Pause
Pause or play music by pressing but-
ton [3].
✽✽
NOTICE
Some cell phones may not support
this function.
Playback
• Press the [MEDIA] button, and
select [BT Audio].
Changing songs
• Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button
to play the previous or next song.
✽✽
NOTICE
Some cell phones may not support
this function.
Repeat play
Press the [Repeat] to enable or dis-
able ‘Repeat all’, ‘Repeat current
song’ or ‘Repeat category’.
• Repeat all: All songs in the
playlist are repeated.
• Repeat current song: The
song that is currently playing is
repeated.
• Repeat category: Repeat all
songs in the current category.
✽✽
NOTICE
The repeat play function is engaged,
depending on the operation of the
connected Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device.
Shuffle play
Press the [Shuffle] to enable/disable
‘Shuffle’, ‘Shuffle category’ play.
• Shuffle: Songs are played in
random order.
• Shuffle category: Songs within
the current category are played in
random order.
✽✽
NOTICE
The shuffle function is engaged,
depending on the operation of the
connected Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device.
Menu
Press the [MENU] button, and select
the desired function.
• Connections: The currently connect-
ed
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device can be changed.
• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-
tings can be changed.
Audio system
531
AUX
Running AUX
• Press the [MEDIA] button, and
select [AUX].
• Connect the external device con-
nection jack to the AUX terminal to
run AUX.
Menu
Press the [MENU] button, and select
the desired function.
• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-
tings can be changed.
My Music
(1) Repeat
Enable/disable repeat by pressing
button [1].
(2) Shuffle
Enable/disable shuffle play by press-
ing button [2].
(3) List
View a list of all songs by pressing
button [3].
Playback
Press the [MEDIA] button, and
select [My Music].
• My Music cannot be selected if it
does not contain music.
• Check the content of your USB
drive before saving music to My
Music.
Changing songs
Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to
play the previous or next song.
• Press and hold the [SEEK/TRACK]
button to rewind or fastforward the
currently playing song.
• Search songs by turning the TUNE
knob and press the knob to play.
Selecting songs from a list
Press the [List] to see a list of songs
available for play.
Select and play the desired song.
Audio system
325
Repeat play
Press the [Repeat] to enable or dis-
able ‘Repeat all’, ‘Repeat current
song’ or ‘Repeat category’.
• Repeat all: All songs in the
playlist are repeated.
• Repeat current song: The cur-
rently playing song is repeated.
• Repeat category: Repeat all
songs in the current category.
Shuffle play
Press the [Shuffle] to enable/disable
‘Shuffle’, ‘Shuffle category’ play.
• Shuffle: Songs are played in
random order.
• Shuffle category: Songs within
the current category are played in
random order.
Menu
Press the [MENU] button, and select
the desired function.
• Delete Files: You can delete files
from My Music.
(1)File: Select saved file by using
TUNE knob
.
(2)Mark All: Select all files by press-
ing button [1].
(3)Unmark All: Deselect all files by
pressing button [2].
(4)Delete: Delete the selected file(s)
by pressing button [3].
- Select the file to delete, then
press the [Delete] to delete it.
- If Siri is activated, phone calls
are received or made during
delete, delete will be canceled.
• Add to Playlist: Frequently played
songs can be paired in a [Playlist].
- Songs can be played from the
[Playlist].
• Information: Detailed info on the
currently playing song is displayed.
• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-
tings can be changed.
Delete from Playlist
When a song in the playlist is play-
ing, press the [MENU] button and
select [Delete from Playlist].
Select the song to delete, then press
[Delete].
Audio system
533
Pandora
(1) Pause
Pause or play music.
(2) Skip
Skip to the next song.
✽✽
NOTICE
Pandora
®
limits the number of times
that you can skip to the next song.
(3) Stations
Display the station list.
(4) Thumbs Down
If you don’t like the song that is cur-
rently playing, press this button to
skip to the next song and to minimize
the number of songs from similar
genres.
✽✽
NOTICE
Pandora
®
limits the number of times
that you can skip to the next song.
(5) Thumbs Up
If you like the song that is currently
playing, press this button. Pandora
®
will play more songs from the same
genre.
✽✽
NOTICE
The settings of this function cannot
be reset.
(6) Bookmark
Add the song that is currently playing
to your bookmarks list.
✽✽
NOTICE
• You can view your bookmarked
songs on your online Pandora
®
profile. Go to pandora.com, then
go to [Your profile] above the
player. That will bring up a page
with your stations and book-
marked songs.
• The settings of this function can-
not be reset.
(7) Shared Station
Indicate that the station is already
shared.
✽✽
NOTICE
Thumbs Up/Down is not available
for shared stations.
Audio system
345
Playback
Press the [MEDIA] button, and
select [Pandora].
✽✽
NOTICE
• Pandora
®
: Connect a smartphone
to listen to Pandora
®
Radio.
• Apple devices must be connected
via USB cable and Android
devices must be connected via
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology in
order to run Pandora
®
.
Menu
Press the [MENU] button, and select
the desired function.
• Quit: Exit Pandora
®
mode and
return to previous audio mode.
• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-
tings can be changed.
Audio system
535
Phone
✽✽
NOTICE - Using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Phone
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology is
a near-field wireless networking
technology that uses the 2.4 GHz
frequency to connect various
devices within a certain distance
wirelessly.
• The technology is used in PCs,
peripherals, Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phones, tablet PCs,
household appliances and automo-
biles. Devices supporting Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology can exchange
data at high speeds without physi-
cal cable connections.
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree devices enable conven-
ient access to phone functions
through cell phones equipped with
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
• Some Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices may not be supported by
the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree function.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology is connected and calls
are attempted through a connect-
ed cell phone from outside the
vehicle, the call is connected
through the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree function of
the vehicle.
• Please be sure to disconnect the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree function through your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device or the audio screen.
• The Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree function helps drivers
to drive safely. By connecting a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology-
enabled phone to the vehicle’s
audio system, phone calls can be
made and received through the
audio system and contacts can be
managed. Consult the user manu-
al before use.
• Excessive manipulation of con-
trols while driving, making it diffi-
cult to pay attention to the road
ahead, can lead to accidents. Do
not operate the device excessively
while driving.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Looking at the screen for a pro-
longed time increases the risk of
accidents. Keep time spent looking
at the screen to a minimum.
Audio system
365
Precautions when connecting Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology devices
• The vehicle supports the following
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
functions.Some
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices may not sup-
port some functions.
1)
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree phone calls
2) Operations during a call (Private,
Switch, Out Vol.controls)
3) Download call history saved to
the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device
4) Download contacts saved to the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device
5) Automatic contacts/call history
download when
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology is connected
6) Automatic
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device connection
when the vehicle is started
7)
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio streaming playback
• Before connecting the audio sys-
tem to your device, make sure your
device supports
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
• Even if your device supports
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology, a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
connection cannot be established
if the device’s
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology function is switched
off. Search and connect with the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
function enabled.
• Pair or connect
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices to the audio
system with the vehicle at a standstill.
• If a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
connection is lost due to abnormal
conditions while a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device is con-
nected (communication range
exceeded, device power OFF,
communication errors, etc.), the
disconnected
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is searched for
and automatically reconnected.
• If you want to disable the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device auto-connect function, turn
the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
function OFF on your device.Consult
the user manuals for individual
devices to see whether
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology is supported.
• Handsfree call quality and volume
may vary depending on the type of
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device.
• Some
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices are subject to intermittent
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
connection failures. In this case,
use the following method.
1) Turn the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology function off on your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device ➟ Turn it on and try
again.
2) Delete the paired device from
both the audio system and
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device, then pair again.
3)Power down your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device ➟
Turn it on and try again.
4) Completely remove the battery
from your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device; reinsert it,
reboot, and attempt connection.
5) Restart the vehicle and reat-
tempt connection.
Audio system
537
Pairing a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device
Information on pairing Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology devices
• Pairing refers to the process of
pairing
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology cell phones or devices
with the system prior to connec-
tion.This is a necessary procedure
for
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
connection and usage.
• Up to five devices can be paired.
• Pairing
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is not allowed
while vehicle is moving.
Pairing the first Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device
Select the [PHONE] button on the
audio system or the [CALL] button
on the steering wheel remote control
➟ Search for the vehicle from the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device, and pair ➟ Enter the passkey
on the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device or approve passkey ➟
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology pair-
ing completed.
1. When the [PHONE] button on the
audio or the [CALL] button on the
steering wheel remote control is
pressed, the following screen is dis-
played.Devices can now be paired.
(1)Vehicle Name: Searched name in
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device.
✽✽
NOTICE
The vehicle name in the image above
is an example. Refer to your device
for the actual name of your device.
2. Search for available
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology devices in
the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
menu of your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device (cell phone,
etc.).
3. Confirm that the vehicle name in
your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device matches the vehicle name
shown on the audio screen, then
select it.
Audio system
385
4. For devices that require passkey
confirmation, the following screen
is shown on the audio system. A
6-digit passkey input screen is
shown in the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device.
- After confirming that the 6-digit
passkey on the audio screen and
the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device are identical, press [OK] in
your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device.
✽✽
NOTICE
The 6-digit passkey in the image
above is an example. Refer to your
vehicle for the actual passkey
Pairing a second Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technologydevice
Press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button
on the audio system ➟ Select
[Bluetooth] ➟ Select [Connections]
➟ Select [Add New Device].
- The pairing procedure from this
point is identical to [Pairing the first
Bluetooth device].
✽✽
NOTICE
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
standby mode lasts for three min-
utes. If a device is not paired with-
in three minutes, pairing is can-
celed. Start over from the begin-
ning.
• For most Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices, a connection
is established automatically after
pairing. Some devices, however,
require separate confirmation
when connecting after pairing. Be
sure to check your Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device after
pairing to confirm that it has con-
nected.
Audio system
539
Connecting Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices
If there are no connected devices
Select the [PHONE] button on the
audio system or the [CALL] button in
the steering wheel remote control ➟
List of paired
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices ➟ Select the
desired
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device from the list ➟ Connect
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
If there are connected devices
Select the [PHONE] button on the
audio system ➟ Select [Settings] ➟
Select [Connections] ➟ Select
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device
to connect ➟ Select [Connect] ➟
Connect
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Only one Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device can be connect-
ed at a time.
• When a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is connected,
other devices cannot be paired.
Accepting/rejecting phone calls
Receiving phone calls with
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology connected.
(1)Caller name: If the caller number
is in your contacts, the correspon-
ding name is displayed.
(2) Incoming phone number: Incoming
phone number is displayed.
(3)Accept: Accept call.
(4)Reject: Reject call.
Audio system
405
✽✽
NOTICE
• When the incoming call screen is
displayed, audio mode and the set-
tings screen cannot be shown.
Only call volume control is sup-
ported.
• Some Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices may not support the call
reject function.
• Some Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices may not support the phone
number display function.
Operation during calls
Incoming call with
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology connected ➟
Select [Accept].
(1) Call duration: Call duration display.
(2) Caller name: If the caller number is
in your contacts, the corresponding
name is displayed.
(3) Incoming phone number: Incoming
phone number is displayed.
(4) Private: Call is transferred to a cell
phone.
(5)End: End call.
(6)Mute: Block outgoing voice.
Menu
Press the [MENU] button, and select
the desired function.
• Switch: Switch between calls if
connected to two or more calls.
• Outgoing Volume: Adjust outgoing
voice volume.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Some Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices may not support the
Private function.
• The outgoing voice volume may
vary depending on the type of
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device. If the outgoing voice vol-
ume is too high or low, adjust the
Out Vol.
• The Switch menu will only be dis-
played if connected to two or more
calls.
Audio system
541
Favorites
Select the [PHONE] button on the
audio system ➟ Select [Favorites] ➟
Favorites list displayed.
(1)Add to Favorites: Add a down-
loaded phone number to
favorites.
(2)Favorites list: A list of paired
favorites is displayed
Connect a call when selected.
Menu
Press the [MENU] button, and select
the desired function.
• Delete: Delete a saved favorite.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Up to 20 favorites can be paired
for each paired Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device.
• Favorites can be accessed when
the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device they were paired from is
connected.
• The audio system does not down-
load favorites from Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology devices.
Favorites must be newly saved
before use.
• To add to favorites, contacts must
be downloaded first.
• Saved favorites are not updated
even if the contacts of the connected
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device are changed. In this case,
favorites need to be deleted and
added again.
Call history
Select the [PHONE] button on the
audio system ➟ Select [Call history]
➟ Call history is displayed.
(1)Call history: Display the down-
loaded call history list.
Connect a call when selected.
(2)Call duration: Display the time the
call was connected.
Audio system
425
Menu
Press the [MENU] button, and select
the desired function.
• All Calls: Display all call history.
• Missed Calls: Display missed calls.
• Dialed Calls: Display dialed calls.
• Received Calls: Display received
calls.
• Download: Download call history
from connected
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Up to 50 dialed, received and
missed calls are saved.
• When the latest call history is
received, the existing call history is
deleted.
Contacts
Select the [PHONE] button on the
audio system ➟ Select [Contacts] ➟
Select letter (ABC) ➟ Contacts dis-
played.
(1)Contacts: Display downloaded
contacts.
If one phone number is saved, the
number will be dialed when
selected.
If two or more phone numbers are
saved, a list of saved numbers will
be displayed when selected.
Menu
Press the [MENU] button, and select
the desired function.
• Download: Download contacts
from connected
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Up to 2,000 contacts can be saved.
• In some cases, additional confir-
mation from your Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device is nec-
essary when downloading con-
tacts. If downloading of contacts
unsuccessful, consult your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device’s settings or the audio
screen to approve the download.
• Contacts without phone numbers
are not displayed.
Settings
Select the [PHONE] button on the
audio ➟ Select [Settings]
- For phone setup, refer to Setup
page.
Audio system
543
Siri
✽✽
NOTICE - Using Siri
• If you want to use Siri, you have to
connect your iOS device to multi-
media system through Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology. (Please
check whether your iOS device
supports Siri and turning Siri On)
• If the iOS version is changed, the
functions and response may be dif-
ferent according to the iOS device
and the latest version.
• Siri automatically stops in the fol-
lowing events.
1) Outgoing and incoming phone
calls.
2) Media (USB, etc.) is connected.
(Siri mode is maintained when
iPod®s are connected)
3) Rear camera is activated
(option).
4) Vehicle is started or engine is
turned off.
5) Screen transition buttons, such
as RADIO or MEDIA, are
selected.
(Continued)
(Continued)
6) When a pop-up message is dis-
played on the screen due to
accidental execution of Siri.
• The microphone is located above
the driver’s seat. To ensure proper
Siri, state your voice while main-
taining proper driving posture.
Starting Siri
Press the [VOICE] button on the
steering wheel remote control to
start Siri and see the screen.
(1)Speak: Re-start Siri.
(2)Exit: End Siri.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Functions and feedbacks from
voice commands via Siri are exe-
cuted in the iOS device.
• The Audio system only supports
“Phone” related functions, other
functions will be performed in
your iOS device.
Audio system
445
Setup
Access Display, Sound, Date/Time,
Bluetooth, System and Display Off
settings.
Select the [SETUP/CLOCK] button
on the audio system.
Display
Select the [SETUP/CLOCK] button on
the audio system ➟ Select [Display].
• Mode: Audio screen brightness
can be adjusted to the time of day.
• Illumination: The brightness of the
audio screen can be changed.
• Screen Saver: Set the information
displayed when the audio system
is switched off or the screen is
turned off.
Sound
Select the [SETUP/CLOCK] button
on the audio system ➟ Select
[Sound].
• Position: Sound balance and pan-
ning can be adjusted.
• Tone: Sound tone color can be
adjusted.
• Speed Dependent Volume:
Automatically adjust volume based
on vehicle speed.
Date/Time
Select the [SETUP/CLOCK] button
on the audio system ➟ Select
[Date/Time].
• Set Time:Set the time displayed on
the audio screen.
• Time Format: Choose between 12-
hour and 24-hour time formats.
• Set Date: Set the date displayed on
the audio screen.
Bluetooth
Select the [SETUP/CLOCK] button
➟ Select [Bluetooth].
• Connections: Control pairing, dele-
tion, connection and disconnection
of
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices.
• Auto Connection Priority: Set the
connection priority of
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology devices when
the vehicle is started.
• Download Contacts: Contacts can
be downloaded from connected
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices.
• Bluetooth Voice Prompts: Play or
mute voice prompts for
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device pair-
ing, connection and errors.
Audio system
545
✽✽
NOTICE
• When paired devices are deleted,
the call history and contacts of the
device saved to the audio system
are deleted.
• For Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
connections with low connection
priority, some time may be
required for the connection to be
established.
• Contacts can be downloaded only
from the currently connected
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device.
• If no Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device is connected, the download
contacts button is disabled.
• If the language setting is Korean,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
voice prompts are not supported.
System
Select the [SETUP/CLOCK] button
on the audio system ➟ Select
[System].
• Memory Information: View My
Music memory usage.
• Language: Change the user lan-
guage.
• Default: Reset the audio system.
• System Information: At the System
Information screen, Software ver-
sion information, updates are avail-
able.
- System Update: At the System
Information screen, insert the
USB memory with the latest file
downloaded, and then select the
[Update] to begin updating. The
system with then reboot auto-
matically.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The system resets to the default
values, and all saved data and set-
tings are lost.
• This product needs supplemented
software updates and additional
functions, which collectively may
take some time to complete,
depending on the amount of data.
• If the Power is disconnected or the
USB is removed during an update,
the data might be damaged. Please
wait until the update is complete
while engine is on.
Display Off
To prevent glare, the screen can be
turned off with the audio system in
operation.
Select the [SETUP/CLOCK] button
on the audio system ➟ Select
[Display Off].
✽✽
NOTICE
Use ‘Screen Saver’ to set the infor-
mation to be displayed when the
screen is turned off.
Audio system
465
AUDIO (With Touch Screen)
B2H4G0000EU
(With
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology)
■ Type B
Audio system
547
Feature of Your Audio
Head unit
❈ The actual features in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
(1) LCD screen
• Tap the screen to select a button.
(2) RADIO
• Start FM, AM and SiriusXM.
(3) MEDIA
• Select USB(iPod
®
),
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology(BT) Audio,
AUX, My Music or Pandora.
• Display the media menu when two or
more media are connected or when
the [MEDIA] button is pressed in
media mode.
(4) PHONE
• Start
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Phone mode.
(5) POWER/VOL knob
• Turn to adjust the volume.
• Press to turn the device on or off.
(6) SEEK/TRACK
• Search for frequencies in radio
mode.
• Change the current song in media
mode.
Audio system
485
(7) DISP
• Turn the display on or off.
(8) CLOCK
• Display the time/date/day.
(9) SETUP
• Access Display, Sound, Date/Time,
Bluetooth, Screen Saver, System
and Display Off settings.
(10) TUNE knob
• Turn to navigate through the sta-
tions/songs list.
• Press to select an item.
(11) RESET
• Shutdown and restart the system.
Audio system
549
Steering wheel remote control
❈ The actual features in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
(1)MODE
• Press the button to change the
mode in the following order: Radio
➟ Media.
• Press and hold the button to turn
off.
(2)VOLUME
• Press to adjust the volume.
(3)UP/DOWN
• Press the button in radio mode to
search Presets.
• Press and hold the button in radio
mode to search frequencies.
• Press the button in media mode to
change the current song.
• Press and hold the button in media
mode to quick search through
songs.
(4)VOICE
• Pressing the button
- If Siri is not active: Starts Siri.
- If Siri is active: Re-starts Siri.
• Pressing and holding the button:
Siri is deactivated.
(5)CALL
• Pressing the button
- If not in
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree mode or
receiving a phone call.
First press: Display Dial Number
screen.
Second press: Automatically dis-
play the most recently Dialed call
number.
Third press: Dial the phone num-
ber entered.
- Press in the Incoming Call notifi-
cation screen to accept the
phone call.
- Press in
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree mode to
switch to the waiting call.
• Pressing and holding the button
- If not in
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree mode or
receiving a phone call, the most
recently Dialed Call number is
dialed.
- Press in
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree mode to
transfer the call to your cell
phone.
- Press in cell phone mode to
switch to
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree mode.
(6)END
• Press in
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree mode to
end the phone call.
• Press in the incoming call screen
to reject the call.
Audio system
505
• Adjust the volume to levels that
allow the driver to hear sounds
from outside of the vehicle. Driving
in a state where external sounds
cannot be heard may lead to acci-
dents.
• Pay attention to the volume setting
when turning the device on. A sud-
den output of extreme volume
upon turning the device on could
lead to hearing impairment.(Adjust
the volume to a suitable levels
before turning off the device.)
• If you want to change the position
of device installation, please
inquire with your place of purchase
or service maintenance center.
Technical expertise is required to
install or disassemble the device.
• Turn on the car ignition before
using this device. Do not operate
the audio system for long periods
of time with the ignition turned off
as such operations may lead to
battery discharge.
• In case of product malfunction,
please contact your place of pur-
chase or After Service center.
• Placing the audio system within an
electromagnetic environment may
result in noise interference.
WARNING - Driver dis-
traction
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle con-
trol that may lead to an acci-
dent, severe personal injury,
and death. The driver's primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver's
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a
vehicle or which are not permis-
sible by law should never be
used during operation of the
vehicle.
CAUTION - LCD Monitor
Do not subject the device to
severe shock or impact. Direct
pressure onto the front side of
the monitor may cause damage
to the LCD or touch screen.
Audio system
551
CAUTION
• When cleaning the device,
make sure to turn off the
audio system and use a dry
and smooth cloth.
• Do not place beverages close
to the audio system. Spilling
beverages may lead to system
malfunction.
• Never use tough materials,
chemical cloths, or solvents
(alcohol, benzene, thinners,
etc.) as such materials may
damage the device panel or
cause color/quality deteriora-
tion.
• Prevent caustic solutions
such as perfume and cosmet-
ic oil from contacting the
dashboard because they may
cause damage or discol-
oration.
WARNING - Antenna
Do not touch the antenna dur-
ing thunder or lightening as
such acts may lead to lightning
induced electric shock.
WARNING - Driver
Distraction
• Do not stare at the screen
while driving. Staring at the
screen for prolonged periods
of time could lead to traffic
accidents.
• Using the phone while driving
may lead to a lack of attention
of traffic conditions and
increase the likelihood of acci-
dents. Use the phone feature
after parking the vehicle.
WARNING - Audio System
• Do not disassemble, assem-
ble, or modify the audio sys-
tem. Such acts could result in
fire or electric shock.
• Exercise caution not to spill
water or introduce foreign
objects into the device. Such
acts could lead to smoke, fire,
or product malfunction.
Audio system
525
Information on status icons
Icons showing audio status are shown in the upper-right
corner of the screen.
Icon Description
Mute Mute engaged
Battery
Remaining battery life of a connected
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device
Handsfree +
Audio streaming
connection
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Handsfree
call and audio streaming available
Handsfree
connection
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Handsfree
call available
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
audio streaming
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology audio
streaming available
Downloading
contacts
Downloading contacts through
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology wireless communications
Downloading
call history
Downloading call history through
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology wireless communications
Line busy Phone call in progress
Mute mic
Mic muted during a call
(caller cannot hear your voice)
Phone signal
strength
Display the phone signal strength for a cell
phone connected by
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
Audio system
553
Radio
You can listen to FM, AM and
SiriusXM radio.
(1) Band
Switch between FM, AM and
SiriusXM.
(2) Presets
Change the preset number on the
main screen.
(3) List
Display all available stations.
(4) Menu
Navigate to the menu screen.
(5) Presets 1~40
Save or listen to favorite stations.
Switching between FM, AM and
SiriusXM
• Press the [RADIO] button on the
audio system to switch between
FM, AM and SiriusXM.
• Press the [Band] on the screen to
switch between FM, AM and
SiriusXM.
Searching frequencies
Searching frequencies by pressing
the [SEEK/TRACK] button on the
product.
< Presets >
By pressing [< Presets >], the but-
tons for Presets 1~40 displayed on
the screen can be changed.
Presets 1~40
Press the button to listen to a preset.
Press and hold the button number to
save the current station. If the slot is
empty, simply pressing saves the
station to the slot.
List
A list of all available stations is dis-
played. Press the desired station.
Favorite stations can be saved to
[Presets] by pressing the [+].
Menu
Press the [Menu], and select the
desired function.
• Presets: Save up to 40 frequently
used stations.
To listen to a preset, press the
desired station.
Press and hold the desired slot
from 1 through 40. This saves the
current station in the selected slot.
If the slot is empty, simply pressing
saves the station to the slot.
• Scan: All stations available in the
current location of the vehicle are
played for five seconds each.
• Information: View detailed station
information.
• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-
tings can be changed.
• Station Info: Set whether to receive
station information such as Station
Name, Program Type or Information.
Audio system
545
✽✽
NOTICE - SiriusXM
®
Satellite
Radio information
• Satellite Radio channels:
Enjoy SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with a 3-month trial subscription
to the Sirius Select package. You’ll
get over variable channels, includ-
ing commercialfree music, plus all
your favorite sports, exclusive
talk, entertainment, and a selec-
tion of premium programming.
For more information and a com-
plete list of SiriusXM channels,
visit siriusxm.com in the United
States, siriusxm.ca in Canada, or
call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
• Satellite Radio reception factors:
To receive the satellite signal, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
satellite radio antenna located on
the roof of your vehicle. The vehi-
cle roof provides the best location
for an unobstructed, open view of
the sky, a requirement of a satellite
radio system. Like AM/FM, there
are several factors that can affect
satellite radio reception perform-
ance:
(Continued)
(Continued)
- Antenna obstructions: For opti-
mal reception performance, keep
the antenna clear of snow and
ice build-up and keep luggage
and other material as far away
from the antenna as possible.
• SiriusXM Satellite Radio service:
SiriusXM is a subscription-based
satellite radio service that broad-
casts music, sports, news and
entertainment programming to
radio receivers, which are avail-
able for installation in motor vehi-
cles or factory installed, as well as
for the home, portable and wire-
less devices, and through an Internet
connection on a personal computer.
Vehicles that are equipped with a
factory installed SiriusXM Satellite
Radio system include:
- Hardware and an introductory
trial subscription term, which
begins on the date of sale or lease
of the vehicle.
- For a small upgrade fee, access to
SiriusXM music channels, and
other select channels over the
Internet using any computer con-
nected to the Internet (U.S. cus-
tomers only).
(Continued)
(Continued)
• SiriusXM services require a sub-
scription sold separately, or as a
package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc.
If you decide to continue service
after your trial, the subscription
plan you choose will automatically
renew thereafter and you will be
charged according to your chosen
payment method at then-current
rates. Fees and taxes apply. To
cancel you must call SiriusXM at
1-866-635-2349. See SiriusXM
Customer Agreement for complete
terms at www.siriusxm.com.
SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data
services are available only in the
48 contiguous states, DC and
Puerto Rico (with coverage limita-
tions). SiriusXM satellite service is
also available in Canada; see
www.siriusxm. ca. All fees and
programming subject to change.
Sirius, XM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of Sirius
XM Radio Inc.
Audio system
555
SiriusXM
(1) Band
Switch between FM, AM and
SiriusXM.
(2) Presets
Change the preset number on the
main screen.
(3) List
Display all channels.
(4) Menu
Navigate to the menu screen.
(5) Presets 1~40
Save or listen to favorite channels.
(6) Play Live
Switches to the live broadcast mode.
(7) Skip Backward
Repeats the previously broadcasted
program.
- Holding for less than 0.8 seconds:
Moves to the previous segment.
- Holding for more than 0.8 seconds:
Moves to the previous 5 seconds.
(8) Play/Pause
Pauses/plays the current broadcast-
ing program.
(9) Skip Forward
Moves to the next segment.
Switching between FM, AM and
SiriusXM
• Press the [RADIO] button on the
audio system to switch between
FM, AM and SiriusXM.
• Press the [Band] on the screen to
switch between FM, AM and
SiriusXM.
Searching channels
Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to
search channels.
< Presets >
By pressing [< Presets >], the but-
tons for Presets 1~40 displayed on
the screen can be changed.
Presets 1~40
Press the button to listen to a preset.
Press and hold the button number to
save the current channel.
Audio system
565
List
A list of all channels is displayed.
Press the desired channel.
Favorite channels can be saved to
[Presets] by pressing the [+].
Menu
Press the [Menu], and select the
desired function.
• Presets: Save up to 40 frequently
used channels.
To listen to a preset, press the
desired channel.
Press and hold the desired slot
from 1 through 40. This saves the
current channel in the selected
slot.
If the slot is empty, simply pressing
saves the channel to the slot.
• Categories: Channels can be
searched by category.
• Direct Tune: The desired channel
can be selected by entering num-
bers.
• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-
tings can be changed.
• Tag Song: Tag the current song
information.
When an Apple device (iPhone
®
,
iPod
®
) is connected, tagged song
information is sent automatically to
the connected device.
✽✽
NOTICE
Up to 50 songs can be tagged.
• Scan: All channels available in the
vehicle's current location are
played for ten seconds each.
• Program Schedule: View the pro-
gram schedule.
• Featured Favorites: The Featured
Favorites feature allows SiriusXM™
to broadcast additional presets.
- Example 1: During holidays,
“Holiday Music” might include all
SiriusXM™ channels that are
playing holiday music for easy
access by users.
Multiple sets of Featured Favorites
data can be broadcast by
SiriusXM™ and can change from
time to time.
• Information: View detailed channel
information.
• Category Lock: Search or scan
channels in the current category
only.
Audio system
557
Media
MP3
Supported audio formats
✽✽
NOTICE
File formats other than the formats
above may not be recognized or
playable. Information such as file-
name may not be displayed.
Range of supported compressed file
types
1. Bitrate range (Kbps)
2. Sampling frequency (Hz)
• The sound quality of MP3/WMA
compressed files may vary depend-
ing on the bitrate. (A higher bitrate
can have better sound quality.)
• The product only recognizes files
with the MP3 or WMA extension.
Files without one of these exten-
sions are not recognized.
3. Number of recognizable folders
and files
• Folders: 2,000 for USB
• Files: 6,000 for USB
• No recognition limit for folder hier-
archies
Audio system
585
4. Character display range (Unicode)
• Filenames: Up to 64 English char-
acters (64 Korean characters)
• Foldernames: Up to 32 English
characters (32 Korean characters)
Languages supported (Unicode sup-
port)
• Korean: 2,604 characters
• English: 94 characters
• Common Chinese characters:
4,888 characters
• Special symbols: 986 characters
✽✽
NOTICE
Japanese/Simplified Chinese char-
acters are not supported.
Audio system
559
✽✽
NOTICE - Using the USB
Devices
• Starting the vehicle while a USB
device is connected can damage
the device. Please disconnect USB
devices before starting the vehicle.
• Starting the vehicle or stopping
the engine while an external USB
device is connected can result in
failure of the external USB device
to operate.
• Be cautious of static electricity
when connecting/disconnecting
external USB devices.
• An encrypted MP3 player is not
recognized when connected as an
external device.
• External USB devices may not be
recognized, depending on the state
of the external USB device.
• Only products with byte/sectors
formatted at 4 KB or lower are
recognized.
• Only USB devices in FAT12/16/32
format are recognized; NTFS and
ExFAT file systems are not recog-
nized.
• Some USB devices are not recog-
nized due to compatibility issues.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not touch the USB connections.
• Connecting and disconnecting
USB devices rapidly over a short
period of time can cause equip-
ment failure.
• Abnormal sounds may be audible
when the USB device is discon-
nected.
• Turn the audio off before connect-
ing or disconnecting external USB
devices.
• Recognition may take longer
depending on the type, capacity or
file format of the external USB
device. This is not a product mal-
function.
• Use of USB devices for purposes
other than playing music files is
prohibited.
• Image display and video playback
are not supported.
• Use of USB accessories, including
charge and heat though the USB
I/F, can lead to reduced product
performance or malfunctions. Do
not use USB devices or accessories
for these purposes.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Use of aftermarket USB hubs and
extension cables can result in the
vehicle’s audio system failing to
recognize your USB device.
Connect the USB device directly to
the multimedia port of your vehi-
cle.
• When using high-capacity USB
devices with logical drive divi-
sions, only files saved on the high-
est level logical drive can be
played.
If applications are loaded on a
USB drive, file playback may fail.
• Some MP3 players, cell phones,
digital cameras, etc. (USB devices
that are not recognized as mobile
storage) may not operate normally
when connected.
• USB charging may not be sup-
ported by some mobile devices.
• Operation is guaranteed only for
standard (Metal Cover Type) USB
Memory drives.
• Operation of HDD, CF, SD and
memory stick devices is not guar-
anteed.
(Continued)
Audio system
605
(Continued)
• DRM (Digital Rights Management)
files cannot be played.
• SD-type USB memory, CF-type
USB memory, and other USB
memory devices that require
adapters for connection are not
supported.
• Proper operation of USB HDDs or
USB drives with connectors that
loosen due to vehicle vibrations is
not guaranteed. (iStick, etc.)
• USB products that are
used as key chains or
cell phone accessories
may damage the USB
jack and affect proper
file playback. Please refrain from
use. Use only products with plug
connectors, as shown in the follow-
ing illustration.
• When MP3 devices or cell phones
are connected simultaneously
through AUX, BT Audio and USB
modes, a popping noise or mal-
function may occur.
Audio system
561
USB
(1) Repeat
Enable/disable repeat.
(2) Shuffle
Enable/disable shuffle play.
(3) List
View a list of all songs.
(4) Menu
Navigate to the menu screen.
(5) Album Image
View song info.
(6) Pause
Pause or play music.
(7) Playback progress
Press to skip to the desired location.
Playback
• Press the [MEDIA] button, and
select [USB].
• Connect a USB drive to the USB
port to automatically play files on
the USB drive.
Changing songs
• Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button
to play the previous or next song.
• Press and hold the [SEEK/TRACK]
button to rewind or fast forward the
currently playing song.
• Search songs by turning TUNE
knob, and press the knob to play.
Selecting songs from a list
Press the [List] to see a list of songs
available for play.
Select and play the desired song.
Repeat play
Press the [Repeat] to enable or dis-
able ‘Repeat all’, ‘Repeat current
song’, ‘Repeat folder’ or ‘Repeat cat-
egory’.
• Repeat all: All songs in the
playlist are repeated.
• Repeat current song: The cur-
rently playing song is repeated.
• Repeat folder: All songs in the
current folder are repeated.
• Repeat category: Repeat all
songs in the current category.
Audio system
625
✽✽
NOTICE
The repeat folder function is avail-
able only when songs are playing
from the [File] category under
[List].
Shuffle play
Press the [Shuffle] to enable/disable
‘Shuffle’, ‘Shuffle folder’ or ‘Shuffle
category’ play.
• Shuffle: Songs are played in
random order.
• Shuffle folder: Songs within
the current folder are played in ran-
dom order.
• Shuffle category: Songs within
the current category are played in
random order.
Menu
Press the [Menu], and select the
desired function.
• Save to My Music: Songs on your
USB device can be saved to My
Music.
(1)File: Select a file to save
.
(2)Mark All: Select all files.
(3)Unmark All: Deselect all files.
(4)Save: Save the selected files.
- Select the files you want to save,
and press the [Save]. This saves
the selected files to My Music.
- If Siri is activated, phone calls
are received or made while sav-
ing, saving will be canceled.
- Up to 6,000 files can be saved.
- The currently playing file on the
USB device cannot be changed
while saving.
- My Music cannot be used while
saving.
- Up to 700 MB can be saved.
• Information: Detailed information
on the currently playing song is dis-
played.
• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-
tings can be changed.
Audio system
563
✽✽
NOTICE - Using the iPod
®
Devices
• To use the audio system’s iPod
®
control function, use the dedicated
cable provided with your iPod
®
.
• Connecting the iPod
®
to the vehi-
cle during play may result in a
loud noise that lasts about one to
two seconds. Connect the iPod
®
to
the vehicle after stopping or paus-
ing play.
• Connect the iPod
®
with the vehicle
in the ACC ON state to begin
charging.
• When connecting the iPod
®
cable,
be sure to fully push the cable into
the port.
• When EQ effects are enabled
simultaneously on external
devices, such as iPod
®
s and the
audio system, the EQ effects may
overlap, causing sound quality
deterioration or distortion.
Deactivate the EQ function for all
external devices, if possible.
• Noise may occur when your iPod
®
or the AUX port is connected.
Disconnect and store separately
when not in use.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• There may be noise if the audio
system is used with an iPod
®
or
AUX external device connected to
the power jack. In these cases, dis-
connect the iPod
®
or external
device from the power jack.
• Play may be interrupted, or device
malfunctions may occur depend-
ing on the characteristics of your
iPod
®
/iPhone
®
.
• Play may fail if your iPhone
®
is
connected through both
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
and USB. In this case, select Dock
connector or Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology on your iPhone
®
to
change the sound output settings.
• If your software version does not
support the communication proto-
col or your iPod
®
is not recognized
due to device failure, anomalies or
defects, iPod
®
mode cannot be
used.
• iPod
®
nano (5th generation)
devices may not be recognized if
the battery is low. Charge suffi-
ciently before use.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The search and song play order in
the iPod
®
device may be different
from the search order in the audio
system.
• If the iPod
®
has failed due to an
internal defect, please reset the
iPod
®
(consult your iPod
®
manu-
al).
• Depending on the software ver-
sion, the iPod
®
may fail to sync
with the system. If the media is
removed or disconnected before
recognition, the previous mode
may not be restored (iPad
®
cannot
be charged).
• Cables other than the 1-meter
cable provided with iPod
®
/iPhone
®
products may not be recognized.
• When other music apps are used
on your iPod
®
, the system sync
function may fail due to malfunc-
tion of the iPod
®
application.
Audio system
645
iPod
®
(1) Repeat
Enable/disable repeat.
(2) Shuffle
Enable/disable shuffle play.
(3) List
View a list of all songs.
(4) Menu
Navigate to the menu screen.
(5) Album Image
View song info.
(6) Pause
Pause or play music.
(7) Playback progress
Press to skip to the desired location.
Playback
• Connect your iPod
®
to the audio
USB port, press the [MEDIA] but-
ton, and select [iPod
®
].
Changing songs
• Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button
to play the previous or next song.
• Press and hold the [SEEK/TRACK]
button to rewind or fast forward the
currently playing song.
• Search songs by turning the TUNE
knob, and press the knob to play.
Selecting songs from a list
Press the [List] to see a list of songs
available for play.
Select and play the desired song.
Repeat play
Press the [Repeat] to enable or dis-
able ‘Repeat category’, ‘Repeat cur-
rent song’.
• Repeat category: Repeat all
songs in the current category.
• Repeat current song: The cur-
rently playing song is repeated.
Shuffle play
Press the [Shuffle] to enable/disable
‘Shuffle category’ play.
• Shuffle category: Songs within
the current category are played in
random order.
Menu
Press the [Menu], and select the
desired function.
• Information: Detailed info on the
currently playing song is displayed.
• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-
tings can be changed.
Audio system
565
When other music programs are run-
ning
When songs saved on your iPod
®
are playing through a separate music
app, the following screen is dis-
played.
(1)Play/Pause: Pause or play music
.
(2)Play iPod
®
Files: Play music
saved on your iPod
®
.
(3)Album Image:View playback info.
✽✽
NOTICE
Operation cannot be carried out
correctly due to iPod
®
application
malfunction.
Playing iPod files
®
• Select [Play iPod
®
Files] to play
songs saved on your iPod
®
.
If there are no songs saved on your
iPod
®
, the [Play iPod
®
Files] is dis-
abled.
Audio system
665
✽✽
NOTICE - Using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio mode can only be used if a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology-
enabled phone is connected. Only
devices that support Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology audio can be
used.
• If the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology-enabled phone is dis-
connected during play, the music
stops.
• When the TRACK UP/DOWN
buttons are used during
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio streaming, a popping noise
or sound interruptions may occur,
depending on the cell phone
device.
• Depending on the cell phone
model, the audio streaming func-
tion may not be supported.
• If a phone call is made or received
when music is playing in
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio mode, the call may mix with
the music.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When returning to Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio mode
after ending a call, play might not
resume automatically for some cell
phone models.
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree is a feature that enables
drivers to practice safe driving.
Connecting the car audio system
with a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone allows the user to conve-
niently make calls, receive calls,
and manage the phone book.
Before using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology, carefully
read the contents of this user’s
manual.
• Excessive use or operations while
driving may lead to negligent driv-
ing practices and be the cause of
accidents.
• Do not operate the device exces-
sively while driving.
• Viewing the screen for prolonged
periods of time is dangerous and
may lead to accidents.
• When driving, view the screen only
for short periods of time.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle con-
trol that may lead to an acci-
dent, severe personal injury,
and death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a
vehicle or which are not permis-
sible by law should never be
used during operation of the
vehicle.
Audio system
567
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
(BT) Audio
(1) Repeat
Enable/disable repeat.
(2) Shuffle
Enable/disable shuffle play.
(3) Menu
Navigate to the menu screen.
(4) Play/Pause
Pause or play music.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Some cell phone models may not
support particular functions.
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio volume is synced with cell
phone media volume.
Playback
• Press the [MEDIA] button, and
select [BT Audio].
Changing songs
• Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button
to play the previous or next song.
✽✽
NOTICE
Some cell phones may not support
this function.
Repeat play
Press the [Repeat] to enable or dis-
able ‘Repeat all’, ‘Repeat current
song’ or ‘Repeat category’.
• Repeat all: All songs in the
playlist are repeated.
• Repeat current song: The cur-
rently playing song is repeated.
• Repeat category: Repeat all
songs in the current category.
✽✽
NOTICE
The repeat play function is engaged,
depending on the operation of the
connected Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device.
Shuffle play
Press the [Shuffle] to enable/disable
‘Shuffle’, ‘Shuffle category’ play.
• Shuffle: Songs are played in
random order.
• Shuffle category: Songs within
the current category are played in
random order.
✽✽
NOTICE
The shuffle function is engaged,
depending on the operation of the
connected Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device.
Audio system
685
Menu
Press the [Menu], and select the
desired function.
• Connections: The currently con-
nected
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device can be changed.
• Information: Detailed information
on the currently playing song is dis-
played.
• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-
tings can be changed.
AUX
Running AUX
• Press the [MEDIA] button, and
select [AUX].
• Connect the external device con-
nection jack to the AUX terminal to
run AUX.
(1)Sound Settings: Audio sound set-
tings can be changed.
My Music
(1) Repeat
Enable/disable repeat.
(2) Shuffle
Enable/disable shuffle play.
(3) List
View a list of all songs.
(4) Menu
Navigate to the menu screen.
(5) Album Image
View song info.
Audio system
569
(6) Pause
Pause or play music.
(7) Playback progress
Press to skip to the desired location.
Playback
Press the [MEDIA] button, and
select [My Music].
• My Music cannot be selected if it
does not contain music.
• Check the content of your USB
drive before saving music to My
Music.
Changing songs
Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to
play the previous or next song.
• Press and hold the [SEEK/TRACK]
button to rewind or fast forward the
currently playing song.
• Search songs by turning the TUNE
knob and press the knob to play.
Selecting songs from a list
Press the [List] to see a list of songs
available for play.
• Select and play the desired song.
Repeat play
Press the [Repeat] to enable or dis-
able ‘Repeat all’, ‘Repeat current
song’ or ‘Repeat category’.
• Repeat all: All songs in the
playlist are repeated.
• Repeat current song: The cur-
rently playing song is repeated.
• Repeat category: Repeat all
songs in the current category.
Shuffle play
Press the [Shuffle] to enable/disable
‘Shuffle’, ‘Shuffle category’ play.
• Shuffle: Songs are played in
random order.
• Shuffle category: Songs within
the current category are played in
random order.
Menu
Press the [Menu], and select the
desired function.
• Delete Files: You can delete files
from My Music.
(1)File: Select saved file
.
(2)Mark All: Select all Files.
(3)Unmark All: Deselect all files.
(4)Delete: Delete the selected file(s).
Audio system
705
- Select the file to delete, then
press the [Delete] to delete it.
- If Siri is activated, phone calls
are received or made during
delete, delete will be canceled.
• Add to Playlist: Frequently played
songs can be paired in a [Playlist].
- Songs can be played from the
[Playlist].
• Information: Detailed info on the
currently playing song is displayed.
• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-
tings can be changed.
Delete from Playlist
When a song in the playlist is play-
ing, press the [Menu] and select
[Delete from Playlist].
Select the song to delete, then press
[Delete].
Audio system
571
Pandora
(1) Thumbs Down
If you don’t like the song that is cur-
rently playing, press this button to
skip to the next song and to minimize
the number of songs from similar
genres.
✽✽
NOTICE
Pandora
®
limits the number of times
that you can skip to the next song.
(2) Thumbs Up
If you like the song that is currently
playing, press this button. Pandora
®
will play more songs from the same
genre.
✽✽
NOTICE
The settings of this function cannot
be reset.
(3) Skip
Skip to the next song.
✽✽
NOTICE
Pandora
®
limits the number of times
that you can skip to the next song.
(4) Stations
Display the station list.
(5) Menu
Navigate to the menu screen.
(6) Album Image
View song info.
(7) Pause
Pause or play music.
(8) Shared Station
Indicate that the station is already
shared.
✽✽
NOTICE
Thumbs Up/Down is not available
for shared stations.
Playback
Press the [MEDIA] button, and
select [Pandora].
✽✽
NOTICE
• Pandora
®
: Connect a smartphone
to listen to Pandora
®
Radio
• Apple devices must be connected
via USB cable and Android
devices must be connected via
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology in
order to run Pandora
®
.
Audio system
725
Menu
Press the [Menu] and select the
desired function.
• Bookmark: Add the song that is
currently playing to your book-
marks list.
✽✽
NOTICE
• You can view your bookmarked
songs on your online Pandora
®
profile. Go to pandora.com, then
go to [Your profile] above the
player. That will bring up a page
with your stations and book-
marked songs.
• The settings of this function can-
not be reset.
• Quit: Exit Pandora
®
mode and
return to previous audio mode.
• Information: Detailed info on the
currently playing song is displayed.
• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-
tings can be changed.
Audio system
573
Phone
✽✽
NOTICE - Using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Phone
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology is
a near-field wireless networking
technology that uses the 2.4 GHz
frequency to connect various
devices within a certain distance
wirelessly.
• The technology is used in PCs,
peripherals, Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phones, tablet PCs,
household appliances and automo-
biles. Devices supporting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
can exchange data at high speeds
without physical cable connec-
tions.
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree devices enable conven-
ient access to phone functions
through cell phones equipped with
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
• Some Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices may not be supported by
the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree function.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology is connected and calls
are attempted through a connect-
ed cell phone from outside the
vehicle, the call is connected
through the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree function of
the vehicle.
• Please be sure to disconnect the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree function through your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device or the audio screen.
• The Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree function
helps drivers to drive safely. By
connecting a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology-enabled phone to the
vehicle’s audio system, phone calls
can be made and received through
the audio system and contacts can
be managed. Consult the user
manual before use.
• Excessive manipulation of con-
trols while driving, making it diffi-
cult to pay attention to the road
ahead, can lead to accidents. Do
not operate the device excessively
while driving.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Looking at the screen for a pro-
longed time increases the risk of
accidents. Keep time spent looking
at the screen to a minimum.
Audio system
745
Precautions when connecting Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology devices
• The vehicle supports the following
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
functions. Some
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology devices may
not support some functions.
1)
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree phone calls
2) Operations during a call (Private,
Switch, Out Vol.controls)
3) Download call history saved to
the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device
4) Download contacts saved to the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device
5) Automatic contacts/call history
download when
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology is connected
6) Automatic
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device connection
when the vehicle is started
7)
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio streaming playback
• Before connecting the audio sys-
tem to your device, make sure your
device supports
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
• Even if your device supports
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology, a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
connection cannot be established
if the device’s
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology function is switched off.
Search and connect with the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology function enabled.
• Pair or connect
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices to the audio
system with the vehicle at a standstill.
• If a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
connection is lost due to abnormal
conditions while a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device is connect-
ed (communication range exceed-
ed, device power OFF, communi-
cation errors, etc.), the disconnect-
ed
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device is searched for and auto-
matically reconnected.
• If you want to disable the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device auto-
connect function, turn the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
function OFF on your device.
Consult the user manuals for indi-
vidual devices to see whether
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology is
supported.
• Handsfree call quality and volume
may vary depending on the type of
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device.
• Some
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices are subject to intermittent
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
connection failures. In this case,
use the following method.
1) Turn the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology function off on your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device ➟ Turn it on and try
again.
2) Delete the paired device from
both the audio system and
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device, then pair again.
3)Power down your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device ➟
Turn it on and try again.
4) Completely remove the battery
from your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device; reinsert it,
reboot, and attempt connection.
5) Restart the vehicle and reat-
tempt connection.
Audio system
575
Pairing a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device
Information on pairing Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology devices
• Pairing refers to the process of pair-
ing
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
cell phones or devices with the
system prior to connection. This is
a necessary procedure for
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology connection
and usage.
• Up to five devices can be paired.
Pairing the first Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device
Select the [PHONE] button on the
audio system or the [CALL] button
on the steering wheel remote control
➟ Search for the vehicle from the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device, and pair ➟ Enter the passkey
on the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device or approve passkey ➟
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology pair-
ing completed.
1. When the [PHONE] button on the
audio or the [CALL] button on the
steering wheel remote control is
pressed, the following screen is dis-
played.Devices can now be paired.
(1)Vehicle Name: Searched name in
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device.
✽✽
NOTICE
The vehicle name in the image above
is an example. Refer to your device
for the actual name of your device.
2. Search for available
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology devices in
the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
menu of your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device (cell phone,
etc.).
3. Confirm that the vehicle name in
your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device matches the vehicle name
shown on the audio screen, then
select it.
4. For devices that require passkey
confirmation, the following screen
is shown on the audio system. A
6-digit passkey input screen is
shown in the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device.
- After confirming that the 6-digit
passkey on the audio screen and
the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device are identical, press [OK] in
your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device.
Audio system
765
✽✽
NOTICE
The 6-digit passkey in the image
above is an example. Refer to your
vehicle for the actual passkey.
Pairing a second Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device
Press the [SETUP] button on the
audio system ➟ Select [Bluetooth] ➟
Select [Connections] ➟ Select [Add
New].
- The pairing procedure from this
point is identical to [Pairing the first
Bluetooth device].
✽✽
NOTICE
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
standby mode lasts for three min-
utes. If a device is not paired with-
in three minutes, pairing is can-
celed. Start over from the begin-
ning.
• For most Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices, a connection
is established automatically after
pairing. Some devices, however,
require separate confirmation
when connecting after pairing. Be
sure to check your Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device after
pairing to confirm that it has con-
nected.
Connecting Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices
If there are no connected devices
Select the [PHONE] button on the
audio system or the [CALL] button in
the steering wheel remote control ➟
List of paired
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices ➟ Select the
desired
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device from the list ➟ Connect
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
Audio system
577
If there are connected devices
Select the [PHONE] button on the
audio system ➟ Select [Settings] ➟
Select [Connections] ➟ Select
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device
to connect ➟ Select [Connect] ➟
Connect
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Only one Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device can be connect-
ed at a time.
• When a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is connected,
other devices cannot be paired.
Accepting/rejecting phone calls
Receiving phone calls with
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology con-
nected.
(1)Caller name: If the caller number
is in your contacts, the correspon-
ding name is displayed.
(2) Incoming phone number: Incoming
phone number is displayed.
(3)Accept: Accept call.
(4)Reject: Reject call.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When the incoming call screen is
displayed, audio mode and the set-
tings screen cannot be shown.
Only call volume control is sup-
ported.
• Some Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices may not support the call
reject function.
• Some Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices may not support the phone
number display function.
Audio system
785
Operation during calls
Incoming call with
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology connected ➟
Select [Accept].
(1) Call duration: Call duration display.
(2) Caller name: If the caller number is
in your contacts, the corresponding
name is displayed.
(3) Incoming phone number: Incoming
phone number is displayed.
(4) Keypad: Number keypad for
Automatic Response Service input
is displayed.
(5) Private: Call is transferred to a cell
phone.
(6)Outgoing Volume: Adjust outgo-
ing voice volume.
(7)End: End call.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Some Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices may not support the
Private function.
• The outgoing voice volume may
vary depending on the type of
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device. If the outgoing voice vol-
ume is too high or low, adjust the
Out Vol.
Favorites
Select the [PHONE] button on the
audio system ➟ Select [Favorites] ➟
Favorites list displayed.
(1)Favorites list: A list of paired
favorites is displayed.
Connect a call when selected.
(2)Add to Favorites: Add a down-
loaded phone number to favorites.
(3)Delete: Delete a saved favorites.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Up to 20 favorites can be paired
for each paired Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device.
• Favorites can be accessed when
the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device they were paired from is
connected.
• The audio system does not down-
load favorites from Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology devices.
Favorites must be newly saved
before use.
• To add to favorites, contacts must
be downloaded first.
• Saved favorites are not updated
even if the contacts of the connected
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device are changed. In this case,
favorites need to be deleted and
added again.
Audio system
579
Call history
Select the [PHONE] button on the
audio system ➟ Select [Call history]
➟ Call history is displayed.
(1)Call history: Display the down-
loaded call history list.
Connect a call when selected.
(2)Sort by: Sort by all calls, dialed
calls, received calls or missed calls.
(3)Download: Download call history
from connected
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Up to 50 dialed, received and
missed calls are saved.
• When the latest call history is
received, the existing call history is
deleted.
Contacts
Select the [PHONE] button on the
audio system ➟ Select [Contacts] ➟
Select letter (ABC) ➟ Contacts dis-
played.
(1)Contacts: Display downloaded
contacts.
Connect a call when selected.
(2)Download: Download contacts
from connected
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology devices.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Up to 2,000 contacts can be saved.
• In some cases, additional confir-
mation from your Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device is nec-
essary when downloading con-
tacts. If downloading of contacts
unsuccessful, consult your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device’s settings or the audio
screen to approve the download.
• Contacts without phone numbers
are not displayed.
Audio system
805
Dial
Select the [PHONE] button on the
audio ➟ Select [Dial].
(1)Phone number entry window:The
phone number entered using the
keypad is displayed.
(2)Clear
- Press to delete individual digits.
- Press and hold to delete the
entire phone number.
(3)Keypad: Enter phone number.
(4)
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone name
- The name of the connected
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device is displayed.
- Contacts matching the keypad
number/letter input are displayed.
(5)Call
- Enter and select a phone num-
ber to call.
- Select without entering a phone
number to see the most recent
dialed call.
Setup
Select the [PHONE] button on the
audio ➟ Select [Settings].
- For phone Setup, refer to Setup
page ➟ Select [Bluetooth].
Audio system
581
Siri
✽✽
NOTICE - Using Siri
• If you want to use Siri, you have to
connect your iOS device to multi-
media system through Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology. (Please
check whether your iOS device
supports Siri and turning Siri On)
• If the iOS version is changed, the
functions and response may be dif-
ferent according to the iOS device
and the latest version.
• Siri automatically stops in the fol-
lowing events.
1) Outgoing and incoming phone
calls.
2) Media (USB, etc.) is connected.
(Siri mode is maintained when
iPod
®
s are connected)
3) Rear camera is activated
(option).
4) Vehicle is started or engine is
turned off.
5) Screen transition buttons, such
as RADIO or MEDIA, are
selected.
(Continued)
(Continued)
6) When a pop-up message is dis-
played on the screen due to
accidental execution of Siri.
• The microphone is located above
the driver’s seat. To ensure proper
Siri, state your voice while main-
taining proper driving posture.
Starting Siri
Press the [VOICE] button on the
steering wheel remote control to
start Siri and see the screen.
(1)Speak: Re-start Siri.
(2)Exit: End Siri.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Functions and feedbacks from
voice commands via Siri are exe-
cuted in the iOS device.
• The Audio system only supports
“Phone” related functions, other
functions will be performed in
your iOS device.
Audio system
825
Setup
Access Display, Sound, Date/Time,
Bluetooth, System, Screen Saver
and Display Off settings.
Select the [SETUP] button on the
audio system.
Display
Select the [SETUP] button on the
audio system ➟ Select [Display].
• Mode: Audio screen brightness
can be adjusted to the time of day.
• Illumination: The brightness of the
audio screen can be changed.
Sound
Select the [SETUP] button on the
audio system ➟ Select [Sound].
• Position: Sound balance and pan-
ning can be adjusted.
• Tone: Sound tone color can be
adjusted.
• Speed Dependent Volume:
Automatically adjust volume based
on vehicle speed.
• Beep: Select whether to play a
sound when the screen is touched.
Date/Time
Select the [SETUP] button on the
audio system ➟ Select [Date/Time].
• Set Time:Set the time displayed on
the audio screen.
• Time Format: Choose between 12-
hour and 24-hour time formats.
• Set Date: Set the date displayed on
the audio screen.
Bluetooth
Select the [SETUP] button on the
audio system ➟ Select [Bluetooth].
• Connections: Control pairing, dele-
tion, connection and disconnection
of
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices.
• Auto Connection Priority: Set the
connection priority of
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology devices when
the vehicle is started.
• Download Contacts: Contacts can
be downloaded from connected
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices.
• Bluetooth Voice Prompts: Play or
mute voice prompts for
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device pair-
ing, connection and errors.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When paired devices are deleted,
the call history and contacts of the
device saved to the audio system
are deleted.
• For Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
connections with low connection pri-
ority, some time may be required for
the connection to be established.
(Continued)
Audio system
583
(Continued)
• Contacts can be downloaded only
from the currently connected
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device.
If no Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device is connected, the download
contacts button is disabled.
• If the language setting is Korean,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
voice prompts are not supported.
System
Select the [SETUP] button on the
audio system ➟ Select [System].
• Memory Information: View My
Music memory usage.
• Language: Change the user lan-
guage.
• Default: Reset the audio system.
• System Information: At the System
Information screen, Software version
information, updates are available.
- System Update: At the System
Information screen, insert the
USB memory with the latest file
downloaded, and then select the
[Update] to begin updating. The
system with then reboot auto-
matically.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The system resets to the default
values, and all saved data and set-
tings are lost.
• This product needs supplemented
software updates and additional
functions, which collectively may
take some time to complete,
depending on the amount of data.
• If the Power is disconnected or the
USB is removed during an update,
the data might be damaged. Please
wait until the update is complete
while engine is on.
Screen Saver
Set the information displayed when
the audio system is switched off or
the screen is turned off.
Select the [SETUP] button on the
audio system ➟ Select [Screen
Saver].
• Analog: An analog clock is dis-
played.
• Digital: A digital clock is displayed.
• None: No information is displayed.
Display Off
To prevent glare, the screen can be
turned off with the audio system in
operation.
Select the [SETUP] button on the
audio system ➟ Select [Display Off].
Audio system
845
FCC
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15
of the FCC Rules.These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a resi-
dential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or tel-
evision reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to cor-
rect the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Caution: Any changes or modifications to this device not explicitly approved by manufacturer could void
your authority to operate this equipment.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum 20cm between the radiator and your body.This trans-
mitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter unless authorized to
do so by the FCC.
Declaration of Conformity
Driving your vehicle
• Be sure the exhaust system does not leak. . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Before driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
• Before entering vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
• Necessary inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
• Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Key positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
• Illuminated ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
• Ignition switch position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
• Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Engine start/stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
• Illuminated engine start/stop button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
• Engine start/stop button position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
• Starting the engine with a smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Manual transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
• Manual transaxle operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
• Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Automatic transaxle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
• Automatic transaxle operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
• Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Dual Clutch Transmission (DCT). . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
• Dual clutch transmission operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
• Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
• Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
• Parking brake - Hand type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
• Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
• Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
• Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
• Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
• Good braking practices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Autonomous emergency braking (AEB) . . . . . . . 6-48
• System setting and activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
• AEB warning message and system control. . . . . . . . 6-50
• Brake operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
• Sensor to detect the distance from the vehicle in front
(front radar). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
• System malfunction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
• Limitations of the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Cruise Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
• Cruise control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
• To set cruise control speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
• To increase cruise control set speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
• To decrease the cruising speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
• To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on . . 6-64
• To cancel cruise control, do one of the following . . . 6-65
• To resume cruising speed at more than
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
• To turn cruise control off, do one of the following . . . 6-66
Smart cruise control system (SCC) . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
• Speed setting (SCC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
• Vehicle to vehicle distance setting (SCC) . . . . . . . . . 6-73
• To adjust the sensitivity of smart cruise control . . . 6-77
6
• To convert to cruise control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
• Limitations of the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
Drive mode integrated control system . . . . . . . . . 6-84
Lane departure warning system (LDWS) . . . . . . 6-85
• Warning indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88
• The LDWS does not operate when . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
• The LDWS may not warn you even if the
vehicle leaves the lane, or may warn you even if the
vehicle does not leave the lane when . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
Blind spot detection system (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91
• BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
• RCTA (Rear cross traffic alert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95
• Driver's Attention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97
Foward collision warning system (FCWS) . . . . . 6-99
• FCWS Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99
• Limitations of the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-101
Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103
Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105
• Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105
• Reducing the risk of a rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105
• Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-106
• Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-107
• Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-107
• Driving in the rain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-108
• Driving in flooded areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-108
• Driving off-road. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-109
• Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-109
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-110
• Snowy or icy conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-110
• Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant. . . . . . . . . 6-112
• Check battery and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112
• Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary . . . . . . 6-112
• Check spark plugs and ignition system. . . . . . . . . . 6-112
• To keep locks from freezing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112
• Use approved window washer anti-freeze in system . 6-112
• Don’t let your parking brake freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-113
• Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath . . . 6-113
• Carry emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-113
Vehicle load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-114
• Tire and loading information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-114
• Certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118
Vehicle weight glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-120
• Base curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-120
• Vehicle curb weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-120
• Cargo weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-120
• GAW (Gross axle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-120
• GAWR (Gross axle weight rating). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-120
• GVW (Gross vehicle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-120
• GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . 6-120
6
63
Driving your vehicle
Be sure the exhaust system
does not leak.
The exhaust system should be
checked whenever the vehicle is
raised to change the oil or for any
other purpose. If you hear a change
in the sound of the exhaust or if you
drive over something that strikes the
underneath side of the vehicle, have
the exhaust system checked as soon
as possible by an authorized Kia
dealer.
WARNING - Engine
exhaust
Do not inhale exhaust fumes or
leave your engine running in an
enclosed area for a prolonged
time. Exhaust fumes contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless,
odorless gas that can cause
unconsciousness and death by
asphyxiation.
WARNING - Open tailgate
Do not drive with the tailgate
open. Poisonous exhaust gases
can enter the passenger com-
partment. If you must drive with
the tailgate open proceed as fol-
lows:
1. Close all windows.
2. Open side vents.
3. Set the air intake control at
“Fresh”, the air flow control
at “Floor” or “Face” and the
fan at the highest speed.
CALIFORNIA PROPO-
SITION 65 WARNING
Engine exhaust and a wide vari-
ety of automobile components
and parts, including compo-
nents found in the interior fur-
nishings in a vehicle, contain or
emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause can-
cer and birth defects and repro-
ductive harm. In addition, cer-
tain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain or emit chem-
icals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproduc-
tive harm.
Driving your vehicle
46
Before entering vehicle
• Be sure that all windows, outside
mirror(s), and outside lights are
clean.
• Check the condition of the tires.
• Check under the vehicle for any
sign of leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles
behind you if you intend to back up.
Necessary inspections
Fluid levels, such as engine oil,
engine coolant, brake fluid, and
washer fluid should be checked on a
regular basis, at the exact interval
depending on the fluid. Further
details are provided in chapter 8,
“Maintenance”.
Before starting
• Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all con-
trols are easily reached.
• Buckle your seat belt.
• Adjust the inside and outside
rearview mirrors.
• Be sure that all lights work.
• Check all gauges.
• Check the operation of warning
lights when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position.
• Release the parking brake and
make sure the brake warning light
goes out.
For safe operation, be sure you are
familiar with your vehicle and its
equipment.
BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle con-
trol, that may lead to an acci-
dent, severe personal injury,
and death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a
vehicle or which are not permis-
sible by law should never be
used during operation of the
vehicle.
65
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Check sur-
roundings
Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for peo-
ple, especially children, before
putting a vehicle into D (Drive)
or R (Reverse).
WARNING - Fire risk
When you intend to park or stop
the vehicle with the engine on,
be careful not to depress the
accelerator pedal for a long
period of time. It may overheat
the engine or exhaust system
and cause fire.
WARNING - Loose
objects
Securely store items in your
vehicle. When you make a sud-
den stop or turn the steering
wheel rapidly, loose objects
may drop on the floor and it
could interfere with the opera-
tion of the foot pedals, possibly
causing an accident.
WARNING - Driving while
intoxicated
Do not drive while intoxicated.
Drinking and driving is danger-
ous. Even a small amount of
alcohol will affect your reflexes,
perceptions and judgment.
Driving while under the influ-
ence of drugs is as dangerous
as or more dangerous than driv-
ing drunk.
Driving your vehicle
66
Illuminated ignition switch
Whenever a front door is opened, the
ignition switch will illuminate for your
convenience, provided the ignition
switch is not in the ON position. The
light will go off immediately when the
ignition switch is turned on. It will
also go off after about 30 seconds
when the door is closed.
Ignition switch position
LOCK
The steering wheel locks to protect
against theft (if equipped). The igni-
tion key can be removed only in the
LOCK position.
When turning the ignition switch to
the LOCK position, push the key
inward at the ACC position and turn
the key toward the LOCK position.
ACC (Accessory)
The steering wheel is unlocked and
electrical accessories are operative.
If difficulty is experienced turning the
ignition switch to the ACC position,
turn the key while turning the steer-
ing wheel right and left to release the
tension.
ON
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. This is
the normal running position after the
engine is started.
Do not leave the ignition switch ON if
the engine is not running to prevent
battery discharge.
START
Turn the ignition switch to the START
position to start the engine. The
engine will crank until you release
the key; then it returns to the ON
position.The brake warning light can
be checked in this position.
KEY POSITIONS (IF EQUIPPED)
OPS053001
OXM059029N
67
Driving your vehicle
The anti-theft steering column lock (if
equipped) is not a substitute for the
parking brake. Before leaving the dri-
ver’s seat, always make sure the shift
lever is engaged in 1st gear for the
manual transaxle or P (Park) for
automatic transaxle, set the parking
brake fully and shut the engine off.
Unexpected and sudden vehicle
movement may occur if these pre-
cautions are not taken.
Starting the engine
1.Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2.Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the
clutch pedal and brake pedal
depressed while turning the igni-
tion switch to the start position.
Automatic Transaxle / Dual clutch
transmission - Place the transaxle
shift lever in P (Park). Depress the
brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position.
3.Turn the ignition switch to START
and hold it there until the engine
starts (a maximum of 10 seconds),
then release the key.
It should be started without
depressing the accelerator.
WARNING - Ignition
switch
Never turn the ignition switch to
LOCK or ACC while the vehicle
is moving. This would result in
loss of directional control and
braking function, which could
cause an accident.
WARNING - Proper
footwear
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski
boots, sandals, etc.) may inter-
fere with your ability to use the
brake and accelerator pedals.
Driving your vehicle
86
Manual Transaxle
To start the vehicle, keep the clutch
pedal and brake pedal depressed, and
make sure the engine RPM is within
normal range (under 1000 rpm). After
checking, shift the transaxle shift lever
to the desired position.
Unlock the parking brake, and take
your foot off the clutch pedal. Then,
lightly depress the accelerator pedal
and slowly start the vehicle.
4.Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains sta-
tionary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and
decelerating should be avoided.)
Do not engage the starter for more
than 10 seconds. If the engine stalls
or fails to start, wait 5 to 10 seconds
before re-engaging the starter.
Improper use of the starter may
damage it.
Stopping manual transaxle vehicles
1. After safely parking the vehicle,
press the clutch pedal and brake
pedal at the same time.
2.While depressing the clutch pedal
and brake pedal at the same time,
shift the transaxle lever to ‘N’.
CAUTION - Starter
If the engine stalls while you are
in motion, do not attempt to
move the shift lever to the P
(Park) position. If traffic and
road conditions permit,you may
put the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position while the
vehicle is still moving and turn
the ignition switch to the START
position in an attempt to restart
the engine.
WARNING - Steering
wheel
Never reach for any controls
through the steering wheel
while the vehicle is in motion.
The presence of your hand or
arm in this area could cause a
loss of vehicle control.
69
Driving your vehicle
Illuminated ENGINE
START/STOP button
Whenever the front door is opened,
the ENGINE START/STOP button
will illuminate for your convenience.
The light will go off after about 30
seconds when the door is closed.
When all entrances are closed, if you
lock the vehicle by using the trans-
mitter or the smart key, the light will
go off immediately.
ENGINE START/STOP button
position
OFF
• With manual transaxle
To turn off the engine (START/RUN
position) or vehicle power (ON posi-
tion), stop the vehicle then press the
engine start/stop button.
• With automatic transaxle /
dual clutch transmission
To turn off the engine (START/RUN
position) or vehicle power (ON posi-
tion), press the ENGINE
START/STOP button with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position. When
you press the ENGINE
START/STOP button without the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, the
ENGINE START/STOP button will
not change to the OFF position but to
the ACC position.
In an emergency situation while the
vehicle is in motion, you are able to
turn the engine off and to the ACC
position by pressing the ENGINE
START/STOP button for more than 2
seconds or 3 times successively
within 3 seconds. If the vehicle is still
moving, you can restart the engine
without depressing the brake pedal
by pressing the ENGINE
START/STOP button with the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position.
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED)
OPS053003
Not illuminated
Driving your vehicle
106
ACC(Accessory)
• With manual transaxle
Press the engine start/stop button
when the button is in the OFF posi-
tion without depressing the clutch
pedal.
• With automatic transaxle /
dual clutch transmission
Press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while it is in the OFF position
without depressing the brake pedal.
If the ENGINE START/STOP button
is in the ACC position for more than
1 hour, the button is turned off auto-
matically to prevent battery dis-
charge.
ON
• With manual transaxle
Press the engine start/stop button
when the button is in the ACC posi-
tion without depressing the clutch
pedal.
• With automatic transaxle /
dual clutch transmission
Press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while it is in the ACC position
without depressing the brake pedal.
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. Do not
leave the ENGINE START/STOP
button in the ON position for a long
time. The battery may discharge,
because the engine is not running.
START/RUN
• With manual transaxle
To start the engine, depress the
clutch pedal and brake pedal, then
press the engine start/stop button
with the shift lever in the N (Neutral)
position.
• With automatic transaxle /
dual clutch transmission
To start the engine, depress the
brake pedal and press the ENGINE
START/ STOP button with the shift
lever in the P (Park) or the N
(Neutral) position. For your safety,
start the engine with the shift lever in
the P (Park) position.
Amber
Redish orange
Not illuminated
611
Driving your vehicle
If you press the ENGINE
START/STOP button without depress-
ing the clutch pedal for manual
transaxle vehicles or without depress-
ing the brake pedal for automatic
transaxle vehicles, the engine will not
start and the ENGINE START/STOP
button changes as follow:
OFF ➔ ACC ➔ ON ➔ OFF or ACC
✽✽
NOTICE
If you leave the ENGINE START/
STOP button in the ACC or ON
position for a long time, the battery
will discharge.
Starting the engine with a
smart key (if equipped)
1.Carry the smart key or leave it
inside the vehicle.
2.Make sure the parking brake is
firmly applied
3.Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the
clutch pedal and brake pedal
depressed while starting the engine.
Automatic transaxle / Dual
clutch transmission - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position.
4.Press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while depressing the brake
pedal.
It should be started without
depressing the accelerator.
WARNING - Starting
vehicle
Never press the ENGINE
START/STOP button while the
vehicle is in motion except in an
emergency. If the engine stops
while the vehicle is in motion,this
would result in loss of directional
control and braking function,
which could cause an accident.
WARNING - Leaving the
Vehicle
To avoid unexpected or sudden
vehicle movement, never leave
your vehicle if the transmission
is not locked in the P (Park) posi-
tion and the parking brake is
fully engaged.Before leaving the
driver's seat, always make sure
the shift lever is engaged in P
(Park),set the parking brake fully
and shut the engine off.
CAUTION
If the driver takes foot off the
clutch pedal of a manual
transaxle vehicle before the
engine is fully started, the
engine may not start.
Make sure to fully depress the
clutch pedal and brake pedal to
start the engine.
Driving your vehicle
126
Manual Transaxle
To start the vehicle, keep the clutch
pedal and brake pedal depressed, and
make sure the engine RPM is within
normal range (under 1000 rpm). After
checking, shift the transaxle shift lever
to the desired position.
Unlock the parking brake, and take
your foot off the clutch pedal. Then,
lightly depress the accelerator pedal
and slowly start the vehicle.
5.Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains sta-
tionary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and
decelerating should be avoided.)
• Even if the smart key is in the vehi-
cle, if it is far away from you, the
engine may not start.
• When the ENGINE START/STOP
button is in the ACC position or
above, if any door is opened, the
system checks for the smart key. If
the smart key is not in the vehicle,
a message "key is not in the vehi-
cle" will appear on the LCD display.
And if all doors are closed, the
chime will sound for 5 seconds.The
indicator or warning will turn off
while the vehicle is moving. Always
have the smart key with you.
Stopping manual transaxle vehicles
1. After safely parking the vehicle,
press the clutch pedal and brake
pedal at the same time.
2.While depressing the clutch pedal
and brake pedal at the same time,
shift the transaxle lever to ‘N’.
CAUTION - Starter
If the engine stalls while the
vehicle is in motion, do not
attempt to move the shift lever
to the P (Park) position. If the
traffic and road conditions per-
mit, you may put the shift lever
in the N (Neutral) position while
the vehicle is still moving and
press the ENGINE START/STOP
button in an attempt to restart
the engine.
613
Driving your vehicle
• If the battery is weak or the smart
key does not work correctly, you
can start the engine by pressing
the engine start/stop button with
the smart key.
The side with the lock button
should contact the engine
start/stop button directly.
When you press the engine
start/stop button directly with the
smart key, the smart key should
contact the button at a right angle.
• When the stop lamp fuse is blown,
you can't start the engine normally.
Replace the fuse with a new one.If
it is not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the ENGINE
START/STOP button for 10 sec-
onds while it is in the ACC posi-
tion. The engine can start without
depressing the brake pedal.But for
your safety always depress the
brake pedal before starting the
engine.
Do not press the ENGINE START/
STOP button for more than 10 sec-
onds except when the stop lamp fuse
is blown.
OPS053007
WARNING - Unintended
vehicle movement
Never leave the smart key in the
vehicle with children or vehicle
occupants who are unfamiliar
with the vehicle operation.
Pushing the ENGINE
START/STOP button while the
smart key is in the vehicle may
result in unintended engine
activation and/or unintended
vehicle movement.
Driving your vehicle
146
Manual transaxle operation
• The manual transaxle has 6 for-
ward gears.
This shift pattern is imprinted on
the shift knob.The transaxle is fully
synchronized in all forward gears
so shifting to either a higher or a
lower gear is easily accomplished.
• Press the clutch pedal down fully
while shifting, then release it slowly.
If your vehicle is equipped with an
ignition lock switch, the engine will
not start when starting the engine
without depressing the clutch
pedal. (if equipped)
In order to start the vehicle, slowly
let go of the fully depressed clutch
pedal. Then, push the accelerator
pedal to start.
• The gearshift lever must be
returned to the neutral position
before shifting into R (Reverse).
The ring (1) located immediately
below the shift knob must be pulled
upward while moving the shift lever
to the R (Reverse) position. (if
equipped)
•
Make sure the vehicle is complete-
ly stopped before shifting into R
(Reverse).
Never operate the engine with the
tachometer (rpm) in the red zone.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
CAUTION
• When downshifting from 5
(Fifth) gear to 4 (Fourth) gear,
caution should be taken not to
inadvertently move the shift
lever sideways in such a man-
ner that second gear is
engaged. Such a drastic
downshift may cause the
engine speed to increase to
the point that the tachometer
will enter the red-zone. Such
overreving of the engine may
possibly cause engine and
transaxle damage.
• Do not downshift more than 2
gears or downshift the gear
when the engine is running at
high speed (5,000 RPM or
higher). Such a downshifting
may damage the engine,
clutch and the transaxle.
(Continued)
OJD053058
The ring (1) must be pushed while
moving the shift lever.
The shift lever can be moved without
pushing the ring (1).
615
Driving your vehicle
• During cold weather, shifting may
be difficult until the transaxle lubri-
cant has warmed up. This is nor-
mal and not harmful to the
transaxle.
• If you've come to a complete stop
and it's hard to shift into 1st or R
(Reverse), put the shift lever in N
(Neutral) position and release the
clutch. Press the clutch pedal back
down, and then shift into 1st or R
(Reverse) gear position.
CAUTION
• To avoid premature clutch wear
and damage, do not drive with
your foot resting on the clutch
pedal.Also, don’t use the clutch
to hold the vehicle stopped on
an uphill grade, while waiting
for a traffic light, etc.
• Do not use the shift lever as a
handrest during driving, as this
can result in premature wear of
the transaxle shift forks.
• When operating the clutch
pedal, depress the clutch pedal
down fully. If you don’t depress
the clutch pedal fully, the clutch
may be damaged or noise may
occur.
• To prevent possible damage to
the clutch system, do not start
with the 2nd (second) gear
engaged except when you start
on a slippery road.
• Do not exceed the maximum
weight limits of the loading
weight. Improper loading can
result in damage to clutch sys-
tem.
WARNING - Incline parking
• Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always set the parking brake
fully and shut the engine off.
Then make sure the transaxle is
shifted into 1st gear when the
vehicle is parked on a level or
uphill grade, and shifted into R
(Reverse) on a downhill grade.
Unexpected and sudden vehicle
movement can occur if these
precautions are not followed in
the order identified.
• If your vehicle has a manual
transaxle not equipped with a
ignition lock switch, it may
move and cause a serious acci-
dent when starting the engine
without depressing the clutch
pedal while the parking brake is
released and the shift lever not
in the neutral position.
• Do not use the engine brake
(shifting from a high gear to
lower gear) rapidly on slippery
roads. The vehicle may slip
causing an accident.
(Continued)
• When shifting between 5th
and 6th gear, you should
always push the gear level all
the way to the right.You could
otherwise shift unintentionally
into 3rd or 4th gear and dam-
age the transaxle.
Driving your vehicle
166
Using the clutch
The clutch should be pressed all the
way to the floor before shifting, then
released slowly. The clutch pedal
should always be fully released while
driving. Do not rest your foot on the
clutch pedal while driving. This can
cause unnecessary wear. Do not par-
tially engage the clutch to hold the
vehicle on an incline. This causes
unnecessary wear.Use the foot brake
or parking brake to hold the vehicle on
an incline. Do not operate the clutch
pedal rapidly and repeatedly.
*
1)
: Half clutch?
A condition where the clutch is half-
engaged and sliding. It may occur when
the clutch pedal is partially depressed
(not fully depressed), or vehicle power is
transferred to the clutch before the pedal
is fully let go.
CAUTION
• If half-clutch*
1)
driving style is
adopted, or driver’s foot is
placed on the pedal while driv-
ing, the clutch may be dam-
aged or worn out prematurely.
• While parking on a steep
grade, do not use half clutch
method to park the vehicle. It
will cause premature wear of
the clutch disc.
• While driving at fast speed, do
not abruptly shift to low
speed. It may lead to engine
and transaxle damage.
CAUTION
• When starting a fully stopped
vehicle, refrain to start in 2nd
gear. When starting in 2nd
gear, abnormal clutch disc fric-
tion heat may occur and result
in clutch cover and clutch disc
damage.
• When the vehicle is in motion,
please refrain from using half
clutch. The use of half clutch
while the vehicle is in motion
may result in early clutch disc
wear, abnormal vibration or
noise.
• The clutch pedal should be
depressed fully for any opera-
tion. When letting go of the
depressed pedal, make sure
not to depress the pedal again
before the pedal goes back to
its initial position. If such unin-
tended re-depressing occurs,
the clutch system may be dam-
aged.
617
Driving your vehicle
Downshifting
When you must slow down in heavy
traffic or while driving up steep hills,
downshift before the engine starts to
labor. Downshifting reduces the
chance of stalling and gives better
acceleration when you again need to
increase your speed.When the vehi-
cle is traveling down steep hills,
downshifting helps maintain safe
speed and prolongs brake life.
Good driving practices
• Never take the vehicle out of gear
and coast down a hill. This is
extremely hazardous.Always leave
the vehicle in gear.
• Don't "ride" the brakes. This can
cause them to overheat and mal-
function. Instead, when you are
driving down a long hill, slow down
and shift to a lower gear.When you
do this, engine braking will help
slow down the vehicle.
• Slow down before shifting to a
lower gear. This will help avoid
over-revving the engine, which can
cause damage.
• Slow down when you encounter
cross winds. This gives you much
better control of your vehicle.
• Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift
into reverse. The transaxle can be
damaged if you do not.To shift into
reverse, depress the clutch, move
the shift lever to neutral, then shift
to the reverse position.
• Exercise extreme caution when
driving on a slippery surface. Be
especially careful when braking,
accelerating or shifting gears.On a
slippery surface, an abrupt change
in vehicle speed can cause the
drive wheels to lose traction and
the vehicle to go out of control.
• Always buckle-up! In a collision, an
unbelted occupant is significantly
more likely to be seriously injured
or killed than a properly belted
occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when cornering
or turning. High speed cornering
and turning increase the risk of
vehicle rollover. Rollover accidents
are violent and unpredictable.
• Never exceed posted speed limits.
Driving your vehicle
186
WARNING
• Always buckle-up! In a colli-
sion, an unbelted occupant is
significantly more likely to be
seriously injured or killed than
a properly belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when cor-
nering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as
sharp lane changes or fast,
sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control
of your vehicle at highway
speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off
the roadway and the driver
oversteers to reenter the road-
way.
• In the event your vehicle
leaves the roadway, do not
steer sharply. Instead, slow
down before pulling back into
the travel lanes.
• Never exceed posted speed
limits.
619
Driving your vehicle
Automatic transaxle operation
The automatic transaxle has 6 for-
ward speeds and one reverse speed.
The individual speeds are selected
automatically, depending on the
position of the shift lever.
✽✽
NOTICE
The first few shifts on a new vehicle,
if the battery has been disconnected,
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a
normal condition, and the shifting
sequence will adjust after shifts are
cycled a few times by the TCM
(Transaxle Control Module) or
PCM (Powertrain Control Module).
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
OPS053008
++
++
((
((
UU
UU
PP
PP
))
))
--
--
((
((
DD
DD
OO
OO
WW
WW
NN
NN
))
))
The shift lever can be shifted freely.
Press the lock release button when shifting.
Depress the brake pedal and the lock release button when shifting.
(If the shift lock system is not equipped, it is not necessary to depress the brake pedal.
However, it is recommended to depress the brake pedal to avoid inadvertent movement
of the vehicle.)
Driving your vehicle
206
For smooth operation, depress the
brake pedal and the lock release but-
ton when shifting from N (Neutral) to
a forward or reverse gear.
When stopped on an incline, do not
hold the vehicle with the engine
power. Use the service brake or the
parking brake.
Transaxle ranges
The indicator in the instrument clus-
ter displays the shift lever position
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into P (Park). This
position locks the transaxle and pre-
vents the drive wheels from rotating.
Shifting into P (Park) while the vehi-
cle is in motion will cause the drive
wheels to lock which will cause you
to lose control of the vehicle.
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transaxle are not
engaged. The vehicle will roll freely
even on the slightest incline unless
the parking brake or service brakes
are applied.
CAUTION - Transaxle
To avoid damage to your
transaxle, do not accelerate the
engine in R (Reverse) or any for-
ward gear position with the
brakes on.The transaxle may be
damaged if you shift into P
(Park) while the vehicle is in
motion.
WARNING - Leaving the
Vehicle
To avoid unexpected or sudden
vehicle movement, never leave
your vehicle if the transmission
is not locked in the P (Park)
position and the parking brake
is fully engaged. Before leaving
the driver's seat, always make
sure the shift lever is engaged in
P (Park), set the parking brake
fully and shut the engine off.
CAUTION - Shifting
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transaxle if you shift into R
(Reverse) while the vehicle is in
motion, except when “Rocking
the vehicle” explained in this
section.
621
Driving your vehicle
- Parking in N (Neutral) gear
Follow below steps when parking
and you want the vehicle to move
when pushed.
1.After parking your vehicle, step on
the brake pedal and move the shift
lever to [P] with the ignition button in
[ON] or while the engine is running.
2.If the parking brake is applied
unlock the parking brake.
3.While pressing the brake pedal,
turn the ignition button [OFF].
- For smart key equipped vehicles,
the ignition switch can be moved
to [OFF] only when the shift lever
is in [P].
4.Change the gear shift lever to [N]
(Neutral) while pressing the brake
pedal and pushing [SHIFT LOCK
RELEASE] button or inserting,
pressing down a tool (e.g. flathead
screw-driver) into the [SHIFT LOCK
RELEASE] access hole at the same
time. Then, the vehicle will move
when external force is applied.
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving
position. The transaxle will automati-
cally shift through a 6-gear
sequence, providing the best fuel
economy and power.
For extra power when passing anoth-
er vehicle or climbing grades, depress
the accelerator fully, at which time the
transaxle will automatically downshift
to the next lower gear.
Sports mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or
in motion, sports mode is selected by
pushing the shift lever from the D
(Drive) position into the manual gate.
To return to D (Drive) range opera-
tion, push the shift lever back into the
main gate.
CAUTION
• With the exception of parking
in neutral gear, always park
the vehicle in [P] (Park) for
safety and engage the parking
brake.
• Before parking in [N] (Neutral)
gear, first make sure the park-
ing ground is level and flat. Do
not park in [N] gear on any
slopes or gradients.
If parked and left in [N], the
vehicle may move and cause
serious damage and injury.
OPS053009
Sports mode
++
++
((
((
UU
UU
PP
PP
))
))
--
--
((
((
DD
DD
OO
OO
WW
WW
NN
NN
))
))
Driving your vehicle
226
In sports mode, moving the shift
lever backwards and forwards will
allow you to make gearshifts rapidly.
In contrast to a manual transaxle, the
sports mode allows gearshifts with
the accelerator pedal depressed.
Up (+) : Push the lever forward once
to shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards
once to shift down one
gear.
• In sports mode, the driver must
execute upshifts in accordance
with road conditions, taking care to
keep the engine speed below the
red zone.
• In sports mode, only the 6 forward
gears can be selected. To reverse
or park the vehicle, move the shift
lever to the R (Reverse) or P (Park)
position as required.
• In sports mode, downshifts are
made automatically when the vehi-
cle slows down. When the vehicle
stops, 1st gear is automatically
selected.
• In sports mode, when the engine
rpm approaches the red zone shift
points are varied to upshift auto-
matically.
• To maintain the required levels of
vehicle performance and safety,
the system may not execute cer-
tain gearshifts when the shift lever
is operated.
• When driving on a slippery road,
push the shift lever forward into the
+(up) position. This causes the
transaxle to shift into the 2nd gear
which is better for smooth driving
on a slippery road. Push the shift
lever to the -(down) side to shift
back to the 1st gear.
623
Driving your vehicle
Shift lock system
For your safety, the automatic
transaxle has a shift lock system
which prevents shifting the transaxle
from P (Park) into R (Reverse)
unless the brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transaxle from P (Park)
into R (Reverse):
1.Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2.Start the engine or turn the ignition
switch to the ON position.
3.Move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, a chat-
tering noise near the shift lever may
be heard. It is a normal condition.
Shift-lock override
If the shift lever cannot be moved
from the P (Park) position into R
(Reverse) position with the brake
pedal depressed, continue depress-
ing the brake, then do the following:
1.Carefully remove the cap covering
the shift-lock access hole (1).
2.Insert a screwdriver into the
access hole and press down on
the screwdriver.
3.Move the shift lever.
4.Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer immediately.
WARNING - Shifting from
park
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and while shifting
out of the P (Park) position into
another position to avoid inad-
vertent motion of the vehicle
which could injure persons in
or around the vehicle.
OPS053010
Driving your vehicle
246
Ignition key interlock system
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P
(Park) position. Even if the ignition
switch is in the LOCK position, the
key also cannot be removed.
If your vehicle is equipped with
ENGINE START/STOP button, the
button will not change to the OFF
position unless the shift lever is in the
P (Park) position.
Good driving practices
• Never move the gear shift lever
from P (Park) to any other position
with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the gear shift lever into
P (Park) when the vehicle is in
motion.
• Slow down before shifting to a
lower gear. Otherwise, the lower
gear may not be engaged.
• Always use the parking brake. Do
not depend on placing the
transaxle in P (Park) to keep the
vehicle from moving.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the
accelerator pedal.
Moving up a steep grade from a
standing start
To move up a steep grade from a
standing start, depress the brake
pedal, shift the shift lever to D
(Drive). Select the appropriate gear
depending on load weight and steep-
ness of the grade, and release the
parking brake.Depress the accelera-
tor gradually while releasing the
service brakes.
625
Driving your vehicle
Dual clutch transmission oper-
ation
The dual clutch transmission has
seven forward speeds and one
reverse speed.
The individual speeds are selected
automatically in the D (Drive) posi-
tion.
DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (IF EQUIPPED)
OPS053008
++
++
((
((
UU
UU
PP
PP
))
))
--
--
((
((
DD
DD
OO
OO
WW
WW
NN
NN
))
))
The shift lever can freely operate.
Press the shift button while moving the shift lever.
Depress the brake pedal and press the shift button while moving the shift lever.
❈ To move the shift lever from/to P (Parking) or between R (Reverse) and D (Drive), you must
depress the brake pedal for the vehicle to stand still.
Driving your vehicle
266
• The Dual Clutch Transmission
gives the driving feel of a manual
transmission, yet provides the
ease of a fully automatic transmis-
sion. Unlike a traditional automatic
transmission, the gear shifting can
be felt (and heard) on the dual
clutch transmission
- Think of it as an automatically
shifting manual transmission.
- Shift into Drive range and get fully
automatic shifting, similar to a con-
ventional automatic transmission.
• Dual clutch transmission adopts
dry-type dual clutch, which is dif-
ferent from torque converter of
automatic transmission, and
shows better acceleration perform-
ance during driving. But, initial
launch might be little bit slower
than Automatic Transmission.
• The dry-type clutch transfers
torque and provides a direct driv-
ing feeling which may feel different
from a conventional automatic
transmission with a torque convert-
er. This may be more noticeable
when starting from a stop or low
vehicle speed.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death:
• ALWAYS check the surround-
ing areas near your vehicle for
people, especially children,
before shifting a vehicle into
D (Drive) or R (Reverse).
• Before leaving the driver's
seat, always make sure the
shift lever is in the P (Park)
position, then set the parking
brake, and place the ignition
switch in the LOCK/OFF posi-
tion. Unexpected and sudden
vehicle movement can occur
if these preNOTICEs are not
followed.
• Do not use the engine braking
(shifting from a high gear to
lower gear) rapidly on slip-
pery roads. The vehicle may
slip causing an accident.
CAUTION
• To avoid damage to your
transmission, do not try to
accelerate in R (Reverse) or
any forward gear position with
the brakes on.
• When stopped on slope, do
not hold the vehicle with
accelerator pedal. Use the
service brake or the parking
brake.
627
Driving your vehicle
• When rapidly accelerating at low
vehicle speed, engine could rev at
high rpm depending on vehicle
drive condition.
• For smooth launch uphill, press
down the accelerator pedal
smoothly depending on the current
conditions.
• If you release your foot from the
accelerator pedal at low vehicle
speed, you may feel strong engine
brake, which is similar to manual
transmission.
• When driving downhill, you may
use Sports Mode and press the
paddle shifters to downshift to a
lower gear in order to control your
speed without using the brake
pedal excessively.
• When you turn the engine on and
off, you may hear clicking sounds
as the system goes through a self
test.This is a normal sound for the
Dual Clutch Transmission.
✽✽
NOTICE
If your transmission should fail,
your gear shift lever may not move
from and position indicator (D,R,N,
etc.) will blink on the cluster. If this
occurs, have the system checked by
an authorized Kia dealership.
• To hold the vehicle on a hill use the
foot brake or the parking brake. If
the vehicle is held by applying the
accelerator pedal on a hill the
clutch and transmission will be
overheated resulting in damage.
At this time, a warning message
(“Steep grade! Press brake pedal”)
will appear on the LCD display and
you may feel a vibration.
OJF055111L
Driving your vehicle
286
• If the clutch becomes overheated
by excessive use of the clutch to
hold on a hill, you may notice a
shudder feeling and a blinking dis-
play on the instrument cluster.
When this occurs, the clutch is dis-
abled until the clutch cools to nor-
mal temperatures. If this occurs,
pull over to a safe location, shift
into P (Park) and apply the foot
brake for a few minutes.
• If the LCD warning is active, the
foot brake must be applied.
• Ignoring the warnings can lead to
damage to the transmission.
• If the display continues to blink, for
your safety, we recommend that you
contact an authorized Kia dealer.
• Under certain conditions such as
repeated launch on steep grades,
the clutch in the transmission could
overheat. When the clutch is over-
heated, the safe protection mode
engages.
If the safe protection mode
engages, the gear position indica-
tor on the cluster blinks with a
chime sound.
At this time, a warning message
(“Transmission temp. is high! Stop
safely”, “Trans Hot! Park with
engine on”, “Trans Cooling.
Remain parked for 00 min.”, “Trans
cooled. Resume driving”) will
appear on the LCD display and
driving may not be smooth.
If you ignore this warning, the driv-
ing condition may become worse.
To return the normal driving condi-
tion, stop the vehicle and apply the
foot brake for a few minutes before
driving off.
• Gear shifts may be more notice-
able than a conventional automatic
transmission. This is a normal
characteristic of this type of dual
clutch transmission.
OJF055117L
OJF055115L
OJF055119L
629
Driving your vehicle
• Repetitive kick downs may lead to
overheating of the transmission.
This will lead to change in the vehi-
cle speed shift pattern, and illumi-
nate some warning message.
To return the normal driving condi-
tion, refrain from kick down speed
changes. When the warning mes-
sage illuminates, park the vehicle
at a safe location.
• During the first 1,500 km (1,000
miles), you may feel that the vehi-
cle may not be smooth when accel-
erating at low speed. During this
break-in period, the shift quality
and performance of your new vehi-
cle is continuously optimized.
• Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into D (Drive) or R
(Reverse).
• Do not put the shift lever in N
(Neutral) while driving.
Transmission ranges
The indicator in the instrument clus-
ter displays the shift lever position
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into P (Park).
To shift from P (Park), you must
depress firmly on the brake pedal
and make sure your foot is off the
accelerator pedal.
The shift lever must be in P (Park)
before turning the engine off.
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
WARNING
• Shifting into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion may
cause you to lose control of
the vehicle.
• After the vehicle has stopped,
always make sure the shift
lever is in P (Park), apply the
parking brake, and turn the
engine off.
• Do not use the P (Park) posi-
tion in place of the parking
brake.
CAUTION
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transmission if you shift into R
(Reverse) while the vehicle is in
motion.
CAUTION - Holding the
Vehicle Using Accelerator
Pedal
Do not attempt to hold your
vehicle on a hill by applying the
accelerator pedal. This can
cause your clutch and transmis-
sion to be damaged as a result
of overheating.
Driving your vehicle
306
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transmission are not
engaged.
Use N (Neutral) if you need to restart
a stalled engine, or if it is necessary
to stop with the engine ON. Shift into
P (Park) if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason.
Always depress the brake pedal
when you are shifting from N
(Neutral) to another gear.
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving
position. The transaxle will automati-
cally shift through a seven-gear
sequence, providing the best fuel
economy and power.
For extra power when passing anoth-
er vehicle or driving uphill, depress
the accelerator further and the
transaxle will automatically downshift
to the next lower gear (or gears, as
appropriate).
The DRIVE MODE switch, located
on the shift lever console, allows the
driver to switch from NORMAL mode
to SPORT or ECO mode. (if
equipped)
For more information, refer to “Drive
Mode Integrated Control System”
later in this chapter.
✽✽
NOTICE
Always ensure vehicle is stationary,
at a complete stop, before selecting
D (Drive).
WARNING
• Do not shift into gear unless
your foot is firmly on the
brake pedal. Shifting into gear
when the engine is running at
high speed can cause the
vehicle to move very rapidly.
You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit people or
objects.
• Do not drive with the shift
lever in N (Neutral).
The engine brake will not
work and lead to an accident.
631
Driving your vehicle
Sports mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or
in motion, sports mode is selected by
pushing the shift lever from the D
(Drive) position into the manual gate.
To return to D (Drive) range opera-
tion, push the shift lever back into the
main gate.
In Sports Mode, moving the shift
lever backwards and forwards will
allow you to select the desired range
of gears for the current driving condi-
tions.
+ (Up) : Push the lever forward once
to shift up one gear.
- (Down) : Pull the lever backwards
once to shift down one
gear.
✽✽
NOTICE
In SPORT mode, the fuel efficiency
may decrease.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Only the seven forward gears can
be selected. To reverse or park the
vehicle, move the shift lever to the
R (Reverse) or P (Park) position as
required.
• Downshifts are made automatical-
ly when the vehicle slows down.
When the vehicle stops, 1st gear is
automatically selected.
• When the engine rpm approaches
the red zone the transmission will
upshift automatically.
• If the driver presses the lever to +
(Up) or - (Down) position, the trans-
mission may not make the request-
ed gear change if the next gear is
outside of the allowable engine rpm
range. The driver must execute
upshifts in accordance with road
conditions, taking care to keep the
engine rpms below the red zone.
OPS053009
SS
SS
pp
pp
oo
oo
rr
rr
tt
tt
ss
ss
mm
mm
oo
oo
dd
dd
ee
ee
++
++
((
((
UU
UU
PP
PP
))
))
--
--
((
((
DD
DD
OO
OO
WW
WW
NN
NN
))
))
Driving your vehicle
326
Shift lock system (if equipped)
For your safety, the Dual clutch trans-
mission has a shift lock system
which prevents shifting the transmis-
sion from P (Park) or N (Neutral) into
R (Reverse) unless the brake pedal
is depressed.
To shift the transmission from P (Park)
or N (Neutral) into R (Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or turn the ignition
switch to the ON position.
3. Move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, a chat-
tering noise near the shift lever may
be heard.This is a normal condition.
Shift-lock override
If the shift lever cannot be moved
from the P (Park) or N (Neutral) posi-
tion into R (Reverse) position with
the brake pedal depressed, continue
depressing the brake, then do the fol-
lowing:
1. Carefully remove the cap covering
the shift-lock override access hole.
2.Insert a screwdriver into the
access hole and press down on
the screwdriver.
3. Move the shift lever.
4. Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer immediately.
Ignition key interlock system
(if equipped)
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P
(Park) position.
OPS053010
WARNING
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and while shifting
out of the P (Park) position into
another position to avoid inad-
vertent motion of the vehicle
which could injure persons in
or around the car.
633
Driving your vehicle
Parking
Always come to a complete stop and
continue to depress the brake pedal.
Move the shift lever into the P (Park)
position, apply the parking brake,
and place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position. Take the Key
with you when exiting the vehicle.
Good driving practices
• Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other
position with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P
(Park) when the vehicle is in motion.
• Be sure the car is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift
into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Never take the car out of gear and
coast down a hill. This may be
extremely hazardous.Always leave
the car in gear when moving.
• Do not "ride" the brakes. This can
cause them to overheat and mal-
function. Instead, when you are
driving down a long hill, slow down
and shift to a lower gear.When you
do this, engine braking will help
slow the car.
• Slow down before shifting to a
lower gear. Otherwise, the lower
gear may not be engaged.
• Always use the parking brake. Do
not depend on placing the trans-
mission in P (Park) to keep the car
from moving.
• Exercise extreme caution when
driving on a slippery surface. Be
especially careful when braking,
accelerating or shifting gears.On a
slippery surface, an abrupt change
in vehicle speed can cause the
drive wheels to lose traction and
the vehicle to go out of control.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING
When you stay in the vehicle
with the engine running, be
careful not to depress the accel-
erator pedal for a long period of
time.The engine or exhaust sys-
tem may overheat and start a
fire.
The exhaust gas and the
exhaust system are very hot.
Keep away from the exhaust
system components.
Do not stop or park over flam-
mable materials, such as dry
grass,paper or leaves.They may
ignite and cause a fire.
Driving your vehicle
346
Kickdown Mechanism
(if equipped)
Use the kickdown mechanism for
maximum acceleration. Depress the
accelerator pedal beyond the pres-
sure point.The transmission will shift
to a lower gear depending on the
engine speed.
Moving up a steep grade from a
standing start
To move up a steep grade from a
standing start, depress the brake
pedal, shift the shift lever to D
(Drive). Depress the accelerator
gradually while releasing the service
brakes.
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle
free by moving it forward and
backward. Do not attempt this
procedure if people or objects
are anywhere near the vehicle.
During the rocking operation the
vehicle may suddenly move for-
ward or backward as it becomes
unstuck, causing injury or dam-
age to nearby people or objects.
(Continued)
• In the event your vehicle
leaves the roadway, do not
steer sharply. Instead, slow
down before pulling back into
the travel lanes.
• Kia recommends you follow all
posted speed limits.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS wear your seatbelt.
In a collision, an unbelted
occupant is significantly more
likely to be seriously injured
or killed than a properly belt-
ed occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when cor-
nering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as
sharp lane changes or fast,
sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control
of your vehicle at highway
speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off
the roadway and the driver
over steers to reenter the
roadway.
(Continued)
635
Driving your vehicle
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted
brakes that adjust automatically
through normal usage.
In the event that the power-assisted
brakes lose power because of a
stalled engine or some other reason,
you can still stop your vehicle by
applying greater force to the brake
pedal than you normally would. The
stopping distance, however, will be
longer.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially
depleted each time the brake pedal
is applied. Do not pump the brake
pedal when the power assist has
been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when
necessary to maintain steering con-
trol on slippery surfaces.
Wet brakes may impair the vehicle’s
ability to safely slow down; the vehi-
cle may also pull to one side when
the brakes are applied. Applying the
brakes lightly will indicate whether
they have been affected in this way.
Always test your brakes in this fash-
ion after driving through deep water.
To dry the brakes, apply them lightly
while maintaining a safe forward
speed until brake performance
returns to normal.
BRAKE SYSTEM
WARNING - Steep hill
braking
Avoid continuous application of
the brakes when descending a
long or steep hill by shifting to a
lower gear. Continuous brake
application will cause the
brakes to overheat and could
result in a temporary loss of
braking performance.
CAUTION - Brake Pedal
Do not drive with your foot rest-
ing on the brake pedal.This will
create abnormally high brake
temperatures which can cause
excessive brake lining and pad
wear.
Driving your vehicle
366
In the event of brake failure
If service brakes fail to operate while
the vehicle is in motion, you can
make an emergency stop with the
parking brake. The stopping dis-
tance, however, will be much greater
than normal.
Disc brakes wear indicator
When your brake pads are worn and
new pads are required, you will hear
a high-pitched warning sound from
your front brakes or rear brakes.You
may hear this sound come and go or
it may occur whenever you depress
the brake pedal.
Please remember that some driving
conditions or climates may cause a
brake squeal when you first apply (or
lightly apply) the brakes. This is nor-
mal and does not indicate a problem
with your brakes.
Always replace the front or rear
brake pads as pairs.
WARNING - Parking
brake
Applying the parking brake
while the vehicle is moving at
normal speeds can cause a
sudden loss of control of the
vehicle. If you must use the
parking brake to stop the vehi-
cle, use great caution in apply-
ing the brake.
CAUTION - Parking brake
Driving with the parking brake
applied will cause excessive
brake pad (or lining) and brake
rotor wear.
WARNING - Brake wear
Do not ignore high pitched
whining sounds from your
brakes. If you ignore this audi-
ble warning, you will eventually
lose braking performance,
which could lead to a serious
accident.
637
Driving your vehicle
Parking brake - Hand type
Applying the parking brake
To engage the parking brake, first
apply the foot brake and then without
pressing the release button in, pull
the parking brake lever up as far as
possible.
In addition it is recommended that
when parking the vehicle on a gradi-
ent, the shift lever should be posi-
tioned in the appropriate low gear on
manual transaxle vehicles or in the P
(Park) position for automatic
transaxle vehicles.
Releasing the parking brake
To release the parking brake, first
apply the foot brake and pull up the
parking brake lever slightly. Secondly
press the release button (1) and
lower the parking brake lever (2)
while holding the button.
CAUTION - Parking brake
Driving with the parking brake
applied will cause excessive
brake pad and brake rotor wear.
OPS053011
OPS053012
Driving your vehicle
386
Check the brake warning light by
turning the ignition switch ON (do not
start the engine). This light will be
illuminated when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the
START or ON position.
Before driving, be sure the parking
brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off.
If the brake warning light remains on
after the parking brake is released
while the engine is running, there
may be a malfunction in the brake
system. Immediate attention is nec-
essary.
If at all possible, cease driving the
vehicle immediately.If that is not pos-
sible, use extreme caution while
operating the vehicle and only con-
tinue to drive the vehicle until you
can reach a safe location or repair
shop.
W-75
WARNING - Parking
Brake Use
• Never allow a passenger to
touch the parking brake. If the
parking brake is released
unintentionally, serious injury
may occur.
• All vehicles should always
have the parking brake fully
engaged when parked to
avoid inadvertent movement
of the car which can injure
occupants or pedestrians.
639
Driving your vehicle
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
ABS (or ESC) will not prevent acci-
dents due to improper or dangerous
driving maneuvers. Even though
vehicle control is improved during
emergency braking, always maintain
a safe distance between you and
objects ahead. Vehicle speeds
should always be reduced during
extreme road conditions.The vehicle
should be driven at reduced speeds
in the following circumstances:
• When driving on rough, gravel or
snow-covered roads
• When driving with tire chains
installed
• When driving on roads where the
road surface is pitted or has differ-
ent surface heights.
Driving in these conditions increase
the stopping distance for your vehi-
cle.
The ABS continuously senses the
speed of the wheels. If the wheels
are going to lock, the ABS system
repeatedly modulates the hydraulic
brake pressure to the wheels.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’
sound from the brakes, or feel a cor-
responding sensation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and it means
your ABS is active.
In order to obtain the maximum ben-
efit from your ABS in an emergency
situation, do not attempt to modulate
your brake pressure and do not try to
pump your brakes. Press your brake
pedal as hard as possible or as hard
as the situation allows the ABS to
control the force being delivered to
the brakes.
✽✽
NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehi-
cle begins to move after the engine is
started. These conditions are normal
and indicate that the anti-lock brake
system is functioning properly.
• Even with the anti-lock brake sys-
tem, your vehicle still requires suf-
ficient stopping distance. Always
maintain a safe distance from the
vehicle in front of you.
• Always slow down when cornering.
The anti-lock brake system cannot
prevent accidents resulting from
excessive speeds.
• On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake
system may result in a longer stop-
ping distance than for vehicles
equipped with a conventional
brake system.
Driving your vehicle
406
The ABS warning light will stay on for
approximately 3 seconds after the
ignition switch is ON. During that
time, the ABS will go through self-
diagnosis and the light will go off if
everything is normal.If the light stays
on, you may have a problem with
your ABS. Contact an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
• When you drive on a road having
poor traction, such as an icy road,
and have operated your brakes
continuously, the ABS will be active
continuously and the ABS warning
light may illuminate. Pull your vehi-
cle over to a safe place and stop
the engine.
• Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light goes off, then your
ABS system is normal. Otherwise,
you may have a problem with the
ABS. Contact an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
✽✽
NOTICE
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the
engine may not run as smoothly and
the ABS warning light may turn on
at the same time. This happens
because of low battery voltage. It
does not mean your ABS has mal-
functioned.
• Do not pump your brakes!
• Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
W-78
641
Driving your vehicle
Electronic stability control
(ESC)
The Electronic Stability control
(ESC) system is designed to stabi-
lize the vehicle during cornering
maneuvers. ESC checks where you
are steering and where the vehicle is
actually going. ESC applies the
brakes on individual wheels and
intervenes with the engine manage-
ment system to stabilize the vehicle.
Electronic stability control (ESC) will
not prevent accidents. Excessive
speed in turns, abrupt maneuvers and
hydroplaning on wet surfaces can still
result in serious accidents. Only a
safe and attentive driver can prevent
accidents by avoiding maneuvers that
cause the vehicle to lose traction.
Even with ESC installed, always fol-
low all the normal precautions for driv-
ing - including driving at safe speeds
for the conditions.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system is an electronic system
designed to help the driver maintain
vehicle control under adverse condi-
tions.It is not a substitute for safe driv-
ing practices. Factors including speed,
road conditions and driver steering
input can all affect whether ESC will be
effective in preventing a loss of control.
It is still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the wheels,
you may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensa-
tion in the brake pedal. This is normal
and it means your ESC is active.
✽✽
NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehi-
cle begins to move after the engine is
started. These conditions are normal
and indicate that the Electronic
Stability Control System is function-
ing properly.
✽✽
NOTICE
For maximum protection, always
wear your seat belt. No system, no
matter how advanced, can compen-
sate for all driver error and/or driv-
ing conditions. Always drive respon-
sibly.
OPS053013L
Driving your vehicle
426
ESC operation
ESC ON condition
• When the ignition is turned
ON, ESC and ESC OFF
indicator lights illuminate for
approximately 3 seconds,
then ESC is turned on.
• Press the ESC OFF but-
ton for at least half a sec-
ond after turning the igni-
tion ON to turn ESC off.
(ESC OFF indicator will
illuminate). To turn the
ESC on, press the ESC
OFF button (ESC OFF
indicator light will go off).
• When starting the engine,
you may hear a slight tick-
ing sound. This is the ESC
performing an automatic
system self-check and does
not indicate a problem.
When operating
When the ESC is in opera-
tion, the ESC indicator light
blinks.
• When the Electronic
Stability Control is operat-
ing properly, you can feel a
slight pulsation in the vehi-
cle. This is only the effect
of brake control and indi-
cates nothing unusual.
• When moving out of the
mud or driving on a slip-
pery road, pressing the
accelerator pedal may not
cause the engine rpm
(revolutions per minute) to
increase.
ESC operation off
ESC OFF state
This car has 2 kinds of ESC
off states.
If the engine stops when
ESC is off, ESC remains off.
Upon restarting the engine,
the ESC will automatically
turn on again.
-
643
Driving your vehicle
• ESC off state 1
To cancel ESC operation, press the
ESC OFF button (ESC OFF )
shortly (ESC OFF indicator light
(ESC OFF ) illuminates). At this
state, the engine control function
does not operate. It means the trac-
tion control function does not oper-
ate.Brake control function only oper-
ates.
The message (“Traction Control dis-
abled”) will appear on the LCD dis-
play.
• ESC off state 2
To cancel ESC operation, press the
ESC OFF button (ESC OFF ) for
more than 3 seconds.ESC OFF indi-
cator light (ESC OFF ) illuminates
and ESC OFF warning chime will
sound. At this state, the engine con-
trol function and brake control func-
tion do not operate. It means the car
stability control function does not
operate any more.
The message (“Traction & Stability
Control disabled”) will appear on the
LCD display.
Indicator light
When ignition switch is turned to ON,
the indicator light illuminates, then
goes off if the ESC system is operat-
ing normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks when-
ever ESC is operating or illuminates
when ESC fails to operate.
The ESC OFF indicator light comes
on when the ESC is turned off with
the button.
■ ESC indicator light
■ ESC OFF indicator light
Driving your vehicle
446
ESC OFF usage
When driving
• ESC should be turned on for daily
driving whenever possible.
• To turn ESC off while driving, press
the ESC OFF button while driving
on a flat road surface.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When operating the vehicle on a
dynamometer, ensure that the
ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light
illuminated). If the ESC is left on,
it may prevent the vehicle speed
from increasing, and result in false
diagnosis.
• Turning the ESC off does not
affect ABS or brake system opera-
tion.
CAUTION
Driving with varying tire or
wheel sizes may cause the ESC
system to malfunction. When
replacing tires, make sure they
are the same size as your origi-
nal tires.
WARNING - Operating
ESC
Never press the ESC OFF but-
ton while ESC is operating (ESC
indicator light blinks).
If ESC is turned off while ESC is
operating, the vehicle may slip
out of control.
WARNING - Electronic sta-
bility control
Drive carefully even though
your vehicle has Electronic
Stability Control. It can only
assist you in maintaining con-
trol under certain circum-
stances.
645
Driving your vehicle
Vehicle stability management
(VSM)
This system provides further
enhancements to vehicle stability
and steering responses when a vehi-
cle is driving on a slippery road or a
vehicle detects changes in coeffi-
cient of friction between right wheels
and left wheels when braking.
VSM operation
When the VSM is in operation, ESC
indicator light ( ) blinks.
When the vehicle stability manage-
ment is operating properly, you can
feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle
and/or abnormal steering responses
(EPS).This is only the effect of brake
and EPS control and indicates noth-
ing unusual.
The VSM does not operate when:
• Driving on bank road such as gra-
dient or incline
• Driving in reverse
• ESC OFF indicator light ( )
remains on the instrument cluster
• EPS indicator light remains on the
instrument cluster
VSM operation off
If you press the ESC OFF button to
turn off the ESC, the VSM will also
cancel and the ESC OFF indicator
light ( ) illuminates.
To turn on the VSM, press the button
again. The ESC OFF indicator light
goes out.
Malfunction indicator
The VSM can be deactivated even if
you don’t cancel the VSM operation
by pressing the ESC OFF button. It
indicates that a malfunction has
been detected somewhere in the
Electric Power Steering system or
VSM system. If the ESC indicator
light ( ) or EPS warning light
remains on, take your vehicle to an
authorized Kia dealer and have the
system checked.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 13 mph (22
km/h) on curves.
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 6 mph (10
km/h) when a vehicle is braking on
a split-mu road. The split-mu road
is made of surfaces which have dif-
ferent friction forces.
Driving your vehicle
466
• The Vehicle Stability Management
system is not a substitute for safe
driving practices but a supplemen-
tary function only. It is the respon-
sibility of the driver to always check
the speed and the distance to the
vehicle ahead. Always hold the
steering wheel firmly while driving.
• Your vehicle is designed to activate
according to the driver’s intention,
even with installed VSM. Always
follow all the normal precautions
for driving at safe speeds for the
conditions – including driving in
clement weather and on a slippery
road.
Hill-start assist control (HAC)
A vehicle has the tendency to roll
back on a steep hill when it starts to
go after stopping. The Hill-start
Assist Control (HAC) prevents the
vehicle from rolling back by applying
the brakes automatically for about 2
seconds. The brakes are released
when the accelerator pedal is
depressed or after about 2 seconds.
The HAC is activated only for about 2
seconds, so when the vehicle is
starting off always depress the accel-
erator pedal.
Good braking practices
• Check to be sure the parking brake
is not engaged and the parking
brake indicator light is out before
driving away.
• Driving through water may get the
brakes wet. They can also get wet
when the vehicle is washed. Wet
brakes can be dangerous! Your
vehicle will not stop as quickly if the
brakes are wet. Wet brakes may
cause the vehicle to pull to one
side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action
returns to normal, taking care to
keep the vehicle under control at
all times. If the braking action does
not return to normal, stop as soon
as it is safe to do so and call an
authorized Kia dealer for assis-
tance.
WARNING - Maintaining
Brake Pressure on Incline
HAC does not replace the need
to apply brakes while stopped on
an incline. While stopped, make
sure you maintain brake pres-
sure sufficient to prevent your
vehicle from rolling backward
and causing an accident. Don’t
release the brake pedal until you
are ready to accelerate forward.
647
Driving your vehicle
• Don't coast down hills with the
vehicle out of gear.This is extreme-
ly hazardous. Keep the vehicle in
gear at all times, use the brakes to
slow down, then shift to a lower
gear so that engine braking will
help you maintain a safe speed.
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal.
Resting your foot on the brake
pedal while driving can be danger-
ous because the brakes might
overheat and lose their effective-
ness. It also increases the wear of
the brake components.
• If a tire goes flat while you are driv-
ing, apply the brakes gently and
keep the vehicle pointed straight
ahead while you slow down.When
you are moving slowly enough for it
to be safe to do so, pull off the road
and stop in a safe place.
• If your vehicle is equipped with an
automatic transaxle, don't let your
vehicle creep forward. To avoid
creeping forward, keep your foot
firmly on the brake pedal when the
vehicle is stopped.
• Be cautious when parking on a hill.
Firmly engage the parking brake
and place the shift lever in P (auto-
matic transaxle) or in first or
reverse gear (manual transaxle). If
your vehicle is facing downhill, turn
the front wheels into the curb to
help keep the vehicle from rolling.If
your vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb to help keep the vehicle from
rolling. If there is no curb or if it is
required by other conditions to
keep the vehicle from rolling, block
the wheels.
• Under some conditions your park-
ing brake can freeze in the
engaged position.This is most like-
ly to happen when there is an
accumulation of snow or ice
around or near the rear brakes or if
the brakes are wet.If there is a risk
that the parking brake may freeze,
apply it only temporarily while you
put the shift lever in P (automatic
transaxle) or in first or reverse gear
(manual transaxle) and block the
rear wheels so the vehicle cannot
roll. Then release the parking
brake.
• Do not hold the vehicle on the
upgrade with the accelerator
pedal.This can cause the transaxle
to overheat. Always use the brake
pedal or parking brake.
Driving your vehicle
486
The AEB system is to reduce or to
avoid accident risk. It recognizes the
distance from the vehicle ahead or
the pedestrian through the sensors
(i.e. radar and camera), and, if nec-
essary, warns the driver of accident
risk with the warning message or the
warning alarms.
System setting and activation
System setting
The driver can activate the AEB by
placing the engine start/stop button
to the ON position and by selecting
'User Settings', 'Driving Assist', and
'Autonomous Emergency Braking
System'.The AEB deactivates, when
the driver cancels the system setting.
AUTONOMOUS EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB) (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
-
Autonomous Emergency
Braking (AEB) Limitations
The AEB system is a supple-
mental system and is not a sub-
stitute for safe driving prac-
tices. It is the responsibility of
the driver to always check the
speed and distance to the vehi-
cle ahead to ensure it is safety
to use the AEB system.
WARNING
Take the following precautions
when using the Autonomous
Emergency Braking (AEB):
• This system is only a supple-
mental system and it is not
intended to, nor does it
replace the need for extreme
care and attention of the driv-
er. The sensing range and
objects detectable by the sen-
sors are limited. Pay attention
to the road conditions at all
times.
• NEVER drive too fast in accor-
dance with the road condi-
tions or while cornering.
• Always drive cautiously to
prevent unexpected and sud-
den situations from occur-
ring. AEB does not stop the
vehicle completely and does
not avoid collisions.
649
Driving your vehicle
The warning light illumi-
nates on the LCD display,
when you cancel the AEB
system. The driver can
monitor the AEB ON/OFF status on
the LCD display. Also, the warning
light illuminates when the ESC
(Electronic Stability Control) is tuned
off (Traction & Stability Control dis-
abled.) When the warning light
remains ON with the AEB activated,
have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
The driver can select the initial warn-
ing activation time in the User
Settings in the instrument cluster
LCD display. The options for the ini-
tial Forward Collision Warning
include the following:
• EARLY - When this condition is
selected, the initial
Forward Collision Warning
is activated earlier than
normal. This setting maxi-
mizes the amount of dis-
tance between the vehicle
or pedestrian ahead before
the initial warning occurs.
The driver feels it is too
sensitive to activate than
expectation, change it to
Normal. If the vehicle in
front stops abruptly, the
driver can notice the warn-
ing alarm is late even
though the early option is
selected.
• NORMAL - When this condition is
selected, the initial
Forward Collision
Warning is activated nor-
mally.This setting allows
for a nominal amount of
distance between the
vehicle or pedestrian
ahead before the initial
warning occurs.
• LATE - When this condition is
selected, the initial Forward
Collision Warning is activat-
ed later than normal. This
setting reduces the amount
of distance between the
vehicle or pedestrian ahead
before the initial warning
occurs.The driver can use it
when the traffic is not busy
on the road and driving
speed is lower.
Driving your vehicle
506
Prerequisite for activation
The AEB will activate activated when
the AEB is selected on the LCD dis-
play, and when the following prereq-
uisites are satisfied:
- The ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) is activated.
- The driving speed is over 6 mph
(10 km/h). (The AEB only works
within a certain range of vehicle
speeds)
- When the AEB recognizes a vehi-
cle or the pedestrian in front. (The
AEB may not recognize every
obstacle or provide warnings and
braking in every situation, so do
not rely on the AEB to stop the
vehicle in instances where the driv-
er sees an obstacle and has the
ability to apply the brakes)
• The AEB automatically activates
when you turn the vehicle on.
The driver can deactivate the AEB
by canceling the in the system set-
ting on the LCD display.
• The AEB automatically deactivates
when canceling the ESC.When the
ESC is canceled, the AEB cannot
be activated on the LCD display.
AEB warning message and
system control
The AEB produces warning mes-
sages, warning alarms, and emer-
gency braking based on the level of
risk of a frontal collision, such as
when a vehicle ahead suddenly
brakes, when there is no following dis-
tance from the vehicle in front, or
when it detects a collision with a
pedestrian is imminent.
WARNING
Set or cancel AEB with control-
ling switches on steering wheel
after stopping the vehicle in the
safe place for your safety. Do
not attempt to set or cancel the
AEB while your vehicle is mov-
ing.
651
Driving your vehicle
Forward Warning (1
st
warning)
The warning message appears on
the LCD display with the warning
alarms.
Collision Warning (2
nd
warning)
• The warning message appears on
the LCD display with the warning
alarms.
• The AEB applies the brakes within
certain limit to reduce the impact
from a collision.
Emergency braking (3
rd
warning)
• The warning message appears on
the LCD display with the warning
alarms.
• The AEB controls the brakes with-
in certain limit to release shock
from the collision.
The AEB controls the maximum
brakes just before the collision.
OPS056129L OPS056130LOPS056107L
Driving your vehicle
526
Brake operation
• In an urgent situation, the braking
system enters into the ready status
for prompt reaction against the dri-
ver’s depressing the brake pedal.
• The AEB provides additional brak-
ing power for optimum braking per-
formance, when the driver
depresses the brake pedal.
• The braking control is automatical-
ly deactivated, when the driver
sharply depresses the brake pedal,
or when the driver abruptly turns
the steering wheel.
• The braking control is automatical-
ly canceled, when risk factors dis-
appear.
The driver should always exercise
caution when operating the vehicle,
even though there is no warning
message or warning alarm.
✽✽
NOTICE
The AEB operates in accordance
with the risk levels, such as the dis-
tance from the vehicle/passer-by in
front, the speed of the vehicle/pass-
er-by in front, and the driver's vehi-
cle operation.
WARNING
The AEB cannot avoid all colli-
sions. The AEB might not com-
pletely stop the vehicle before
collision, due to ambient weath-
er and road conditions. The
driver has the responsibility to
drive safely and control the
vehicle.
WARNING
The AEB braking control cannot
completely stop the vehicle nor
avoid all collisions. The driver
should hold the responsibility
to safely drive and control the
vehicle.
WARNING
The AEB system logic operates
within certain parameters, such
as the distance from the vehicle
or pedestrian ahead, the speed
of the vehicle ahead, and the
driver's vehicle speed. Certain
conditions such as inclement
weather and road conditions
may affect the operation of the
AEB system.
WARNING
Never deliberately drive danger-
ously to activate the system.
653
Driving your vehicle
Sensor to detect the distance
from the vehicle in front
(front radar)
The sensor is to maintain a certain
distance from the vehicle in front.
However, the smudged sensor lens
with foreign substances, such as
snow and rain, adversely affects the
sensing performance. It may even
temporarily cancel the AEB. Always
keep the sensor lens clean.
• Do not apply license plate molding
or foreign objects such as a
bumper sticker or a bumper guard
near the radar sensor. Doing so
may adversely affect the sensing
performance of the radar.
• Always keep the radar sensor and
cover clean and free of dirt and
debris.
• Use only a soft cloth to wash the
vehicle. Do not spray pressurized
water directly on the sensor or sen-
sor cover.
• Be careful not to apply unneces-
sary force on the radar sensor or
sensor cover. If the sensor is
forcibly moved out of proper align-
ment, the AEB system may not
operate correctly. In this case, a
warning message may not be dis-
played. Have the vehicle inspected
by an authorized Kia dealer.
• If the front bumper becomes dam-
aged in the area around the radar
sensor, the AEB system may not
operate properly. Have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
• Use only genuine Kia parts to
repair or replace a damaged sen-
sor or sensor cover. Do not apply
paint to the sensor cover.
• NEVER install any accessories or
stickers on the front windshield,
nor tint the front windshield.
• NEVER locate any reflective
objects (i.e. white paper, mirror)
over the dashboard. Any light
reflection may cause a malfunction
of the system.
• Pay extreme caution to keep the
camera out of water.
• NEVER disassemble the camera
assembly, nor apply any impact on
the camera assembly.
• Playing the vehicle audio system at
high volume may offset the system
warning sounds.
OPS057133N
Driving your vehicle
546
Warning message and warning
light
When the sensor is covered or the
sensor lens is dirty with foreign sub-
stances, such as snow or rain, the
AEB operation may temporarily stop.
In this case, a warning message will
appear to notify the driver.
This is not a malfunction with the
AEB. To operate the AEB again,
remove the foreign substances.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Do not install any accessories, such
as a license plate bracket or
bumper sticker near the sensor
area. Do not replace the bumper
by yourself. Doing so may adverse-
ly affect the sensing performance.
• Always keep the sensor/bumper
area clean.
• Use only a soft cloth to wash the
vehicle. Also, do not spray highly
pressurized water on the sensor
installed on the bumper.
• Be careful not to apply unneces-
sary force on the frontal sensor
area. When the sensor moves out
of the correct position due to
external force, the system may not
operate correctly even without the
warning light or message. In this
case, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized Kia dealer.
• Use only the genuine Kia sensor
cover. Do not arbitrarily apply
paint on the sensor cover.
System malfunction
• When the AEB is not working prop-
erly, the AEB warning light ( ) will
illuminate and the warning mes-
sage will appear for a few seconds.
After the message disappears, the
master warning light ( ) will illu-
minate.In this case, have your vehi-
cle inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
• The AEB warning message may
appear along with the illumination
of the ESC warning light.
OPS056131L
OPS056132L
655
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
• The AEB is only a supplemen-
tal system for the driver's con-
venience.
The driver should hold the
responsibility to control the
vehicle operation. Do not sole-
ly depend on the AEB system.
Rather, maintain a safe braking
distance, and, if necessary,
depress the brake pedal to
reduce the driving speed.
• In certain instances and under
certain driving conditions, the
AEB system may activate pre-
maturely. This initial warning
message appears on the LCD
display with a warning chime.
Also, in certain instances the
front radar sensor or camera
recognition system may not
detect the vehicle or pedestri-
an ahead. The AEB system
may not activate and the warn-
ing message will not be dis-
played.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If there is a malfunction with
the AEB system, the automat-
ic emergency braking is not
applied even though the brak-
ing system is operating nor-
mally.
• If the vehicle in front stops
suddenly, you may have less
control of the brake system.
Therefore, always keep a safe
distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle in front of you.
• The AEB system may activate
during braking and the vehi-
cle may stop suddenly shift-
ing loose objects toward the
passengers. Always keep
loose objects secured.
• The AEB system may not acti-
vate if the driver applies the
brake pedal to avoid a colli-
sion.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The brake control may be
insufficient, possibly causing
a collision, if a vehicle in front
abruptly stops. Always pay
extreme caution.
• Occupants may get injured, if
the vehicle abruptly stops by
the activated AEB system.Pay
extreme caution.
• The AEB system operates
only to detect vehicles or
pedestrians in front of the
vehicle.
• The AEB system does not
operate when the vehicle is in
reverse.
• The AEB system is not
designed to detect other
objects on the road such as
animals.
• The AEB system does not
detect vehicles in the oppo-
site lane.
• The AEB system does not
detect cross traffic vehicles
that are approaching.
(Continued)
Driving your vehicle
566
Limitations of the system
The Automatic Emergency Braking
(AEB) system is designed to monitor
the vehicle ahead or a pedestrian on
the roadway through radar signals\
and camera recognition to warn the
driver that a collision is imminent,
and if necessary, apply emergency
braking.
In certain situations, the radar sen-
sor or the camera may not be able to
detect the vehicle or pedestrian
ahead. In these cases, the AEB sys-
tem may not operate normally. The
driver must pay careful attention in
the following situations where the
AEB operation may be limited.
Recognizing vehicles
The sensor may be limited when:
• The radar sensor or camera is
blocked with a foreign object or
debris
• Inclement weather such as heavy
rain or snow obscures the field of
view of the radar sensor or camera
• There is interference by electro-
magnetic waves
• There is severe irregular reflection
from the radar sensor
• The radar/camera sensor recogni-
tion is limited
• The vehicle in front is too small to
be detected (for example a motor-
cycle or a bicycle, etc.)
• The camera cannot fit the full out-
line of a vehicle in front
• The vehicle in front is an oversize
vehicle or trailer that is too big to
be detected by the camera recog-
nition system (for example a tractor
trailer, etc.)
• The driver's field of view is not well
illuminated (either too dark or too
much reflection or too much back-
light that obscures the field of view)
(Continued)
• The AEB system cannot
detect the driver approaching
the side view of a parked vehi-
cle (for example on a dead
end street.)
In these cases, you must
maintain a safe braking dis-
tance, and if necessary,
depress the brake pedal to
reduce the driving speed in
order to maintain a safe dis-
tance.
657
Driving your vehicle
• The vehicle in front does not have
their rear lights properly turned ON
• The outside brightness changes
suddenly, for example when enter-
ing or exiting a tunnel
• Light coming from a street light or
an oncoming vehicle is reflected on
a wet road surface such as a pud-
dle in the road
• The field of view in front is
obstructed by sun glare
• The windshield glass is fogged up;
a clear view of the road is obstruct-
ed
• The vehicle in front is driving errat-
ically
• The vehicle drives through a con-
struction area, on an unpaved
road, or above metal materials,
such as a railway
• The vehicle drives inside a build-
ing, such as a basement parking
lot
• The adverse road conditions cause
excessive vehicle vibrations while
driving
• The vehicle in front is moving verti-
cally to the driving direction
• The vehicle in front is stopped ver-
tically
• The vehicle in front is driving
towards your vehicle or reversing
• Sensor recognition changes rapid-
ly when driving over the bump
• When the vehicle vibrates heavily
• When the vehicle in front drives in
circles, such as on a roundabout
• Window tint on the front wind-
shield, film, water repellent coat-
ing, damaged glass, camera lens
contaminated with foreign objects
(e.g. a sticker, insect, etc.)
• When the radar or camera/camera
lens is damaged
• When the headlights are off or
weak at night or in a tunnel
• Light such as street light, sunlight
or oncoming vehicle light reflects
from water on the road
• Driving with the sun in front of you
(including headlights of a vehicle
coming from the opposite direc-
tion)
• Signs, shadow on the road, tunnel
entrance, toll gate, partially paved
roads
• The windshield is fogged by humid
air in the vehicle or frosted over
• In foggy weather
• The radar/camera sensor recogni-
tion is limited
Driving your vehicle
586
- Driving on a curve
The performance of the AEB system
may be limited when driving on a
curved road.
In certain instances on a curved
road, the AEB system may activate
prematurely.
The AEB (Autonomous Emergency
Braking) performance decreases
while driving on a curve not recog-
nizing the vehicle in front in the same
lane. It may unnecessarily produce
the warning alarm or brake, or it may
not produce the warning alarm or
brake at all.
Also, in certain instances the front
radar sensor or camera recognition
system may not detect the vehicle
traveling on a curved road.
In these cases, the driver must main-
tain a safe braking distance, and if
necessary, depress the brake pedal
to reduce your driving speed in order
to maintain a safe distance.
The AEB system may recognize a
vehicle in the next lane when driving
on a curved road.
In this case, the system may unnec-
essarily alarm the driver and apply
the brake.
Always pay attention to road and
driving conditions, while driving. If
necessary, depress the brake pedal
to reduce your driving speed in order
to maintain a safe distance.
Also, when necessary depress the
accelerator pedal to prevent the sys-
tem\ from unnecessarily decelerating
your vehicle.
Check the traffic conditions around
the vehicle before operating the AEB
(Autonomous Emergency Braking).
OQL055054OQL055053
659
Driving your vehicle
- Driving on a slope
The AEB performance decreases
while driving upward or downward on
a slope, not recognizing the vehicle
in front in the same lane. It may
unnecessarily produce the warning
message and the warning alarm, or it
may not produce the warning mes-
sage and the warning alarm at all.
When the AEB suddenly recognizes
the vehicle in front while passing
over a slope, you may experience
sharp deceleration.
Always keep your eyes forward while
driving upward or downward on a
slope, and, if necessary, depress the
brake pedal.
- Changing lanes
When a vehicle changes lanes in
front of you, the AEB system may not
immediately detect the vehicle, espe-
cially if the vehicle changes lanes
abruptly.In this case, you must main-
tain a safe braking distance, and if
necessary, depress the brake pedal
to reduce your driving speed in order
to maintain a safe distance.
When driving in stop-and-go traffic,
and a stopped vehicle in front of you
merges out of the lane, the AEB sys-
tem may not immediately detect the
new vehicle that is now in front of
you. In this case, you must maintain
a safe braking distance, and if nec-
essary, depress the brake pedal to
reduce your driving speed in order to
maintain a safe distance.
OQL055057OPS056127N OQL055056
Driving your vehicle
606
- Recognizing the vehicle
If the vehicle in front of you has cargo
that extends rearward from the cab,
or when the vehicle in front of you
has higher ground clearance, addi-
tional special attention is required.
The AEB system may not be able to
recognize the cargo extending from
the vehicle. In these instances, you
must maintain a safe braking dis-
tance from the rearmost object, and
if necessary, depress the brake
pedal to reduce your driving speed in
order to maintain distance.
Recognizing pedestrians
The sensor may be limited when:
• The pedestrian is not fully detected
by the camera recognition system,
for example, if the pedestrian is
leaning over or is not fully walking
upright
• The pedestrian is moving very
quickly or appears abruptly in the
camera detection area
• The pedestrian is wearing clothing
that easily blends into the back-
ground, making it difficult to be
detected by the camera recogni-
tion system
• The outside lighting is too bright
(e.g.when driving in bright sunlight
or in sun glare) or too dark (e.g.
when driving on a dark rural road
at night)
• There is an item similar to a per-
son's body structure
• The pedestrian is small
• The pedestrian has impaired
mobility
• The sensor recognition is limited
• It is difficult to detect and distin-
guish the pedestrian from other
objects in the surroundings, for
example, when there is a group of
pedestrians or a large crowd
• Sensor recognition changes rapid-
ly when driving over the bump
• When the vehicle vibrates heavily
• When the vehicle in front drives in
circles, such as on a roundabout
• Window tint on the front wind-
shield, film, water repellent coat-
ing, damaged glass, camera lens
contaminated with foreign objects
(e.g. a sticker, insect, etc.)
• When the radar or camera/camera
lens is damaged
• When the headlights are off or
weak at night or in a tunnel
• Light such as street light, sunlight
or oncoming vehicle light reflects
from water on the road
• Driving with the sun in front of you
(including headlights of a vehicle
coming from the opposite direc-
tion)
OPS056128N
661
Driving your vehicle
• Signs, shadow on the road, tunnel
entrance, toll gate, partially paved
roads
• The windshield is fogged by humid
air in the vehicle or frosted over
• In foggy weather
• The radar/camera sensor recogni-
tion is limited
✽✽
NOTICE
In some instances, the AEB system
may be cancelled when subjected to
electromagnetic interference.
(Continued)
• Never try to test the operation
of the AEB system. Doing so
may cause severe injury or
death.
• Please have the system
inspected by a professional
workshop when replacing or
reinstalling the front wind-
shield, front bumper or
radar/camera. Kia recom-
mends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
WARNING
• Do not use the Autonomous
Emergency Braking system
when towing a vehicle.
Application of the AEB sys-
tem while towing may
adversely affect the safety of
your vehicle or the towing
vehicle.
• Use extreme caution when the
vehicle in front of you has
cargo that extends rearward
from the cab, or when the
vehicle in front of you has
higher ground clearance.
• The AEB system is designed
to detect and monitor the
vehicle ahead or detect a
pedestrian in the roadway
through radar signals and
camera recognition. It is not
designed to detect bicycles,
motorcycles, or smaller
wheeled objects such as lug-
gage bags, shopping carts, or
strollers.
(Continued)
Driving your vehicle
626
1. Cruise indicator
2. Cruise set indicator
The cruise control system allows you
to program the vehicle to maintain a
constant speed without pressing the
accelerator pedal.
This system is designed to function
above approximately 20 mph (30
km/h).
• If the cruise control is left on
(CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster illuminated), the
cruise control can be switched on
accidentally. Keep the cruise con-
trol system off (CRUISE indicator
light OFF) when the cruise control
is not in use, to avoid inadvertently
setting a speed.
• Use the cruise control system only
when traveling on open highways
in good weather.
• Do not use the cruise control driv-
ing in heavy or varying traffic, or on
slippery (rainy, icy or snow-cov-
ered) or winding roads or over 6%
up-hill or down-hill roads.
✽✽
NOTICE
• During normal cruise control opera-
tion, when the SET switch is activat-
ed or reactivated after applying the
brakes, the cruise control will ener-
gize after approximately 3 seconds.
The delay is normal.
• To activate cruise control, depress
the brake pedal at least once after
turning the ignition switch to the ON
position or starting the engine. This
is to check if the brake switch which
is important part to cancel cruise
control is in normal condition.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OPS053015
WARNING - Misuse of
Cruise Control
Do not use cruise control if the
traffic situation does not allow
you to drive safely at a constant
speed and with sufficient dis-
tance to the vehicle in front.
663
Driving your vehicle
Cruise control switch
CRUISE :Turns cruise control sys-
tem on or off.
CANCEL: Cancels cruise control
operation.
RES+: Resumes or increases cruise
control speed.
SET-: Sets or decreases cruise con-
trol speed.
To set cruise control speed:
1. Press the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel to turn the system
on. The CRUISE indicator light in
the instrument cluster will illumi-
nate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed,
which must be more than 20 mph
(30 km/h).
✽✽
NOTICE - Manual transaxle
For manual transaxle vehicles, you
should depress the brake pedal at
least once to set the cruise control
after starting the engine.
3.Push the SET - switch, and
release it at the desired speed.
The SET indicator light in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
Release the accelerator pedal at
the same time.The desired speed
will automatically be maintained.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may
slow down or speed up slightly while
going uphill or downhill.
OPS053016 OPS053017
OPS053018
Driving your vehicle
646
To increase cruise control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Push the RES + switch and hold it.
Your vehicle will accelerate.
Release the lever at the speed you
want.
• Push the RES + switch and
release it immediately.
The cruising speed will increase by
1 mph (or 2km/h) each time you
move the lever up (to RES+) in this
manner.
To decrease the cruising
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Push the SET - switch and hold it.
Your vehicle will gradually slow
down. Release the lever at the
speed you want to maintain.
• Push the SET - switch and release
it immediately.
The cruising speed will decrease
by 1 mph (2 km/h) each time you
move the lever down (to SET-) in
this manner.
To temporarily accelerate with
the cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily
when the cruise control is on,
depress the accelerator pedal.
Increased speed will not interfere
with cruise control operation or
change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your
foot off the accelerator.
OPS053019 OPS053018
665
Driving your vehicle
To cancel cruise control, do
one of the following:
• Press the brake pedal.
• Depress the clutch pedal if
equipped with a manual transaxle.
• Shift into N (Neutral) with an auto-
matic transaxle.
• Push the CANCEL switch located
on the steering wheel.
• Decrease the vehicle speed lower
than the memory speed by approx-
imately 12mph(20km/h).
• Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than approximately 15 mph (25
km/h).
Each of these actions will cancel
cruise control operation (the SET
indicator light in the instrument clus-
ter will go off), but it will not turn the
system off. If you wish to resume
cruise control operation, push the
RES + switch located on your steer-
ing wheel.You will return to your pre-
viously preset speed.
To resume cruising speed at
more than approximately 20
mph (30 km/h):
If any method other than the
CRUISE button was used to cancel
cruising speed and the system is still
activated, the most recent set speed
will automatically resume when the
RES+ switch is pushed.
It will not resume, however, if the
vehicle speed has dropped below
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
OPS053020
OPS053019
Driving your vehicle
666
To turn cruise control off, do
one of the following:
• Press the CRUISE button (the
CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster will go off).
• Turn the ignition off.
Both of these actions cancel cruise
control operation. If you want to
resume cruise control operation,
repeat the steps provided in “To set
cruise control speed” on the previous
page.
OPS053017
667
Driving your vehicle
➀ Cruise indicator
➁ Set speed
➂ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
The SCC allows you to program the
vehicle to maintain a set speed so
long as it is not limited by traffic.When
traffic is encountered the vehicle will
slow down to maintain a set distance
behind traffic without depressing the
accelerator or brake pedal.
• Use the SCC only when traveling
on open highways in good weather.
• Limited visibility (rain, snow, smog,
etc)
• Cruise function should not be used
when the vehicle is being towed to
prevent any damage.
❈ SCC is the abbreviation for Smart
Cruise Control.
SMART CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (SCC) (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
- Smart Cruise Control
Inadvertent Activation
If the smart cruise control is left
on (CRUISE indicator in the
instrument cluster illuminated),
it can be activated inadvertent-
ly. Keep the advanced smart
cruise control system off
(CRUISE indicator turn off)
when the smart cruise control is
not in use to avoid setting a
speed which the driver is not
aware of.
OPS057119N
WARNING
The Smart Cruise Control
System (SCC) is deactivated
when driving under the speed
of 6.0 mph (10 km/h). In this
case, the SCC will be unable to
maintain the distance entered
by the driver. It is the driver's
responsibility to depress the
brake to maintain a safe dis-
tance from the vehicle the driv-
er is approaching.
Driving your vehicle
686
(Continued)
- Slippery road with rain, ice,
or snow covered
- Abrupt curved road
- Steep hills
- Windy roads
- Off roads
- Rods under construction
- Rumble strip
- The sensing ability decreas-
es if the level of front and rear
vehicle is changed from the
factory.
• The smart cruise control sys-
tem cannot recognize a
stopped vehicle, pedestrians or
an oncoming vehicle. Always
look ahead cautiously to pre-
vent unexpected and sudden
situations from occurring.
• Use the smart cruise control
system only when traveling on
open highways in good weath-
er conditions.
(Continued)
WARNING
- Smart Cruise Control
Limitations
• The smart cruise control is a
supplemental system and is
not a substitute for safe driv-
ing practices. It is the respon-
sibility of the driver to always
check the speed and distance
to the vehicle ahead.
• Do not use the smart cruise
control when it may not be
safe to keep the car at a con-
stant speed. For instance.
- Highway interchange and
tollgate
- Road surrounded by abnor-
mally multiple steel con-
structions (subway con-
struction, steel tunnel, etc)
- Parking lot
- Lanes beside guard rail on a
road
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When driving near crash barri-
ers
• When driving on a sharp curve
• When driving with limited view
(possibly due to bad weather,
such as fog, snow, rain or
sandstorm)
• Always pay attention to the
road and driving conditions to
prevent unexpected situations
from occurring even while the
SCC is operating.
669
Driving your vehicle
Speed setting (SCC)
To set cruise control speed:
1. Press the CRUISE button, to turn
the system on. The CRUISE indi-
cator in the instrument cluster will
illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
• 20 mph (30 km/h) ~ 110 mph
(180 km/h) : when there is no
vehicle in front
• 6 mph (10 km/h) ~ 110 mph (180
km/h) : when there is a vehicle in
front
3. Move the lever down (to SET-),
and release it at the desired
speed. The set speed and vehicle
to vehicle distance on the LDC
screen will illuminate.
4. Release the accelerator pedal.
The desired speed will automati-
cally be maintained.
If there is a vehicle in front of you, the
speed may decrease to maintain the
distance to the vehicle ahead.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may
slow down or speed up slightly while
going uphill or downhill.
To increase cruise control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever up (to RES+), and
hold it. Your vehicle set speed will
increase by 5 mph (10 km/h).
Release the lever at the speed you
want.
• Move the lever up (to RES+), and
release it immediately.The cruising
speed will increase by 1 mph (1.0
km/h) each time you move the
lever up (to RES+) in this manner.
OPS053017 OPS053019
OPS053018
Driving your vehicle
706
• SCC will operate to a maximum
setting of 110 mph (180 km/h).
However all local speed limit laws
must be followed.
To decrease the cruise control
set speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever down (to SET-), and
hold it. Your vehicle set speed will
decrease by 5 mph (10 km/h).
Release the lever at the speed you
want.
• Move the lever down (to SET-), and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will decrease by 1 mph (1.0
km/h) each time you move the lever
down (to SET-) in this manner.
• You can set the cruise control to any
speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).
To temporarily accelerate with the
cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily
when the cruise control is on,
depress the accelerator pedal.
Increased speed will not interfere
with cruise control operation or
change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your
foot off the accelerator.
If you move the lever down (to SET-)
at increased speed, the cruising
speed will be set again.
✽✽
NOTICE
Be careful when accelerating tem-
porarily, because the speed is not
regulated automatically at this time
even if there is a vehicle in front of
you.
CAUTION
When vehicle speed is under 10
km/h (6 mph), the Smart Cruise
Control is canceled. The driver
must adjust the vehicle speed
by depressing the accelerator r
brake pedal according to the
oad condition ahead and driving
condition.
CAUTION
Check the driving condition
before using the toggle switch.
Driving speed sharply increas-
es, when you push up and hold
the toggle switch.
OPS053018
671
Driving your vehicle
SCC will be temporarily canceled
when:
Cancelled manually
The smart cruise control is temporar-
ily canceled when the brake pedal is
depressed or the CANCEL button is
pressed. The speed and vehicle to
vehicle distance indicator on the
cluster will disappear and the
CRUISE indicator is illuminated con-
tinuously.
Cancelled automatically
• The driver's door is opened.
• The vehicle is shifted to N
(Neutral), R (Reverse) or P (Park).
• The EPB (Electronic Parking
Brake) is applied.
• The vehicle speed is over 120 mph
(190 km/h).
• The vehicle stops on a steep
incline.
• The ESC (Electronic Stability
Control), TCS (Traction Control
System) or ABS is operating.
• The ESC is turned off.
• The sensor or the cover is dirty or
blocked with foreign matter.
• The vehicle is stopped for a certain
period of time.
• The vehicle stops and goes repeat-
edly for a long period of time.
• The accelerator pedal is continu-
ously depressed for a long period
of time.
• The engine performance is abnor-
mal.
• The driver starts driving by pushing
the switch up (RES+)/down (SET-)
or depressing the accelerator
pedal, after the vehicle is stopped
by the Smart Cruise Control
System with no other vehicle
ahead.
• When the AEB (Autonomous
Emergency Braking) is operating
• When the engine speed is in dan-
gerous range
• The driver starts driving by pushing
the switch up (RES+)/down (SET-)
or depressing the accelerator
pedal, after stopping the vehicle
with a vehicle stopped far away in
front.
• The AEB is activated.
• The vehicle stops and goes repeat-
edly for a long period of time.
Each of these actions will cancel the
Smart Cruise Control operation.
The Set Speed and Vehicle-to-
Vehicle Distance on the LCD display
will go off.
OPS056120N
Driving your vehicle
726
In a condition the Smart Cruise
Control is cancelled automatically,
the Smart Cruise Control will not
resume even though the RES+ or
SET- switch is pushed.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the system is automatically can-
celled, the warning chime will sound
and a message (“Smart Cruise
Control canceled”) will appear for a
few seconds.
You must adjust the vehicle speed by
depressing the accelerator or brake
pedal according to the road condi-
tions ahead and driving condition.
Always check the road conditions.
Do not rely on the warning chime.
To resume cruise control set
speed:
If any method other than the CRUISE
button was used to cancel cruising
speed and the system is still activat-
ed, the cruising speed will automati-
cally resume when you move the
lever up/down (to RES+ or SET-).
If you move the lever up (to RES+),
the speed will resume to the recently
set speed. When the speed of the
vehicle is greater than or equal to 6
mph (10 km/h) but less than 20 mph
(30 km/h), the smart cruise control
system will be reset only when there
is a vehicle in front.
WARNING - Following
Distance
• To avoid collisions, always be
aware of the selected speed
and vehicle to vehicle dis-
tance settings when activat-
ing your smart cruise control
system.
• Always maintain sufficient
braking distance and deceler-
ate your vehicle by applying
the brakes if necessary.
OPS053019
673
Driving your vehicle
To turn cruise control off:
Press the CRUISE button. (the
CRUISE indicator in the instrument
cluster will go off).
Vehicle to vehicle distance
setting (SCC)
To set vehicle to vehicle distance:
This function allows you to program
the vehicle to maintain relative dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead without
depressing the accelerator pedal or
brake pedal.
The vehicle to vehicle distance will
automatically activate when the SCC
is on.
Select the appropriate distance
according to road conditions and
vehicle speed.
Each time the button is pressed, the
vehicle to vehicle distance changes
as follows:
OPS053017
OPS056121N
Distance 4 Distance 3 Distance 2
Distance 1
Driving your vehicle
746
For example, if you drive at 56 mph
(90 km/h), the distance is maintained
as follows;
Distance 4 - approximately 172 feet
(52.5 m)
Distance 3 - approximately 130 feet
(40 m)
Distance 2 - approximately 106 feet
(32.5 m)
Distance 1 - approximately 82 feet
(25 m)
✽✽
NOTICE
The smart cruise control system
remember the last vehicle to vehicle
distance which the driver used in the
vehicle with AEB.
OPS057123N
OPS057125N
Distance 4
Distance 2
OPS057124N
Distance 3
OPS057122N
Distance 1
675
Driving your vehicle
• The vehicle will maintain the set
speed, when the lane ahead is clear.
• The vehicle will slow down or
speed up within selected speed to
maintain the selected distance,
when there is a vehicle ahead of
you in the lane. (A vehicle will
appear in front of your vehicle in
the LCD display only when there is
an actual vehicle in front of you)
• If the vehicle ahead speeds up,
your vehicle will travel at a steady
cruising speed after accelerating to
the selected speed.
• The warning chime sounds and
LCD display blinks if it is hard to
maintain the selected distance to
the vehicle ahead.
• If the warning chime sounds,
actively adjust the vehicle speed by
depressing the brake pedal
according to the road condition
ahead and driving condition.
• Even if the warning chime is not acti-
vated, always pay attention to the
driving conditions to prevent danger-
ous situations from occurring.
If the vehicle ahead (vehicle speed:
less than 20 mph (30 km/h)) moves to
the next lane, the warning chime will
sound and a message will appear.
If a vehicle enters into your lane mov-
ing less than the designated speed,
you can adjust your vehicle speed by
depressing the brake pedal.
Radar to detect distance to the
vehicle ahead
The sensor detects distance to the
vehicle ahead.
If the sensor is covered with dirt or
other foreign matter, the vehicle to
vehicle distance control may not
operate correctly.
Always keep the sensor clean.
OPS057133N
OPS056126N
Driving your vehicle
766
Radar check message
If the radar or cover is dirty or
obscured with foreign matter such as
snow, this message (“Smart Cruise
Control disabled temporarily”) will
appear and it will disappear after for
a while. In this case, the system may
not function temporarily, but it does
not indicate a malfunction of the
Smart Cruise Control System. Clean
the radar or cover by using a soft
cloth and it will operate normally.
SCC (Smart Cruise Control)
malfunction message
The message (“Check Smart Cruise
Control System”) will appear when
the vehicle to vehicle distance control
system is not functioning normally.
Take your vehicle to an authorized
Kia dealer and have the system
checked.
• Always keep the sensor and
bumper clean.
• Use only a genuine Kia sensor
cover for your vehicle.
• Do not install accessories around
the sensor and do not replace the
bumper by yourself.It may interfere
with the sensor performance.
• Impact damage to the sensor or
sensor area may cause the sensor
to move slightly off position and
result in the SCC not operating
correctly without any warning or
indicator from the cluster. If this
occurs, have your vehicle checked
by an authorized Kia dealer as
soon as possible.
• Do not apply license plate frame or
foreign objects such as a bumper
sticker or a bumper guard near the
radar sensor. Doing so may
adversely affect the sensing per-
formance of the radar.
• Always keep the radar sensor and
lens cover clean and free of dirt
and debris.
• Use only a soft cloth to wash the
vehicle. Do not spray pressurized
water directly on the sensor or sen-
sor cover.
• Be careful not to apply unneces-
sary force on the radar sensor or
sensor cover. If the sensor is
forcibly moved out of proper align-
ment, the Smart Cruise Control
System may not operate correctly.
In this case, a warning message
may not be displayed. Have the
vehicle inspected by an authorized
Kia dealer.
• If the front bumper becomes dam-
aged in the area around the radar
sensor, the Smart Cruise Control
System may not operate properly.
Have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
CAUTION - Sensor
Damage
To prevent sensor cover dam-
age from occurring, wash the
car with a soft cloth.
677
Driving your vehicle
• Use only genuine Kia parts to
repair or replace a damaged sen-
sor or sensor cover. Do not apply
paint to the sensor cover.
To adjust the sensitivity of
Smart Cruise Control
The sensitivity of vehicle speed when
following the front vehicle to maintain
the set distance can be adjusted. Go
to the User Settings Mode (Driving
Assist) and select SCC (Smart
Cruise Control). You may select one
of the three stages you prefer.
• Slow:
Vehicle speed following the front
vehicle to maintain the set distance
is slower than normal speed.
• Normal:
Vehicle speed following the front
vehicle to maintain the set distance
is normal
• Fast:
Vehicle speed following the front
vehicle to maintain the set distance
is faster than normal speed.
✽✽
NOTICE
The system remembers the last
selected mode.
To convert to cruise control
mode:
The driver may choose to only use
the cruise control mode (speed con-
trol function) by doing as follows:
1.Turn the SCC on (the cruise indi-
cator light will be on but the system
will not be activated).
2.Push the distance to distance
switch for more than 2 seconds.
3.Choose between “Smart cruise
control (SCC) mode” and “Cruise
control (CC) mode”.
WARNING
When using the cruise control
mode, you must manually
assess the distance to other
vehicles as the system will not
automatically brake to slow
down for other vehicles.
Driving your vehicle
786
Limitations of the system
The SCC may have limits to its ability
to detect distance to the vehicle ahead
due to road and traffic conditions.
On curves
• On curves, the SCC may not
detect a moving vehicle in your
lane, and then your vehicle could
accelerate to the set speed. Also,
the vehicle speed will rapidly slow
down when the vehicle ahead is
recognized suddenly.
• Select the appropriate set speed
on curves and adjust your vehicle
speed by depressing the accelera-
tor or brake pedal according to the
road condition ahead and driving
condition.
• Your vehicle speed can be reduced
due to a vehicle in the adjacent
lane. Adjust your vehicle speed by
depressing the brake pedal
according to the road condition
ahead and driving condition. Apply
the accelerator pedal and select
the appropriate set speed. Check
to be sure that the road conditions
permit safe operation of the SCC.
OJF055025
OJF055026
679
Driving your vehicle
On inclines
• During uphill or downhill driving, the
SCC may not detect a moving vehi-
cle in your lane, and cause your
vehicle to accelerate to the set
speed. Also, the vehicle speed will
rapidly slow down when the vehicle
ahead is recognized suddenly.
• Select the appropriate set speed
on inclines and adjust your vehicle
speed by depressing the accelera-
tor or brake pedal according to the
road condition ahead.
Lane changing
• A vehicle which moves into your
lane from an adjacent lane cannot
be recognized by the sensor until it
is in the sensor's detection range.
• The sensor may not detect imme-
diately when a vehicle cuts in sud-
denly. Always pay attention to the
traffic, road and driving conditions.
• If a vehicle which moves into your
lane is slower than your vehicle, your
speed may decrease to maintain the
distance to the vehicle ahead.
• If a vehicle which moves into your
lane is faster than your vehicle,
your vehicle will accelerate to the
selected speed.
• Your vehicle may accelerate when
a vehicle ahead of you disappears.
• When you are warned that the
vehicle ahead of you is not detect-
ed, drive with caution.
OPS056127N OJF055028
OJF055049
Driving your vehicle
806
Vehicle recognition
Some vehicles ahead in your lane
cannot be recognized by the sensor
as follows:
- Narrow vehicles such as motorcy-
cles or bicycles
- Vehicles offset to one side
- Slow-moving vehicles or sudden-
decelerating vehicles
- Stopped vehicles
- Vehicles with small rear profile such
as trailers with no loads
A vehicle ahead cannot be recog-
nized correctly by the sensor if any of
following occurs:
- When the vehicle is pointing
upwards due to overloading in the
liftgate
- While making turns by steering
- When driving to one side of the lane
- When driving on narrow lanes or on
curves
Adjust your vehicle speed by
depressing the brake pedal accord-
ing to the road condition ahead and
driving condition.
• If the vehicle right in front moves to
another direction, the SCC system
may not sense stopped vehicle in
front and may crash. Always main-
tain safe distance.
OJF055048
OJF055029
681
Driving your vehicle
• Always look out for pedestrians
when your vehicle is maintaining a
distance with the vehicle ahead.
• Always be cautious for vehicles
that are taller with higher clear-
ance, or vehicles carrying loads
that stick out of the back of the
vehicle.
OJF055050 OPS056128N
WARNING - Emergency
Stops
The smart cruise control sys-
tem cannot guarantee the stop
for every emergency situation.
If an emergency stop is neces-
sary,you must apply the brakes.
WARNING - Safe Use of
SCC
The SCC can provide you with an
additional level of safety and
fatigue reduction. However you
must maintain careful observa-
tion of the roadway in front and
around you and maintain control
of your vehicle and spacing
around other vehicles as you
normally would. For example,
this will require you to apply the
brakes as needed when coming
upon a slower moving vehicle, or
when a vehicle from another lane
drives quickly in front of you.
WARNING - Inclines &
Towing
Do not use SCC on steep
inclines or when towing another
vehicle or trailer since such
extreme loading can interfere
with your vehicle's ability to
maintain the selected speed.
Driving your vehicle
826
When using the Smart Cruise
Control take the following precau-
tions:
• If an emergency stop is necessary,
you must apply the brakes. The
vehicle cannot be stopped at every
emergency situation by using the
Smart Cruise Control System.
• Keep a safe distance according to
road conditions and vehicle speed.
If the vehicle to vehicle distance is
too close during a high-speed driv-
ing, a serious collision may result.
• Always maintain sufficient braking
distance and decelerate your vehi-
cle by applying the brakes if neces-
sary.
• The Smart Cruise Control System
cannot recognize a stopped vehi-
cle, pedestrians or an oncoming
vehicle. Always look ahead cau-
tiously to prevent unexpected and
sudden situations from occurring.
• Vehicles moving in front of you with
a frequent lane change may cause
a delay in the system's reaction or
may cause the system to react to a
vehicle actually in an adjacent
lane. Always drive cautiously to
prevent unexpected and sudden
situations from occurring.
• Always be aware of the selected
speed and vehicle to vehicle dis-
tance. The driver should not solely
rely on the system but always pay
attention to driving conditions and
control your vehicle speed.
• The Smart Cruise Control System
may not recognize complex driving
situations so always pay attention
to driving conditions and control
your vehicle speed.
• Make sure to be well informed of
the owner's manual and practice
using the smart cruise control sys-
tem to ensure the safe use of the
system.
• After an engine start, please stop
for several seconds. If system ini-
tialization is not completed, the
SCC does not normally operate.
• After an engine start, if any objects
are not detected or the sensor
cover is obscured with foreign sub-
stances, there is a possibility that
the SCC system may not work.
• The following conditions may
cause a malfunction: over-loading
the liftgate, suspension modifica-
tion, tire replacement with unau-
thorized tires or tires with different
tread wear and pressure levels.
683
Driving your vehicle
Outside rearview mirror may not
alert the driver when:
- The outside rearview mirror hous-
ing is severely polluted
- The window is severely polluted
- The windows are severely tinted.
This device complies with Part 15
of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
3. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the device.
Radio frequency radiation expo-
sure information:
This equipment complies with FCC
radiation exposure limits set forth for
an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed
and operated with minimum distance
of 20 cm between the radiator
(antenna) and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-
located or operating in conjunction
with any other antenna or transmit-
ter.
Driving your vehicle
846
The drive mode may be selected
according to the driver’s preference
or road condition.
The system resets to be in the ECO
mode, when the hybrid system is
restarted.
If there is a problem with the instru-
ment cluster, the drive mode will be
in ECO mode and may not change to
NORMAL mode or SPORT mode.
The mode changes whenever the
DRIVE MODE button is pressed.
■ Except DCT
■ For DCT
❈ When normal mode is selected, it
is not displayed on the cluster.
ECO mode (Active ECO)
Active ECO helps improve
fuel efficiency by control-
ling certain engine and
transaxle system operat-
ing parameters. Fuel effi-
ciency depends on the
driver's driving habit and
road condition.
• When the DRIVE MODE
button is pressed and
the ECO mode is select-
ed, the ECO indicator
(green) will illuminate to
show that the Active
ECO is operating.
• When the Active ECO is
activated, it does not turn
off even though the
engine is restarted again.
To turn off the system,
press the DRIVE MODE
button again.
DRIVE MODE INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OPS056118
ECO
NORMAL
SPORT ECO
NORMAL SPORT
685
Driving your vehicle
When Active ECO is activated:
• The acceleration may slightly be
reduced eventhough you depress
the accelerator fully.
• The air conditioner performance
may be limited
• The shift pattern of the automatic
transaxle may change.
• The engine noise may get louder.
The above situations are normal
conditions when the active eco sys-
tem is activated to improve fuel effi-
ciency.
Limitation of Active ECO operation:
If the following conditions occur while
Active ECO is operating, the system
operation is limited even though there
is no change in the ECO indicator.
• When the coolant temperature is
low:
The system will be limited until
engine performance becomes nor-
mal.
• When driving up a hill:
The system will be limited to gain
power when driving uphill because
the engine torque is restricted.
• When using manual mode:
The system will be limited accord-
ing to the shift location.
• When the accelerator pedal is
deeply depressed for a few seconds:
The system will be limited, judging
that the driver wants to speed up.
SPORT mode
SPORT mode focuses on dynamic
driving by automatically controlling
the steering wheel, engine and
transaxle system.
• When the DRIVE MODE button is
pressed and the SPORT mode is
selected, the SPROT indicator
(yellow) will illuminate.
• Whenever the hybrid system is
restarted, the Drive Mode will revert
back to ECO mode.If SPORT mode
is desired, re-select SPORT mode
from the DRIVE MODE button
• If the system is activated:
- After speeding, it maintains the
gear and RPM for some time
even though the accelerator
pedal is not depressed.
- Up-shifting is delayed.
✽✽
NOTICE
In Sport drive mode, the fuel effi-
ciency may decrease.
Driving your vehicle
866
This system detects the lane with a
sensor at the front windshield and
notifies you if it detects that your
vehicle leaves the lane.
• The LDWS does not make the
vehicle change lanes. It is the dri-
ver's responsibility to always check
the road conditions.
• If the sensor cannot detect the lane
or if the vehicle speed does not
exceed 40 mph (64 km/h), the
LDWS will not be able to notify you
if the vehicle leaves the lane.
• If your vehicle has window tint or
other types of coating on the front
windshield, the LDWS may not
work properly.
• Prevent damage to the LDWS sen-
sor from water or any liquid.
• Do not remove the LDWS parts
and avoid damaging the sensor by
avoiding a strong impacts.
• Do not put objects that reflect light
on the dash board.
• The operation of the LDWS can be
affected by several factors (includ-
ing environmental conditions). It is
the responsibility of the driver to
pay attention to the roadway and to
maintain the vehicle in it's lane at
all times.
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING SYSTEM (LDWS) (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING - LDWS Alert
The LDWS is a supplemental
system and only intended to
provide you with information
regarding your vehicle's posi-
tion on the roadway. Upon
receiving an LDWS alert, you
must take the necessary steps
to maintain control of your vehi-
cle.The LDWS does not provide
any steering inputs into the
vehicle for you. It can be dan-
gerous to make a large sudden
steering input in response to an
alert, since that could result in
loss of control.
OPS056039L
OPS055040N
OPS056115L
687
Driving your vehicle
To operate the LDWS, press the but-
ton with the engine start/stop button
in the ON position.The indicator illu-
minates on the cluster.To cancel the
LDWS, press the button again.
If the system detects that your vehi-
cle is leaving the lane when the
LDWS is operating and vehicle
speed exceeds 40 mph (64 km/h),
the warning operates as follows:
1.Visual warning
If you leave the lane, the lane you
leave on the LCD display blinks yel-
low.
2.Auditory warning
If you leave the lane, the warning
sound operates.
OPS046467L
OPS046466L
■ When the sensor detects the lane line
■ When the sensor doesn’t detect the lane line
OPS056068L
OPS046468L
OPS046469L
■ Left lane departure warning
■ Right lane departure warning
Driving your vehicle
886
The color of symbol will change
depend on the condition of LDWS
system.
- White color : When you activate the
lane departure warn-
ing system by press-
ing the LDWS button,
system operating con-
ditions are not satis-
fied or the sensor does
not detect the lane line
- Green color : When you activate the
lane departure warn-
ing system by press-
ing the LDWS button,
system operating con-
ditions are satisfied
and the sensor detect
the lane line
- Yellow color : when there is a mal-
function with the lane
departure warning
system.
Warning indicator
When the LDWS is not working prop-
erly, the warning light will illuminate
and the warning message will come
on for a few second. After the mes-
sage disappears, the master warning
light will illuminate.
Take your vehicle to an authorized Kia
dealer and have the system checked.
OPS056068L
OJF055246L
OPS056069L
689
Driving your vehicle
The LDWS does not operate
when:
• The driver turns on the turn signal
or the hazard warning flasher to
change lane.
• Driving on the lane line.
✽✽
NOTICE
To change lanes, operate the turn
signal switch then change the lane.
The LDWS may not warn you
even if the vehicle leaves the
lane, or may warn you even if
the vehicle does not leave the
lane when;
• The lane is not visible due to snow,
rain, stain, a puddle or other envi-
ronmental conditions.
• The brightness of the outside
changes suddenly such as tunnel
enter/exit.
• The headlights are off at night or in
a tunnel.
• The color of the lane marking from
the road is difficult to distinguish.
• Driving on a steep grade or a
curve.
• Light such as street light, sunlight
or oncoming vehicle light reflects
from water on the road.
• The lens or windshield is stained
with foreign matter.
• The sensor cannot detect the lane
because of fog, heavy rain or
heavy snow.
• The surrounding of the inside rear
view mirror temperature is high
due to a direct ray of light.
• The lane is very wide or narrow.
• The lane line is damaged or indis-
tinct.
• The windshield is fogged by humid
air in the vehicle.
• The shadow is on the lane line by a
median strip.
• The sensor cannot distinguish the
lane from the road due to the
dust/dirt.
• There is a mark similar to a lane
line.
• There is a boundary structure.
• The distance from vehicle ahead is
very short or the vehicle ahead
drives hiding the lane line.
• The vehicle vibrates heavily due to
road conditions.
• The lane number increases or
decreases or the lane lines are
crossing.
WARNING - LDWS
Limitations
The Lane Departure Warning
System is a supplemental sys-
tem. Do not solely rely on the
system but always pay attention
and drive safely.
Driving your vehicle
906
• Putting something on the dash-
board.
• Driving with the sun in front of you.
• Driving in areas under construc-
tion.
• The lane line is more than two in
either side (Left/Right)
Outside rearview mirror may not
alert the driver when:
- The outside rearview mirror hous-
ing is severely polluted
- The window is severely polluted
- The windows are severely tinted.
This device complies with Part 15
of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
691
Driving your vehicle
The BSD (Blind spot detection) sys-
tem uses a radar sensor to alert the
driver while driving.
It senses the rear side territory of the
vehicle and provides information to
the driver.
➀ BSD(Blind spot detection)
Warning range is dependent on your
vehicle speed. However, if the speed
of your vehicle is faster by 10km/h or
more than other nearby vehicles, the
warning is not operated.
➁ LCA(Lane change assist)
When vehicles are approaching to
your vehicle at high speed, the warn-
ing is operated.
➂ RCTA(Rear cross traffic alert)
When your vehicle moves backward,
the sensor detects approaching vehi-
cles to the left or right side direction
and warning is operated.
BLIND SPOT DETECTION SYSTEM (BSD) (IF EQUIPPED)
OUM054176L
WARNING - BSD
Limitations
• Always check the road condi-
tion while driving for unex-
pected situations even though
the Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) is operating.
• The Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) is a supplemen-
tal system. Do not solely rely
on the system and always pay
attention to drive safely.
• The Blind Spot Detection
System may not detect every
object alongside the vehicle
and is not a substitute for
proper and safe lane chang-
ing procedures. Always drive
safely and use caution when
changing lanes.
Driving your vehicle
926
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist)
Operating conditions
The indicator on the switch will illumi-
nate when the BSD (Blind spot
detection) system switch is pressed
with the engine start/stop button
switch ON. If the vehicle speed
exceeds 18.6 mph (30 km/h), the
system will activate.
If you press the switch again, the
switch indicator and system will be
turned off.
If the engine start/stop button switch
is turned OFF and ON the system
returns to the previous state.
When the system is not used turn the
system off by pressing the switch.
When the system is turned on the
warning light will illuminate for 3 sec-
onds on the outside rearview mirror.
Warning type
The system will activate when:
1.The system is on
2.Vehicle speed is above 18.6 mph
(30 km/h)
3.Other vehicles are detected in the
rear side
If a vehicle is detected within the
boundary of the system, a warning
light will illuminate on the outside
rearview mirror.
If the detected vehicle is not in detec-
tion range, the warning will be turned
off.
OUM054028
1st stage
OPS056116L
WARNING
The Blind Spot Detection
System with Lane Change
Assist and Rear Cross Traffic
Alert is not a substitute for
proper and safe lane changing
procedures. Always drive safely
and use caution when changing
lanes. The Blind Spot Detection
System may not detect every
object alongside the vehicle.
693
Driving your vehicle
The second stage alarm will activate
when:
1. The first stage alert is on
2. The turn signal is on to change a
lane
When the second stage alert is acti-
vated, a warning light will be blinking
on the outside rearview mirror and
an alarm will sound.
If you move the turn signal switch to
origin position, the second stage
alert will be deactivated.
- The second stage alarm can be
deactivated.
• To activate the alarm:
Go to the User Settings Mode →
Sound and select "BSD" on the
LCD display.
• To deactivate the alarm:
Go to the User Settings Mode →
Sound and deselect "BSD" on the
LCD display.
The alarm function helps alert the
driver. Deactivate this function only
when it is necessary
Detecting sensor
The sensors are located inside the
rear bumper.
Always keep the rear bumper clean
for the system to work properly.
OPS056114L
OUM054029
2nd stage
Driving your vehicle
946
Warning message
The message (“Blind Spot Detection
disabled.Radar blocked”) will appear
to notify the driver if there are foreign
substances on the rear bumper or it
is hot near the rear bumper.The light
on the switch and the system will be
turned off automatically.
Remove the foreign substance on
the rear bumper.
After the foreign substance is
removed, if you drive for approxi-
mately 10 minutes, the system will
work normally.
If the system does not work normally
even though the foreign substance is
removed, take your vehicle to an
authorized Kia dealer and have the
system checked.
It is possible to get the message with
no foreign substance on the rear
bumper, for example, when driving in
sparse rural or open area, such as
desert, where there is insufficient
data for operation.
This message may also activate dur-
ing heavy rain or due to road spray.
The warning message may activate
with that the rear bumper, in which
the sensor is located, is covered or
blocked with a foreign matter such as
a sticker, a bumper guard, a bicycle
stand, etc.
When trailer/carrier or other equip-
ment is installed on the rear of the
vehicle
Turn OFF the system when using a
trailer, carrier or other equipment.
Make sure to remove a trailer, carrier
or other equipment prior to use of the
BSD(Blind spot detection system).
Remove the foreign substance on
the bumper, if any.
Also, when a trailer or carrier is
installed, the message may appear.
In this case, the vehicle does not
need service.
If the system does not work properly,
a warning message will appear and
the light on the switch will turn off.The
system will turn off automatically.
Have the system checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
OJF055247L
695
Driving your vehicle
RCTA (Rear cross traffic alert)
When your vehicle moves backwards
from a parking position, the sensor
detects approaching vehicles to the
left or right side direction and gives
information to the driver.
Operating conditions
• Select RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
Alert) in “User Settings” under
"Driving Assist" on the instrument
cluster.The system will turn on and
stand by to be activated.
• Select RCTA again, to turn the sys-
tem off.
• If the vehicle is turned off and on
again, the RCTA system will return
to the state right before the vehicle
was turned off.Turn the RCTA sys-
tem off when not in use.
• The system is operated when the
vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10
km/h) with the shift lever in R
(Reverse).
• The RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
detection range is 1.6 feet (0.5 m) ~
65 feet (20 m) based on side direc-
tion. If an approaching vehicle
speed is 4 mph (7 km/h) ~ 22 mph
(36 km/h) in detection range, The
warning is on. However, the system
sensing range is different based on
conditions. Always pay attention to
surrounding.
Warning type
OPS046471L
OJF055196L
OPS046470L
OYP054026K
Driving your vehicle
966
• If an approaching vehicle detected
by sensors, the warning is chime
and the warning light will blink on
the outside rearview mirror.
• If the detected vehicle is out of
detection range, moving away in
the opposite direction or moving
slow, the warning is cancelled.
• The system may not be operating
properly due to other factors or cir-
cumstances, so always pay atten-
tion to your surrounding.
❈ If the bumper on either side is
blocked by a barrier or vehicles,
the system sensing ability may be
deteriorated.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The system may not work proper-
ly if the bumper has been replaced
or if a repair work has been done
near the sensor.
• The detection area differs accord-
ing to the roads width. If the road
is narrow the system may detect
other vehicles in the second next
lane.
• On the contrary, if the road is very
wide the system may not detect
other vehicles in the next lane.
• The system might be turned off
due to strong electromagnetic
waves.
WARNING
The Blind Spot Detection
System with Lane Change
Assist and Rear Cross Traffic
Alert is not a substitute for
proper and safe lane changing
procedures. Always drive safely
and use caution when changing
lanes. The Blind Spot Detection
System and Rear Cross Traffic
Alert may not detect every
object alongside the vehicle.
697
Driving your vehicle
Non-operating condition
Outside rearview mirror may not
alert the driver when:
- The outside rearview mirror housing
is damaged or covered with debris.
- The window is covered with debris.
- The windows are severely tinted.
Driver's Attention
The driver must be cautious in the
below situations, because the sys-
tem may not detect other vehicles
or objects in certain circumstances.
- The vehicle drives on a curved
road or through a tollgate.
- The sensor is polluted with rain,
snow, mud, etc.
- The rear bumper, in which the
sensor is located, is covered or
blocked with a foreign matter
such as a sticker, a bumper
guard, a bicycle stand, etc.
- The rear bumper is damaged, or
the sensor is out of the original
default position.
- The vehicle height gets lower or
higher due to heavy loading in a
trunk,abnormal tire pressure, etc.
- The vehicle drives in a bad
weather such as heavy rain or
snow.
(Continued)
(Continued)
- There is a fixed object near the
vehicle, such as a guardrail.
- A big vehicle is near such as a
bus or truck.
- A motorcycle or bicycle is near.
- A flat trailer is near.
- If the vehicle has started at the
same time as the vehicle next to
you and has accelerated.
- When the other vehicle passes
at a very fast speed.
- While changing lanes.
- When going down or up a steep,
uneven road.
- When the other vehicle
approaches very close.
- When a trailer or carrier is
installed.
- When the temperature of the
rear bumper is very high or low.
(Continued)
Driving your vehicle
986
(Continued)
- When the sensors are blocked
by other vehicles, walls or park-
ing-lot pillars.
- When the detected vehicle also
moves back, as your vehicle
drives back.
- If there are small things like
shopping cart and baby carriage.
- If there is low height vehicle like
sport vehicle.
- When other vehicles are close to
your vehicle.
- When the vehicle in the next
lane moves two lanes away from
you OR when the vehicle two
lanes away moves to the next
lane from you.
- When driving through a narrow
road with many plants.
- When driving on wet surface.
Outside rearview mirror may not
alert the driver when:
- The outside rearview mirror hous-
ing is severely polluted
- The window is severely polluted
- The windows are severely tinted.
This device complies with Part 15
of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
699
Driving your vehicle
The Foward Collision Warning
System helps avoid accidents by
identifying critical situations early
and warning the driver.
FCWS Operation
To operate:
Go to the User Settings Mode
(Driving Assist) and select FCW
(Forward Collision Warning) on the
LCD display.
Select one of the three warning tim-
ing level (Late/Normal/Early) to turn
the system on and adjust the level of
the forward collision warning timing.
The system will turn on and standby
to activate. The system will activate
when vehicle speed is above 10 mph
(16 km/h) and below 110 mph (177
km/h).
FCWS will default ON when vehicle
is restarted.
Warning message
A warning message and chime will
be provided when rapidly approach-
ing a slower moving, braking or
stopped vehicle ahead.
Immediately reduce your speed to
prevent a collision.
FOWARD COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM (FCWS) (IF EQUIPPED)
OPS056107L
Driving your vehicle
1006
FCWS is a warning system and does
not apply the brakes automatically in
a near crash situation. FCWS may
not provide a warning with enough
time to help avoid a crash. FCWS
does not detect pedestrians, ani-
mals, signs, construction or other
objects. It is the responsibility of the
driver to pay attention to the roadway
to prevent collisions.
FCWS malfunction message
When the FCWS is not working
properly, the warning message will
come on for a few second. After the
message disappears, the master
warning light will illuminate.
System disabled
The message will appear when cam-
era’s field of view is covered by some
objects. The system stops until the
field of view is normal.
WARNING - Forward
Collision Warning System
The Forward Collision Warning
System is a supplemental sys-
tem to assist you and its effects
may differ according to road
and driving conditions. Do not
solely rely on the system and
always pay attention to prevent
dangerous situations from
occurring.
OYP054118N
OPS056109L
■ Warning message
■ Master warning light
OUMA054148
OPS055040N
6101
Driving your vehicle
Check the windshield around the
camera view area.If the system does
not work normally even though cam-
era’s field of view is cleared, take
your vehicle to an authorized Kia
dealer and have the system checked.
Limitations of the System
The Forward Collision Warning
System may have limits to its ability
to detect distance to the vehicle
ahead due to road and traffic condi-
tions.
The FCW could not detect vehicle or
could detect objects as vehicles
when :
- The camera lens is covered with
dirt.
- There is heavy rain or heavy snow.
- Driving on a curve.
- Driving uphill or downhill.
- An object ahead is very narrow
such as motorcycles or bicycles.
- A vehicle suddenly cut in on your
lane.
- The front vehicle suddenly departs
from the lane or it is hidden by other
objects.
- A vehicle passes by at a higher rate
of speed.
- An unusual shape vehicle is ahead
such as a trailer, special access
vehicles or a truck with unique
shaped cargo.
- The rear lamps of the vehicle
ahead is missing, installed on an
unusual place or installed unevenly.
- The front vehicle has a separate
lamp or LED lamp at the rear of the
vehicle.
- Passing through a tunnel where the
difference of intensity of illumina-
tion is high.
- Driving with the sun in front of you.
- The approaching vehicle turns it’s
high beam on.
- The vehicle violently vibrates due to
road conditions.
- The vehicle is tilted from a flat tire
or being towed.
- The vehicle ahead is not distin-
guishable due to multiple or repeat-
ed shape lamps.
- The vehicle ahead is not distin-
guishable due to objects that can
be mistaken for a vehicle.
Driving your vehicle
1026
- The surrounding environments
such as shadow or markers on a
road, etc. could be mistaken as a
vehicle.
Outside rearview mirror may not
alert the driver when:
- The outside rearview mirror hous-
ing is severely polluted
- The window is severely polluted
- The windows are severely tinted.
This device complies with Part 15
of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
6103
Driving your vehicle
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends
mainly on your style of driving, where
you drive and when you drive.
Each of these factors affects how
many miles (kilometers) you can get
from a gallon (liter) of fuel.To operate
your vehicle as economically as pos-
sible, use the following driving sug-
gestions to help save money in both
fuel and repairs:
• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a
moderate rate. Don't make "jack-
rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts
and maintain a steady cruising
speed. Don't race between stop-
lights. Try to adjust your speed to
the traffic so you don't have to
change speeds unnecessarily.
Avoid heavy traffic whenever pos-
sible. Always maintain a safe dis-
tance from other vehicles so you
can avoid unnecessary braking.
This also reduces brake wear.
• Drive at a moderate speed. The
faster you drive, the more fuel your
vehicle uses. Driving at a moderate
speed, especially on the highway,
is one of the most effective ways to
reduce fuel consumption.
• Don't "ride" the brake or clutch
pedal. This can increase fuel con-
sumption and also increase wear
on these components. In addition,
driving with your foot resting on the
brake pedal may cause the brakes
to overheat, which reduces their
effectiveness and may lead to
more serious consequences.
• Take care of your tires. Keep them
inflated to the recommended pres-
sure. Incorrect inflation, either too
much or too little, results in unnec-
essary tire wear. Check the tire
pressures at least once a month.
• Be sure that the wheels are
aligned correctly. Improper align-
ment can result from hitting curbs
or driving too fast over irregular
surfaces. Poor alignment causes
faster tire wear and may also result
in other problems as well as
greater fuel consumption.
• Keep your vehicle in good condi-
tion. For better fuel economy and
reduced maintenance costs, main-
tain your vehicle in accordance
with the maintenance schedule in
section 8. If you drive your vehicle
in severe conditions, more frequent
maintenance is required (see sec-
tion 8 for details).
• Keep your vehicle clean. For maxi-
mum service, your vehicle should
be kept clean and free of corrosive
materials. It is especially important
that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be
allowed to accumulate on the
underside of the vehicle.This extra
weight can result in increased fuel
consumption and also contribute to
corrosion.
• Travel lightly. Don't carry unneces-
sary weight in your vehicle.Weight
reduces fuel economy.
• Don't let the engine idle longer
than necessary. If you are waiting
(and not in traffic), turn off your
engine and restart only when
you're ready to go.
ECONOMICAL OPERATION
Driving your vehicle
1046
• Remember, your vehicle does not
require extended warm-up. After
the engine has started, allow the
engine to run for 10 to 20 seconds
prior to placing the vehicle in gear.
In very cold weather, however, give
your engine a slightly longer warm-
up period.
• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.
Lugging is driving too slowly in a
very high gear resulting in engine
bucking. If this happens, shift to a
lower gear. Over-revving is racing
the engine beyond its safe limit.
This can be avoided by shifting at
the recommended speed.
• Use your air conditioning sparingly.
The air conditioning system is
operated by engine power so your
fuel economy is reduced when you
use it.
• Open windows at high speeds can
reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds
and headwinds. To help offset
some of this loss, slow down when
driving in these conditions.
Keeping a vehicle in good operating
condition is important both for econ-
omy and safety. Therefore, have an
authorized Kia dealer perform
scheduled inspections and mainte-
nance.
WARNING
- Engine off during motion
Never turn the engine off to
coast down hills or anytime the
vehicle is in motion. The power
steering and power brakes will
not function properly without
the engine running. In addition,
turning off the ignition while
driving could engage the steer-
ing wheel lock resulting in loss
of vehicle steering. Keep the
engine on and downshift to an
appropriate gear for engine
braking effect.
6105
Driving your vehicle
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving conditions
are encountered such as water,
snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar haz-
ards, follow these suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and allow extra
distance for braking.
• Avoid sudden braking or steering.
• When braking with non-ABS
brakes pump the brake pedal with
a light up-and-down motion until
the vehicle is stopped.
Do not pump the brake pedal on a
vehicle equipped with ABS.
• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand,
use second gear. Accelerate slow-
ly to avoid spinning the drive
wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, or other non-
slip material under the drive
wheels to provide traction when
stalled in ice, snow, or mud.
Reducing the risk of a rollover
This multi-purpose passenger vehi-
cle is defined as a Crossover Utility
Vehicle (CUV). CUV’s have higher
ground clearance and a narrower
track to make them capable of per-
forming in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Specific design charac-
teristics give them a higher center of
gravity than ordinary vehicles. An
advantage of the higher ground
clearance is a better view of the
road, which allows you to anticipate
problems. They are not designed for
cornering at the same speeds as
conventional passenger vehicles,
any more than low-slung sports vehi-
cles are designed to perform satis-
factorily in off-road conditions.Due to
this risk, driver and passengers are
strongly recommended to buckle
their seat belts. In a rollover crash,
an unbelted person is more likely to
die than a person wearing a seat
belt.There are steps that a driver can
make to reduce the risk of a rollover.
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
WARNING - Downshifting
Do not downshift with an auto-
matic transaxle while driving on
slippery surfaces. The sudden
change in tire speed could
cause the tires to skid and
result in an accident.
Driving your vehicle
1066
If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers, do not load your
roof rack with heavy cargo, and
never modify your vehicle in any way.
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to
free it from snow, sand, or mud, first
turn the steering wheel right and left
to clear the area around your front
wheels. Then, shift back and forth
between 1st (First) and R (Reverse)
in vehicles equipped with a manual
transaxle or R (Reverse) and any for-
ward gear in vehicles equipped with
an automatic transaxle. Do not race
the engine, and spin the wheels as lit-
tle as possible. If you are still stuck
after a few tries, have the vehicle
pulled out by a tow vehicle to avoid
engine overheating and possible
damage to the transaxle.
The ESC system should be turned
OFF prior to rocking the vehicle.
CAUTION - Vehicle rocking
Prolonged rocking may cause
engine overheating, transaxle
damage or failure, and tire dam-
age.
WARNING - Replacement
tires
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in the tire
section of the manual.
Installation of variant tires can
affect the safety and perform-
ance of your vehicle.
CAUTION - Spinning tires
Do not spin the wheels, espe-
cially at speeds more than 35
mph (56 km/h). Spinning the
wheels at high speeds when the
vehicle is stationary could
cause a tire to overheat which
could result in tire damage that
may injure bystanders.
WARNING
- Sudden vehicle movement
Do not attempt to rock the vehi-
cle if people or objects are near-
by. The vehicle may suddenly
move forward or backwards as
it becomes unstuck.
6107
Driving your vehicle
Smooth cornering
Avoid braking or gear changing in
corners, especially when roads are
wet. Ideally, corners should always
be taken under gentle acceleration.If
you follow these suggestions, tire
wear will be held to a minimum.
Driving at night
Because night driving presents more
hazards than driving in the daylight,
here are some important tips to
remember:
• Slow down and keep more dis-
tance between you and other vehi-
cles, as it may be more difficult to
see at night, especially in areas
where there may not be any street
lights.
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the
glare from other driver's head-
lights.
• Keep your headlights clean and
properly aimed. (On vehicles not
equipped with the automatic head-
light aiming feature.) Dirty or
improperly aimed headlights will
make it much more difficult to see
at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the head-
lights of oncoming vehicles. You
could be temporarily blinded, and it
will take several seconds for your
eyes to readjust to the darkness.
OUN056051 OCM053010
Driving your vehicle
1086
Driving in the rain
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous, especially if you’re not
prepared for the slick pavement.
Here are a few things to consider
when driving in the rain:
• A heavy rainfall will make it harder
to see and will increase the dis-
tance needed to stop your vehicle,
so slow down.
• Keep your windshield wiping
equipment in good shape.Replace
your windshield wiper blades when
they show signs of streaking or
missing areas on the windshield.
• If your tires are not in good condi-
tion, making a quick stop on wet
pavement can cause a skid and
possibly lead to an accident. Be
sure your tires are in good shape.
• Turn on your headlights to make it
easier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large pud-
dles can affect your brakes. If you
must go through puddles, try to
drive through them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
your brakes wet, apply them lightly
while driving until normal braking
operation returns.
Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no
higher than the bottom of the wheel
hub. Drive through any water slowly.
Allow adequate stopping distance
because brake performance may be
affected.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them sev-
eral times while the vehicle is moving
slowly.
1VQA3003
6109
Driving your vehicle
Driving off-road
Drive carefully off-road because your
vehicle may be damaged by rocks or
roots of trees. Become familiar with
the off-road conditions where you
are going to drive before you begin
driving.
Highway driving
Tires
Adjust the tire inflation pressures to
specification. Low tire inflation pres-
sures will result in overheating and
possible failure of the tires.
Avoid using worn or damaged tires
which may result in reduced traction
or tire failure.
Never exceed the maximum tire
inflation pressure shown on the tires.
Fuel, engine coolant and engine
oil
High speed travel consumes more
fuel than urban motoring. Do not for-
get to check both the engine coolant
and engine oil.
Drive belt
A loose or damaged drive belt may
result in overheating of the engine.
WARNING - Under/over
inflated tires
Always check the tires for proper
inflation before driving.
Underinflated or overinflated
tires can cause poor handling,
loss of vehicle control, and sud-
den tire failure leading to acci-
dents, injuries, and even death.
For proper tire pressures,refer to
“Tires and wheels” in section 9.
WARNING - Tire tread
Always check the tire tread
before driving your vehicle.
Worn-out tires can result in loss
of vehicle control. Worn-out tires
should be replaced as soon as
possible. For further information
and tread limits, refer to "Tires
and wheels" in section 8.
Driving your vehicle
1106
Severe weather conditions in the
winter result in greater wear and
other problems. To minimize the
problems of winter driving, you
should follow these suggestions:
Snowy or icy conditions
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it
may be necessary to use snow tires
or to install tire chains on your tires.
If snow tires are needed, it is neces-
sary to select tires equivalent in size
and type of the original equipment
tires. Failure to do so may adversely
affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle. Furthermore, speeding,
rapid acceleration, sudden brake
applications, and sharp turns are
potentially very hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine
braking to the fullest extent. Sudden
brake applications on snowy or icy
roads may cause skids to occur.You
need to keep sufficient distance
between the vehicle in operation in
front of your vehicle. Also, apply the
brake gently. It should be noted that
installing tire chains on the tire will
provide a greater driving force, but
will not prevent side skids.
✽✽
NOTICE
Tire chains are not legal in all states.
Check state laws before fitting tire
chains.
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your vehi-
cle, make sure they are radial tires of
the same size and load range as the
original tires. Mount snow tires on all
four wheels to balance your vehicle’s
handling in all weather conditions.
Keep in mind that the traction provid-
ed by snow tires on dry roads may
not be as high as your vehicle's orig-
inal equipment tires.You should drive
cautiously even when the roads are
clear. Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Do not install studded tires without
first checking local, state and munic-
ipal regulations for possible restric-
tions against their use.
WINTER DRIVING
1VQA3005
WARNING - Snow tire size
Snow tires should be equivalent
in size and type to the vehicle's
standard tires. Otherwise, the
safety and handling of your vehi-
cle may be adversely affected.
6111
Driving your vehicle
Tire chains
Since the sidewalls of radial tires are
thinner, they can be damaged by
mounting some types of snow chains
on them. Therefore, the use of snow
tires is recommended instead of
snow chains. Do not mount tire
chains on vehicles equipped with
aluminum wheels; snow chains may
cause damage to the wheels.If snow
chains must be used, use wire-type
chains with a thickness of less than
0.59 in (15 mm). Damage to your
vehicle caused by improper snow
chain use is not covered by your
vehicle manufacturers warranty.
Install tire chains only in pair and
only on the front tires.
Chain installation
When installing chains, follow the
manufacturer's instructions and
mount them as tightly as you can.
Drive slowly with chains installed. If
you hear the chains contacting the
body or chassis, stop and tighten
them. If they still make contact, slow
down until it stops. Remove the
chains as soon as you begin driving
on cleared roads.
When mounting snow chains, park
the vehicle on level ground away from
traffic. Turn on the vehicle Hazard
Warning flashers and place a triangu-
lar emergency warning device behind
the vehicle if available. Always place
the vehicle in P (Park), apply the
parking brake and turn off the engine
before installing snow chains.
• The use of chains may adversely
affect vehicle handling.
• Do not exceed 20 mph (30 km/h)
or the chain manufacturer’s recom-
mended speed limit, whichever is
lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid bumps,
holes, sharp turns, and other road
hazards, which may cause the
vehicle to bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or locked-wheel
braking.
1VQA3007
CAUTION - Snow chains
Make sure the snow chains are
the correct size and type for
your tires. Incorrect snow
chains can cause damage to the
vehicle body and suspension
and may not be covered by your
vehicle manufacturer warranty.
Driving your vehicle
1126
Use high quality ethylene gly-
col coolant
Your vehicle is delivered with high qual-
ity ethylene glycol coolant in the cool-
ing system.It is the only type of coolant
that should be used because it helps
prevent corrosion in the cooling sys-
tem, lubricates the water pump and
prevents freezing. Be sure to replace
or replenish your coolant in accor-
dance with the maintenance schedule
in section 8. Before winter, have your
coolant tested to assure that its freez-
ing point is sufficient for the tempera-
tures anticipated during the winter.
Check battery and cables
Winter puts additional burdens on the
battery system. Visually inspect the
battery and cables as described in
section 8.The level of charge in your
battery can be checked by an author-
ized Kia dealer or a service station.
Change to "winter weight" oil
if necessary
In some climates it is recommended
that a lower viscosity "winter weight"
oil be used during cold weather. See
section 9 for recommendations.If you
aren't sure what weight oil you should
use, consult an authorized Kia dealer.
Check spark plugs and ignition
system
Inspect your spark plugs as
described in section 8 and replace
them if necessary. Also check all
ignition wiring and components to be
sure they are not cracked, worn or
damaged in any way.
To keep locks from freezing
To keep the locks from freezing,
squirt an approved de-icer fluid or
glycerine into the key opening. If a
lock is covered with ice, squirt it with
an approved de-icing fluid to remove
the ice.If the lock is frozen internally,
you may be able to thaw it out by
using a heated key. Handle the heat-
ed key with care to avoid injury.
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system
To keep the water in the window
washer system from freezing, add an
approved window washer anti-freeze
solution in accordance with instruc-
tions on the container. Window wash-
er anti-freeze is available from an
authorized Kia dealer and most auto
parts outlets. Do not use engine
coolant or other types of anti-freeze
as these may damage the paint finish.
CAUTION - Snow chains
• Chains that are the wrong size
or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle's brake
lines, suspension, body and
wheels.
• Stop driving and retighten the
chains any time you hear them
hitting the vehicle.
6113
Driving your vehicle
Don’t let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged
position.This is most likely to happen
when there is an accumulation of
snow or ice around or near the rear
brakes or if the brakes are wet. If
there is a risk the parking brake may
freeze, apply it only temporarily while
you put the gear shift lever in P
(Park, automatic transaxle) or in first
or reverse gear (manual transaxle)
and block the rear wheels so the
vehicle cannot roll.Then release the
parking brake.
Don't let ice and snow accu-
mulate underneath
Under some conditions, snow and
ice can build up under the fenders
and interfere with the steering.When
driving in severe winter conditions
where this may happen, you should
periodically check underneath the
vehicle to be sure the movement of
the front wheels and the steering
components are not obstructed.
Carry emergency equipment
Depending on the severity of the
weather, you should carry appropri-
ate emergency equipment. Some of
the items you may want to carry
include tow straps or chains, flash-
light, emergency flares, sand, shov-
el, jumper cables, window scraper,
gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, blan-
ket, etc.
We do not recommend using this
vehicle for trailer towing.
TRAILER TOWING
Driving your vehicle
1146
VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT
The label located on the driver's door sill gives the original tire size, cold tire pressures recom-
mended for your vehicle, the number of people that can be in your vehicle and vehicle capacity
weight.
Tire and loading information label
OPS077153N/OPS077150N/OPS077154N/OPS077151N/OPS077155N/OPS077152N
6115
Driving your vehicle
Vehicle capacity weight:
827 lbs. (375 kg)
Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-
mum combined weight of occupants
and cargo.If your vehicle is equipped
with a trailer, the combined weight
includes the tongue load.
Seating capacity:
Total - 5 persons
(Front seat : 2 persons,
Rear seat : 3 persons)
Seating capacity is the maximum
number of occupants including a
driver, your vehicle may carry.
However, the seating capacity may
be reduced based upon the weight of
all of the occupants, and the weight
of the cargo being carried or towed.
Do not overload the vehicle as there
is a limit to the total weight, or load
limit including occupants and cargo,
the vehicle can carry.
Towing capacity:
We do not recommend using this
vehicle for trailer towing.
Driving your vehicle
1166
Cargo capacity:
The cargo capacity of your vehicle
will increase or decrease depending
on the weight and the number of
occupants and the tongue load, if
your vehicle is equipped with a trailer.
Steps for determining correct
load limit
1.Locate the statement "The com-
bined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg
or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's plac-
ard.
2.Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3.Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4.The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and lug-
gage load capacity. For example, if
the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs.
and there will be five 150 lbs. pas-
sengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5.Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle.That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calcu-
lated in Step 4.
6.If your vehicle will be towing a trail-
er, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehi-
cle.
6117
Driving your vehicle
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight
and seating positions.The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's
capacity weight.
C190F01JM
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity 1400 lbs
Weight (635 kg)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight
300 lbs
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2
(136 kg)
C
Available Cargo and
1100 lbs
Luggage weight (499 kg)
Example 1
ABC
C190F02JM
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity 1400 lbs
Weight (635 kg)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight
750 lbs
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5
(340 kg)
C
Available Cargo and
650 lbs
Luggage weight (295 kg)
ABC
Example 2
C190F03JM
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity 1400 lbs
Weight (635 kg)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight
860 lbs
172 lbs (78 kg) × 5
(390 kg)
C
Available Cargo and
540 lbs
Luggage weight (245 kg)
ABC
Example 3
Driving your vehicle
1186
Certification label
The certification label is located on
the driver's door sill at the center pillar.
This label shows the maximum allow-
able weight of the fully loaded vehi-
cle. This is called the GVWR (Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR
includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel and cargo.
This label also tells you the maxi-
mum weight that can be supported
by the front and rear axles, called
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
To find out the actual loads on your
front and rear axles, you need to go to
a weigh station and weigh your vehi-
cle.Your dealer can help you with this.
Be sure to spread out your load equal-
ly on both sides of the centerline.
The label will help you decide how
much cargo and installed equipment
your vehicle can carry.
If you carry items inside your vehicle
- like suitcases, tools, packages, or
anything else - they are moving as
fast as the vehicle.If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a crash,
the items will keep going and can
cause an injury if they strike the driv-
er or a passenger.
OEN056020
WARNING - Over loading
Never exceed the GVWR for
your vehicle, the GAWR for
either the front or rear axle and
vehicle capacity weight.
Exceeding these ratings can
affect your vehicle’s handling
and braking ability.
6119
Driving your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be cov-
ered by your warranty. Do not over-
load your vehicle.
WARNING - Loose cargo
Do not travel with unsecured
blunt objects in the passenger
compartment of your vehicle
(e.g. suit cases or unsecured
child seats). These items may
strike occupant during a sud-
den stop or crash.
WARNING - Over loading
Do not overload your vehicle.
Overloading your vehicle can
cause heat buildup in your vehi-
cle's tires and possible tire fail-
ure, increased stopping dis-
tances and poor vehicle han-
dling all of which may result in a
crash.
Driving your vehicle
1206
This section will guide you in the
proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle
weight within its design rating capa-
bility, with or without a trailer.
Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of the vehi-
cle design performance. Before load-
ing your vehicle, familiarize yourself
with the following terms for determin-
ing your vehicle's weight ratings, with
or without a trailer, from the vehicle's
specifications and the certification
label:
Base curb weight
This is the weight of the vehicle
including a full tank of fuel and all
standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or option-
al equipment.
Vehicle curb weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your deal-
er plus any aftermarket equipment.
Cargo weight
This figure includes all weight added
to the Base Curb Weight, including
cargo and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross axle weight)
This is the total weight placed on
each axle (front and rear) - including
vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR
(Gross axle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single
axle (front or rear). These numbers
are shown on the certification label.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus
actual Cargo Weight plus passen-
gers.
GVWR
(Gross vehicle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle
(including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR
is shown on the certification label
located on the driver’s door sill.
VEHICLE WEIGHT GLOSSARY
What to do in an emergency
Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
• Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
In case of an emergency while driving. . . . . . . . . . 7-3
• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing. . . . . . . 7-3
• If you have a flat tire while driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
• If the engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
If the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
• If engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly . . . . 7-4
• If engine turns over normally but does not start. . . . 7-4
Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
• Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
• Push-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
If the engine overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . 7-9
• Changing a tire with TPMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
• This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. . . 7-14
If you have a flat tire (with Spare Tire) . . . . . . . . 7-15
• Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
• Removing and storing the spare tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
• Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
• Jack label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
If you have a flat tire (with Tire Mo bility Kit). . 7-24
• Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
• Notes on the suggested use of the Tire Mobility Kit. . 7-25
• Components of the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
• Using the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
• Distributing the sealant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
• Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
• Removable towing hook (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
• Emergency towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
7
What to do in an emergency
27
ROAD WARNING
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher serves
as a warning to other drivers to exer-
cise extreme caution when
approaching, overtaking, or passing
your vehicle.
It should be used whenever emer-
gency repairs are being made or
when the vehicle is stopped near the
edge of a roadway.
Depress the flasher switch with the
ignition switch in any position. The
flasher switch is located in the center
console switch panel. All turn signal
lights will flash simultaneously.
• The hazard warning flasher oper-
ates whether your vehicle is run-
ning or not.
• The turn signals do not work when
the hazard flasher is on.
• Care must be taken when using
the hazard warning flasher while
the vehicle is being towed.
OPS066001L
73
What to do in an emergency
If the engine stalls at a cross-
road or crossing
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, set the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position and then push the
vehicle to a safe place.
If you have a flat tire while
driving
If a tire goes flat while you are driv-
ing:
1.Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal and let the vehicle slow
down while driving straight ahead.
Do not apply the brakes immedi-
ately or attempt to pull off the road
as this may cause a loss of control.
When the vehicle has slowed to
such a speed that it is safe to do
so, brake carefully and pull off the
road. Drive off the road as far as
possible and park on a firm level
ground. If you are on a divided
highway, do not park in the median
area between the two traffic lanes.
2.When the vehicle is stopped, turn
on your emergency hazard flash-
ers, set the parking brake and put
the transaxle in P (Park, automatic
transaxle) or reverse (manual
transaxle).
3.Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle. Be sure they all get out on
the side of the vehicle that is away
from traffic.
4.When changing a flat tire, follow
the instruction provided later in this
section.
If the engine stalls while driv-
ing
1.Reduce your speed gradually,
keeping a straight line. Move cau-
tiously off the road to a safe place.
2.Turn on your emergency flashers.
3.Try to start the engine again.If your
vehicle will not start, contact an
authorized Kia dealer or seek other
qualified assistance.
✽✽
NOTICE
If there was a check engine light and
loss of power or stall and if safe to do
so to wait at least 10 seconds to
restart the vehicle after it stalls. This
may reset the car so it will no longer
run at low power (limp home) condi-
tion.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING
What to do in an emergency
47
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START
If engine doesn't turn over or
turns over slowly
1.If your vehicle has an automatic
transaxle, be sure the shift lever is
in N (Neutral) or P (Park) and the
emergency brake is set.
2.Check the battery connections to
be sure they are clean and tight.
3.Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you operate
the starter, the battery is dis-
charged.
4.Check the starter connections to
be sure they are securely tight-
ened.
5.Do not push or pull the vehicle to
start it. See instructions for "Jump
starting".
If engine turns over normally
but does not start
1.Check the fuel level.
2.With the ignition switch in the
LOCK position, check all connec-
tors at the ignition coils and spark
plugs. Reconnect any that may be
disconnected or loose.
3.Check the fuel line in the engine
compartment.
4.If the engine still does not start, call
an authorized Kia dealer or seek
other qualified assistance.
WARNING - Push/pull
start
Do not push or pull the vehicle
to start it. Push or pull starting
may cause the catalytic con-
verter to overload and create a
fire hazard.
75
What to do in an emergency
EMERGENCY STARTING
Connect cables in numerical order
and disconnect in reverse order.
Jump starting
Jump starting can be dangerous if
done incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid
harm to yourself or damage to your
vehicle or battery, follow these jump
starting procedures. If in doubt, we
strongly recommend that you have a
competent technician or towing serv-
ice jump start your vehicle.
CAUTION - 12 volt battery
Use only a 12-volt jumper sys-
tem. You can damage a 12-volt
starting motor, ignition system,
and other electrical parts
beyond repair by use of a 24-
volt power supply (either two
12-volt batteries in series or a
24-volt motor generator set).
WARNING - Battery
Never attempt to check the elec-
trolyte level of the battery as
this may cause the battery to
rupture or explode causing seri-
ous injury.
1VQA4001
Discharged
battery
Jumper Cables
Booster
battery
(-)
(+)
(+)
(-)
WARNING - Frozen
batteries
Do not attempt to jump start the
vehicle if the discharged battery
is frozen or if the electrolyte
level is low as the battery may
rupture or explode.
What to do in an emergency
67
Jump starting procedure
1.Make sure the booster battery is
12-volt and that its negative termi-
nal is grounded.
2.If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to
come in contact.
3.Turn off all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4.Connect the jumper cables in the
exact sequence shown in the illus-
tration. First connect one end of a
jumper cable to the positive termi-
nal of the discharged battery (1),
then connect the other end to the
positive terminal of the booster
battery (2).
Proceed to connect one end of the
other jumper cable to the negative
terminal of the booster battery (3),
then the other end to a solid, sta-
tionary, metallic point (for example,
the engine lifting bracket) away
from the battery (4). Do not con-
nect it to or near any part that
moves when the engine is cranked.
Do not allow the jumper cables to
contact anything except the correct
battery terminals or the correct
ground. Do not lean over the bat-
tery when making connections.
WARNING - Battery
Keep all flames or sparks away
from the battery. The battery
produces hydrogen gas which
will explode if exposed to flame
or sparks.
WARNING - Sulfuric acid
risk
When jump starting your vehi-
cle be careful not to get acid on
yourself, your clothing or on the
vehicle. Automobile batteries
contain sulfuric acid. This is
poisonous and highly corro-
sive.
WARNING
- Battery
cables
Do not connect the jumper
cable from the negative terminal
of the booster battery to the
negative terminal of the dis-
charged battery.
This can cause the discharged
battery to overheat and crack,
releasing battery acid.
Make sure to connect one end
of the jumper cable to the nega-
tive terminal of the booster bat-
tery, and the other end to a
metallic point, far away from the
battery.
77
What to do in an emergency
✽✽
NOTICE
Make sure to connect one end of the
jumper cable to the negative termi-
nal of the booster battery, and the
other end to a metalic point, far
away from the battery.
5.Start the engine of the vehicle with
the booster battery and let it run at
2,000 rpm, then start the engine of
the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
If the cause of your battery discharg-
ing is not apparent, you should have
your vehicle checked by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
Push-starting
Vehicles equipped with automatic
transaxle lock system cannot be
push-started.
Follow the directions in this section
for jump-starting.
WARNING - Tow starting
vehicle
Never tow a vehicle to start it
because the sudden surge for-
ward when the engine starts
could cause a collision with the
tow vehicle.
What to do in an emergency
87
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
If your temperature gauge indicates
overheating, you experience a loss
of power, or hear loud pinging or
knocking, the engine will probably be
too hot. If this happens, you should:
1.Pull off the road and stop as soon
as it is safe to do so.
2.Place the shift lever in P (Park,
automatic transaxle) or Neutral
(manual transaxle) and set the
parking brake. If the air condition-
ing is on, turn it off.
3.If engine coolant is running out
under the vehicle or steam is com-
ing out from underneath the hood,
stop the engine. Do not open the
hood until the coolant has stopped
running or the steaming has
stopped. If there is no visible loss
of engine coolant and no steam,
leave the engine running and
check to be sure the engine cool-
ing fan is operating.If the fan is not
running, turn the engine off.
4.Check to see if the water pump
drive belt is missing. If it is not
missing, check to see that it is
tight. If the drive belt seems to be
satisfactory, check for coolant leak-
ing from the radiator, hoses or
under the vehicle. (If the air condi-
tioning had been in use, it is nor-
mal for cold water to be draining
from it when you stop).
5.If the water pump drive belt is bro-
ken or engine coolant is leaking
out, stop the engine immediately
and call the nearest authorized Kia
dealer for assistance.
6.If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine
temperature has returned to nor-
mal.Then, if coolant has been lost,
carefully add coolant to the reser-
voir to bring the fluid level in the
reservoir up to the halfway mark.
7.Proceed with caution, keeping
alert for further signs of overheat-
ing. If overheating happens again,
call an authorized Kia dealer for
assistance.
Serious loss of coolant indicates
there is a leak in the cooling system
and this should be checked as soon
as possible by an authorized Kia
dealer.
WARNING - Under the
hood
While the engine is
running, keep hair,
hands and clothing
away from moving
parts such as the fan
and drive belts to pre-
vent injury.
WARNING - Radiator cap
Do not remove the
radiator cap when the
engine is hot. This
may result in coolant
being blown out of
the opening and
cause serious burns.
79
What to do in an emergency
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
Low tire pressure telltale (1) /
TPMS malfunction indicator (2)
Each tire, including the spare (if pro-
vided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehi-
cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pres-
sure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pres-
sure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumina-
tion of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
OPS063002
OPS046490L
■ Type A
What to do in an emergency
107
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not oper-
ating properly.The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system
detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute
and then remain continuously illumi-
nated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When
the malfunction indicator is illuminat-
ed, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, includ-
ing the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehi-
cle that prevent the TPMS from func-
tioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels
on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the TPMS, Low Tire Pressure
indicator do not illuminate for 3 sec-
onds when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position or engine
is running, or if they remain illumi-
nated after coming on for approxi-
mately 3 seconds, take your vehicle
to your nearest authorized Kia deal-
er and have the system checked.
Low tire pressure tell-
tale
When the tire pressure monitoring
system warning indicators are illumi-
nated, one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated.
If the telltale illuminates, immediately
reduce your speed, avoid hard cor-
nering and anticipate increased stop-
ping distances. You should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible.
Inflate the tires to the proper pres-
sure as indicated on the vehicle’s
placard or tire inflation pressure label
located on the driver’s side center pil-
lar outer panel. If you cannot reach a
service station or if the tire cannot
hold the newly added air, replace the
low pressure tire with the spare tire.
711
What to do in an emergency
Then the Low Tire Pressure telltale
may flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously
illuminated after restarting and about
20 minutes of continuous driving at
speed above 15.5 mph (25 km/h)
before you have the low pressure tire
repaired and replaced on the vehicle.
In winter or cold weather, the low tire
pressure telltale may be illuminated if
the tire pressure was adjusted to the
recommended tire inflation pressure
in warm weather. It does not mean
your TPMS is malfunctioning
because the decreased temperature
leads to a proportional lowering of
tire pressure.
When you drive your vehicle from a
warm area to a cold area or from a
cold area to a warm area, or the out-
side temperature is greatly higher or
lower, you should check the tire infla-
tion pressure and adjust the tires to
the recommended tire inflation pres-
sure.
TPMS (Tire Pressure
Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator
The TPMS malfunction indicator will
illuminate after it blinks for approxi-
mately one minute when there is a
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System. Have the system
checked by an authorized Kia dealer
as soon as possible to determine the
cause of the problem.
WARNING - Low pressure
damage
Do not drive on low pressure
tires. Significantly low tire pres-
sure can cause the tires to over-
heat and fail making the vehicle
unstable resulting in increased
braking distances and a loss of
vehicle control.
What to do in an emergency
127
• The TPMS malfunction indicator
may blink for approximately 1
minute and then remain continuous-
ly illuminated if the vehicle is moving
around electric power supply cables
or radios transmitters such as at
police stations, government and
public offices, broadcasting sta-
tions, military installations, airports,
or transmitting towers, etc.This can
interfere with normal operation of
the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS).
• The TPMS malfunction indicator
may blink for approximately 1
minute and then remain continuous-
ly illuminated if snow chains are
used or some separate electronic
devices such as notebook comput-
er, mobile charger, remote starter or
navigation etc., are used in the vehi-
cle. This can interfere with normal
operation of the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS).
Changing a tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire
Pressure telltale will come on. Have
the flat tire repaired by an authorized
Kia dealer as soon as possible or
replace the flat tire with the spare tire.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem.You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-
ommended that you always have
your tires serviced by an authorized
Kia dealer.
Even if you replace the low pressure
tire with the spare tire, the Low Tire
Pressure telltale will remain on until
the low pressure tire is repaired and
placed on the vehicle.
After you replace the low pressure
tire with the spare tire, the TPMS
malfunction indicator may illuminate
after a few minutes because the
TPMS sensor mounted on the spare
wheel is not initiated.
Once the low pressure tire is reinflat-
ed to the recommended pressure
and installed on the vehicle or the
TPMS sensor mounted on the
replaced spare wheel is initiated by
an authorized Kia dealer, the TPMS
malfunction indicator and the low tire
pressure telltale will extinguish within
a few minutes of driving.
If the indicator is not extinguished
after a few minutes of driving, please
visit an authorized Kia dealer.
CAUTION - Repair Agents
Never use a puncture-repairing
agent not approved by Kia to
repair and/or inflate a low pres-
sure tire. The tire sealant not
approved by Kia may damage
the tire pressure sensor.
713
What to do in an emergency
If an original mounted tire is replaced
with the spare tire, the TPMS sensor
on the replaced spare wheel should
be initiated and the TPMS sensor on
the original mounted wheel should be
deactivated. If the TPMS sensor on
the original mounted wheel located in
the spare tire carrier still activates,
the tire pressure monitoring system
may not operate properly. Have the
tire with TPMS serviced or replaced
by an authorized Kia dealer.
You may not be able to identify a low
tire by simply looking at it. Always
use a good quality tire pressure
gauge to measure the tire's inflation
pressure. Please note that a tire that
is hot (from being driven) will have a
higher pressure measurement than a
tire that is cold (from sitting station-
ary for at least 3 hours and driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) during that
3 hour period).
Allow the tire to cool before measur-
ing the inflation pressure. Always be
sure the tire is cold before inflating to
the recommended pressure.
Do not use any tire sealant if your
vehicle is equipped with a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System.The liq-
uid sealant can damage the tire
pressure sensors.
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire damage
caused by external factors such as
nails or road debris.
• If you feel any vehicle instability,
immediately take your foot off the
accelerator, apply the brakes grad-
ually and with light force, and slow-
ly move to a safe position off the
road.
✽✽
NOTICE - Protecting TPMS
Tampering with, modifying, or dis-
abling the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) components may
interfere with the system's ability to
warn the driver of low tire pressure
conditions and/or TPMS malfunc-
tions. Tampering with, modifying,
or disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) compo-
nents may void the warranty for
that portion of the vehicle.
What to do in an emergency
147
This device complies with Part
15 of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2.This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
715
What to do in an emergency
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (WITH SPARE TIRE, IF EQUIPPED)
Jack and tools
The jack, jack handle, wheel lug nut
wrench are stored in the luggage
compartment.
Pull up the luggage box cover to
reach this equipment.
(1) Jack handle
(2) Jack
(3) Wheel lug nut wrench
Jacking instructions
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
To prevent the jack from “rattling”
while the vehicle is in motion, store it
properly.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce
the possibility of personal injury.
• Always move the vehicle complete-
ly off the road and onto the shoulder
before trying to change a tire. The
jack should be used on a firm level
ground. If you cannot find a firm,
level place off the road, call a towing
service company for assistance.
• Be sure to use the correct front and
rear jacking positions on the vehi-
cle; never use the bumpers or any
other part of the vehicle for jack
support.
• Do not allow anyone to remain in
the vehicle while it is on the jack.
• Make sure any children present are
in a secure place away from the
road and from the vehicle to be
raised with the jack.
OPS063003
WARNING - Tire Jack
Do not place any portion of your
body under a vehicle that is
only supported by a jack since
the vehicle can easily roll off the
jack. Use vehicle support
stands.
WARNING - Changing
tires
Never attempt vehicle repairs in
the traffic lanes of a public road
or highway.
What to do in an emergency
167
Removing and storing the
spare tire
Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt
counterclockwise.
Store the tire in the reverse order of
removal.
To prevent the spare tire and tools
from “rattling” while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
Changing tires
1.Park on a level surface and apply
the parking brake firmly.
2.Place the transaxle shift lever in R
(Reverse) with manual transaxle or
P (Park) with automatic transaxle.
3.Activate the hazard warning flash-
ers.
OAM069008
OPS066018L
WARNING
- Running vehicle on jack
Do not start or run the engine of
the vehicle while the vehicle is
on the jack as this may cause
the vehicle to fall off the jack.
717
What to do in an emergency
4.Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tire
from the vehicle.
5.Block both the front and rear of the
wheel that is diagonally opposite
from the jack position.
6.Loosen the wheel lug nuts counter-
clockwise one turn each, but do
not remove any nut until the tire
has been raised off the ground.
1VQA4023 OPS063004
WARNING
- Changing a tire
• To prevent vehicle movement
while changing a tire, always
set the parking brake fully,
and always block the wheel
diagonally opposite the wheel
being changed.
• We recommend that the
wheels of the vehicle be
blocked, and that no person
remain in a vehicle that is
being jacked.
What to do in an emergency
187
7.Place the jack at the front (1) or
rear (2) jacking position closest to
the tire you are changing.Place the
jack at the designated locations
under the frame.
8.Insert the jack handle into the jack
and turn it clockwise, raising the
vehicle until the tire just clears the
ground. This measurement is
approximately 1 in. (30 mm).
Before removing the wheel lug
nuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-
ble and that there is no chance for
movement or slippage.
9.Loosen the wheel nuts and remove
them with your fingers. Slide the
wheel off the studs and lay it flat so
it cannot roll away.To put the wheel
on the hub, pick up the spare tire,
line up the holes with the studs and
slide the wheel onto them. If this is
difficult, tip the wheel slightly and
get the top hole in the wheel lined
up with the top stud.Then jiggle the
wheel back and forth until the
wheel can slide over the other
studs.
OAM069009
OPS066006L
OPS066005L
WARNING - Jack location
To reduce the possibility of
injury, be sure to use only the
jack provided with the vehicle in
the correct jack position; never
use any other part of the vehicle
for jack support.
719
What to do in an emergency
Wheels may have sharp edges.
Handle them carefully to avoid possi-
ble severe injury. Before putting the
wheel into place, be sure that there
is nothing on the hub or wheel (such
as mud, tar, gravel, etc.) that pre-
vents the wheel from fitting solidly
against the hub.
10.To install the wheel, hold it on the
studs, put the wheel nuts on the
studs and tighten them finger
tight.Jiggle the tire to be sure it is
completely seated, then tighten
the nuts as much as possible
with your fingers again.
11. Insert the wrench into the jack
and lower the vehicle to the
ground by turning the wheel nut
wrench counterclockwise.
Then position the wrench as shown
in the drawing and tighten the wheel
nuts. Be sure the socket is seated
completely over the nut.Do not stand
on the wrench handle or use an
extension pipe over the wrench han-
dle. Go around the wheel tightening
every nut following the numerical
sequence shown in the image until
they are all tight.Then double-check
each nut for tightness.After changing
wheels, have an authorized Kia deal-
er tighten the wheel nuts to their
proper torque as soon as possible.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
79 ~ 93 lb·ft (11 ~ 13 kg·m)
WARNING - Installing a
wheel
Make sure the wheel makes
good contact with the hub when
installed. If the contact of the
mounting surface between the
wheel and hub is not good, the
wheel nuts could come loose
and cause the loss of a wheel.
Loss of a wheel may result in
loss of control of the vehicle.
OPS063007
What to do in an emergency
207
If you have a tire gauge, remove the
valve cap and check the air pressure.
If the pressure is lower than recom-
mended, drive slowly to the nearest
service station and inflate to the cor-
rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust
it until it is correct. Always reinstall
the valve cap after checking or
adjusting the tire pressure. If the cap
is not replaced, dust and dirt may get
into the tire valve and air may leak
from the tire. If you lose a valve cap,
buy another and install it as soon as
possible.
After you have changed the wheels,
always secure the flat tire in its place
and return the jack and tools to their
proper storage locations.
Note that most lug nuts do not have
metric threads. Be sure to use
extreme care in checking for thread
style before installing aftermarket lug
nuts or wheels.If in doubt, consult an
authorized Kia dealer.
To prevent the jack, jack handle,
wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire
from rattling while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
Check the inflation pressures as
soon as possible after installing the
spare tire. Adjust it to the specified
pressure, if necessary. Refer to
“Tires and wheels” in chapter 9.
CAUTION - Reusing lug
nuts
Make certain during wheel
removal that the same nuts that
were removed are reinstalled -
or, if replaced, that nuts with
metric threads and the same
chamfer configuration are used.
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the wheel studs and nuts.
Installation of a non-metric
thread nut on a metric stud will
not secure the wheel to the hub
properly and will damage the
stud so that it must be replaced.
WARNING - Wheel studs
If the studs are damaged, they
may lose their ability to retain
the wheel.This could lead to the
loss of the wheel and a colli-
sion.
721
What to do in an emergency
Important - use of compact spare
tire (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a com-
pact spare tire. This compact spare
tire takes up less space than a regu-
lar-size tire.This tire is smaller than a
conventional tire and is designed for
temporary use only.
• You should drive carefully when
the compact spare is in use. The
compact spare should be replaced
by the proper conventional tire and
rim at the first opportunity.
• The operation of this vehicle is not
recommended with more than one
compact spare tire in use at the
same time.
The compact spare should be inflat-
ed to 60 psi (420 kPa).
✽✽
NOTICE
Check the inflation pressure after
installing the spare tire. Adjust it to
the specified pressure, as necessary.
When using a compact spare tire,
observe the following precautions:
• Under no circumstances should
you exceed 50 mph (80 km/h); a
higher speed could damage the
tire.
• Ensure that you drive slowly
enough for the road conditions to
avoid all hazards.Any road hazard,
such as a pothole or debris, could
seriously damage the compact
spare.
• Any continuous road use of this tire
could result in tire failure, loss of
vehicle control, and possible per-
sonal injury.
• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-
mum load rating or the load-carry-
ing capacity shown on the sidewall
of the compact spare tire.
WARNING - Spare tire
Do not operate your vehicle on
this compact spare at speeds
over 50 mph (80 km/h). The
compact spare tire is for emer-
gency use only.The original tire
should be repaired or replaced
as soon as possible to avoid
failure of the spare.
What to do in an emergency
227
• Avoid driving over obstacles. The
compact spare tire diameter is
smaller than the diameter of a con-
ventional tire and reduces the
ground clearance approximately 1
inch (25 mm), which could result in
damage to the vehicle.
• Do not take this vehicle through an
automatic vehicle wash while the
compact spare tire is installed.
• Do not use tire chains on the com-
pact spare tire. Because of the
smaller size, a tire chain will not fit
properly. This could damage the
vehicle and result in loss of the
chain.
• Do not use the compact spare tire
on any other vehicle because this
tire has been designed especially
for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tire’s tread life
is shorter than a regular tire.
Inspect your compact spare tire
regularly and replace worn com-
pact spare tires with the same size
and design, mounted on the same
wheel.
• The compact spare tire should not
be used on any other wheels, nor
should standard tires, snow tires,
wheel covers or trim rings be used
with the compact spare wheel. If
such use is attempted, damage to
these items or other vehicle com-
ponents may occur.
• Do not use more than one compact
spare tire at a time.
• Do not tow a trailer while the com-
pact spare tire is installed.
723
What to do in an emergency
Jack label
1. Model Name
2. Maximum allowable load
3.When using the jack, set your
parking brake.
4.When using the jack, stop the
engine.
5. Do not get under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
6.The designated locations under
the frame
7.When supporting the vehicle, the
base plate of jack must be vertical
under the lifting point.
8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles
with manual transmission or move
the shift lever to the P position on
vehicles with automatic transmis-
sion.
9.The jack should be used on firm
level ground.
10. Jack manufacturer
11. Production date
12. Representative company and
address
OHYK064001
OHYK064005
OHYK064002
• Type A
■ Exemple
• Type B
• Type C
❈ The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. For
more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.
What to do in an emergency
247
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (TIRE MOBILITY KIT, IF EQUIPPED)
For safe operation, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this
manual before use.
(1) Compressor
(2) Sealant bottle
The Tire Mobility Kit is a temporary
fix to the tire and the tire should be
inspected by an authorized Kia deal-
er as soon as possible.
When two or more tires are flat, do
not use the tire mobility kit because
the supported one sealant of Tire
Mobility Kit is only used for one flat
tire.
Have your tire repaired as soon as
possible.The tire may loose air pres-
sure at any time after inflating with
the Tire Mobility Kit.
Introduction
With the Tire Mobility Kit you stay
mobile even after experiencing a tire
puncture.
The system of compressor and sealing
compound effectively and comfortably
seals most punctures in a passenger
car tire caused by nails or similar
objects and reinflates the tire.
After you ensured that the tire is prop-
erly sealed you can drive cautiously on
the tire (distance up to 200 km (120
miles)) at a max.speed of (80 km/h) in
order to reach a service station or tire
dealer for the tire replacement.
OPS063008
OAM060013L
WARNING - Tire wall
Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit
to repair punctures in the tire
walls. This can result in an acci-
dent due to tire failure.
725
What to do in an emergency
It is possible that some tires, espe-
cially with larger punctures or dam-
age to the sidewall, cannot be sealed
completely.
Air pressure loss in the tire may
adversely affect tire performance.
For this reason, you should avoid
abrupt steering or other driving
maneuvers, especially if the vehicle
is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in
use.
The Tire Mobility Kit is not designed
or intended as a permanent tire
repair method and is to be used for
one tire only.
This instruction shows you step by
step how to temporarily seal the
puncture simply and reliably.
Read the section "Notes on the safe
use of the Tire Mobility Kit".
Notes on the suggested use of
the Tire Mobility Kit
• Park your car at the side of the road
so that you can work with the Tire
Mobility Kit away from moving traf-
fic.
• To be sure your vehicle will not
move, even when you're on fairly
level ground, always set your park-
ing brake.
• Only use the Tire Mobility Kit for
sealing/inflation passenger car tires.
Only punctured areas located with-
in the tread region of the tire can be
sealed using the tire mobility kit.
• Do not use on motorcycles, bicycles
or any other type of tires.
• When the tire and wheel are dam-
aged, do not use Tire Mobility Kit for
your safety.
• Use of the Tire Mobility Kit may not
be effective for tire damage larger
than approximately 0.24 in (6 mm).
Please contact the nearest Kia
dealership if the tire cannot be
made roadworthy with the Tire
Mobility Kit.
• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if a
tire is severely damaged by driving
run flat or with insufficient air pres-
sure.
• Do not remove any foreign objects
such as nails or screws that have
penetrated the tire.
• Provided the car is outdoors, leave
the engine running. Otherwise
operating the compressor may
eventually drain the car battery.
• Never leave the Tire Mobility Kit
unattended while it is being used.
• Do not leave the compressor run-
ning for more than 10 min.at a time
or it may overheat.
• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if
the ambient temperature is below -
22°F (-30°C).
What to do in an emergency
267
1. Speed restriction label
2.Sealant bottle and label with
speed restriction
3. Filling hose from sealant bottle to
wheel
4.Connectors and cable for the
power outlet direct connection
5. Holder for the sealant bottle
6. Compressor
7. On/off switch
8. Pressure gauge for displaying the
tire inflation pressure
9. Screw cap for reducing tire infla-
tion pressure
10. Hose to connect compressor and
sealant bottle or compressor and
wheel
Connectors, cable and connection
hose are stored in the compressor
housing.
Strictly follow the specified
sequence, otherwise the sealant
may escape under high pressure.
Components of the Tire Mobility Kit
OPS066020L
WARNING - Expired
sealant
Do not use the Tire sealant after
the sealant has expired (i.e.
pasted the expiration date on
the sealant container). This can
increase the risk of tire failure.
WARNING - Sealant
• Keep out of reach of children.
• Avoid contact with eyes.
• Do not swallow.
727
What to do in an emergency
Using the Tire Mobility Kit
1. Detach the speed restriction label
(1) from the sealant bottle (2), and
place it in a highly visible place
inside the vehicle such as on the
steering wheel to remind the driv-
er not to drive too fast.
✽✽
NOTICE
Before using the tire repair kit,
please read carefully the instruction
attached on the sealant case. Detach
the speed limit label on the sealant
case and put it on a highly visible
place. Always drive within the speed
limit.
Carefully follow below steps.
2. Shake the sealant case.
OPS066021L OTAM061022
What to do in an emergency
287
3. Screw connection hose (10) onto
the connector of the sealant bottle.
4.Ensure that screw cap (9) is
closed.
5. Unscrew the valve cap from the
valve of the defective wheel and
screw filling hose (3) of the sealant
bottle onto the valve.
6. Insert the sealant bottle into the
housing (5) of the compressor so
that the bottle is upright.
7. Ensure that the compressor is
switched off, position 0.
8. Plug the compressor power cord
into the front passenger side
power outlet of the vehicle.
✽✽
NOTICE
Only use the front passenger side
power outlet when connecting the
power cord.
OPS063008 OPS043204
WARNING
If sealant is dispersed when the
injection hose and tire air injec-
tion valve have not been fully
connected, the sealant may
overflow and clog the valve.
729
What to do in an emergency
9.With the engine start/stop button
position on or ignition switch posi-
tion on, switch on the compressor
and let it run for approximately 5~7
minutes to fill the sealant up to
proper pressure. (refer to the Tire
and Wheels, chapter 9). The infla-
tion pressure of the tire after filling
is unimportant and will be
checked/corrected later.
Be careful not to overinflate the tire
and stay away from the tire when
filling it.
10. Switch off the compressor.
11. Detach the hoses from the
sealant bottle connector and
from the tire valve.
Return the Tire Mobility Kit to its stor-
age location in the vehicle.
Distributing the sealant
12. Immediately drive approximately
4~6 miles (7~10 km or, about 10
min) to evenly distribute the
sealant in the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h). If possible, do not fall
below a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
While driving, if you experience any
unusual vibration, ride disturbance or
noise, reduce your speed and drive
with caution until you can safely pull
off of the side of the road.
Call for road side service or towing.
When you use the Tire Mobility Kit,
the tire pressure sensors and wheel
may be stained by sealant.
Therefore, remove the tire pressure
sensors and wheel stained by
sealant and have it serviced by an
authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING - Carbon
monoxide
Do not leave your vehicle run-
ning in a poorly ventilated area
for extended periods of time.
Carbon monoxide poisoning
and suffocation can occur.
WARNING - Tire pressure
Do not attempt to drive your
vehicle if the tire pressure is
below 29 PSI(200kpa). This
could result in an accident due
to sudden tire failure.
What to do in an emergency
307
Checking the tire inflation pres-
sure
1.After driving approximately 4
~6miles(7~10km or about 10min),
stop at a safety location.
2.Connect connection hose (10) of
the compressor directly to the tire
valve.
3.Plug the compressor power cord
into the vehicle power outlet.
4.Adjust the tire inflation pressure to
the recommended tire inflation.
With the ignition switched on, pro-
ceed as follows.
- To increase the inflation pres-
sure : Switch on the compressor,
position I. To check the current
inflation pressure setting, briefly
switch off the compressor.
✽✽
NOTICE
The pressure gauge may show high-
er than actual reading when the
compressor is running. To get an
accurate tire pressure, the compres-
sor needs to be turned off.
- To reduce the inflation pres-
sure: Loosen the screw cap (9)
on the compressor hose.
CAUTION - Tire pressure
sensor
When you use the Tire Mobility
Kit including sealant not
approved by Kia, the tire pres-
sure sensors may be damaged
by sealant. The sealant on the
tire pressure sensor and wheel
should be removed when you
replace the tire with a new one
and inspect the tire pressure
sensors in authorized dealer.
731
What to do in an emergency
Technical Data
System voltage: DC 12 V
Working voltage: DC 10 - 15 V
Amperage rating: max. 15 A
Suitable for use at temperatures:
-22 ~ +158°F (-30 ~ +70°C)
Max. working pressure:
87 psi (6 bar)
Size
Compressor: 6.7 x 5.9 x 2.4 in.
(170 x 150 x 60 mm)
Sealant bottle: 3.3 x 2.8 ø in.
(85 x 70 ø mm)
Compressor weight:
1.77 lbs (0.8 kg)
Sealant volume:
12.2 cu. in. (200 ml)
What to do in an emergency
327
TOWING
Towing service
If emergency towing is necessary,
we recommend having it done by an
authorized Kia dealer or a commer-
cial tow-truck service. Proper lifting
and towing procedures are neces-
sary to prevent damage to the vehi-
cle. The use of wheel dollies or
flatbed is recommended.
For trailer towing guidelines informa-
tion, refer to “Trailer towing” in chap-
ter 6.
It is acceptable to tow the vehicle
with the rear wheels on the ground
(without dollies) and the front wheels
off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or sus-
pension components are damaged
or the vehicle is being towed with the
front wheels on the ground, use a
towing dolly under the front wheels.
When being towed by a commercial
tow truck and wheel dollies are not
used, the front of the vehicle should
always be lifted, not the rear.
OXM069028
dolly
dolly
WARNING - Side and
curtain air bag
If your vehicle is equipped with
side and curtain air bag, set the
ignition switch to LOCK or ACC
position when the vehicle is
being towed.
The side and curtain air bag
may deploy when the ignitions
is ON, and the rollover sensor
detects the situation as a
rollover.
733
What to do in an emergency
When towing your vehicle in an
emergency without wheel dollies :
1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC
position.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.
Removable towing hook (front)
(if equipped)
1.Remove the towing hook from the
tool case.
2.Remove the hole cover pressing
the lower part of the cover on the
front bumper.
CAUTION - Towing gear
position
Failure to place the transaxle
shift lever in N (Neutral) may
cause internal damage to the
transaxle.
CAUTION - Towing
• Do not tow the vehicle back-
wards with the front wheels on
the ground as this may cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type
equipment. Use wheel lift or
flatbed equipment.
OUN046030
OCM054034
OPS066009L
What to do in an emergency
347
3.Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is
fully secured.
4.Remove the towing hook and
install the cover after use.
Emergency towing
If towing is necessary, we recom-
mend you to have it done by an
authorized Kia dealer or a com-
mercial tow truck service.
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using a cable or
chain secured to the emergency tow-
ing hook under the front (or rear) of
the vehicle. Use extreme caution
when towing the vehicle. A driver
must be in the vehicle to steer it and
operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done
only on hard-surfaced roads for a
short distance and at low speeds.
Also, the wheels, axles, power train,
steering and brakes must all be in
good condition.
• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a
vehicle out of mud, sand or other
conditions from which the vehicle
cannot be driven out under its own
power.
• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than
the vehicle doing the towing.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other fre-
quently.
OPS066011L
OPS066010L
OPS066012L
Front
Rear (if equipped)
735
What to do in an emergency
• Attach a towing strap to the tow
hook.
• Using a portion of the vehicle other
than the tow hooks for towing may
damage the body of your vehicle.
• Only use a cable or chain specifi-
cally intended for use in towing vehi-
cles. Securely fasten the cable or
chain to the towing hook provided.
• Before emergency towing, check
that the hook is not broken or dam-
aged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply it
steadily and with even force.
• To avoid damaging the hook, do not
pull from the side or at a vertical
angle. Always pull straight ahead.
• Use a towing strap less than 16
feet (5 m) long. Attach a white or
red cloth (about 12 inches (30 cm)
wide) in the middle of the strap for
easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so that the towing
strap is not loose during towing.
OPA067014
CAUTION
Using a portion of the vehicle
other than the tow hooks for
towing may damage the body of
your vehicle.
WARNING - Emergency
Towing Precautions
Use extreme caution when tow-
ing the vehicle.
• Avoid sudden starts or erratic
driving maneuvers which
would place excessive stress
on the emergency towing hook
and towing cable or chain.The
hook and towing cable or
chain may break and cause
serious injury or damage.
• If the disabled vehicle is
unable to be moved, do not
forcibly continue the towing.
We recommend that you con-
tact an authorized Kia dealer
or a commercial tow truck
service for assistance.
• Tow the vehicle as straight
ahead as possible.
• Keep away from the vehicle
during towing.
What to do in an emergency
367
Emergency towing precautions
• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so
the steering wheel isn’t locked.
• Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
• Release the parking bake.
• Press the brake pedal with more
force than usual since you will have
reduced brake performance.
• More steering effort will be
required because the power steer-
ing system will be disabled.
• If you are driving down a long hill,
the brakes may overheat and brake
performance will be reduced. Stop
often and let the brakes cool off.
• If the car is being towed with all
four wheels on the ground, it can
be towed only from the front. Be
sure that the transaxle is in neutral.
Be sure the steering is unlocked by
placing the ignition switch in the
ACC position. A driver must be in
the towed vehicle to operate the
steering and brakes.
✽✽
NOTICE
Before towing, check the automatic
transaxle for fluid leaks under your
vehicle. If the automatic transaxle
fluid is leaking, a flatbed equipment
or towing dolly must be used.
CAUTION - Automatic
transaxle
To avoid serious damage to the
automatic transaxle, limit the
vehicle speed to 10 mph (15
km/h) and drive less than 1 mile
(1.5 km) when towing.
Maintenance
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
• Owner’s responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
• Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
• Owner maintenance schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Scheduled maintenance service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 8-34
• Engine oil and filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
• Drive belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
• Fuel filter (for gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
• Fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections. . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
• Vapor hose and fuel filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
• Vacuum crankcase ventilation hoses. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
• Air cleaner filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
• Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
• Valve clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
• Cooling system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
• Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
• Manual transaxle fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
• Automatic transaxle fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
• Dual clutch transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
• Brake hoses and lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
• Brake/clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
• Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
• Brake discs, pads, calipers and rotors. . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
• Exhaust pipe and muffler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
• Suspension mounting bolts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
• Steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
• Drive shafts and boots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
• Air conditioning refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Checking fluid levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
• Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
• Changing the engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
• Checking the coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
• Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Brake/clutch fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
• Checking the brake/clutch* fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
• Checking the washer fluid level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
Parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
• Checking the parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
• Filter replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
• Filter inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
• Filter replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
Wiper blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
• Blade inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
• Blade replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
• For best battery service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
8
• Battery recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57
• Reset items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Tires and wheels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
• Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
• Recommended cold tire inflation pressures . . . . . . . 8-59
• Checking tire inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60
• Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61
• Wheel alignment and tire balance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62
• Tire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
• Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64
• Tire traction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64
• Tire maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64
• Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64
• All season tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-71
• Summer tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-71
• Snow tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-71
• Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-71
• Radial-ply tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-72
• Low aspect ratio tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-74
• Inner panel fuse replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-76
• Engine compartment fuse replacement. . . . . . . . . . . 8-77
• Fuse/relay panel description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-79
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-88
• Bulb replacement precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-88
• Light bulb position (Front). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-89
• Light bulb position (Rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-90
• Headlamp (HID type) bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . 8-90
• Headlamp (Low/High beam) bulb replacement. . . . 8-91
• Front turn signal lamp bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . 8-93
• Front side marker bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-95
• Position lamp + DRL (LED type) bulb replacement. . 8-96
• Front fog lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-96
• Side repeater lamp (LED type) bulb replacement. . 8-97
• Rear turn signal lamp bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . 8-98
• Stop and tail lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-99
• Back-up lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100
• Stop and tail lamp (LED type) bulb replacement. . 8-101
• High mounted stop lamp bulb replacement . . . . . 8-101
• High mounted stop lamp (LED type) bulb
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-102
• License plate lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 8-102
• Map lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-102
• Room lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-103
• Glove box lamp bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-104
• Luggage lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-104
• Vanity mirror lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . 8-105
Appearance care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-106
• Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-106
• Interior care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-111
Emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-114
• Crankcase emission control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-114
• Evaporative emission control (including ORVR:
Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery) system . . . . 8-114
• Exhaust emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-115
California perchlorate notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-117
8
83
Maintenance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
OPS076113/OPS076133
■■
Gamma 1.6L GDI
❈ The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
■■
Gamma 1.6L T-GDI
1. Engine oil filler cap
2.Windshield washer fluid reservoir
3. Engine oil dipstick
4. Engine coolant reservoir
5. Radiator cap
6. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir
7. Positive battery terminal
8. Negative battery terminal
9. Fuse box
10. Air cleaner
Maintenance
48
OPS076002N
* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
1. Engine oil filler cap
2.Windshield washer fluid reservoir
3. Engine oil dipstick
4. Engine coolant reservoir
5. Radiator cap
6. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir
7. Positive battery terminal
8. Negative battery terminal
9. Fuse box
10. Air cleaner
■■
Nu 2.0L GDI
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care
to prevent damage to your vehicle
and injury to yourself whenever per-
forming any maintenance or inspec-
tion procedures.
Should you have any doubts con-
cerning the inspection or servicing of
your vehicle, we strongly recom-
mend that you have an authorized
Kia dealer perform this work.
An authorized Kia dealer has factory
trained technicians and genuine Kia
parts to service your vehicle proper-
ly.For expert advice and quality serv-
ice, see an authorized Kia dealer.
Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi-
cient servicing may result in opera-
tional problems with your vehicle that
could lead to vehicle damage, an
accident, or personal injury.
Owner’s responsibility
✽✽
NOTICE
Maintenance Service and Record
Retention are the owner's responsi-
bility. You should retain documents
that show proper maintenance has
been performed on your vehicle in
accordance with the scheduled
maintenance service charts shown
on the following pages. You need this
information to establish your com-
pliance with the servicing and main-
tenance requirements of your vehi-
cle warranties.
Detailed warranty information is
provided in your Warranty &
Consumer Information manual.
Repairs and adjustments required as
a result of improper maintenance or
a lack of required maintenance are
not covered.
We recommend you have your vehi-
cle maintained and repaired by an
authorized Kia dealer. An authorized
Kia dealer meets Kia’s high service
quality standards and receives tech-
nical support from Kia in order to pro-
vide you with a high level of service
satisfaction.
85
Maintenance
Maintenance
68
✽✽
NOTICE - NHTSA Safety
Corrosion Alert
The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) has
issued a general warning to all vehi-
cle owners of all brands regarding
the risks associated with vehicle
underbody corrosion. From your
initial purchase, take the following
steps to prevent unsafe corrosion
damage to your vehicle:
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Wash the undercarriage of your
vehicle regularly during the win-
ter and whenever your vehicle has
been exposed to such salts or
chemicals.
• Do a thorough washing of the
undercarriage at the end of the
winter.
• Use professional service techni-
cians or governmental inspection
stations to annually inspect for
corrosion.
• Immediately seek an inspection of
your vehicle if you become visual-
ly aware of corrosion flaking or
scaling or if you become aware of
a change in vehicle performance,
such as soft or spongy brakes, flu-
ids leaking, impairment of direc-
tional control, suspension noises
or rattling metal straps.
NHTSA further advises that after
a vehicle is 7 years old, it is essen-
tial that you take these indicated
maintenance steps to ensure that
you protect yourself from unsafe
corrosion conditions.
Owner maintenance precau-
tions
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems.This section gives
instructions only for the maintenance
items that are easy to perform.
As explained earlier in this section,
several procedures can be done only
by an authorized Kia dealer with spe-
cial tools.
✽✽
NOTICE
Improper owner maintenance dur-
ing the warranty period may affect
warranty coverage. For details, read
the separate Warranty & Consumer
Information manual provided with
the vehicle. If you're unsure about
any servicing or maintenance proce-
dure, have it done by an authorized
Kia dealer.
87
Maintenance
WARNING - Maintenance
work
Do not wear jewelry or loose
clothing while working under
the hood of your vehicle with
the engine running. These can
become entangled in moving
parts, if you must run the engine
while working under the hood,
make certain that you remove
all jewelry (especially rings,
bracelets, watches, and neck-
laces) and all neckties, scarves,
and similar loose clothing
before getting near the engine
or cooling fans.
Maintenance
88
OWNER MAINTENANCE
The following lists are vehicle checks
and inspections that should be per-
formed by the owner or an author-
ized Kia dealer at the frequencies
indicated to help ensure safe,
dependable operation of your vehi-
cle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your deal-
er as soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance Checks
are generally not covered by war-
ranties and you may be charged for
labor, parts and lubricants used.
Owner maintenance schedule
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check the coolant level in the
coolant reservoir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tires.
Check if the front of the radiator
and condenser are clean and not
blocked with leaves, dirt or insects
etc. If any of the above parts are
extremely dirty or you are not sure
of their condition, take your vehicle
to an authorized Kia dealer.
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of
the exhaust or any smell of
exhaust fumes in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice any increased steer-
ing effort or looseness in the steer-
ing wheel, or change in its straight-
ahead position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly
turns slightly or “pulls” to one side
when traveling on smooth, level
road.
• When stopping, listen and check
for unusual sounds, pulling to one
side, increased brake pedal travel
or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the
operation of your transaxle occurs,
check the transaxle fluid level.
• Check the automatic transaxle P
(Park) function.
• Check the parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your
vehicle (water dripping from the air
conditioning system during or after
use is normal).
WARNING - Hot coolant
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. Scalding hot
coolant and steam may blow out
under pressure.
89
Maintenance
At least monthly:
• Check the coolant level in the
engine coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn
signals and hazard warning flash-
ers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare.
At least twice a year
(i.e., every Spring and Fall):
• Check the radiator, heater and air
conditioning hoses for leaks or
damage.
• Check the windshield washer
spray and wiper operation. Clean
the wiper blades with clean cloth
dampened with washer fluid.
• Check the headlight alignment.
• Check the muffler, exhaust pipes,
shields and clamps.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for
wear and function.
• Check for worn tires and loose
wheel lug nuts.
At least once a year:
• Clean the body and door drain
holes.
• Lubricate the door hinges and
checks, and hood hinges.
• Lubricate the door and hood locks
and latches.
• Lubricate the door rubber weather-
strips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Inspect and lubricate the automat-
ic transaxle linkage and controls.
• Clean the battery and terminals.
• Check the brake fluid level.
Maintenance
108
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Follow the Normal Maintenance
Schedule if the vehicle is usually
operated where none of the following
conditions apply. If any of the follow-
ing conditions apply, follow the
Maintenance Under Severe Usage
Conditions.
• Repeated driving short distance of
less than 5 miles (8 km) in normal
temperature or less than 10 miles
(16 km)in freezing temperature
• Extensive engine idling or low
speed driving for long distances
• Driving on rough, dusty, muddy,
unpaved, graveled or salt-spread
roads
• Driving in areas using salt or other
corrosive materials or in very cold
weather
• Driving in heavy dust condition
• Driving in heavy traffic area
• Driving on uphill, downhill, or
mountain road repeatedly
• Towing a trailer or using a camper,
or roof rack
• Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other
commercial use of vehicle towing
• Driving over 106 mile/h(170 km/h)
• Frequently driving in stop-and-go
condition
If your vehicle is operated under the
above conditions, you should
inspect, replace or refill more fre-
quently than the following Normal
Maintenance Schedule. After 120
months or 150,000 miles continue to
follow the prescribed maintenance
intervals.
811
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep
receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the fre-
quency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.
*
1
lnspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or
timing belt.
*
2
Fuel tank air filter is considered to be maintenance free
but periodic inspection is recommended for this main-
tenance schedule depends on fuel quality.
*
3
Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibra-
tion and adjust if necessary.
*
4
The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur
or tension is reduced excessively.
*
5
When replacing coolant, use only a qualified coolant
additive for your vehicle and never mix hard water in
the coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant
mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine
damage.
*
6
If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one
bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are avail-
able from your authorized Kia dealer along with infor-
mation on how to use them.Do not mix other additives.
Maintenance
128
7,500 miles or 6 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refriger-
ant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *
1
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Inspect visually the following items.
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Fuel lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (1.6 T-GDI)
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
6
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
813
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
15,000 miles or 12 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refriger-
ant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *
1
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Fuel lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (1.6 T-GDI)
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
6
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
Maintenance
148
22,500 miles or 18 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refriger-
ant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *
1
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Inspect visually the following items.
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Fuel lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (1.6 T-GDI)
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
6
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
815
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
30,000 miles or 24 months
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrig-
erant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *
1
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Inspect fuel line, hoses and connection
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter *
2
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Fuel lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
(Continued)
(Continued)
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (1.6 T-GDI)
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
6
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
Maintenance
168
37,500 miles or 30 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refriger-
ant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *
1
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Inspect dual clutch transmission fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
(Every 37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 48 months)
❑ Inspect visually the following items.
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Fuel lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
(Continued)
(Continued)
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (1.6 T-GDI)
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
6
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
817
Maintenance
(Continued)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (1.6 T-GDI)
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated) (1.6 T-GDI)
❑ Add fuel additive *
6
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
45,000 miles or 36 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrig-
erant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *
1
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Fuel lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
(Continued)
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
Maintenance
188
52,500 miles or 42 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refriger-
ant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *
1
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Inspect visually the following items.
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Fuel lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (1.6 T-GDI)
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
6
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
819
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
60,000 miles or 48 months
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrig-
erant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *
1
❑ Inspect drive belt *
4
(First, 60,000 miles or 72 months
after every 15,000 miles or 24 months)
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Inspect fuel line, hoses and connection
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter *
2
❑ Inspect valve clearance (Engine 1.6) *
3
(Every 60,000 miles or 72 months)
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Fuel lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)
(Continued)
(Continued)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (1.6 T-GDI)
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
6
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
Maintenance
208
67,500 miles or 54 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refriger-
ant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *
1
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Inspect visually the following items.
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Fuel lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (1.6 T-GDI)
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
6
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
821
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
75,000 miles or 60 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrig-
erant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *
1
❑ Inspect drive belt *
4
(First 60,000 miles or 72 months after
every 15,000 miles or 24 months)
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Inspect dual clutch transmission fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
(Every 37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 48 months)
❑ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Fuel lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)
(Continued)
(Continued)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (1.6 T-GDI)
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
6
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
Maintenance
228
82,500 miles or 66 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refriger-
ant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *
1
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months))
❑ Inspect visually the following items.
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Fuel lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (1.6 T-GDI)
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
6
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
823
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
90,000 miles or 72 months
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refriger-
ant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *
1
❑ Inspect drive belt *
4
(First 60,000 miles or 72 months after
every 15,000 miles or 24 months)
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Inspect fuel line, hoses and connection
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter *
2
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Fuel lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
(Continued)
(Continued)
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (1.6 T-GDI)
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated) (1.6 T-GDI)
❑ Add fuel additive *
6
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
Maintenance
248
97,500 miles or 78 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refriger-
ant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *
1
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Inspect visually the following items.
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Fuel lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (1.6 T-GDI)
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
6
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
825
Maintenance
(Continued)
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (1.6 T-GDI)
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
6
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated), (1.6 GDI, 2.0 GDI)
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
105,000 miles or 84 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrig-
erant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *
1
❑ Inspect drive belt *
4
(First 60,000 miles or 72 months after
every 15,000 miles or 24 months)
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Fuel lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
(Continued)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
Maintenance
268
112,500 miles or 90 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refriger-
ant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *
1
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Inspect dual clutch transmission fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
(Every 37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 48 months)
❑ Inspect visually the following items.
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Fuel lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
(Continued)
(Continued)
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (1.6 T-GDI)
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
6
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
827
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
120,000 miles or 96 months
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrig-
erant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *
1
❑ Inspect drive belt *
4
(First 60,000 miles or 72 months after
every 15,000 miles or 24 months)
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Inspect fuel line, hoses and connection
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter *
2
❑ Inspect valve clearance (Engine 1.6) *
3
(Every 60,000 miles or 72 months)
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Fuel lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)
(Continued)
(Continued)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine coolant*
5
(First, 120,000 miles or 120 months
after every 30,000 miles or 24 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (1.6 T-GDI)
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
6
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
Maintenance
288
127,000 miles or 102 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refriger-
ant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *
1
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Inspect visually the following items.
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Fuel lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (1.6 T-GDI)
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
6
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
829
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
135,000 miles or 108 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrig-
erant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *
1
❑ Inspect drive belt *
4
(First 60,000 miles or 72 months after
every 15,000 miles or 24 months)
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Fuel lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
(Continued)
(Continued)
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (1.6 T-GDI)
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated), (1.6 T-GDI)
❑ Add fuel additive *
6
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
Maintenance
308
142,500 miles or 114 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refriger-
ant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *
1
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Inspect visually the following items.
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Fuel lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (1.6 T-GDI)
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
6
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
831
Maintenance
150,000 miles or 120 months
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrig-
erant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *
1
❑ Inspect drive belt *
4
(First 60,000 miles or 72 months after
every 15,000 miles or 24 months)
❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Inspect dual clutch transmission fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect fuel line, hoses and connection
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter *
2
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
(Every 37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 48 months)
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect visually the following items
1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Fuel lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)
(Continued)
(Continued)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine coolant *
5
(First 120,000 miles or 120 months
after every 30,000 miles or 24 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (1.6 T-GDI)
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
6
(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 6,500 miles or 12 months)
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
No check, No service required
❑ Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
Maintenance
328
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions.
Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
MAINTENANCE ITEM
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING
CONDITION
ENGINE OIL AND
ENGINE OIL FILTER
1.6 GDI / 2.0 GDI R Every 3,750 miles or 6 months
A, B, C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, J, K
1.6 T-GDI R Every 3,000 miles or 6 months
AIR CLEANER FILTER R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E
SPARK PLUGS R MORE FREQUENTLY A, B, H, I, K
DISC BRAKE/ PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H
REAR BRAKE DRUMS/ LININGS, PARKING
BRAKE
I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H
STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/
LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM
BSALL JOINT
I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, E, F, G, H, I
DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS I Every 7,500 miles OR 6 months C, D, E, F, G, H
MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL R Every 80,000 miles C, D, F, G, H, I, J
DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION FLUID R Every 80,000 miles C, D, F, G, H, I, J
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID R Every 60,000 miles A, C, E, F, G, H, I
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)
R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E
833
Maintenance
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
A - Repeatedly driving shorts distanse of less than 5miles in
normal temperature or less than 10miles in freezing tem-
perature
B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long dis-
tances
C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-
spread roads
D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in
very cold weather
E - Driving in heavy dust condition
F - Driving in heavy traffic area
G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
H - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle
towing
J - Driving over 106 MPH
K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
Maintenance
348
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Engine oil and filter
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in
the maintenance schedule. If the
vehicle is being driven in severe con-
ditions, more frequent oil and filter
changes are required.
Drive belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil
saturation and replace if necessary.
Drive belts should be checked peri-
odically for proper tension and
adjusted as necessary.
Fuel filter (for gasoline)
Kia gasoline vehicle is equipped with
a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated
with the fuel tank. Regular mainte-
nance or replacement is not needed.
This may vary depending on fuel
quality. If you experience any of the
following: fuel flow restriction, surg-
ing, loss of power, or a hard starting
issue, inspection and, if necessary,
replacement may be needed. Have
the fuel filter inspected or replaced
by an authorized Kia dealer.
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
nections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and
connections for leakage and dam-
age. Have an authorized Kia dealer
replace any damaged or leaking
parts immediately.
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap
should be inspected at those inter-
vals specified in the maintenance
schedule. Make sure that a new
vapor hose or fuel filler cap is cor-
rectly replaced.
835
Maintenance
Vacuum crankcase ventilation
hoses (if equipped)
Inspect the surface of hoses for evi-
dence of heat and/or mechanical
damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and
excessive swelling indicate deterio-
ration. Particular attention should be
paid to examine those hose surfaces
nearest to high heat sources, such
as the exhaust manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to assure
that the hoses do not come in con-
tact with any heat source, sharp
edges or moving components which
might cause heat damage or
mechanical wear. Inspect all hose
connections, such as clamps and
couplings, to make sure they are
secure, and that no leaks are pres-
ent. Hoses should be replaced
immediately if there is any evidence
of deterioration or damage.
Air cleaner filter
A Genuine Kia air cleaner filter is
recommended when the filter is
replaced.
Spark plugs
Make sure to install new spark plugs
of the correct heat range.
Valve clearance (if equipped)
Inspect for excessive valve noise
and/or engine vibration and adjust if
necessary. An authorized Kia dealer
should perform the operation.
Cooling system
Check the cooling system compo-
nents, such as the radiator, coolant
reservoir, hoses and connections for
leakage and damage. Replace any
damaged parts.
Coolant
The coolant should be changed at
the intervals specified in the mainte-
nance schedule.
Maintenance
368
Manual transaxle fluid
(if equipped)
Inspect the manual transaxle fluid
according to the maintenance sched-
ule.
Automatic transaxle fluid
(if equipped)
Automatic transaxle fluid should not
be checked under normal usage
conditions.
But in severe conditions, the fluid
should be changed at an authorized
Kia dealer in accordance to the
scheduled maintenance at the begin-
ning of this section.
✽✽
NOTICE
Automatic transaxle fluid color is
basically red.
As the vehicle is driven, the auto-
matic transaxle fluid will begin to
look darker.
It is the normal condition and you
should not judge the need to replace
the fluid based upon the changed
color.
Dual clutch transmission Fluid
Inspect the dual clutch transmission
fluid according to the maintenance
schedule.
Brake hoses and lines
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and
any leakage. Replace any deteriorat-
ed or damaged parts immediately.
✽✽
NOTICE - NHTSA Safety
Corrosion Alert
NHTSA has warned all vehicle own-
ers of all brands that they must main-
tain their vehicles in a manner which
will prevent brake hose and brake line
failures due to corrosion when such
vehicles are exposed to winter road
salt and related chemicals. While seri-
ous corrosion conditions typically only
manifest themselves as safety issues
after 7 years of vehicle use, the corro-
sion process starts immediately and
thus underbody cleaning maintenance
must commence from your vehicle's
first exposure to road salts and chem-
icals. NHTSA urges vehicle owners to
take the following steps to prevent
corrosion:
(Continued)
CAUTION - Transaxle fluids
The use of a non-specified fluid
could result in transaxle mal-
function and failure.
Use only specified automatic
transaxle fluid. (Refer to
"Recommended lubricants and
capacities" in chapter 9.)
837
Maintenance
(Continued)
1. Wash the undercarriage of your
vehicle regularly throughout the
winter and do a thorough washing
in the spring to remove road salt
and other de-icing chemicals.
2. Monitor the brake system for
signs of corrosion by having regu-
lar professional inspections and
watching for signs of problems,
including loss of brake fluid,
unusual leaks and soft or spongy
feel in the brake pedal.
3. Replace the entire brake pipe
assembly if you find severe corro-
sion that causes scaling or flaking
of brake components.
Brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
Check the brake fluid level in the
brake fluid reservoir.The level should
be between “MIN” and “MAX” marks
on the side of the reservoir. Use only
hydraulic brake fluid conforming to
DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.
Parking brake
Inspect the parking brake system
including the parking brake lever (or
pedal) and cables.
Brake discs, pads, calipers
and rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear,
discs for run out and wear, and
calipers for fluid leakage.
Exhaust pipe and muffler
Visually inspect the exhaust pipes,
muffler and hangers for cracks, dete-
rioration, or damage. Start the
engine and listen carefully for any
exhaust gas leakage. Tighten con-
nections or replace parts as neces-
sary.
Maintenance
388
Suspension mounting bolts
Check the suspension connections
for looseness or damage. Retighten
to the specified torque.
Steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine
off, check for excessive free-play in
the steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or dam-
age. Check the dust boots and ball
joints for deterioration, cracks, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
Drive shafts and boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and
clamps for cracks, deterioration, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts and, if necessary, repack the
grease.
Air conditioning refrigerant
Check the air conditioning lines and
connections for leakage and dam-
age.
839
Maintenance
CHECKING FLUID LEVELS
When checking engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid,
always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain plug, or
dipstick before checking or draining
any lubricant or fluid. This is espe-
cially important in dusty or sandy
areas and when the vehicle is used
on unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug
and dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the engine and
other mechanisms that could be
damaged.
Maintenance
408
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil level
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to
reach normal operating tempera-
ture.
3.Turn the engine off and wait for a
few minutes (about 5 minutes) for
the oil to return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,
and re-insert it fully.
5. Pull the dipstick out again and
check the level. The level should
be between F and L.
✽✽
NOTICE - Replacing engine
oil
• Do not spill engine oil, when
adding or changing engine oil. If
you drop the engine oil on the
engine room, wipe it off immedi-
ately.
WARNING - Radiator
hose
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or
adding the engine oil as it may
be hot enough to burn you.
■ 1.6 T-GDI
■ 1.6 GDI
OPS076135L
■ 2.0 GDI
OPS073003
OPS076114
CAUTION - Replacing
engine oil
Do not overfill the engine oil. It
may damage the engine.
841
Maintenance
If it is near or at L, add enough oil to
bring the level to F. Do not overfill.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil
from being spilled on engine com-
ponents.
Use only the specified engine oil.
(Refer to “Recommended lubricants
and capacities” in chapter 9.)
Changing the engine oil and
filter
Have engine oil and filter changed by
an authorized Kia dealer according
to the Maintenance Schedule at the
beginning of this chapter.
■ 1.6 T-GDI
■ 1.6 GDI
OPS076136L
■ 2.0 GDI
OPS073004
OPS076115
CALIFORNIA PROPO-
SITION 65 WARNING
Engine oil contains chemicals
known to the State of California
to cause cancer, birth defects
and reproductive harm. Used
engine oil may cause irritation or
cancer of the skin if left in con-
tact with the skin for prolonged
periods of time. Always protect
your skin by washing your hands
thoroughly with soap and warm
water as soon as possible after
handling used oil.
Maintenance
428
ENGINE COOLANT
The high-pressure cooling system
has a reservoir filled with year round
antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is
filled at the factory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant level at least once a year, at
the beginning of the winter season,
and before traveling to a colder cli-
mate.
Checking the coolant level
Turn the engine off and wait until it
cools down. Use extreme care when
removing the radiator cap. Wrap a
thick towel around it, and turn it
counterclockwise slowly to the first
stop. Step back while the pressure is
released from the cooling system.
When you are sure all the pressure
has been released, press down on
the cap, using a thick towel, and con-
tinue turning counterclockwise to
remove it.
CAUTION - Radiator Cap
Never attempt to remove the
radiator cap while the engine is
operating or hot. Doing so
might lead to cooling system
and engine damage.
WARNING - Cooling fan
Use caution when
working near the
blade of the cooling
fan. The electric
motor (cooling fan) is
controlled by engine coolant
temperature, refrigerant pres-
sure and vehicle speed. it may
sometimes operate even when
the engine is not running.
843
Maintenance
Check the condition and connections
of all cooling system hoses and
heater hoses. Replace any swollen
or deteriorated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between F and L marks on the side
of the coolant reservoir when the
engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
specified coolant to provide protec-
tion against freezing and corrosion.
Bring the level to F, but do not over-
fill. If frequent additions are required,
see an authorized Kia dealer for a
cooling system inspection.
Recommended engine coolant
• When adding coolant, use only
deionized water or soft water for
your vehicle and never mix hard
water in the coolant filled at the fac-
tory. An improper coolant mixture
can result in serious malfunction or
engine damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has alu-
minum engine parts and must be
protected by an ethylene-glycol
with phosphate based coolant to
prevent corrosion and freezing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the spec-
ified coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less
than 35% antifreeze, which would
reduce the effectiveness of the
solution.
OPS076116
OAM079005
■ 1.6 T-GDI
■ 1.6 GDI/2.0 GDI
Maintenance
448
For mixture percentage, refer to the
following table.
Changing the coolant
Have the coolant changed by an
authorized Kia dealer according to
the Maintenance Schedule at the
beginning of this chapter.
Put a thick cloth around the radiator
cap before refilling the coolant in
order to prevent the coolant from
overflowing into engine parts such as
the alternator.
Ambient
Temperature
Mixture Percentage
(volume)
Antifreeze Water
5°F (-15°C)
35 65
-13°F (-25°C)
40 60
-31°F (-35°C)
50 50
-49°F (-45°C)
60 40
OPS076117
WARNING
Radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator
are hot. Scalding hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure which may result in
serious injury.
845
Maintenance
BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID
Checking the brake/clutch*
fluid level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir
periodically. The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap
and adding brake/clutch* fluid, clean
the area around the reservoir cap
thoroughly to prevent brake/clutch*
fluid contamination.
* if equipped
If the level is low, add fluid to the
MAX level. The level will fall with
accumulated mileage. This is a nor-
mal condition associated with the
wear of the brake linings and/or
clutch disc (if equipped). If the fluid
level is excessively low, have the
brake/clutch* system checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Use only the specified brake/clutch*
fluid. (Refer to “Recommended lubri-
cants and capacities” in chapter 9.)
Never mix different types of fluid.
In the event the brake/clutch* system
requires frequent additions of fluid,
the vehicle should be inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
When changing and adding
brake/clutch* fluid, handle it carefully.
Do not let it come in contact with
your eyes. If brake/ clutch* fluid
should come in contact with your
eyes, immediately flush them with a
large quantity of fresh tap water.
Have your eyes examined by a doc-
tor as soon as possible.
OPS076118
CAUTION - Proper fluid
Only use brake fluid in brake
system. Small amounts of
improper fluids (such as engine
oil) can cause damage to the
brake system.
Maintenance
468
Brake/clutch* fluid, which has been
exposed to open air for an extended
time should never be used as its
quality cannot be guaranteed. It
should be disposed of properly.
CAUTION - Brake/clutch*
fluid
Do not allow brake/clutch* fluid
to contact the vehicle's body
paint, as paint damage will
result.
847
Maintenance
WASHER FLUID
Checking the washer fluid
level
The reservoir is translucent so that
you can check the level with a quick
visual inspection.
Check the fluid level in the washer
fluid reservoir and add fluid if neces-
sary. Plain water may be used if
washer fluid is not available.
However, use washer solvent with
antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-
mates to prevent freezing.
OPS073006
OPS073007
■ Type A
■ Type B
WARNING - Flammable
Fluid
Do not allow the washer fluid to
come in contact with open
flames or sparks.The windshield
washer fluid reservoir is flamma-
ble under certain circumstances.
This can result in a fire.
WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windshield and may
cause loss of vehicle control.
WARNING - Windshield
fluid
Do not drink the windshield
washer fluid. The windshield
washer fluid is poisonous to
humans and animals.
Maintenance
488
PARKING BRAKE
Checking the parking brake
Check the stroke of the parking
brake by counting the number of
“clicks’’ heard while fully applying it
from the released position. Also, the
parking brake alone should securely
hold the vehicle on a fairly steep
grade. If the stroke is more or less
than specified, have the parking
brake adjusted by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Stroke : 6~8 “clicks’’ at a force of
44 lbs (20 kg, 196 N).
Filter replacement
It must be replaced when necessary,
and should not be washed.
You can clean the filter when inspect-
ing the air cleaner element.
Clean the filter by using compressed
air.
1.Loosen the air cleaner cover
attaching clips and open the cover.
AIR CLEANER
OPS076119
OPS076120
OPS053011
849
Maintenance
2.Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.
3. Replace the air cleaner filter.
4. Lock the cover with the cover
attaching clips.
Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is operated in extreme-
ly dusty or sandy areas, replace the
element more often than the usual
recommended intervals. (Refer to
“Maintenance under severe usage
conditions” in this chapter.)
CAUTION - Air filter main-
tenance
• Do not drive with the air clean-
er removed; this will result in
excessive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner
filter, be careful that dust or
dirt does not enter the air
intake, or damage may result.
• Use a Kia genuine part. Use of
non-genuine parts could dam-
age the air flow sensor.
OPS076121
Maintenance
508
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)
Filter inspection
The climate control air filter should
be replaced according to the mainte-
nance schedule. If the vehicle is
operated in severely air-polluted
cities or on dusty rough roads for a
long period, it should be inspected
more frequently and replaced earlier.
When you replace the climate control
air filter, replace it performing the fol-
lowing procedure, and be careful to
avoid damaging other components.
Filter replacement
1. Open the glove box.
2.With the glove box open, remove
the Air filter cover.
OPS073009
OPS073008
851
Maintenance
3. Remove the climate control air fil-
ter case by pulling out both sides
of the cover.
4. Replace the climate control air filter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order
of disassembly.
When replacing the climate control
air filter install it properly. Otherwise,
the system may produce noise and
the effectiveness of the filter may be
reduced.
OPS073010 OPS073011
Maintenance
528
WIPER BLADES
Blade inspection
Commercial hot waxes applied by
automatic vehicle washes have been
known to make the windshield diffi-
cult to clean.
Contamination of either the wind-
shield or the wiper blades with for-
eign matter can reduce the effective-
ness of the windshield wipers.
Common sources of contamination
are insects, tree sap, and hot wax
treatments used by some commer-
cial vehicle washes. If the blades are
not wiping properly, clean both the
window and the blades with a good
cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse
thoroughly with clean water.
Blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean
adequately, the blades may be worn
or cracked, and require replacement.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms
or other components, do not attempt
to move the wipers manually.
The use of a non-specified wiper
blade could result in wiper malfunc-
tion and failure.
1JBA5122
CAUTION - Wiper blades
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
853
Maintenance
Front windshield wiper blade
Type A
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the
wiper blade assembly to expose
the plastic locking clip.
2. Compress the clip and slide the
blade assembly downward.
3. Lift it off the arm.
4. Install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
Type B
1. Raise the wiper arm.
1LDA5023
CAUTION - Wiper arms
Do not allow the wiper arm to
fall against the windshield,
since it may chip or crack the
windshield.
CAUTION - Wiper arms
Do not allow the wiper arm to
fall against the windshield,
since it may chip or crack the
windshield.
1JBA7037
1JBA7038
OHM078059
Maintenance
548
2. Lift up the wiper blade clip. Then
pull down the blade assembly and
remove it.
3. Install the new blade assembly in
the reverse order of removal.
Rear window wiper blade
1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out
the wiper blade assembly.
OHM078060
OHM078062
OHM078061
855
Maintenance
2. Install the new blade assembly by
inserting the center part into the
slot in the wiper arm until it clicks
into place.
3. Make sure the blade assembly is
installed firmly by trying to pull it
slightly.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms
or other components, have an
authorized Kia dealer replace the
wiper blade.
OHM078063
Maintenance
568
BATTERY
For best battery service
• Keep the battery securely mount-
ed.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connec-
tions clean, tight, and coated with
petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from
the battery immediately with a
solution of water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be
used for an extended time, discon-
nect the battery cables.
OPS076122
WARNING - Risk of
explosion
Keep lit cigarettes and
all other flames or
sparks away from the
battery.
The battery contains
hydrogen -- a highly
combustible gas which
will explode if it comes
in contact with a flame or
spark.
WARNING - Sulfuric acid
in batteries
Keep batteries out of the
reach of children
because batteries con-
tain highly corrosive
SULFURIC ACID and
electrolytes. Do not
allow battery acid to
contact your skin, eyes,
clothing or paint finish.
Wear eye protection
when charging or work-
ing near a battery.
Always provide ventila-
tion when working in an
enclosed space.
857
Maintenance
Always read the following
instructions carefully when
handling a battery.
If any electrolyte gets into
your eyes, flush your eyes
with clean water for at least
15 minutes and get immedi-
ate medical attention.
If electrolyte gets on your
skin, thoroughly wash the
contacted area. If you feel
pain or burning sensation,
get medical attention imme-
diately.
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local law(s)
or regulation.
Never attempt to recharge the bat-
tery when the battery cables are con-
nected.
✽✽
NOTICE
If you connect unauthorized elec-
tronic devices to the battery, the bat-
tery may be discharged. Never use
unauthorized devices.
Battery recharging
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
• If the battery becomes discharged
in a short time (because, for exam-
ple, the headlights or interior lights
were left on while the vehicle was
not in use), recharge it by slow
charging (trickle) for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while
the vehicle is being used, recharge
it at 20-30A for two hours.
CALIFORNIA PROPO-
SITION 65 WARNING
Battery posts, terminals, and
related accessories contain
lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer, birth
defects and reproductive harm.
Batteries also contain other
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer.
Wash hands after handling.
WARNING - Risk of elec-
trocution
Never touch the electrical igni-
tion system while the vehicle is
running. This system works
with high voltage which can
"zap" you.
WARNING - Recharging
battery
Never attempt to recharge the
battery when the battery cables
are connected.
Maintenance
588
When recharging the battery,
observe the following precautions:
• The battery must be removed from
the vehicle and placed in an area
with good ventilation.
• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks, or
flame near the battery.
• Watch the battery during charging,
and stop or reduce the charging
rate if the battery cells begin
gassing (boiling) violently or if the
temperature of the electrolyte of
any cell exceeds 120°F (49°C).
• Wear eye protection when check-
ing the battery during charging.
• Disconnect the battery charger in
the following order.
1.Turn off the battery charger main
switch.
2.Unhook the negative clamp from
the negative battery terminal.
3.Unhook the positive clamp from
the positive battery terminal.
• Before performing maintenance or
recharging the battery, turn off all
accessories and stop the engine.
• The negative battery cable must be
removed first and installed last
when the battery is disconnected.
Reset items
Items should be reset after the bat-
tery has been discharged or the bat-
tery has been disconnected.
• Auto up/down window
(See chapter 4)
• Sunroof (See chapter 4)
• Trip computer (See chapter 4)
• Climate control system
(See chapter 4)
• Clock (See chapter 4)
• Audio (See chapter 5)
859
Maintenance
TIRES AND WHEELS
Tire care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
Recommended cold tire infla-
tion pressures
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tires are cold.“Cold Tires” means the
vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or driven less than
one mile (1.6 km).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, vehicle
handling, and minimum tire wear.
For recommended inflation pressure,
refer to “Tire and wheels” in chapter
9.
All specifications (sizes and pres-
sures) can be found on a label
attached to the driver’s side center
pillar.
OXM079101L
WARNING - Tire under
inflation
Inflate your tire consistent with
the instructions provided in this
manual. Severe under inflation
can lead to severe heat build-
up, causing blowouts, tread
separation and other tire fail-
ures that can result in the loss
of vehicle control. This risk is
much higher on hot days and
when driving for long periods at
high speeds.
Maintenance
608
• Underinflation also results in
excessive wear, poor handling and
reduced fuel economy. Wheel
deformation also is possible. Keep
your tire pressures at the proper
levels. If a tire frequently needs
refilling, have it checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Overinflation produces a harsh
ride, excessive wear at the center
of the tire tread, and a greater pos-
sibility of damage from road haz-
ards.
• Warm tires normally exceed rec-
ommended cold tire pressures by 4
to 6 psi (28 to 41 kPa). Do not
release air from warm tires to
adjust the pressure or the tires will
be underinflated.
• Be sure to reinstall the tire inflation
valve caps. Without the valve cap,
dirt or moisture could get into the
valve core and cause air leakage.If
a valve cap is missing, install a
new one as soon as possible.
Always observe the following:
• Check tire pressure when the tires
are cold. (After vehicle has been
parked for at least three hours or
hasn't been driven more than one
mile (1.6 km) since startup.)
• Check the pressure of your spare
tire each time you check the pres-
sure of other tires.
• Never overload your vehicle. Be
careful not to overload a vehicle
luggage rack if your vehicle is
equipped with one.
Checking tire inflation pressure
Check your tires once a month or
more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the
spare tire.
How to check
Use a good quality gauge to check
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your
tires are properly inflated simply by
looking at them. Radial tires may
look properly inflated even when
they're underinflated.
Check the tire's inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. - "Cold"
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
WARNING - Tire inflation
Overinflation or underinflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure. This
could result in loss of vehicle
control and potential injury.
861
Maintenance
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem.Press the tire gauge firm-
ly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement.If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjust-
ment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the rec-
ommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gauge. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. They help prevent
leaks by keeping out dirt and mois-
ture.
• Inspect your tires frequently for
proper inflation as well as wear and
damage. Always use a tire pres-
sure gauge.
• Tires with too much or too little
pressure wear unevenly causing
poor handling, loss of vehicle con-
trol, and sudden tire failure leading
to accidents, injuries, and even
death. The recommended cold tire
pressure for your vehicle can be
found in this manual and on the tire
label located on the driver's side
center pillar.
• Remember to check the pressure
of your spare tire.Kia recommends
that you check the spare every
time you check the pressure of the
other tires on your vehicle.
Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recom-
mended that the tires be rotated every
7,500 miles (12,000 km) or sooner if
irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for cor-
rect balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pres-
sure, improper wheel alignment, out-
of-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness.
Refer to “Tire and wheels”in chapter 9.
Maintenance
628
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
Rotate radial tires that have an
asymmetric tread pattern only from
front to rear and not from right to left.
Wheel alignment and tire bal-
ance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
S2BLA790A
CBGQ0707A
Without a spare tire
Directional tires (if equipped)
CAUTION - Wheel weight
Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle's alu-
minum wheels. Use only
approved wheel weights.
WARNING - Mixing tires
• Do not use the compact spare
tire (if equipped) for tire rota-
tion.
• Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circum-
stances. This may cause
unusual handling characteris-
tics.
863
Maintenance
Tire replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator (A) will appear as a solid
band across the tread. This shows
there is less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm)
of tread left on the tire. Replace the
tire when this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replac-
ing the tire.
The ABS works by comparing the
speed of the wheels. The tire size
affects wheel speed.When replacing
tires, all 4 tires must use the same
size originally supplied with the vehi-
cle.Using tires of a different size can
cause the ABS (Anti-lock Brake
System) and ESC (Electronic
Stability Control) to work irregularly.
✽✽
NOTICE
We recommend that when replacing
tires, use the same originally sup-
plied with the vehicles. If not, that
affects driving performance.
Compact spare tire replacement
A compact spare tire has a shorter
tread life than a regular size tire.
Replace it when you can see the
tread wear indicator bars on the tire.
The replacement compact spare tire
should be the same size and design
tire as the one provided with your
new vehicle and should be mounted
on the same compact spare tire
wheel. The compact spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
size wheel, and the compact spare
tire wheel is not designed for mount-
ing a regular size tire.
OUM076204L
Maintenance
648
Wheel replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
A wheel that is not the correct size
may adversely affect wheel and
bearing life, braking and stopping
abilities, handling characteristics,
ground clearance, body-to-tire clear-
ance, snow chain clearance,
speedometer and odometer calibra-
tion, headlight aim and bumper
height.
Tire traction
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. Slow down whenever there
is rain, snow or ice on the road to
reduce the possibility of losing con-
trol of the vehicle.
Tire maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
Tire sidewall labeling
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental charac-
teristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
CAUTION - Wheels
Wheels that do not meet Kia
specifications may fit poorly
and result in damage to the
vehicle or unusual handling and
poor vehicle control.
OJF085008L
865
Maintenance
2.Tire size designation
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replace-
ment tires for your vehicle. The fol-
lowing explains what the letters and
numbers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designa-
tor could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
P235/65R17 108T
P - Applicable vehicle type (tires
marked with the prefix “P’’ are
intended for use on passenger
vehicles or light trucks; however,
not all tires have this marking).
235 - Tire width in millimeters.
65 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
17 - Rim diameter in inches.
108 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
T - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with impor-
tant information that you need if you
ever have to replace one.The follow-
ing explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designa-
tion mean.
Example wheel size designation:
7.0JX17
7.0 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
17 - Rim diameter in inches.
Maintenance
668
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the dif-
ferent speed ratings currently being
used for passenger vehicle tires.The
speed rating is part of the tire size
designation on the sidewall of the
tire.This symbol corresponds to that
tire's designed maximum safe oper-
ating speed.
3. Checking tire life (TIN :Tire
Identification Number)
Any tires that are over 6 years old,
based on the manufacturing date,
(including the spare tire) should be
replaced by new ones. You can find
the manufacturing date on the tire
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the
wheel), displaying the DOT Code.
The DOT Code is a series of num-
bers on a tire consisting of numbers
and English letters. The manufactur-
ing date is designated by the last four
digits (characters) of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four num-
bers indicate week and year manu-
factured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1617 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2017.
S 112 mph (180 km/h)
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
Z Above 149 mph (240 km/h)
Maximum Speed
Speed
Rating
Symbol
WARNING - Tire age
Replace tires within the recom-
mended time frame. Failure to
replace tires as recommended
can result in sudden tire failure,
which could lead to a loss of
control and an accident.
867
Maintenance
4.Tire ply composition and mate-
rial
The number of layers or plies of rub-
ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply con-
struction; the letter "D" means diago-
nal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-
struction.
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire.Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maxi-
mum section width.
For example:
TREADWEAR 200
TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
Tires degrade over time, even when
they are not being used. Regardless
of the remaining tread, we recom-
mend that tires be replaced after
approximately six (6) years of normal
service. Heat caused by hot climates
or frequent high loading conditions
can accelerate the aging process.
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified govern-
ment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-a-
half times (1½) as well on the gov-
ernment course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicle
may vary with respect to grade.
Maintenance
688
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spec-
ified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perform-
ance.
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead brak-
ing traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction char-
acteristics.
Temperature -A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C cor-
responds to a level of performance
which all passenger vehicle tires
must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the labora-
tory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Tire terminology and definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air
inside the tire pressing outward on
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-
pascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the
combined weight of optional acces-
sories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic
transaxle, power seats, and air con-
ditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a
tire's height to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords
that is located between the plies and
the tread. Cords may be made from
steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel
wires wrapped by steel cords that
hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the plies are laid at alternate
angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
869
Maintenance
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of
air pressure in a tire, measured in
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-
pascals (kPa) before a tire has built
up heat from driving.
Curb Weight: This means the weight
of a motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, but without passengers and
cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into
the sidewall of a tire signifying that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation motor
vehicle safety standards. The DOT
code includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric des-
ignator which can also identify the
tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Front Axle.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Rear axle.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire, that
must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for
air pressure.
Light truck (LT) tire: A tire designat-
ed by its manufacturer as primarily
intended for use on lightweight trucks
or multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load ratings: The maximum load
that a tire is rated to carry for a given
inflation pressure.
Load Index: An assigned number
ranging from 1 to 279 that corre-
sponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The
maximum air pressure to which a
cold tire may be inflated. The maxi-
mum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load
rating for a tire at the maximum per-
missible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:
The sum of curb weight; accessory
weight; vehicle capacity weight; and
production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The
number of occupants a vehicle is
designed to seat multiplied by 150
pounds (68 kg).
Occupant Distribution: Designated
seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side
of a asymmetrical tire that has a par-
ticular side that faces outward when
mounted on a vehicle. The outward
facing sidewall bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on
the inner facing sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire
used on passenger cars and some
light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Ply: A layer of rubber-coated parallel
cords.
Maintenance
708
Pneumatic tire: A mechanical
device made of rubber, chemicals,
fabric and steel or other materials,
that, when mounted on an automo-
tive wheel, provides the traction and
contains the gas or fluid that sustains
the load.
Production options weight: The
combined weight of installed regular
production options weighing over 5
lb.(2.3 kg) in excess of the standard
items which they replace, not previ-
ously considered in curb weight or
accessory weight, including heavy
duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty battery, and special trim.
Recommended Inflation Pressure:
Vehicle manufacturer's recommend-
ed tire inflation pressure and shown
on the tire placard.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the ply cords that extend to the
beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and
upon which the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric
code assigned to a tire indicating the
maximum speed at which a tire can
operate.
Traction: The friction between the
tire and the road surface. The
amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called "wear bars,"
that show across the tread of a tire
when only 2/32 inch of tread remains.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards, a tire information
system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire's traction, tempera-
ture and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing proce-
dures. The ratings are molded into
the sidewall of the tire.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num-
ber of designated seating positions
multiplied by 150 lbs.(68 kg) plus the
rated cargo and luggage load.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire: Load on an individual tire due
to curb and accessory weight plus
maximum occupant and cargo
weight.
Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occu-
pant weight and driving by 2.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanent-
ly attached to a vehicle showing the
original equipment tire size and rec-
ommended inflation pressure.
871
Maintenance
All season tires
Kia specifies all season tires on
some models to provide good per-
formance for use all year round,
including snowy and icy road condi-
tions. All season tires are identified
by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud
and Snow) on the tire sidewall.Snow
tires have better snow traction than
all season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.
Summer tires
Kia specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior perform-
ance on dry roads. Summer tire per-
formance is substantially reduced in
snow and ice. Summer tires do not
have the tire traction rating M+S
(Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall.
if you plan to operate your vehicle in
snowy or icy conditions, Kia recom-
mends the use of snow tires or all
season tires on all four wheels.
Snow tires
If you equip your vehicle with snow
tires, they should be the same size
and have the same load capacity as
the original tires. Snow tires should
be installed on all four wheels; other-
wise, poor handling may result.
Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28
kPa) more air pressure than the
pressure recommended for the stan-
dard tires on the tire label on the dri-
ver's side of the center pillar, or up to
the maximum pressure shown on the
tire sidewall, whichever is less.
Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120
km/h) when your vehicle is equipped
with snow tires.
Tire chains
Tire chains, if necessary, should be
installed on the front wheels.
Be sure that the chains are installed
in accordance with the manufactur-
er's instructions.
To minimize tire and chain wear, do
not continue to use tire chains when
they are no longer needed.
Maintenance
728
• When driving on roads covered
with snow or ice, drive at less than
20 mph (30 km/h).
• Use the SAE “S” class or wire
chains.
• If you hear noise caused by chains
contacting the body, retighten the
chain to avoid contact with the
vehicle body.
• To prevent body damage, retighten
the chains after driving 0.3~0.6
miles (0.5~1.0 km).
• Do not use tire chains on vehicles
equipped with aluminum wheels.
In unavoidable circumstance, use
a wire type chain.
• Use wire chains less than 0.59
inches (15 mm) to prevent damage
to the chain’s connection.
Radial-ply tires
Radial-ply tires provide improved
tread life, road hazard resistance and
smoother high speed ride. The radi-
al-ply tires used on this vehicle are of
belted construction, and are selected
to complement the ride and handling
characteristics of your vehicle.
Radial-ply tires have the same load
carrying capacity, as bias-ply or bias
belted tires of the same size, and use
the same recommended inflation
pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires
with bias-ply or bias belted tires is
not recommended. Any combina-
tions of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias
belted tires when used on the same
vehicle will seriously deteriorate
vehicle handling.The best rule to fol-
low is:Identical radial-ply tires should
always be used as a set of four.
Longer wearing tires can be more
susceptible to irregular tread wear. It
is very important to follow the tire
rotation interval shown in this section
to achieve the tread life potential of
these tires. Cuts and punctures in
radial-ply tires are repairable only in
the tread area, because of sidewall
flexing. Consult your tire dealer for
radial-ply tire repairs.
873
Maintenance
Low aspect ratio tire
(if equipped)
Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect
ratio is lower than 50, are provided
for sporty looks.
Because the low aspect ratio tires
are optimized for handling and brak-
ing, it may be more uncomfortable to
ride in and there is more noise com-
pare with normal tires.
• It is not easy to recognize the tire
damage with your own eyes. But if
there is the slightest hint of tire
damage, even though you cannot
see the tire damage with your own
eyes, have the tire checked or
replaced because the tire damage
may cause air leakage from the
tire.
• If the tire is damaged by driving on
a rough road, off road, pothole,
manhole, or curb stone, it will not
be covered by the warranty.
• You can find out the tire information
on the tire sidewall.
CAUTION
Because the sidewall of the low
aspect ratio tire is shorter than
the normal, the wheel and tire of
the low aspect ratio tire is easi-
er to be damaged. So, follow the
instructions below.
- When driving on a rough road
or off road, drive cautiously
because tires and wheels may
be damaged. And after driving,
inspect tires and wheels.
- When passing over a pothole,
speed bump, manhole, or curb
stone, drive slowly so that the
tires and wheels are not dam-
aged.
- If the tire is impacted, we rec-
ommend that you inspect the
tire condition or contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
- To prevent damage to the tire,
inspect the tire condition and
pressure every 1,900 miles
(3,000 km).
Maintenance
748
FUSES
A vehicle’s electrical system is pro-
tected from electrical overload dam-
age by fuses.
This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels,
one located in the driver’s side panel
bolster, the other in the engine com-
partment near the battery.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-
sories, or controls do not work, check
the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse
has blown, the element inside the
fuse will melt.
If the electrical system does not
work, first check the driver’s side
fuse panel.
Always replace a blown fuse with
one of the same rating.
If the replacement fuse blows, this
indicates an electrical problem.Avoid
using the system involved and imme-
diately consult an authorized Kia
dealer.
Three kinds of fuses are used: micro
mini type for lower amperage rating,
cartridge type, and multi fuse for
higher amperage ratings.
• Do not arbitrarily modify or add-on
electric wiring to the vehicle.
WARNING - Fuse
replacement
• Never replace a fuse with any-
thing but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly a
fire.
• Never install a wire or alu-
minum foil instead of the
proper fuse - even as a tem-
porary repair. It may cause
extensive wiring damage and
a possible fire.
OPS073054
Normal
Normal
■ Micro mini type
■ Cartridge type
■ Multi fuse
Blown
Blown
Normal
Blown
875
Maintenance
✽✽
NOTICE
• When replacing fuse, turn the
ignition “OFF” and turn off
switches of all electrical devices
then remove battery (-) terminal.
• The actual fuse/relay panel label
may differ from equipped items.
CAUTION
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove
fuses because it may cause a
short circuit and damage the
system.
CAUTION - Fuse fire
• When replacing a blown fuse
or relay, make sure the new
fuse or relay fits tightly into
the clips. Failure to tightly
install the fuse or relay may
cause damage to the wiring
and electric systems.
• Do not remove fuses, relays
and terminals fastened with
bolts or nuts.The fuses, relays
and terminals may not be fas-
tened correctly which may
cause vehicle damage.
CAUTION - Fuse
Replacement
Do not input any other objects
except fuses or relays into
fuse/relay terminals such as a
driver or wiring. It may cause
contact failure and system mal-
function.
WARNING - Electrical Fire
• Always ensure replacements
fuses and relays are securely
fastened when installed.
Failure to do so can result in a
vehicle fire.
• We recommend that you do not
remove fuses,relays and termi-
nals that are fastened with
bolts or nuts. If they are not
completely re-installed, such
looseness may cause electrical
arcing and a possible fire. If
fuses, relays and terminals fas-
tened with bolts or nuts need
replacement, consult with an
authorized Kia dealer.
Maintenance
768
Inner panel fuse replacement
1.Turn the ignition switch and all
other switches off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.
3. Pull the suspected fuse straight
out. Use the fuse puller provided
on the engine compartment fuse
panel cover.
4. Check the removed fuse;replace it
if it is blown.
Spare fuses are provided in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized
Kia dealer.
If you do not have a spare, use a
fuse of the same rating from a circuit
you may not need for operating the
vehicle, such as the power outlet
fuse.
If the headlights or other electrical
components do not work and the
fuses are OK, check the fuse panel
in the engine compartment. If a fuse
is blown, it must be replaced.
OPS073017
OPS073014
877
Maintenance
Fuse switch
Always, put the fuse switch at the ON
position.
If you move the switch to the OFF
position, some items such as audio
and digital clock must be reset and
transmitter (or smart key) may not
work properly.
✽✽
NOTICE
If you need to park your vehicle for
prolonged periods more than 1
month, move the transportation fuse
switch to the OFF position to pre-
vent the battery being discharged.
Engine compartment fuse
replacement
1.Turn the ignition switch and all
other switches off.
2. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tab and pulling the
cover up. When the blade type
fuse is disconnected, remove it by
using the clip designed for chang-
ing fuses located in the engine
room fuse box. Upon removal,
securely insert reserve fuse of
equal quantity.
OPS073016
OPS073015
Maintenance
788
3. Check the removed fuse;replace it
if it is blown. To remove or insert
the fuse, use the fuse puller in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult
an authorized Kia dealer.
Multi fuse
If the multi fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1.Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-
ture above.
4. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
5. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the multi fuse is blown, consult an
authorized Kia dealer.
OPS073039
CAUTION - Fuse panel
covers
After checking the fuse panel in
the engine compartment,
securely install the fuse panel
cover with using cover locking
sound. If not, electrical failures
may occur from water contact.
CAUTION
Visually inspect the battery cap
for secure closing. If the battery
cap is not securely latched, the
electrical system may be dam-
aged due to moisture entering
the system.
879
Maintenance
Fuse/relay panel description
Inside the fuse/relay panel covers,
you can find the fuse/relay label
describing fuse/relay name and
capacity.
✽✽
NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in
this manual may be applicable to
your vehicle. It is accurate at the
time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer
to the fuse panel label.
OPS073014
OPS076107N
Maintenance
808
Inner fuse panel
Description Fuse rating Protected component
POWER OUTLET 20A P_OUTLET
ACC 10A
O_S_MIRR_SW, AMP, AUDIO/UVO/AVN 4.0_HEAD UNIT, BCM, MOOD_LAMP_UNIT, SMK_UNIT,
LDC_AMP(400W), LDC_AMP(200W), ISG, USB_CHARGER, ICM_BOX(POWER_OUTLET_RLY_COIL),
E_CALL_UNIT
HEAD LAMP 25A C/LIGHT, REAR_P_OUTLET
DRL 10A BCM(DAY_RUNNNIG_LIGHT_LAMP_POWER)
MODULE 6 7.5A
SUNROOF_MOTOR, LUGGAGE_PORTABLE_LAMP(CHARGE_POWER), SEAT_EXTN_DRV(HEAT-
ED), REAR_SEAT(IGN2)
WIPER FRT 2 25A FRONT_WIPER_MOTOR(POWER), FRONT_WIPER_RLY(LOW)
WIPER RR 15A
REAR_WIPER_MOTOR, MULTI_FUNCTION_SW(WIPER), REAR_WIPER_RLY,
REAR_WIPER_RLY_COIL,
AMP 30A AMP, LDC_AMP(400W)
MODULE 5 7.5A BCM, SMK_UNIT
WIPER FRT 1 10A MULTI_FUNCTION_SW(WIPER), BCM(WASHER_MOTOR_POWER),
HEATED STEERING 15A STEERING_HEATED
A/CON 1 7.5A AIR_CONTROL_UNIT(MANUAL, AUTO), IONIZER, PTC_RLY_COIL, BLOWER_RLY_COIL
HEATED MIRROR 10A
OUTSIDE_MIRROR(HEATED), ECU(ELEC. LOAD DEFROST),
AIR_CONTROL_UNIT_MANUAL/AUTO(HEATED_SIGNAL)
881
Maintenance
Description Fuse rating Protected component
LIFTGATE OPEN 15A T/GATE_OPEN_RLY(T/GATE_LATCH_MOTOR), T/GATE_OPEN_RLY_COIL
S/HEATER FRT 20A FRONT_SEAT_EXTN(HEATED_POWER)
DR LOCK 20A
DOOR_LOCK_RLY, DOOR_LOCK_RLY_COIL, DOOR_UNLOCK_RLY_COIL, DEAD_LOCK_RLY,
DEAD_LOCK_RLY_COIL
A/BAG IND 7.5A CLUSTER
AIR BAG 15A ACU, WCS_ECU
MODULE 4 10A
POWER_OUTLET_EXTN, HLLD_SW, AUDIO/UVO/AVN4.0_HEAD_UNIT, E_CALL_UNIT,
I_S_MIRR_ECM, LDC_AMP(200W), LDC_AMP(200W), DIAGNOSIS, AUTO_HLLD_ECU,
AIR_CONTROL_UNIT(MANUAL, AUTO), SEAT_EXTN_DRV, REAR_SEAT_WARMER_SW,
REAR_SEAT_HEATER_UNIT
STOP LAMP 15A HAZARD_SW(ESS_INDICATOR_POWER), STOP_SIGNAL_ELECTRONIC_MODULE
MODULE 7 10A KEY_LOCK_SOLENOID, OBD_II(POWER)
S/HEATER RR 20A REAR_SEAT(HEATED_POWER)
P/WDW RH 25A FRONT_P/WINDOW_SW(POWER), P/WINDOW_SAFETY_ECU(POWER)
P/WDW LH 25A FRONT_P/WINDOW_SW(POWER), P/WINDOW_SAFETY_ECU(POWER)
MODULE 1 10A BCM, SPORTS_MODE_SW(ATM_SHIFT_LOCK_SOLENOID)
ABS 10A ABS/ESP_UNIT
MODULE 2 10A LOWER_SW, CENTER_SW, STOP_LP_SW, WATER_FUEL_SNSR
Maintenance
828
Description Fuse rating Protected component
MODULE 3 10A
HLLD_ACTR, TPMS_UNIT, BLIND_SPOT_DETECTOR, REAR_PARKING_ASSIST_SYSTEM_SNSR,
SMART_PARKING_ASSIST_SYSTEM_SNSR, SMART_PARKING_ASSIST_SYSTEM_UNIT,
LANE_DEPARTURE_WARNING_SYSTEM_UNIT, OIL_LEVEL_SNSR_EXTN
VACUUM PUMP 2 15A VACUUM_PUMP
ECU 7.5A
ENGINE_CONTROL_UNIT, AIR_FLOW_SNSR, START_RLY_COIL, SMK_UNIT, SMATRA_IMMOBI-
LIZATION, GLOW_UNIT
IOD 2 15A LDC_AMP(200W), AUDIO/UVO/AVN4.0_HEAD_UNIT
IOD 3 7.5A E_CALL_UNIT
AEB 15A AUTONOMOUS_EMERGENCY_BRAKING_UNIT
CLUSTER 10A CLUSTER
TCU 15A
SPEED_SNSR (MT), BACK_UP_LAMP_SW, OIL_PUMP_INVERTER, INHIBITOR,
TRANSMISSION_CONTROL_UNIT
IOD 4 7.5A
TPMS_UNIT(POWER), CLUSTER, AIR_CONTROL_UNIT(MANUAL, AUTO), BCM, REAR-
PARKING_ASSIST_SYSTEM_BUZZER, OUTSIDE_MIRROR_FOLDING_RLY,
OUTSIDE_MIRROR_FOLDING_RLY_COIL, OUTSIDE_MIRROR_UNFOLDING_RLY, OUTSIDE_MIR-
ROR_UNFOLDING_RLY_COIL, RAIN_SNSR
SPARE 10A -
SUNROOF 2 20A SUNROOF_MOTOR (POWER)
P/SEAT DRV 30A SEAT_EXTN_DRV(POWER)
SUNROOF 1 20A SUNROOF_MOTOR (POWER)
883
Maintenance
Description Fuse rating Protected component
MDPS 7.5A MDPS_UNIT
A/CON 2 7.5A AIR_CONTROL_UNIT_MANUAL(MAX_BLOWER), AIR_CONTROL_UNIT_AUTO(BLOWER_MOTOR)
START 7.5A E/R_FUSE & RELAY_BOX(RELAY - START / SUB START), PDM
IOD 1 7.5A
GLOVE_BOX_LAMP, DOOR_WARNING_SW, OVER_HEAD_CONSOLE_LAMP, PERSONAL_LAMP,
SUNVISOR_LAMP, LUGGAGE_LAMP, PORTABLE_LAMP(DOOR)
PDM 2 7.5A SMK_UNIT(BATT_CPU), SMATRA_IMMOBILIZATION(BATT)
P/SEAT PASS 30A SEAT_EXTN_PASS(POWER)
PDM 1 20A SMK_UNIT(POWER)
BRAKE SWITCH 10A STOP_LAMP_SW(NORMAL_OPEN), SMK_UNIT
Maintenance
848
Engine compartment fuse panel
✽✽
NOTICE
The actual fuse/relay panel label
may differ from equipped items.
OPS073013
OPS076106N
885
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel
Description Fuse rating Protected component
IG1 40A IGN_SW(B1), BUTTON_START_RLY(IG1), BUTTON_START_RLY(ACC)
BLOWER 40A BLOWER_RLY, BLOWER_MOTOR
REAR HEATED 40A REAR_GLASS_HEATED_RLY, REAR_GLASS_HEATED_RLY_COIL
ECU 2 30A MAIN_RLY, MAIN_RLY_COIL
ECU 3 15A ECU(AFTER_AIN_RELAY)
IGN COIL 20A IGNITION_COIL(POWER)
ECU 1 20A ECU(AFTER_MAIN_RELAY)
SENSOR 1 10A
STOP_LAMP_SW(NORMAL_CLOSE), O2_SNSR, PURGE_CONTROL_SOLENOID_VALVE, OCV,
PCSV, VIS, CAM_P_SNSR, CAM POSITION SENSOR, VGT_VACCUM
SENSOR 2 10A
CMP, COOLING_FAN_LOW_RLY_COIL, AIR_FLAP_SNSR, VIS , EGR_VALVE, O2_SNSR,
LAMBDA_SNSR, WGV, EGR_ACTUATOR
INJECTOR 10A -
B/UP LAMP 10A RR_COMBI_LAMP(BACK_UP_LAMP)
WIPER 10A ECU(WIPER_SWITCH)
FUEL PUMP 15A FUEL_PUMP_MOTOR
HORN 15A HORN_RLY, HORN_RLY_COIL, HORN
TCU4 15A TRANSMISSION_CONTROL_UNIT
A/CON 10A A/CON_RLY
Maintenance
868
Description Fuse rating Protected component
H/LAMP WASHER 20A HEAD_LAMP_WASHER_RLY, HEAD_LAMP_WASHER_RLY_COIL, HEAD_LAMP_WASHER_MOTOR
POWER OUTLET 4 20A P_OUTLET
B+ 1 50A SMART_JUNCTION_BLOCK(B+1)
B+ 2 50A SMART_JUNCTION_BLOCK(B+2)
TCU 3 30A TRANSMISSION_CONTROL_UNIT
B+ 3 50A SMART_JUNCTION_BLOCK(B+3)
IG2 40A IGN_SW(IG2), BUTTON_START_RLY(IG2), START_RLY
MDPS 80A MDPS_UNIT
ALT (GAMMA) 125A
ALTERNATOR
ALT (NU) 180A
TCU 20A TRANSMISSION_CONTROL_UNIT
DEICER 20A DEICER
ECU 4 15A ECU(BATT_DIRECT)
ECU 5 15A ECU(BATT_DIRECT)
POWER OUTLET 3 20A P_OUTLET
VACUUM PUMP 1 30A VACUUM_PUMP
887
Maintenance
Description Fuse rating Protected component
COOLING FAN
40A (*/**)
60A (***)
COOLING_FAN_MOTOR, SUB_FUEL_PUMP, SUB_FUEL_VALVE, COOLING_FAN_PWM_MOTOR
INVERTER (**)
TCU2 (*/****)
50A OIL_PUMP_INVERTER, TRANSMISSION_CONTROL_UNIT
ABS 1 40A ABS/ESP_UNIT(MOTOR)
ABS 2 30A ABS/ESP_UNIT(SOLENOID)
Maintenance
888
LIGHT BULBS
Bulb replacement precaution
Please keep extra bulbs on hand
with appropriate wattage ratings in
case of emergencies.
Refer to “Bulb Wattage” in chapter 9.
When changing lamps, first turn off
the engine at a safe place, firmly
apply the parking brake and detach
the battery’s negative (-) terminal.
Use only bulbs of the specified
wattage.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If the light bulb or lamp connector
is removed while the lamp is still
on, the fuse box's electronic sys-
tem may log it as a malfunction.
Therefore, a lamp malfunction
incident may be recorded as a
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in
the fuse box.
• It is normal for an operating lamp
to flicker momentarily. This is due
to a stabilization function of the
vehicle’s electronic control device.
If the lamp lights up normally
after momentarily blinking, then
it is functioning as normal.
However, if the lamp continues to
flicker several times or turns off
completely, there may be an error
in the vehicle’s electronic control
device. Please have the vehicle
checked by an authorized Kia
dealer immediately.
WARNING - Working on
the lights
Prior to working on the light,
firmly apply the parking brake,
ensure that the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position
and turn off the lights to avoid
sudden movement of the vehi-
cle and burning your fingers or
receiving an electric shock.
CAUTION - Light replace-
ment
Be sure to replace the burned-
out bulb with one of the same
wattage rating. Otherwise, it
may cause damage to the fuse
or electric wiring system.
CAUTION - Headlamp
Lens
To prevent damage, do not
clean the headlamp lens with
chemical solvents or strong
detergents.
889
Maintenance
If you don’t have the necessary tools,
the correct bulbs and the expertise,
consult an authorized Kia dealer. In
many cases, it is difficult to replace
vehicle light bulbs because other
parts of the vehicle must be removed
before you can get to the bulb.This is
especially true if you have to remove
the headlamp assembly to get to the
bulb(s).
Removing/installing the headlamp
assembly can result in damage to
the vehicle.
If non-genuine parts or substandard
bulbs are used, it may lead to blow-
ing a fuse or other wiring damages.
Do not install extra lamps or LEDs to
the vehicle. If additional lights are
installed, it may lead to lamp mal-
functions and flickering. Additionally,
the fuse box and other writing may
be damaged.
Light bulb position (Front)
(1) Front turn signal lamp
(2) Headlamp (Low/High)
(3) Side marker
(4) Headlamp (High)
(5) Headlamp (Low)
(6) Position lamp (LED Type)
(7) Position lamp/Daytime running
lamp (LED Type)
(8) Front fog lamp
■ Type B
■ Type A
OPS076021N
OPS076020N
■ Type C
OPS076134N
Maintenance
908
Light bulb position (Rear)
(1) Tail lamp (Bulb type)
(2) Tail and stop lamp (Bulb type)
(3) Rear turn signal lamp
(4) Back-up lamp
(5) Tail lamp (Bulb type)
(6) Tail and stop lamp (LED type)
Headlamp (HID type) bulb
replacement
If the light bulb does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
HID lamps have superior perform-
ance vs. halogen bulbs. HID lamps
are estimated by the manufacturer to
last twice as long or longer than halo-
gen bulbs depending on their fre-
quency of use. They will probably
require replacement at some point in
the life of the vehicle. Cycling the
headlamps on and off more than typ-
ical use will shorten HID lamps life.
HID lamps do not fail in the same
manner as halogen incandescent
lamps. If a headlamp goes out after a
period of operation but will immedi-
ately relight when the headlamp
switch is cycled it is likely the HID
lamp needs to be replaced. HID
lamping components are more com-
plex than conventional halogen bulbs
thus have higher replacement cost.
OPS076030L
OPS076029L
■ Type A
■ Type B
WARNING - HID
Headlamp (if equipped)
Do not attempt to replace or
inspect the HID headlamp
(XENON bulb) due to electric
shock danger. If the light bulb
does not operate, have your
vehicle checked by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
891
Maintenance
Headlamp (Low/High beam)
bulb replacement
1.Turn off the engine and open the
hood. Disconnect the negative
battery cable.
2. Disconnect the power connector
front the back of the headlamp
assembly.
3. Loosen the retaining bolts.
4.Pull out the end of the front
bumper.
5. Remove the headlamp assembly
from the body of the vehicle.
❈ If you can reach the bulb without
removing the headlamp assembly,
you do not need to do step 3,4 and
5.
OPS073051
OPS076028L
OPS076046L
Maintenance
928
6. Remove the headlamp bulb cover
by turning it counterclockwise.
7.Disconnect the headlamp bulb
socket-connector.
8. Unsnap the headlamp bulb retain-
ing wire by depressing the end
and pushing it upward.
9. Remove the bulb from the head-
lamp assembly.
10. Install a new headlamp bulb and
snap the headlamp bulb retaining
wire into position by aligning the
wire with the groove on the bulb.
11. Connect the headlamp bulb
socket connector.
12. Install the headlamp bulb cover
by turning it clockwise.
13. Connect the power connector to
the back of the headlamp assem-
bly.
14. Reinstall the headlamp assembly
to the body of the vehicle.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the headlamp aiming adjustment
is necessary after the headlamp
assembly is reinstalled, we recom-
mend that you consult an authorized
Kia dealer.
Headlamp bulb
OPS073047
OPS073023
WARNING - Halogen
bulbs
Handle halogen bulbs with care.
• Halogen bulbs contain pres-
surized gas that will produce
flying pieces of glass if bro-
ken.
OHD076046
893
Maintenance
• Always handle them carefully, and
avoid scratches and abrasions. If
the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with
liquids. Never touch the glass with
bare hands. Residual oil may
cause the bulb to overheat and
burst when lit. A bulb should be
operated only when installed in a
headlamp.
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediately
and carefully dispose of it.
• Wear eye protection when chang-
ing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool
down before handling it.
Front turn signal lamp bulb
replacement
1.Turn off the engine and open the
hood. Disconnect the negative
battery cable.
2. Disconnect the power connector
front the back of the headlamp
assembly.
3. Loosen the retaining bolts.
OPS073051
OPS076028L
Maintenance
948
■ Type B
■ Type A
OPS073049
OPS073024
■ Type C
OPS076125L
4.Pull out the end of the front
bumper.
5. Remove the headlamp assembly
from the body of the vehicle.
❈ If you can reach the bulb without
removing the headlamp assembly,
you do not need to do step 3,4 and
5.
6.Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
7. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket.
8. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
9. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly and
turning the socket clockwise.
10. Reinstall the lamp assembly to
the body of the vehicle.
OPS076046L
895
Maintenance
Front side marker bulb
replacement
1.Turn off the engine and open the
hood. Disconnect the negative
battery cable.
2. Disconnect the power connector
front the back of the headlamp
assembly.
3. Loosen the retaining bolts.
4.Pull out the end of the front
bumper.
5. Remove the headlamp assembly
from the body of the vehicle.
❈ If you can reach the bulb without
removing the headlamp assembly,
you do not need to do step 3,4 and
5.
OPS073051
OPS076028L
OPS076046L
Maintenance
968
6.Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
7. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
8. Insert a new bulb into the socket.
9. Install the socket into the assem-
bly by aligning the tabs on the
socket with the slots on the
assembly and turning the socket
clockwise.
10. Reinstall the lamp assembly to
the body of the vehicle.
Position lamp + DRL (LED
type) bulb replacement
If the position lamp + DRL (1) does
not operate, we recommend that you
checked an authorized Kia dealer.
Front fog lamp bulb replace-
ment
1. Remove the front bumper under
cover.
2. Reach your hand into the back of
the front bumper.
OPS073025
OPS076028L
OPS073027
OPS076127L
897
Maintenance
3. Disconnect the power connector
from the socket.
4. Remove the bulb-socket from the
housing by turning the socket
counter clockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the housing.
5. Install the new bulb-socket into the
housing by aligning the tabs on
the socket with the slots in the
housing. Push the socket into the
housing and turn the socket clock
wise.
6. Connect the power connector to
the socket.
7. Reinstall the front bumper under
cover.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the fog lamp aiming adjustment is
necessary after the fog lamp assem-
bly is reinstalled, we recommend that
you consult an authorized Kia dealer.
Side repeater lamp (LED type)
bulb replacement
If the Side repeater lamp (LED type)
does not operate, we recommend
that you checked an authorized Kia
dealer.
OPS073035
Maintenance
988
Rear turn signal lamp bulb
replacement
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Loosen the lamp assembly retain-
ing screws with a screwdriver.
3.Remove the rear combination
lamp assembly from the body of
the vehicle.
4.Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
5. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket.
6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
7. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly and
turning the socket clockwise.
8. Reinstall the lamp assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
OPS073031
OPS076032L
OPS073034
■ Type A
■ Type B
899
Maintenance
Stop and tail lamp bulb
replacement
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Loosen the lamp assembly retain-
ing screws with a screwdriver.
3.Remove the rear combination
lamp assembly from the body of
the vehicle.
4.Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
5. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket.
6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
7. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly and
turning the socket clockwise.
8. Reinstall the lamp assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
OPS073031
OPS076128L
Maintenance
1008
Back-up lamp bulb replace-
ment
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Loosen the lamp assembly retain-
ing screws with a screwdriver.
3.Remove the rear combination
lamp assembly from the body of
the vehicle.
4.Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
5. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
6. Insert a new bulb into the socket.
7. Install the socket into the assem-
bly by aligning the tabs on the
socket with the slots on the
assembly and turning the socket
clockwise.
8. Reinstall the lamp assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
OPS073031
OPS073032L
OPS073045
■ Type A
■ Type B
8101
Maintenance
Stop and tail lamp (LED type)
bulb replacement
If the Stop and tail lamp (LED type)
(1) does not operate, we recommend
that you checked an authorized Kia
dealer.
High mounted stop lamp bulb
replacement
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Loosen the retaining bolts and
remove the hose (1).
4. Pull out the module from the high
mounted stop lamp assembly by
pulling both clips.
5. Replace the bulbs by pulling it out.
6. Reinstall in the reverse order.
OPS076129L
OPS073036
OPS076052L
OPS073037
OPS073038
Maintenance
1028
High mounted stop lamp (LED
type) bulb replacement
If the High mounted stop lamp (LED
type) (1) does not operate, we rec-
ommend that you checked an
authorized Kia dealer.
License plate lamp bulb
replacement
1. Remove the lens by pressing the
tabs.
2. Remove the socket from the lens.
3. Remove the bulb by turning it
counter clockwise.
4. Install a new bulb in the socket
and install the socket to the lens.
5. Reinstall the lens securely.
Map lamp bulb replacement
OPS076130L OPS073050
OPS073041
WARNING - Interior lamps
Prior to working on the Interior
lamps, ensure that the “OFF”
button is depressed to avoid
burning your fingers or receiv-
ing an electric shock.
8103
Maintenance
1.Using a flat-blade screwdriver,
gently pry the lens cover from
lamp housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens cover tabs with the
lamp housing notches and snap
the lens into place.
Room lamp bulb replacement
1.Using a flat-blade screwdriver,
gently pry the lens cover from
lamp housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens cover tabs with the
lamp housing notches and snap
the lens into place.
CAUTION
Be careful not to dirty or dam-
age the lens, lens tab, and plas-
tic housings.
CAUTION
Be careful not to dirty or dam-
age the lens, lens tab, and plas-
tic housings.
OPS073042
WARNING - Interior lamps
Prior to working on the Interior
lamps, ensure that the “OFF”
button is depressed to avoid
burning your fingers or receiv-
ing an electric shock.
Maintenance
1048
Glove box lamp bulb replace-
ment
1.Using a flat-blade screwdriver,
gently pry the lamp assembly from
interior.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Install the lamp assembly to interior.
Luggage lamp bulb replace-
ment
1.Using a flat-blade screwdriver,
gently pry the lamp assembly from
interior.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Install the lamp assembly to interior.
OPS073043
CAUTION
Be careful not to dirty or dam-
age the lens, lens tab, and plas-
tic housings.
OPS073044
8105
Maintenance
Vanity mirror lamp bulb
replacement
1.Using a flat-blade screwdriver,
gently pry the lamp assembly from
interior.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Install the lamp assembly to interior.
CAUTION
Be careful not to dirty or dam-
age the lens, lens tab, and plas-
tic housings.
CAUTION
Be careful not to dirty or dam-
age the lens, lens tab, and plas-
tic housings.
OXM079041
WARNING - Interior lamps
Prior to working on the Interior
lamps, ensure that the “OFF”
button is depressed to avoid
burning your fingers or receiv-
ing an electric shock.
Maintenance
1068
APPEARANCE CARE
Exterior care
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning
and caution statements that appear
on the label.
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish
from rust and deterioration, wash it
thoroughly and frequently at least once
a month with lukewarm or cold water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road
driving, you should wash it after each
off-road trip. Pay special attention to
the removal of any accumulation of
salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign mate-
rials. Make sure the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors and rocker
panels are kept clear and clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar
deposits can damage your vehicle’s
finish if not removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain water
may not completely remove all these
deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on
painted surfaces, may be used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-
oughly with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not allow soap to dry on the finish.
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes while driving slowly to see if
they have been affected by water. If
braking performance is impaired, dry
the brakes by applying them lightly
while maintaining a slow forward
speed.
CAUTION
• Do not use strong soap, chem-
ical detergents or hot water,
and do not wash the vehicle in
direct sunlight or when the
body of the vehicle is warm.
• Be careful when washing the
side windows of your vehicle.
Especially, with high-pressure
water.Water may leak through
the windows and wet the inte-
rior.
• To prevent damage to the
plastic parts and lamps, do
not clean with chemical sol-
vents or strong detergents.
8107
Maintenance
High-pressure washing
• When using high-pressure wash-
ers, make sure to maintain suffi-
cient distance from the vehicle.
Insufficient clearance or excessive
pressure can lead to component
damage or water penetration.
• Do not spray the camera, sensors
or its surrounding area directly with
a high pressure washer. Shock
applied from high pressure water
may cause the device to not oper-
ate normally.
• Do not bring the nozzle tip close to
boots (rubber or plastic covers) or
connectors as they may be dam-
aged if they come into contact with
high pressure water.
Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle
before waxing. Use a good quality
liquid or paste wax, and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all
metal trim to protect it and to main-
tain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materi-
als with a spot remover will usually
strip the wax from the finish. Be sure
to re-wax these areas even if the rest
of the vehicle does not yet need wax-
ing.
✽✽
NOTICE
Do not apply wax on embossed
unpainted unit, as it may tarnish the
unit.
CAUTION - Wetting engine
• Water washing in the engine
compartment including high
pressure water washing may
cause the failure of electrical
circuits located in the engine
compartment.
• Never allow water or other liq-
uids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as
this may damage them.
OJB037800
Maintenance
1088
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly
rust and may develop into a major
repair expense.
✽✽
NOTICE
If your vehicle is damaged and
requires any metal repair or
replacement, be sure the body shop
applies anti-corrosion materials to
the parts repaired or replaced.
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects,
use a tar remover, not a scraper or
other sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-
metal parts from corrosion, apply a
coating of wax or chrome preser-
vative and rub to a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts
with a heavier coating of wax or
preservative. If necessary, coat the
parts with non-corrosive petroleum
jelly or other protective compound.
Underbody maintenance
Road salt and other corrosive chemi-
cals are used in cold weather states to
melt snow and prevent ice accumula-
tion. If these chemicals are not regu-
larly removed, they will corrode the
vehicle underbody and over time dam-
age fuel lines, the fuel tank retention
system, the vehicle suspension, the
exhaust system, and even the body
frame. The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration has warned all
vehicle owners of all brands of the
need to take the following steps:
• Wash the undercarriage of your
vehicle regularly during the winter
and whenever your vehicle has
been exposed to such salts or
chemicals.
• Do a thorough washing of the
undercarriage at the end of the
winter.
• Use professional service techni-
cians or governmental inspection
stations to annually inspect for cor-
rosion.
CAUTION - Drying vehicle
• Wiping dust or dirt off the
body with a dry cloth will
scratch the finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abra-
sive cleaners, acid detergents
or strong detergents contain-
ing high alkaline or caustic
agents on chrome-plated or
anodized aluminum parts.
This may result in damage to
the protective coating and
cause discoloration or paint
deterioration.
8109
Maintenance
• Immediately seek an inspection of
your vehicle if you become visually
aware of corrosion flaking or scal-
ing or if you become aware of a
change in vehicle performance,
such as soft or spongey brakes,
fluids leaking, impairment of direc-
tional control, suspension noises
or rattling metal straps.
Aluminum wheel maintenance
The aluminum wheels are coated
with a clear protective finish.
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner,
polishing compound, solvent, or
wire brushes on aluminum wheels.
They may scratch the finish.
• Clean the wheel when it has
cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral
detergent, and rinse thoroughly with
water. Also, be sure to clean the
wheels after driving on salted roads.
This helps prevent corrosion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with
highspeed vehicle wash brushes.
• Do not use any alkaline or acid
detergents It may damage and cor-
rode the aluminum wheels coated
with a clear protective finish.
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corro-
sion
By using the most advanced design
and construction practices to combat
corrosion, we produce vehicles of
the highest quality. However, this is
only part of the job. To achieve the
long-term corrosion resistance your
vehicle can deliver, the owner's
cooperation and assistance is also
required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corro-
sion on your vehicle are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath
the vehicle.
• Removal of paint or protective
coatings by stones, gravel, abra-
sion or minor scrapes and dents
which leave unprotected metal
exposed to corrosion.
WARNING
After washing the vehicle, test
the brakes while driving slowly
to see if they have been affected
by water. If braking performance
is impaired, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly while main-
taining a slow forward speed.
Maintenance
1108
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your vehi-
cle is regularly exposed to corrosive
materials, corrosion protection is
particularly important. Some of the
common causes of accelerated cor-
rosion are road salts, dust control
chemicals, ocean air and industrial
pollution.
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in
which corrosion is most likely to
occur. For example, corrosion is
accelerated by high humidity, partic-
ularly when temperatures are just
above freezing. In such conditions,
the corrosive material is kept in con-
tact with the vehicle’s surface by
moisture that evaporates slowly.
Mud is particularly corrosive
because it dries slowly and holds
moisture in contact with the vehicle.
Although the mud appears to be dry,
it can still retain the moisture and
promote corrosion.
High temperatures can also acceler-
ate corrosion of parts that are not
properly ventilated so the moisture
can be dispersed. For all these rea-
sons, it is particularly important to
keep your vehicle clean and free of
mud or accumulations of other mate-
rials.This applies not only to the vis-
ible surfaces but particularly to the
underside of the vehicle.
To help prevent corrosion
You can help prevent corrosion from
beginning by observing the following:
Keep your vehicle clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is
to keep your vehicle clean and free
of corrosive materials. Attention to
the underside of the vehicle is partic-
ularly important.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area
— where road salts are used, near
the ocean, areas with industrial
pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you
should take extra care to prevent
corrosion. In winter, hose off the
underside of your vehicle at least
once a month and be sure to clean
the underside thoroughly when
winter is over.
• When cleaning underneath the
vehicle, give particular attention to
the components under the fenders
and other areas that are hidden
from view. Do a thorough job; just
dampening the accumulated mud
rather than washing it away will
accelerate corrosion rather than
prevent it. Water under high pres-
sure and steam are particularly
effective in removing accumulated
mud and corrosive materials.
8111
Maintenance
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members,
be sure that drain holes are kept
open so that moisture can escape
and not be trapped inside to accel-
erate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry
Don't park your vehicle in a damp,
poorly ventilated garage. This cre-
ates a favorable environment for cor-
rosion. This is particularly true if you
wash your vehicle in the garage or
drive it into the garage when it is still
wet or covered with snow, ice or
mud.Even a heated garage can con-
tribute to corrosion unless it is well
ventilated so moisture is dispersed.
Keep paint and trim in good con-
dition
Scratches or chips in the finish
should be covered with "touch-up"
paint as soon as possible to reduce
the possibility of corrosion. If bare
metal is showing through, the atten-
tion of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are
highly corrosive and may damage
painted surfaces in just a few hours.
Always remove bird droppings as
soon as possible.
Don't neglect the interior
Moisture can collect under the floor
mats and carpeting and cause corro-
sion. Check under the mats periodi-
cally to be sure the carpeting is dry.
Use particular care if you carry fertil-
izers, cleaning materials or chemi-
cals in the vehicle.
These should be carried only in prop-
er containers and any spills or leaks
should be cleaned up, flushed with
clean water and thoroughly dried.
Interior care
Interior general precautions
Prevent chemicals such as perfume,
cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand clean-
er, and air freshener from contacting
the interior parts because they may
cause damage or discoloration. If
they do contact the interior parts,
wipe them off immediately. If neces-
sary, use a vinyl cleaner, see product
instructions for correct usage.
Maintenance
1128
Cleaning the upholstery and inte-
rior trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from
vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a
vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fab-
ric with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solu-
tion recommended for upholstery or
carpets. Remove fresh spots imme-
diately with a fabric spot cleaner. If
fresh spots do not receive immediate
attention, the fabric can be stained
and its color can be affected.Also, its
fire-resistant properties can be
reduced if the material is not proper-
ly maintained.
Using anything but recommended
cleaners and procedures may affect
the fabric’s appearance and fire-
resistant properties.
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt
webbing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for
cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow
the instructions provided with the
soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the
webbing because this may weaken
it.
Cleaning the interior window glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the
vehicle become fogged (that is, cov-
ered with an oily, greasy or waxy
film), they should be cleaned with a
glass cleaner. Follow the directions
on the glass cleaner container.
CAUTION - Electrical
components
Never allow water or other liq-
uids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as this
may damage them.
CAUTION - Leather
When cleaning leather products
(steering wheel, seats etc.), use
neutral detergents or low alco-
hol content solutions. If you use
high alcohol content solutions
or acid/alkaline detergents, the
color of the leather may fade or
the surface may get stripped off.
CAUTION - Rear window
Do not scrape or scratch the
inside of the rear window. This
may result in damage of the rear
window defroster grid.
8113
Maintenance
Taking care of leather seats
• Vacuum the seat periodically to
remove dust and sand on the seat.
It will prevent abrasion or damage of
the leather and maintain its quality.
• Wipe the natural leather seat cover
often with dry or soft cloth.
• Sufficient use of a leather protec-
tive may prevent abrasion of the
cover and helps maintain the color.
Be sure to read the instructions
and consult a specialist when
using leather coating or protective
agents.
• Leather with bright colors(beige,
cream beige) is easily contaminat-
ed and clear in appearance. Clean
the seats frequently.
• Avoid wiping with wet cloth. It may
cause the surface to crack.
Cleaning the leather seats
• Remove all contaminations instant-
ly. Refer to instructions below for
removal of each contaminant.
• Cosmetic products(sunscreen,
foundation, etc.)
- Apply cleansing cream on a cloth
and wipe the contaminated point.
Wipe off the cream with a wet
cloth and remove water with a dry
cloth.
• Beverages(coffee, soft drink, etc.)
- Apply a small amount of neutral
detergent and wipe until contami-
nations do not smear.
• Oil
- Remove oil instantly with
absorbable cloth and wipe with
stain remover for natural leather
only.
• Chewing gum
- Harden the gum with ice and
remove gradually.
Fabric seat cover (If equipped)
Please clean the fabric seats regu-
larly with a vacuum cleaner in con-
sideration of fabric material charac-
teristics. If they are heavily soiled
with beverage stains, etc., use a suit-
able interior cleaner.To prevent dam-
age to seat covers, wipe off the seat
covers down to the seams with a
large wiping motion and moderate
pressure using a soft sponge or
microfiber cloth.
Velcro closures on clothing or sharp
objects may cause snagging or
scratches on the surface of the
seats. Make sure not to rub such
objects against the surface.
Maintenance
1148
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty
information contained in the
Warranty & Maintenance booklet in
your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emission control system to meet all
applicable emission regulations.
There are three emission control
systems, as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control sys-
tem
(2) Evaporative emission control sys-
tem
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function
of the emission control systems, it is
recommended that you have your
vehicle inspected and maintained by
an authorized Kia dealer in accor-
dance with the maintenance sched-
ule in this manual.
Caution for the Inspection and
Maintenance Test (With Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from mis-
firing during dynamometer test-
ing, turn the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system off by
pressing the ESC switch.
• After dynamometer testing is
completed, turn the ESC system
back on by pressing the ESC
switch again.
1. Crankcase emission control
system
The positive crankcase ventilation
system is employed to prevent air
pollution caused by blow-by gases
being emitted from the crankcase.
This system supplies fresh filtered air
to the crankcase through the air
intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by
gases, which then pass through the
PCV valve into the induction system.
2. Evaporative emission con-
trol (including ORVR:
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery)
system
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
vapors from escaping into the atmos-
phere.
(The ORVR system is designed to
allow the vapors from the fuel tank to
be loaded into a canister while refu-
eling at the gas station, preventing
the escape of fuel vapors into the
atmosphere.)
8115
Maintenance
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister.When the engine is
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in
the canister are drawn into the surge
tank through the purge control sole-
noid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve
(PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is
controlled by the Engine Control
Module (ECM); when the engine
coolant temperature is low during
idling, the PCSV closes so that evap-
orated fuel is not taken into the
engine. After the engine warms up
during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to
the engine.
3. Exhaust emission control
system
The Exhaust Emission Control
System is a highly effective system
which controls exhaust emissions
while maintaining good vehicle per-
formance.
Vehicle modifications
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification of your vehicle could
affect its performance, safety or
durability and may even violate gov-
ernmental safety and emissions reg-
ulations.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modifi-
cation may not be covered under
warranty.
• If you use unauthorized electronic
devices, it may cause the vehicle to
operate abnormally, wire damage,
battery discharge and fire.For your
safety, do not use unauthorized
electronic devices.
Engine exhaust gas precautions
(carbon monoxide)
• Carbon monoxide can be present
with other exhaust fumes.
Therefore, if you smell exhaust
fumes of any kind inside your vehi-
cle, have it inspected and repaired
immediately. If you ever suspect
exhaust fumes are coming into
your vehicle, drive it only with all
the windows fully open. Have your
vehicle checked and repaired
immediately.
WARNING - Exhaust
Engine exhaust gases contain
carbon monoxide (CO). Though
colorless and odorless, it is
dangerous and could be lethal if
inhaled. Follow the instructions
on this page to avoid CO poi-
soning.
Maintenance
1168
• Do not operate the engine in con-
fined or closed areas (such as
garages) any more than what is
necessary to move the vehicle in or
out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short
time with the engine running,
adjust the ventilation system (as
needed) to draw outside air into the
vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped
vehicle for any extended time with
the engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to
start, excessive attempts to restart
the engine may cause damage to
the emission control system.
Operating precautions for catalyt-
ic converters
WARNING - Catalytic
converter
Keep away from the catalytic
converter and exhaust system
while the vehicle is running or
immediately thereafter. The
exhaust and catalytic systems
are very hot and may burn you.
WARNING - Fire
• Do not park, idle or drive the
vehicle over or near flamma-
ble objects, such as grass,
vegetation, paper, leaves, etc.
A hot exhaust system can
ignite flammable items under
your vehicle.
• Also, do not remove the heat
sink around the exhaust sys-
tem, do not seal the bottom of
the vehicle or do not coat the
vehicle for corrosion control.
It may present a fire risk under
certain conditions.
8117
Maintenance
Your vehicle is equipped with a cat-
alytic converter emission control
device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for
gasoline engines.
• Do not operate the vehicle when
there are signs of engine malfunc-
tion, such as misfire or a noticeable
loss of performance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the
engine. Examples of misuse are
coasting with the ignition off and
descending steep grades in gear
with the ignition off.
• Do not operate the engine at high
idle speed for extended periods (5
minutes or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any
part of the engine or emission con-
trol system. All inspections and
adjustments must be made by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Avoid driving with a extremely low
fuel level.Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, dam-
aging the catalytic converter.
Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalyt-
ic converter and to your vehicle.
Additionally, such actions could void
your warranties.
Perchlorate Material-special handling
may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/haz-
ardouswaste/ perchlorate.
Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers:
Perchlorate containing materials,
such as air bag inflators, seatbelt
pretensioners and keyless remote
entry batteries, must be disposed of
according to Title 22 California Code
of Regulations Section 67384.10 (a).
CALIFORNIA
PERCHLORATE NOTICE
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Tires and wheels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Capacity/weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Air conditioning system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Recommended lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . 9-7
• Recommended sae viscosity number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Vehicle certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Refrigerant label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Consumer assistance (U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Electrical equipment (U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Reporting safety defects (U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Online factory authorized manuals
(U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
9
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
29
DIMENSIONS
Item in (mm)
Overall length
162.9 (4,140)
Overall width
70.9 (1,800)
Overall height
Without Roof rack
205/60R16 63.0 (1,600)
215/55R17 63.3 (1,607)
235/45R18 63.5 (1,613)
With Roof rack
205/60R16 63.4 (1,612)
215/55R17 63.7 (1,619)
235/45R18 64.0 (1,625)
Tread
Front
205/60R16 62.1 (1,576)
215/55R17 61.7 (1,568)
235/45R18 61.4 (1,560)
Rear
205/60R16 62.5 (1,588)
215/55R17 62.2 (1,580)
235/45R18 61.9 (1,573)
Wheelbase
101.2 (2,570)
93
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
ENGINE
Item 1.6L GDI/T-GDI 2.0L GDI
Displacement
cu. in (cc)
97.1 (1,591) 121.9 (1,999)
Bore x Stroke
in. (mm)
3.03x3.36 (77x85.44) 3.19x3.81 (81x97)
Firing order 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2
No. of cylinders 4. In-line 4. In-line
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
49
BULB WATTAGE
* If equipped
Light Bulb Wattage Bulb type
Front
Headlamps (Low/High) 55/60 H13
Headlamps (Low) 55 H7SLL
Headlamps (Low)-HID type* 35 D3S
Headlamps (High) 55 H7LL
Front turn signal lamps 28 PY28/8W
Front position lamps 8 (Opt : LED) PY28/8W (Opt : LED)
Front fog lamps* 35 H8L
Front side marker 5 W5W
Side Repeater lamps (Outside Mirror)* LED LED
Rear
Bulb Type
Rear Stop/Tail lamps (Bottom) 28/8 P28/8W
Rear tail lamps (Mid) 5 W5W
Rear tail lamps & side marker (Top) 5 W5W
LED Type
Rear Stop lamps LED LED
Rear Tail lamps & side marker LED LED
Rear turn signal lamps 27 PY27W
Back-up lamps 16 W16W
High mounted stop lamps 5 (Opt :LED*) W5W (Opt : LED*)
License plate lamps 5 W5W
Interior
Map lamps 8 FESTOON
Room lamps 8 FESTOON
Personal lamps LED LED
Vanity mirror lamps 5 FESTOON
Glove box lamps 5 FESTOON
Luggage lamp 8 FESTOON
95
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
TIRES AND WHEELS
Item Tire size Wheel sizee
Inflation pressure bar psi (kPa)
Wheel lug nut torque
lbf•ft, N•mk (g•m)
Normal load
()
Maximum load
()
Front Rear Front Rear
Full size tire
205/60R16 6.5JX16
33 (230) 33 (230) 33 (230) 33 (230)
79~94
(11~13, 107~127)
215/55R17 6.5JX17
235/45R18 7.5JX18
Compact spare tire
(if equipped)
T125/80D16 4.0TX16 60 (420) 60 (420) 60 (420) 60 (420)
CAUTION
When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.
Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or make it work irregularly.
✽✽
NOTICE
• We recommend that when replacing tires, use the same originally supplied with the vehicles.
If not, that effects driving performance.
• When driving in high altitude grades, it is natural for the atmospheric pressure to decrease.
Therefore, please check the tire pressure and add more air when necessary.
Additionally required tire air pressure per km above sea level: 1.5psi/km
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
69
CAPACITY/WEIGHT
Item
1.6 GDI 1.6 T-GDI 2.0 GDI
M/T A/T DCT A/T
Gross vehicle weight
lbs. (kg)
3,836 (1,740) 3,902 (1,770) 4,167 (1,890) 4,100 (1,860)
Luggage volume (SAE)
cu ft (l)
Min : 24.2 (686)
Max : 61.3 (1,735)
Min : Back seat upright without luggage under tray
Max : Back seat folded without luggage under tray
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
Item Weight of volume Classification
Refrigerant
550g R-134a
Compressor lubricant
110g FD46XG (IDEMITSU)
We recommend that you contact an authorized Kia dealer for more details.
97
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.
The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
*
1
Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
*
2
Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute
to fuel economy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements
are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*
3
If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.
Lubricant Volume Classification
Engine oil *
1
*
2
(drain and refill)
recommended
(or equivalent)
1.6 L T-GDI
4.75 US qt. (4.5 l)
ILSAC GF-5 or above APISN or above
ACEA A5 or above
1.6 L GDI
3.80 US qt. (3.6 l)
2.0 L GDI
4.23 US qt. (4.0 l)
Manual transaxle fluid 1.6 L GDI/T-GDI
1.7 ~ 1.8 US qt.
(1.6 l ~1.7 l)
SAE 70W API-GL 4
HK MTF 70W
SPIRAX S6 GHME 70W
GS MTF HD 70W
Automatic transaxle fluid
1.6 L GDI/T-GDI
7.08 US qt. (6.7 l)
ATF SP-IV (Recommended Kia genuine,
Michang, SK, NOCA, S-OIL)
or other brands meeting the
above specification approved by Kia motors corp.
2.0 L GDI
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
89
Lubricant Volume Classification
Dual clutch transmission
fluid
1.6 L T-GDI
2.0 ~ 2.1 US qt.
(1.9 l ~ 2.0 l)
SAE 70W API GL-4,
HK SYN DCTF 70W,
SPIRAX S6 GHME 70W ECTF,
GS DCTF HD 70W
Coolant
1.6 L GDI
M/T
5.39 US qt. (5.1 l)
Mixture of antifreeze and distilled water
(Ethylene-glycol with phosphate based
coolant for cooling device)
A/T
5.29 US qt. (5.0 l)
1.6 L T-GDI DCT
6.34 US qt.(6.0 l)
2.0 L GDI A/T
5.29 US qt. (5.0 l)
Brake/Clutch fluid
0.7 ~ 0.8 US qt.
(0.7~0.8 l)
FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Fuel
14.26 US gal. (54 l)
Refer to “Fuel requirements” in chapter 1
99
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has
an effect on fuel economy and cold
weather operating (engine start and
engine oil flowability). Lower viscosi-
ty engine oils can provide better fuel
economy and cold weather perform-
ance, however, higher viscosity
engine oils are required for satisfac-
tory lubrication in hot weather.
Using oils of any viscosity other than
those recommended could result in
engine damage.
When choosing an oil, consider the
range of temperature your vehicle
will be operated in before the next oil
change. Proceed to select the rec-
ommended oil viscosity from the
chart.
*
1
: An engine oil displaying this API Certification Mark con-
forms to the international Lubricant Specification Advisory
Committee (ILSAC). It is recommended to only use engine
oils that uphold this API Certification Mark.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Gasoline
Engine Oil *
1
for
1.6L
GDI
for
1.6L
T-GDI
10W-30
5W-20, 5W-30
20W-50
10W-30
15W-40
5W-30, 5W-40
°C
(°F)
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
109
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the number used in register-
ing your vehicle and in all legal mat-
ters pertaining to its ownership, etc.
The number is punched on the floor
under the front passenger seat. To
check the number, remove the cover
(1).
The VIN is also on a plate attached
to the top of the dashboard. The
number on the plate can easily be
seen through the windshield from
outside.
The vehicle certification label
attached on the driver’s side center
pillar gives the vehicle identification
number (VIN).
OUN088001
OVQ076002N
OPS086009L
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
911
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
The tires supplied on your new vehi-
cle are chosen to provide the best
performance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver's
side center pillar gives the tire pres-
sures recommended for your vehicle.
The engine number is stamped on
the engine block as shown in the
drawing.
The refrigerant label is located on
the underside of the hood.
ENGINE NUMBER
OUN086005
OPS086006L
TIRE SPECIFICATION AND
PRESSURE LABEL
OAM082007L
■ Engine 2.0
■ Engine 1.6
ORB080005
REFRIGERANT LABEL
(IF EQUIPPED)
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
129
Roadside Assistance is provided on all new current
model year Kia Vehicles from the date the vehicle is deliv-
ered to the first retail buyer or otherwise put into use (in-
service date), whichever is earlier, for a period of 60
months or 60,000 miles, whichever is earlier, subject to
the terms, conditions and exclusions set forth in the Kia
Warranty and Consumer Information Manual applicable
to your model year vehicle.
KMA reserves the right to limit or deny services or other
benefits to any owner or driver when, in KMA's judgment,
the claims and/or service requests are excessive in fre-
quency or type of occurrence.
Toll free consumer assistance
Kia's toll-free Consumer Assistance hot line is staffed
from 5:00 AM to 6:00 PM PST, Monday through Friday
and is accessible by dialing 1-800-333-4Kia (4542).
For more information regarding assistance available,
please refer to your Kia Warranty & Consumer
Information Manual.
Emergency roadside assistance
Kia's toll free Roadside Assistance hot line is staffed 24
hours a day, 365 days a year and is accessible by dialing
1-800-333-4Kia (4542).
Please note that you must provide your Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) to verify coverage at the time
of your call. The VIN can be found on the dash of your
vehicle on the driver’s side, on the door jamb of the dri-
ver’s door, your vehicle’s registration or proof of insur-
ance card.
Kia utilizes a network of over 17,000 roadside assistance
providers. Should you accidentally run out of fuel, require
a battery jump, or need help changing a tire, a Kia
Roadside Assistance Representative will dispatch some-
one to deliver a small quantity of gas, change a flat tire
with your inflated spare, or arrange a battery jump to
allow you to proceed to your destination.We have access
to a network of over 10,000 locksmiths to help you should
you become locked out of your Kia.
In the event that mechanical difficulty renders your vehi-
cle undriveable due to a warranty-related concern, Kia’s
Roadside Assistance Representative will arrange to
transport your vehicle to the nearest Kia dealer or to an
alternative service location.
CONSUMER ASSISTANCE (U.S. ONLY)
913
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
Your vehicle must be accessible to our dispatch transport
vehicle, as determined by our driver, to receive this serv-
ice. In the event that Kia does not have a dealer or an
alternative service location available in a particular loca-
tion, Kia will work with a reputable local service facility to
ensure that you receive prompt service.Warranty repairs
are performed at no cost.
✽✽
NOTICE
Roadside Assistance benefits are not available for any
Kia vehicle that has ever been or should be issued a “sal-
vage” title or similar “branded” title under any state’s
law or has been declared a “total loss” or equivalent by
a financial institution or insurance company.
Trip interruption
Trip interruption expense benefits are provided in the
event that a warranty-related disablement occurs more
than 150 miles from your home, and the repairs require
more than 24 hours to complete. Reasonable reimburse-
ment is included for meals, lodging, or rental vehicle
expenses. Trip interruption coverage is limited to $100
per day subject to a three day maximum limit per incident.
You must contact the Kia Roadside Assistance Center to
obtain pre-authorization of expenses. Once the Kia
Roadside Assistance Center gives authorization for trip
interruption benefits, they will assist you in making the
necessary arrangements. Insurance deductibles,
expenses, and claims paid by your insurance company or
other providers are not eligible for reimbursement.
Fleet vehicles are excluded from reimbursement under
Kia’s Trip Interruption Policy.
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
149
Registering your vehicle in a foreign country
If you plan to register your vehicle in a foreign country,
you should confirm that it conforms to the regulations in
that country. Even if you successfully register the vehicle
in a foreign country, you may experience the following
problems and should therefore consider the possibility of
having to deal with them:
1.The fuel specified for your vehicle may be unavailable.
If other than the specified fuel is used, it could cause
damage to the engine, the fuel injection system, and
other fuel-related parts which may not be covered
under your New Vehicle Emissions Limited Warranty.
2.We must, therefore, clearly state that when you leave
the country in which you purchased your Kia new and
register it in another country, problems arising from the
use of fuel other than the specified fuel are not subject
to manufacturer’s warranty. Because vehicles like
yours may not be marketed in the new country of reg-
istration, parts, servicing techniques and tools neces-
sary to maintain and repair your vehicle may be
unavailable.
Even if vehicles like yours are sold there, mechanical
specifications required by the government may vary
enough from the country of purchase to cause addi-
tional problems.
3.There may not be an Authorized Kia Dealer in the area
in which you plan to register your vehicle. You may
additionally experience difficulty in obtaining services
in a foreign country for any number of reasons.
Further, we cannot assume any responsibility for prob-
lems that result from unsatisfactory service or lack of
service outside of the United States.
915
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
The electrical system of your vehicle is designed to per-
form under all reasonably expected operating conditions.
However, before any additional electrical equipment is
installed in your vehicle, consult an Authorized Kia
Dealer, in order to ensure that you do not void your war-
ranty.
Certain electrical equipment, or the way in which it is
installed, may adversely affect the operation of your vehi-
cle, including such systems as the engine control system,
the audio system and the electrical charging system and
thus potentially void all or part of your warranty.
We assume no responsibility for any expense you may
incur or for any malfunction of your vehicle or any of its
components or systems that may result from the installa-
tion of additional electrical equipment that is not supplied,
or recommended for installation by, Kia.
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
If a mobile two-way radio system is installed improperly,
or if an excessively powerful type of system is used, other
electronic systems may be adversely affected. To avoid
damage to your vehicle, consult an Authorized Kia Dealer
concerning the proper equipment and installation.
Kia motor vehicles are designed and manufactured to
meet or exceed all applicable safety standards.
For your safety, however, we strongly urge you to read
and follow all directions in this Owner's Manual, particu-
larly the information under the headings "NOTICE",
"CAUTION" and "WARNING".
If, after reading this manual, you have any questions
regarding the operation of your vehicle, safety issues and
defects please contact your Kia's toll-free Consumer
Assistance hot line as below:
National Consumer Affairs Manager
Kia Motors America, Inc.
P.O. Box 52410
Irvine, CA 92619-2410
1-800-333-4Kia (4542)
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Kia
Motors America, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy cam-
paign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in indi-
vidual problems between you, your dealer, or Kia Motors
America, Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;download the safer-
car mobile application;or write to: Administrator, NHTSA,
1200 New Jersey Ave., SE., West Building, Washington,
DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
The following publications are available on
www.KiaTechinfo.com.
Service manual:
This manual covers maintenance and recommended pro-
cedures for repair to engine and chassis components. It
is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simple
enough for most mechanically inclined owners to under-
stand.
Electrical troubleshooting manual:
This manual complements the Service Manual by provid-
ing indepth troubleshooting information for each electrical
circuit in your vehicle.
Owner's manual:
This manual describes the overall features and operating
procedures for the vehicle.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)
ONLINE FACTORY AUTHORIZED MANUALS
(U.S. ONLY)
916
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
Index
I
Index
2
I
Air bag - advanced supplemental restraint system. . . . 3-42
Adding equipment to or modifying your
air bag-equipped vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
Air bag warning label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
How does the air bag system operate. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Occupant Detection System (ODS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Side air bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
SRS Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
Filter replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Appearance care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-106
Exterior care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-106
Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-111
Audio (With Touch Screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Feature of Your Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
Siri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
SiriusXM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Audio (Without Touch Screen). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Feature of Your Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Siri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
SiriusXM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Audio remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
AUX and USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
How vehicle audio works. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Speaker lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
Air Conditioning refrigerant label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
Automatic heating and air conditioning. . . . . . . . . 4-115
Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Automatic transaxle operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Good driving practices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Autonomous emergency braking (AEB) . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
AEB warning message and system control . . . . . . . 6-50
Brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
A
I
3
Index
Limitations of the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Sensor to detect the distance from the vehicle in
front (front radar). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
System setting and activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
Battery recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57
For best battery service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
Reset items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Before driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Before entering vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Necessary inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Blind spot detection system (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91
BSD (Blind Spot Detection)/LCA
(Lane Change Assist). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
Driver's Attention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97
RCTA (Rear cross traffic alert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Anti-lock brake system (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Good braking practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Parking brake - Hand type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Brake/clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Checking the brake/clutch* fluid level . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Bulb wattage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
California perchlorate notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-117
Capacity/weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Checking fluid levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Child restraint system (CRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Children Always in the Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS) . . . . . . . 3-35
Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS) . . . . . . . 3-32
Clean air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
Filter inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
Filter replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
Consumer assistance (U.S. Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Cruise Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Cruise control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
To cancel cruise control, do one of the following . . 6-65
To decrease the cruising speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
To increase cruise control set speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
To resume cruising speed at more than approximately
20 mph (30 km/h) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
To set cruise control speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
B
C
Index
4
I
To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control
on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
To turn cruise control off, do one of the following . 6-66
Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
FCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Auto door lock/unlock feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Child-protector rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Impact sensing door unlock system. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Operating door locks from inside the vehicle . . . . . 4-18
Operating door locks from outside the vehicle . . . . 4-17
Speed sensing door lock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Drive mode integrated control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84
Dual Clutch Transmission (DCT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Dual clutch transmission operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Good driving practices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Economical operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103
Electrical equipment (U.S. Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Push-starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Emission control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-114
Crankcase emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-114
Evaporative emission control (including ORVR:
Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery) system. . . . 8-114
Exhaust emission control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-115
Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6, 8-3
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Checking the coolant level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Changing the engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Checking the engine oil level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Engine start/stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Engine start/stop button position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Illuminated engine start/stop button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Starting the engine with a smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . . . . 8-34
Exterior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
Mounting bracket for roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
Exterior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
D
E
I
5
Index
Foward collision warning system (FCWS) . . . . . . . . . 6-99
FCWS Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99
Limitations of the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-101
Fuel filler lid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Closing the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Opening the fuel filler lid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Do not use methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol . . . . . . . . 1-3
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-74
Engine compartment fuse replacement . . . . . . . . . . 8-77
Fuse/relay panel description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-79
Inner panel fuse replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-76
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Opening the hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
If the engine overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
If the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
If engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly . . . . 7-4
If engine turns over normally but does not start . . . . 7-4
If you have a flat tire (with Spare Tire) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Jack and tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Jack label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Removing and storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
If you have a flat tire (with Tire Mo bility Kit) . . . . . . 7-24
Components of the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Distributing the sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Notes on the suggested use of the Tire Mobility Kit. 7-25
Using the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Important safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Air bag hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Always wear your seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Control your speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Driver distraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Keep your vehicle in safe condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Restrain all children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
In case of an emergency while driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing . . . . . . 7-3
If the engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
If you have a flat tire while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
F
H
I
Index
6
I
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Instrument cluster control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
LCD display control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Transaxle Shift Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Interior features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
Cargo area cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144
Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142
Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
Floor mat anchor(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
Luggage net holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
Rear seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
Seat air ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
Seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
Interior lamp AUTO cut. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
Luggage room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
Portable lamp usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
Room lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
Vanity mirror lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
Interior overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Transmitter precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Ignition switch position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Illuminated ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Lane departure warning system (LDWS). . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
The LDWS does not operate when . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
The LDWS may not warn you even if the vehicle
leaves the lane, or may warn you even if the
vehicle does not leave the lane when. . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
Warning indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88
LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
LCD modes (for Type B cluster) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
Turn by turn mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
User settings mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
K
L
I
7
Index
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Closing the liftgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Emergency liftgate safety release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Opening the liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-88
Back-up lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100
Bulb replacement precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-88
Front fog lamp bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-96
Front side marker bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-95
Front turn signal lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . 8-93
Glove box lamp bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-104
Headlamp (HID type) bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . 8-90
Headlamp (Low/High beam) bulb replacement. . . . 8-91
High mounted stop lamp (LED type) bulb
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-102
High mounted stop lamp bulb replacement . . . . . 8-101
License plate lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . 8-102
Light bulb position (Front). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-89
Light bulb position (Rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-90
Luggage lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-104
Map lamp bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-102
Position lamp + DRL (LED type) bulb replacement. 8-96
Rear turn signal lamp bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . 8-98
Room lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-103
Side repeater lamp (LED type) bulb replacement . . 8-97
Stop and tail lamp (LED type) bulb replacement . 8-101
Stop and tail lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-99
Vanity mirror lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . 8-105
Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Battery saver function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Daytime running light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
Headlamp escort. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
High beam operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
Turn signals and lane change signals. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Owner’s responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Manual climate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
Air conditioning refrigerant label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
Manual transaxle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Good driving practices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Manual transaxle operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
M
Index
8
I
Online factory authorized manuals (U.S. Only). . . . . . 9-16
Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Owner maintenance schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Closing the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Resetting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Sliding the sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Sunroof open warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Sunshade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Tilting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
Checking the parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
Rear camera display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Recommended lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Recommended sae viscosity number. . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Refrigerant label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Reporting safety defects (U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Scheduled maintenance service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Pre-tensioner seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Seat belt precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Seat belt restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Front seat adjustment - manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Front seat adjustment - power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Seatback pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Smart cruise control system (SCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
Limitations of the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
Speed setting (SCC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
To adjust the sensitivity of smart cruise control . . . 6-77
To convert to cruise control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
Vehicle to vehicle distance setting (SCC) . . . . . . . . 6-73
Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Loss of the smart key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Smart key function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Smart key immobilizer system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Smart key precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
O
P
R
S
I
9
Index
Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105
Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-107
Driving in flooded areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-108
Driving in the rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-108
Driving off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-109
Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105
Highway driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-109
Reducing the risk of a rollover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105
Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-106
Smooth cornering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-107
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Electric power steering (EPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Flex steer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Tilt and telescopic steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
Cool box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
Luggage box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Changing a tire with TPMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. 7-14
Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
All season tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-71
Checking tire inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60
Low aspect ratio tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73
Radial-ply tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-72
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures. . . . . . . 8-59
Snow tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-71
Summer tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-71
Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-71
Tire maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64
Tire replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61
Tire sidewall labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64
Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64
Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62
Wheel replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Emergency towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Removable towing hook (front). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
Accumulated info display (for Type B cluster) . . . . 4-71
Drive info display (for Type B cluster) . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
T
Index
10
I
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
Trip A/B (for Type A cluster). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
Vehicle Break-In Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Vehicle certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders . . . . . . 1-7
Vehicle handling instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Vehicle load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-114
Certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118
Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-114
Vehicle weight glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-120
Base curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-120
Cargo weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-120
GAW (Gross axle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-120
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating). . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-120
GVW (Gross vehicle weight). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-120
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . 6-120
Vehicle curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-120
Warning and indicator lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
Checking the washer fluid level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Windshield defrosting and defogging. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
Defogging logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
Winter driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-110
Carry emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-113
Change to “winter weight” oil if necessary. . . . . . 6-112
Check battery and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112
Check spark plugs and ignition system . . . . . . . . . 6-112
Don’t let your parking brake freeze. . . . . . . . . . . . 6-113
Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath . . . 6-113
Snowy or icy conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-110
To keep locks from freezing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112
Use approved window washer anti-freeze in
system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112
Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant. . . . . . . . 6-112
Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
Blade inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
Blade replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
V
W
I
11
Index
Wipers and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
Rear window wiper/washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Windshield washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Windshield wiper/washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
